Panasonic Mobile Communications 209018A UMTS/ GSM Cellular Mobile with Bluetooth® and RFID User Manual 000 P 09A

Panasonic Mobile Communications Development of Europe Ltd UMTS/ GSM Cellular Mobile with Bluetooth® and RFID 000 P 09A

Contents

User Manual Part 1 of 2

P-09A
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
ISSUE DATE: ‘09.6
NAME:
PHONE NUMBER:
MAIL ADDRESS:
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Before Using the Handset
Voice/Videophone Calls
Phonebook
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Security Settings
Camera
i-mode/Full Browser
i-αppli/i-Widget
Map/GPS Function
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
Mail
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
1Seg
Data Management
Music
Convenient Functions
Character Entry
Network Services
PC Connection
Overseas Use
Appendix/Troubleshooting
Index/Quick Manual
DOCOMO W-CDMA・GSM/GPRS System
Thank you for selecting the “docomo SMART series P-09A”.
Before or during use of the P-09A, make sure that you read this manual and the
separate manuals for other optional devices thoroughly so that you can use the
P-09A correctly.
If you feel any inconvenience in reading the manual, contact the docomo
Information Center listed on the back page of this manual.
The P-09A is designed to be your close partner. Treat it carefully at all times to
ensure long-term performance.
●Because the FOMA terminals use radio waves, they cannot be used in places
where radio waves do not reach, such as inside tunnels, underground, or in
buildings; or the outside where radio waves are weak or out of the FOMA
service area. They may not be used in the high-rise buildings even when the
antennas are unobstructed. You may also experience interruption of calls
even when using without moving while the radio waves are strong enough for
the three antennas to appear on the display.
●Use the FOMA terminal carefully to avoid disturbing other people when in
public, or in crowded or quiet places.
●Since the FOMA terminals use radio waves as the medium of
telecommunication, calls may be tapped by the third party.
However, the W-CDMA・GSM/GPRS system automatically supports tapping
prevention, so your conversation will be incomprehensible to the third party,
because it is recognized as mere noise.
●The FOMA terminals change your voice into digital signals and send them to
the other party. In places where the radio waves are weak, the digital signals
may not be converted correctly, and in such a case, the voice may sound
different from the actual original voice.
●
The user hereby agrees that the user shall be solely responsible for the result of
the use of SSL/TLS. Neither DOCOMO nor the certifiers as listed herein make any
representation and warranty as for the security in the use of SSL/TLS. In the event
that the user shall sustain damage or loss due to the use of SSL/TLS, neither
DOCOMO nor the certifiers shall be responsible for any such damage or loss.
Certifiers: VeriSign Japan K.K., Cybertrust Japan Co., Ltd., GlobalSign K.K.,
RSA Security Japan Ltd., SECOM Trust Systems Co., Ltd., and
Comodo CA Ltd.
●This FOMA terminal supports FOMA Plus-Area and FOMA High-Speed Area.
●The FOMA terminal can be used only via the FOMA network provided by
DOCOMO and in DOCOMO’s roaming area.
●It is recommended that you make separate notes of the information (such as
Phonebook entries, schedule events, text memos, record messages, voice
memos, movie memos) stored in the FOMA terminal and keep them in a safe
place. Note that we cannot be held responsible for the unlikely event of loss of
the stored contents due to a malfunction, repair, change of your model, or
other mishandling of the FOMA terminal.
●You are advised to save your important data files to the microSD card. If you
have a personal computer, you can transfer and save the information such as
Phonebook entries, mail messages, schedule events, and others to the
personal computer by using DOCOMO keitai datalink.
Before using your FOMA terminal
For Using This Manual
This FOMA terminal supports Kisekae Tool (page 105).
If you use Kisekae Tool to change the design of the Menu display,
some menu configurations change according to the usage
frequency depending on the type of the menu. Further, some menu
numbers that are assigned to the menu items do not apply.
You can download the latest information about this manual
from the following DOCOMO website:
・User’s Manual (PDF file) Download
(http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/support/manual/index.html)
※The URL and the content of the website might be modified
without notice.
1
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
In this manual, illustrations and symbols are used in the explanations so
that you can correctly and easily use the FOMA terminal.
pThe most operating procedures and displays in this manual are described with the
default settings of the “GOLD” (see page 448) handset. However, the following settings
are changed.
・“Display setting” → “Stand-by display”: OFF
・“Display setting” → “Clock” → “Stand-by clock” → “Position”: Pattern 1
・“Color theme setting”: White
pDisplays and illustrations described in this manual are for reference. The actual ones
might differ.
pIn this manual, “Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli which supports the IC card function” is
described as “Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli”.
pNote that “P-09A” is referred to as “FOMA terminal” in this manual.
pIn the operating procedures of this manual, key operations are described with
simplified key icons.
pThe functions which use a microSD card are described in this manual; however, you
need to obtain a microSD card separately to make these functions available. See
page 344 for the microSD card.
Viewing/Searching This Manual By the following search methods, you can find pages where your desired
functions and services are described:
How to Refer to This Manual
Search from the index when you know the names of functions or services.
Search from keywords for the functions you frequently use or the functions that are
convenient if you can know any.
Search from the tabs printed on the cover.
See the next page for details.
Search from the contents that categorize functions.
Search from here to use the main functions.
Search from the function list.
Quick Manual gives you a clear, brief description about basic functions. You can take it
when you go out. Further, Quick Manual “For Overseas Use” is attached, so refer to it
when you use the FOMA terminal overseas.
From the Index
From Easy Search
From the Tabs on the Cover
From the Contents P.6
From the Main Functions P.8
From the Function List P.448
From Quick Manual P.534
It is prohibited to copy all or part of this manual without permission.
The instructions contained in this manual may be changed without notice.
2
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
How to search for “Alarm” is explained here as an example of search method.
After-sales services. . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Alarm setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Answer setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
From the Index
P.524
Search for a function or a service
name as shown on the right.
Search for the function you
frequently use or that is
convenient if you know any as
shown on the right.
Other things you can do
To reduce the battery consumption .............................. <Power Saver Mode> 102
To scan QR codes or bar codes ......................................<Bar Code Reader> 226
To listen to music.................................................................. <MUSIC Player> 258
To check your location and area information.................<Map/GPS Function> 306
To use the microSD card ...................................................... <microSD Card> 344
To exchange information using infrared rays.........<Infrared Communication> 358
To use the FOMA terminal as an alarm clock.....................................<Alarm> 376
To use the FOMA terminal as a calculator ..................................<Calculator> 390
To use the FOMA terminal overseas........................ <International Roaming> 432
To update software programs........................................... <Software Update> 497
Go to page 376
where “Alarm”
is explained.
From Easy Search
P.4
i-αppli/i-Widget
Map/GPS Function
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Data Management
Music
Convenient Functions
Character Entry
Network Services
PC Connection
Overseas Use
Appendix/Troubleshooting
From the Tabs on the
Cover
Cover page
Search for the function you want
to set in the order of “Cover”
→ “First page of Chapter”
→ “Description page” as shown
on the right.
3
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
376
Convenient Functions
You can set Alarm to alert you at the specified time with an alarm tone,
animation and illumination. You can store up to 12 alarms.
1mStationeryAlarmHighlight an
alarm and press l()
Do the following operations.
2Press l().
+m-4-4
<Alarm>
Using Alarm
Alarm You can set whether to validate or invalidate the alarm.
ON or OFF
Time Enter the time for sounding the alarm.
pYou cannot set the same time as the time set for the stored
alarm.
Tone Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
Volume Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pIf you set “Step”, the alarm tone is silent for about three
seconds, and then the volume steps up every about three
seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6.
Prefer manner
mode
You can set the alarm tone which sounds at the specified time
during Manner Mode.
ON or OFF
ON. . . . . Sounds at the same volume as set for “Alarm volume”.
OFF. . . . Sounds at the volume set for this function.
The icon appears on the Stand-by display.
“” . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for today (except the setting for past time).
“” . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for tomorrow or onward only.
pIf you set “Alarm” of a schedule event/ToDo item to “OFF”, the icon is not displayed.
Function Menu while Alarm is Displayed
Edit Go to step 1 of “Using Alarm” on page 376.
Detail You can display the stored alarm contents.
Set this You can validate the stored alarm.
YES
pYou can validate also by pressing Oo().
Set all You can validate all the stored alarm.
YES
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter you Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
pIf the alarm tone sounds during a call, press any key to stop it. Once again press any
key to end the alarm including Snooze. If the other party on the phone hangs up, an
alarm including Snooze ends.
pDuring a call, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for “Volume” (earpiece volume).
pTurn off the FOMA terminal after setting “Auto power ON” to “OFF” when you are near
electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals, or where the use is
prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals.
When you set an alarm for “Alarm”, “Schedule”, and “ToDo”
Note: The page above is a sample.
Menu number
(See page 34)
Function name
You can find this in
Index.
Operating
procedure
(See page 32)
Reference display
(Characters and settings
are for reference.)
Options and their
explanations
Items shown on the
display
(Some items cannot
be executed.)
Operation and
supplementary
explanation for each
item
Operations related to
the function and
explanations for
supplementary
operations
Chapter title
You can
search by
chapter.
Cautions or
references for using
each function
Lower sub-menu item
of the Function menu
4
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
To retrieve a desired function with simple words, refer to the following:
Easy Search
To know convenient functions for making calls
To/Not to notify your phone number to the other party
....................................................................................<Caller ID Notification> 45
To switch to a videophone call during a voice call
...........................................................................<Switch to Videophone Call> 51
To change a volume level of the other party’s voice ....................... <Volume> 65
To put a call on hold during a call.................................................... <Holding> 66
To do the following when you cannot answer calls
To put an incoming call on hold before answering ......................... <On Hold> 66
To convey the message that you need to refrain from talking on the phone
.....................................................................Using Public Mode (Drive Mode) 67
....................................................................... Using Public Mode (Power Off) 67
To record voice/video messages.......................... <Record Message Setting> 68
To change melody or illumination
To adjust the ring volume........................................................<Ring Volume> 65
To change ring tones according to callers...................... <Add to Phonebook> 78
To change ring tones........................................................ <Select Ring Tone> 92
To know incoming calls by vibrator .................................................<Vibrator> 94
To mute the keypad sound...................................................<Keypad Sound> 95
To activate Manner Mode...................................................... <Manner Mode> 96
To change colors/lighting patterns of Call indicator for incoming calls
.................................................................................................. <Illumination> 106
To change/know display settings
To know the meaning of marks (icons) on the display .....................<Display> 26
To change the Stand-by display (Wallpaper) ...................... <Display Setting> 99
To display a calendar on the Stand-by display..............................<Calendar> 99
To change the menu display .......................................... <Menu Icon Setting> 104
To change the font size ....................................................<Font Size Setting> 109
To make full use of mail
To send Deco-mail ...................................................................... <Deco-mail> 133
To send images ....................................................................... <Attachments> 140
To sort and save mail automatically ..............................................<Auto-sort> 159
To make full use of camera
To change the shooting size...................................................... <Image Size> 222
To save to the microSD card ...........................................................<Store In> 223
To display shot images......................................................... <Picture Viewer> 318
5
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
※1 This is a pay service.
※2 This is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis.
To use the FOMA terminal with a sense of security
To lock the FOMA terminal from away when it gets lost
.........................................................................................<Omakase Lock>※1115
To keep Phonebook entries from prying eyes .........................<Secret Mode> 120
To reject calls without a caller ID..............................<Call Setting without ID> 122
To reject calls from the phone numbers that are not
in the Phonebook ............................................................ <Reject Unknown> 123
To separately store Phonebook and other data
files in preparation for their erasure.................... <Data Security Service>※2124
To make full use of 1Seg
To watch 1Seg programs ...................................................... <Activate 1Seg> 233
To record 1Seg programs.................. <Record Video> <Record Still Images> 240
To set TV Timer/Timer Recording for 1Seg programs
.......................................................................<TV Timer> <Timer Recording> 241
To change settings of video and audio...................................<User Settings> 246
Other things you can do
To reduce the battery consumption .............................. <Power Saver Mode> 102
To scan QR codes or bar codes ...................................... <Bar Code Reader> 226
To listen to music.................................................................. <MUSIC Player> 258
To check your location and area information.................<Map/GPS Function> 306
To use the microSD card ...................................................... <microSD Card> 344
To exchange information using infrared rays.........<Infrared Communication> 358
To use the FOMA terminal as an alarm clock.....................................<Alarm> 376
To use the FOMA terminal as a calculator ..................................<Calculator> 390
To use the FOMA terminal overseas ........................<International Roaming> 432
To update software programs........................................... <Software Update> 497
To update security ......................................................... <Scanning Function> 502
pThe operating procedures for frequently used functions are summarized in Quick
Manual. (See page 534)
6
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Contents
Viewing/Searching This Manual . . . . .1
Easy Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Main Functions of P-09A. . . . . . . . . . . .8
Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Standard Accessory Kit and Main
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Before Using the
Handset
21
Part Names and Functions, Display,
Desktop Icon, Selecting Menu, Guide,
UIM (FOMA Card), Battery, Charging, Power ON/OFF,
Select Language, Set Time, Caller ID Notification,
Own Number, etc.
Voice/
Videophone Calls
47
Making a Call/Videophone Call, Call Records,
Chaku-moji, Receiving a Call/Videophone Call, Volume,
Ring Volume, Public Mode, Record Message Setting,
Chara-den, etc.
Phonebook
77
Available Phonebooks,
Add to Phonebook (FOMA terminal/UIM),
Group Setting, Search Phonebook, Edit Phonebook,
Delete Data, No. of Phonebook, 2-touch Dial,
Voice Dial
Sound/Screen/
Light Settings
91
Select Ring Tone, Vibrator, Manner Mode,
Display Setting, Backlight, Menu Icon Setting,
Kisekae Tool, Set to Machi-chara, Illumination,
Font, etc.
Security Settings
111
Security Codes, Change Security Code,
Releasing PIN Lock, Lock All, Omakase Lock,
Self Mode, Personal Data Lock, Keypad Dial Lock,
Secret Mode, Call Setting without ID, Reject Unknown,
Reset Settings, Initialize, etc.
Mail
129
i-mode Mail, Deco-mail, Decome-Anime, Template,
Attachments, Mail Auto-receive, Receive Option,
Check New Messages, Message R/F,
Early Warning “Area Mail”, Chat Mail, SMS, etc.
i-mode/
Full Browser
177
i-mode, iMenu, My Menu, Change i-mode Password,
Full Browser, Last URL, Enter URL, Bookmark,
Screen Memo, Download, Upload, i-mode Settings,
Certificate, etc.
i-motion/Movie/
i-Channel/i-concier
205
i-motion/Movie, Download i-motion/Movie,
Movie Auto Play Setting, i-Channel, i-concier
Camera
213
Before Using Camera, Still Image Shoot,
Moving Picture Shoot, Settings for Shooting,
Setting Image Size/Image Quality, Bar Code Reader
1Seg
229
1Seg, Before Using 1Seg, Channel Setting,
Activate 1Seg, i-αppli Program Guide,
Data Broadcasting, TVlink, Recording 1Seg,
TV Timer/Timer Recording, User Settings
Music
249
Music&Video Channel, Set Program,
Playing/Operating Programs, Playing Music,
Saving Music Files, MUSIC Player, Playlist
7
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
i-αppli/i-Widget
269
i-αppli, i-αppli Download, i-αppli Run, iαppli Settings,
Starting i-αppli Automatically, iαppli Call,
i-αppli Stand-by Display, iαppli Data, i-Widget,
Start Widget Appli
Osaifu-Keitai/
ToruCa
293
Osaifu-Keitai, iC Transfer Service, IC Card Content,
IC Card Lock, Check IC Owner, ToruCa,
Receive ToruCa Files, ToruCa Viewer,
ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File Display,
ToruCa Settings
Map/GPS Function
305
Using GPS Function, Position Location,
Map/GPS Compatible i-αppli, Provide Location,
Notify of Location, Location History, GPS Settings
Data Management
315
Picture Viewer, i-motion Player, Movie Player,
Video Player, Chara-den, Machi-chara, Melody Player,
Kisekae Tool, microSD Card, Voice Recorder,
PDF Viewer, etc.
Convenient
Functions
371
Multiaccess, Multitask, Reading Aloud,
Auto Power ON/OFF, Alarm, Schedule, ToDo,
Multi Key Long Press Setting, Own Number, Call Data,
Calculator, Bluetooth Function, Check Settings, etc.
Character Entry
403
Character Entry, Mode 1 (5-touch), Common Phrases,
Cut/Copy/Paste, Own Dictionary, Learned Words,
Download Dictionary, Mode 2 (2-touch),
Mode 3 (NIKO-touch)
Network Services
413
Check New Messages, Voice Mail, Call Waiting,
Call Forwarding, Nuisance Call Blocking,
Caller ID Request, Dual Network, Service Numbers,
Remote Control, Multi Number, 2in1, OFFICEED, etc.
Overseas Use
431
Outline of International Roaming (WORLD WING),
Available Services, Confirmation for Using,
Making a Call at the Country You Stay,
Receiving a Call, 3G/GSM Setting,
Set Roaming Guidance, Network Services, etc.
PC Connection
441
Available Data Communication,
Before Using Data Communication,
Setup Flow for Data Transfer (OBEX™ Communication),
Setup Flow for Data Communication, AT Command,
CD-ROM, DOCOMO Keitai Datalink
Appendix/
Troubleshooting
447
Function List, Options and Related Devices,
Troubleshooting, Error Messages, Warranty and
After-sales Services, i-mode Fault Diagnosis Site,
Software Update, Scanning Function, Main Specifications,
SAR, Export Administration Regulations, etc.
Index/
Quick Manual
523
Index, Quick Manual,
Quick Manual “For Overseas Use”
8
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Main Functions of P-09A
◆i-concier P.210
i-concier is a service that enables you to receive useful information from a character
(Machi-chara image) on the Stand-by display and download schedule event
(i-schedule) files for your convenience.
Downloaded i-schedule events or ToruCa files are automatically updated to the latest
information, and the address information of shops/companies, etc. is automatically
added to the Phonebook.
◆i-αppli Call P.287
i-αppli call is a useful function for online games that enables your content provider or
third party to give notice to your opponent to start the specified corresponding
application.
◆International Roaming P.278, P.432
Your FOMA terminal, phone number, and mail address are available overseas (3G/
GSM areas are supported).
Further, “日英版／日中版 しゃべって翻訳 for P (J-E/J-C Speech Translation for
P)”, which translates words into English or Chinese if you talk in Japanese, and into
Japanese if in English or Chinese, is pre-installed.
◆i-Widget P.290
i-Widget is a useful function that enables you to easily access the tools and
commonly-used contents (Widget Appli) such as a calculator, clock, TV program list,
and stock prices information.
By launching the i-Widget display, you can check your desired latest information at a
glance.
◆i-mode P.178
You are now enabled to check websites more easily for information by enhanced
operational performance, and to enjoy various moving picture contents as Flash®
Video and Windows Media® Video are supported.
◆1Seg P.230
You can watch 1Seg programs of the terrestrial digital broadcasting for mobile
objects. The light sensor automatically adjusts the backlight in accordance with the
ambient brightness, and the LCD AI compensates the image quality in accordance
with the brightness.
◆Bluetooth Function P.395
The wirelessly-connected FOMA terminal and a Bluetooth device enable you to talk
or listen to music while you are carrying the FOMA terminal in your bag.
◆Impressive Liquid Crystal Display
You can display still images and moving pictures in the Full Wide VGA (480 dots x
854 dots) display of approx. 3.0 inches and can enjoy watching 1Seg programs on
the impressive display.
◆Feel＊Mail P.164
Animation of 45 characters and illumination reproduce the atmosphere of mail
messages. Pleasant animation appears and illumination lights according to the
contents of mail message.
9
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
◆Private Menu Setting P.385
Functions that are supposed to be frequently used in business activities have been
lined up.
◆Natural Talk P.60
The earpiece clearness is adjusted so that you are enabled to communicate in more
natural tone as if you are talking with a person just in front of you.
◆One-push Open P.42
■Setting when Opened P.64
When a call comes in, just press the one-push open button, and you can open the
FOMA terminal to answer the call.
■Recv. Mail/Call at Open P.102
When a missed call or new mail message is found, just press the one-push open
button, and you can open the FOMA terminal to display the detailed Missed Call
display or the Inbox list.
◆View Blind P.104
You can make the display hard to see from an angle. You can use the FOMA
terminal without concern for others’ eyes.
◆Camera P.214
You can use approximate 3,200,000 pixels of high-precision camera to shoot still
images and moving pictures.
◆Voice Recorder P.363
You can record your voice as a substitute for taking notes. You can repeatedly play it
back, so it is convenient to record the proceedings at a meeting, etc.
◆Chaku-moji P.54
◆Videophone P.48
◆i-mode mail/Deco-mail/Deco-mail pictogram P.130, P.133, P.316
◆i-αppli/Mega i-αppli P.270
◆High-Speed Communication Supported P.442
◆Chaku-uta Full®/Uta-hodai/Music&Video Channel P.250, P.256, P.258
p“Chaku-uta Full” is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc.
◆MUSIC Player P.258
◆GPS P.306
◆Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa P.294, P.296
◆Kisekae Tool P.105, P.343
◆Respective Network Services P.413
◆Security Settings P.111
10
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
■Before using the FOMA terminal, read these safety precautions carefully so that
you can use it correctly.
After reading the precautions, keep them in a safe place.
■Be sure to observe these safety precautions because they are designed to
protect you or those around you from causing injury and to avoid unnecessary
damage to the property.
■The symbols below indicate the levels of danger or damage that can be caused
if the particular precautions are not observed.
Precautions
Danger This symbol indicates that incorrect handling
will almost certainly cause death or serious
injury.
Warning This symbol indicates that incorrect handling
poses a risk of causing death or serious
injury.
Caution This symbol indicates that incorrect handling
poses a risk of causing injury or damage to
the product or property.
ALWAYS FOLLOW THESE DIRECTIONS
■The following symbols show specific directions:
■“Safety Precautions” are divided into the following six sections:
General precautions for FOMA terminal, batteries, adapters, and UIM... P.11
Precautions for FOMA terminal ................................................................. P.12
Precautions for batteries ............................................................................ P.13
Precautions for adapters............................................................................ P.14
Precautions for UIM.................................................................................... P.15
Notes on using near electronic medical equipment .................................. P.15
Denotes things not to do. (Prohibition)
Denotes not to disassemble.
Denotes not to touch with wet hands.
Denotes not to use where it could get wet or not to wet it.
Denotes mandatory instructions (matters that must be complied
with).
Denotes to pull the power plug out of the outlet.
Don’t
Do not
d
i
sasse
m
b
l
e
Not wet
hands
Avoid
Water
Do
Pull the
power plug
out
11
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Do not use, store or leave the
FOMA terminal and its
accessories in places with a high
temperature such as near fire or
places exposed to direct sunlight,
or in cars under the blazing sun.
The devices could be deformed or
malfunction, or the battery may leak,
overheat, burst, or catch fire, thus resulting
in the deterioration of performance and
shortening of the life of devices.
Also, part of the case could get heated,
causing bare skin burns.
Do not disassemble, modify or
solder the FOMA terminal or
accessories.
Accidents such as fire, injury, or electric
shock, or malfunction may result. The
battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Do not wet the FOMA terminal or
accessories.
If liquids such as water or pet urine get
onto them, overheating, electric shock,
fire, malfunction, injury or others may
result. Pay attention to the place of use
and the way of handling.
With your FOMA terminal, use the
batteries and adapters specified
by NTT DOCOMO, INC.
If you use any type of battery or adapter
other than the specified one, your FOMA
terminal, battery or other accessories
may leak, overheat, burst, catch fire or
malfunction.
General precautions for FOMA
terminal, batteries, adapters, and UIM
Danger
Don’t
Do not
disassemble
Avoid
Water
Do
Do not place the batteries, the
FOMA terminal, adapters, or UIM
in cooking appliances such as
microwave ovens or
high-pressure containers.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or
catch fire. The FOMA terminal or the
adapter may overheat, smoke, or catch
fire, or its circuit parts may become
damaged.
Do not throw the FOMA terminal
or accessories, or subject them
to severe shocks.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or
catch fire. Also, malfunction or fire may
result.
Be careful not to let
electroconductive materials (metal
pieces, pencil leads etc.) contact
with the charging terminal or
connector terminal. Also, make
sure that those are not entered into
the inside of the FOMA terminal.
Short-circuit could cause fire or
malfunction of the FOMA terminal.
When you are in a place such as a
gas station where flammable gas
is generated, turn off the FOMA
terminal, and never do charging.
Otherwise, catching fire may
result.
Ensure that you use Osaifu-Keitai with
the FOMA terminal turned off when you
are in the vicinity of the gas station.
(When IC Card Lock is set, turn off the
power with the lock released.)
Warning
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Do
If odor, overheat, discoloration,
or deformation is detected during
use, battery charge, or storage,
immediately observe the
following:
1. Pull the power plug out of the
outlet or cigarette lighter socket.
2. Turn off the power to the FOMA
terminal.
3. Remove the battery pack from
the FOMA terminal.
If you use the FOMA terminal and its
accessories as they are, overheat, burst,
or catching fire could result or the
battery could leak.
Do not place the FOMA terminal
or accessories on unstable
locations such as wobbly tables
or slanted locations.
The FOMA terminal or accessories may
fall, resulting in injury or malfunction.
Do not store in humid or dusty
places, or in high temperature
environments.
Malfunction may result.
If children use the FOMA terminal or
accessories, a guardian should
explain the safety precautions and
correct operations. The guardian
should also make sure that the
instructions are followed during use.
Otherwise, injury may result.
Keep out of the reach of babies
and infants.
Accidental swallowing or injury may
result.
Caution
Do
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Do
12
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Be especially careful when you
use the FOMA terminal for a long
time with the adapter connected.
If you use i-αppli programs, talk on the
videophone, watch 1Seg programs and
so on for a long time during charging,
the temperature of the FOMA terminal,
battery pack, or adapter might rise.
If you directly touch the part of high
temperature continuously, redness,
itching, rash, or low-temperature bare
skin burns may result depending on your
physical conditions or predisposition.
Do not directly point the infrared
data port at someone’s eyes
during transmission.
His/her eyes may possibly be affected.
Other infrared devices may operate
erroneously if the infrared data port is
pointed at them during transmission.
Do not put the FOMA terminal in
the place where it could be
affected by an expanded airbag,
e.g., on the dashboard.
If the airbag expands, the FOMA
terminal could hit you and others,
causing accidents such as injury and the
FOMA terminal could malfunction and
become damaged.
Precautions for FOMA terminal
Warning
Do
Don’t
Don’t
If you have any implanted
electronic medical equipment, do
not place your FOMA terminal in
a chest pocket or inner pocket.
If the FOMA terminal is positioned close
to electronic medical equipment, it may
cause that equipment to malfunction.
Do not allow liquids such as water,
or foreign materials such as metal
pieces or flammable materials to
get into the UIM or microSD card
slot of the FOMA terminal.
Fire, electric shock or malfunction may
result.
Turn off the FOMA terminal in
places where use is prohibited
such as in airplanes and hospitals.
Otherwise, electronic devices and
electronic medical appliances may be
adversely affected. If the Auto Power
ON function is set, deactivate the
setting, then turn the power off.
For use inside medical facilities, make
sure that you comply with their
regulations. You may be punished for
using the FOMA terminal in airplanes,
which is prohibited by law.
When talking with the FOMA
terminal set to Hands-free, be sure
to keep the FOMA terminal away
from your ear.
Further, when you play games or
play back music with the earphone/
microphone connected, adjust the
sound volume to moderate volume.
The excessive sound volume impairs your
hearing.
Further, accidents may result due to the
hardness of hearing of surrounding sound.
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Do
For those with weak heart
conditions, the vibrator and ring
volume must be adjusted carefully.
Those functions may cause an effect on
the heart.
If thunder starts to rumble while
you are using the FOMA terminal
outdoors, turn off the power and
move to a safe place.
Otherwise, you could be struck by
lightning or suffer an electric shock.
Turn off the FOMA terminal when
near electronic devices using
high-precision control or weak
signals.
The FOMA terminal may possibly cause
these devices to malfunction.
※Electronic devices that may be
affected: Hearing aids, implanted
cardiac pacemakers, implanted
defibrillators, other medical electronic
devices, fire alarms, automatic doors
and other automatically controlled
devices. If you use an implanted
cardiac pacemaker, implanted
defibrillator or any other electronic
medical device, consult the
manufacturer or retailer of the device
for advice regarding possible effects
from the radio waves.
If the display part or camera lens
is broken, be careful about
broken glasses or the exposed
interior of the FOMA terminal.
Plastic panels are used for the surfaces
of the display part and camera lens so
that glasses do not easily get scattered,
however, pay attention not to
erroneously touch the broken part or
interior. Otherwise, injury may result.
Do
Do
Do
Do
13
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Do not swing the FOMA terminal
by its strap.
The FOMA terminal may hit you or
persons around you, and accidents such
as injury or malfunction and damage
may result.
If you erroneously break the
display part and then crystal
liquid gets leaked, never take or
suck the liquid to or into your
mouth, or apply to skin.
If the crystal liquid gets into the
eyes or mouth, immediately rinse
it out with clean water and then
seek medical attention.
When it adheres to your skin or
clothes, immediately wipe it away
with alcohol etc., and then rinse it
out with water and soap.
Otherwise, the loss of eyesight or injury
to your skin may result.
Do not bring your ears close to
the speakers while a ring tone
sounds or a melody is played
back from the FOMA terminal.
Otherwise, your hearing could be
impaired.
Do not open the FOMA terminal
by pressing the one-push open
button near persons around you
or your face.
The FOMA terminal may hit you or
persons around you, causing accidents
and injuries.
Caution
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Electronic devices in some types
of cars can be affected by use of
the FOMA terminal.
For safety’s sake, make sure not to use
the FOMA terminal inside such cars.
Itching, rash or eczema may be
caused depending on your
physical conditions or
predisposition. If an abnormality
occurs, stop using the FOMA
terminal immediately, and then
seek medical attention.
Metals are used for the following parts:
Be careful not to get your finger
or a strap caught in the parts
when you close or open the
FOMA terminal.
Accidents such as injury or damage may
result.
When you watch a 1Seg program,
watch in a place bright enough
taking a certain distance from the
display.
Otherwise, your visual acuity could be
reduced.
Where it is used Material Finishing
Metal part of the
one-push open button
Aluminum Alumite treatment
Charging terminal Phosphor
bronze
Gold-plated finish
with nickel-plated
ground
Back cover Stainless Baking finish
Upper case ABS Evaporated tin,
hard coating
Do
Do
Do
Do
■Check the description on the label of the
battery pack for the type of battery.
Do not let any metal object such
as a wire come in contact the
battery terminals. Also do not
carry or store the battery together
with any metal objects like a
necklace.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Do not use excessive force to
attach the battery to the FOMA
terminal even when you cannot
attach it successfully. Also,
check that the battery is the right
way round when you attach it.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Do not throw the battery into fire.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Do not pierce it with nails, hit it
with a hammer, or step on it.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Precautions for batteries
Description Type
Li-ion Lithium-ion battery
Danger
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
14
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
If the battery fluid gets into your
eyes, do not rub them. Flush your
eyes with clean water and seek
medical attention immediately.
Otherwise, the loss of eyesight may
result.
When any abnormality due to
external shock such as the
deformation or scratches by
dropping is found on the battery
pack, immediately stop using it.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or
catch fire. Also, malfunction or fire may
result.
If charging is not completed at
the end of the specified charging
time, stop charging.
Otherwise, the battery may leak,
overheat, become damaged or catch
fire.
Immediately stop using the FOMA
terminal and keep it away from
fire if the battery leaks or emits
an odor
.
The leaked battery fluid may ignite,
causing fire or burst.
Be careful that your pets do not
bite into the battery pack.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or
catch fire. Also, malfunction or fire may
result.
Warning
Do
Don’t
Do
Do
Do
An exhausted battery should not
be disposed of with other waste.
The battery may catch fire or damage
the environment. After insulating the
battery terminals with tape, take the
unneeded battery to a handling counter
such as a docomo shop or dispose of it
in accordance with local waste disposal
regulations.
Do not charge the wet battery.
The battery pack may overheat, catch
fire, or burst.
If the battery fluid comes in
contact with skin or clothes,
immediately stop using, then
rinse it out thoroughly with clean
water.
Skin injury may result.
Do not use a damaged adapter
cord or power cord.
Electric shock, overheating or fire may
result.
Do not use the AC adapter and
desktop holder in steamy places
such as a bathroom.
Electric shock may occur.
Caution
Precautions for adapters
Warning
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Don’t
Don’t
The DC adapter is for use only in
a negative (-) grounded vehicle.
Do not use it in a positive (+)
grounded vehicle.
Fire may result.
If it starts to thunder, do not
touch the FOMA terminal and
adapter.
You might be struck by lighting or suffer
an electric shock.
Never short-circuit the charging
terminal when the adapter is
plugged into the power outlet or
cigarette lighter socket. Also,
never touch the charging terminal
with fingers or other bare skin.
Fire, malfunction, electric shock or injury
may result.
Place the adapter and desktop
holder on a stable location while
charging. Do not cover or wrap
the adapter and desktop holder in
cloth or bedding.
The FOMA terminal may drop off, or the
adapter and desktop holder may
overheat, causing fire or malfunction.
Do not place something heavy on
the adapter cord and power cord.
Electric shock or fire may result.
Do not touch the adapter cord or
power outlet with wet hands.
Electric shock may result.
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Not wet
hands
15
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Use the adapter at the specified V
AC.
If you use it at a wrong voltage, fire or
malfunction may result. When using the
FOMA terminal overseas, use FOMA
AC adapter available overseas.
AC adapter: 100 V AC
DC adapter: 12/24 V DC
[For negative (-) grounded vehicles only]
AC adapter available overseas: 100 V to
240 V AC
[Connect only to household AC outlet]
If a fuse of the DC adapter has
blown, replace it with a specified
fuse.
If you use an unspecified fuse, fire or
malfunction may result. For the specified
fuse, refer to each instruction manual.
Keep the power plugs dust-free.
Otherwise, fire may result.
When pulling the AC adapter into
the power outlet, firmly plug it in,
taking care not to contact with
metal straps or the like.
Otherwise, electric shock, short-circuit or
fire may result.
Do
Do
Do
Do
When removing the adapter out
of the outlet or cigarette lighter
socket, do not forcibly pull the
adapter cord or power cord,
instead take hold of the power
plug and then pull.
If you pull the plug out by the cord, the
cord may be damaged, which could
result in electric shock or fire.
When the adapter is not to be
used for a long period of time,
unplug the power cord from the
outlet.
Otherwise, electric shock, fire, or
malfunction may result.
If liquids such as water get in the
adapter, unplug the power cord
immediately from the outlet or
cigarette lighter socket.
Otherwise, electric shock, smoke or fire
may result.
Before cleaning, pull the power
plug out of the outlet or cigarette
lighter socket.
Otherwise, electric shock may result.
Be careful not to touch the cut
surface of the UIM (IC portion)
when removing it.
You may hurt your hand or fingers.
Precautions for UIM
Caution
Do
Pull the
power plug
out
Pull the
power plug
out
Pull the
power plug
out
Do
■The description below meets “Guidelines on
the Use of Radio-communication Equipment
such as Cellular Telephones – Safeguards for
Electronic Medical Equipment” by the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference
Japan.
Comply with the following in
hospitals or health care facilities:
pDo not carry the FOMA terminal into
operating rooms, intensive care units
(ICU) or coronary care units (CCU).
pTurn off the FOMA terminal in hospital
wards.
pIf there is any electronic medical
equipment near you, turn off the
FOMA terminal even when in a
location such as a lobby.
pComply with any regulations of
hospital and health care facilities
instructing you not to use or carry in a
mobile phone.
pIf the Auto Power ON function is set,
deactivate the setting, then turn the
power off.
Turn off the FOMA terminal in
crowded areas such as inside
trains during rush hour, as
someone with an implanted
cardiac pacemaker or implanted
defibrillator may be near you.
Operation of an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or implanted defibrillator can
be affected by radio waves.
Notes on using near electronic
medical equipment
Warning
Do
Do
16
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
If you use an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or implanted
defibrillator, use the mobile
phone 22 cm or more away from
an implanted cardiac pacemaker
or implanted defibrillator.
Operation of an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or implanted defibrillator can
be affected by radio waves.
Patients using electronic medical
equipment other than implanted
cardiac pacemakers or implanted
defibrillators (outside medical
establishments for treatment at
home, etc.) should check the
influence of radio waves upon the
equipment by consulting its
manufacturer.
Operation of electronic medical
equipment can be affected by radio
waves.
■Do not wet the equipment.
The FOMA terminal, battery, adapter, and UIM are not
waterproofed. Do not use them in environments, which
are high in humidity such as in bathrooms, and do not
allow them to get wet from rain. Furthermore, if carrying
them against your body, they become moist due to
perspiration and the internal parts may become
corroded, causing malfunction. If the parts are found to
have been damaged due to exposure to the liquids, any
repairs will not be covered by warranty, or repairs may
not be possible. This may be repaired at a cost if
repairs are possible.
Handling Precautions
General notes
Do
Do
■Use a dry soft cloth such as the one for
cleaning glasses to clean the equipment.
pThe screen of the FOMA terminal sometimes has a
special coating so that they are easier to see. If you
rub it roughly with a dry cloth, it might be scratched.
Take care of the way of handling, and use only a dry,
soft cloth such as the one for cleaning glasses. If the
screen is left with water drop or stain adhered, smear
may be generated or the coating might peel off.
pDo not use alcohol, thinner, benzene, detergent or
other solvents for cleaning, otherwise the printing
may be removed or discoloration may result.
■Occasionally clean the terminals of the
equipment using a dry cotton swab, etc.
The soiled terminals deteriorate the connection and
might cause power discontinuity or incomplete
charging. Wipe the terminals with a cotton swab, etc.
Take care not to damage the terminals when cleaning
them.
■Do not place the FOMA terminal near an air
conditioner outlets.
Condensation may form due to rapid changes in
temperature, and this may corrode internal parts and
cause malfunction.
■Do not apply excessive force onto the FOMA
terminal and battery pack.
If you put the FOMA terminal in a bag along with many
other articles or sit with the FOMA terminal in a clothes
pocket, the display, internal circuitry and the battery
pack could be damaged or malfunction. Also, if an
external device is left connected to the connector
terminal (earphone/microphone terminal), the
connector could be damaged, or malfunction.
■Carefully read each instruction manual
attached to the FOMA terminal, adapter, or
desktop holder.
■Do not rub or scratch the display part with
metals.
Doing so might cause damage to the part, resulting in
trouble or malfunction.
■Avoid using in extremely high or low
temperatures.
The FOMA terminal should be used within a temperature
range of 5°C to 35°C and a humidity range of 45% to 85%.
■The FOMA terminal, if operated near land-line
phones, television sets, radios or other
devices that are in use, may affect them. You
should operate your FOMA terminal as far
away from such equipment as possible.
■It is recommended that you make separate
notes of the information stored in the FOMA
terminal and keep such notes in a safe place.
We take no responsibility for any loss of the stored data
items.
■Do not drop the FOMA terminal or subject it to
strong impacts.
Malfunction or damage may result.
■Do not insert an external device to the
connector terminal (earphone/microphone
terminal) at a slant when connecting, and do
not pull it out when it is inserted.
Malfunction or damage may result.
■Make sure that nothing, such as a strap, gets
caught between the parts of the FOMA
terminal when you close it.
Otherwise, malfunction or damage may result.
■The FOMA terminal becomes warm during
use or charging but this is not an abnormality.
Use the FOMA terminal as it is.
■Do not leave the camera in places exposed to
direct sunlight.
Pixels may be discolored or burns may result.
Notes on handling the FOMA terminal
17
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
■Usually, put the cover of the connector
terminal and microSD card slot to use the
FOMA terminal.
Dust or water might enter into the FOMA terminal,
causing malfunction.
■Do not use the FOMA terminal with the back
cover left removed.
The battery pack might come out, or malfunction or
damage may result.
■Do not apply an excessively thick sticker onto
the surfaces of the display, keys, or buttons.
Malfunction may result.
■While you are using the microSD card, never
take it off or turn off the power to the FOMA
terminal.
Data may be erased or malfunction may result.
■Do not place magnetic cards or similar
objects near the FOMA terminal or between
phone parts.
Magnetic data on cash cards, credit cards, telephone
cards and floppy disks, etc. may be deleted.
■Do not bring magnetic substances close to
your FOMA terminal.
Strong magnetic items might cause in erroneous
operation.
■Batteries have a limited life.
Though it varies depending on the usage state, you are
advised to replace the battery if its usable time is
extremely short even when you fully charge it. Make
sure that you buy the specified battery.
■Charge the battery in a place with an
appropriate ambient temperature of 5°C to
35°C.
Notes on handling batteries
■Make sure that the battery is charged when
you use the FOMA terminal for the first time
or have not used it for a long period of time.
■The usable time of the battery differs
depending on the usage environment or its
remaining life.
■Depending on how the battery pack is used, it
might swell as its operating life becomes
short, but this is not a problem.
■Note the following points when you store a
battery pack over a long period:
pStorage in a fully charged state (the state immediately
after charging is completed)
p
Storage with no battery power left (the state you cannot
turn on the power of the handset due to battery drain)
These may lower the battery pack’s performance and
shorten its operating life.
You are advised to store the battery pack in the state of
two or three bars of battery icon indication as a guide
for when you store it for a long period.
■Charge the battery in a place with an
appropriate ambient temperature of 5°C to
35°C.
■Charge the battery where:
pThere is very little humidity, vibration, and dust.
pThere are no land-line phones, television sets or
radios nearby.
■While you are charging, the adapter may
become warm. This is not a malfunction, so
you can keep on using.
■Do not use the DC adapter for charging the
battery when the car engine is not running.
The car battery could go flat.
■When using the power outlet having the
disengaging prevention mechanism, observe
the instructions given in that instruction
manual.
Notes on handling adapters
■Do not give a strong shock. Also, do not
deform the charging terminal.
Malfunction may result.
■Never use more force than necessary when
inserting/removing the UIM.
■The UIM may become warm during use, but
this is not a sign of a malfunction. Continue
using it as it is.
■The warranty does not cover damage caused
by inserting the UIM into some other types of
IC card reader/writer.
■Always keep the IC portion clean.
■Use a dry soft cloth such as the one for
cleaning glasses to clean the equipment.
■It is recommended that you make separate
notes of the information stored on the UIM
and keep such notes in a safe place.
We take no responsibility for any loss of the stored data
items.
■For the environmental protection, bring any
unneeded UIMs to a handling counter such as
a docomo shop.
■Avoid using in extremely high or low
temperatures.
■Do not damage, carelessly touch, or
short-circuit the IC.
Data might be lost or malfunction may result.
■Do not drop the UIM or subject it to strong
impacts.
Malfunction may result.
Notes on handling the UIM
18
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
■Do not bend the UIM or place something
heavy on it.
Malfunction may result.
■Into the FOMA terminal, do not insert the UIM
with a label or sticker pasted.
Malfunction may result.
■As the security for communication using the
Bluetooth function, the FOMA terminal
supports the security function that meets the
Bluetooth Specification. However, the
security may not be sufficient depending on
the configuration. Take care of the security
for communication using the Bluetooth
function.
■Note that even if any leak of data or
information occurs while making connection
using the Bluetooth function, we take no
responsibility.
■With the FOMA terminal, you can use the
following: Headset, Hands-Free, Audio,
Dial-up Communication, Object Push, and
Serial Port. With Audio, you might be able to
use Audio Video Remote Control. (Only with
the compatible Bluetooth devices)
Notes on using Bluetooth function
■Radio frequencies
The radio frequencies the Bluetooth function
of the FOMA terminal uses are as follows:
■Cautions on Using Bluetooth Devices
Bluetooth operates at radio frequencies assigned to
the in-house radio stations for mobile object
identifiers that have to be licensed and are used in
production lines of a factory, specific unlicensed low
power radio stations, and amateur radio stations
(hereafter, referred to “another radio station”) in
addition to scientific, medical, industrial devices, or
home electric appliances such as microwave ovens.
1. Before using this product, make sure that
“another radio station” is not operating nearby.
2. If radio interference between this product and
“another radio station” occurs, move immediately
to another place or turn off power to avoid
interference.
3. For further details, contact “docomo Information
Center” on the back page of this manual.
2.4 FH 1
2.4 : Indicates radio facilities that use 2400 MHz
frequencies.
FH : Indicates the modulation system is the FH-SS
system.
1 : Indicates that a supposed coverage distance is
10 meters or less.
: Indicates that all radio frequencies 2400 MHz
through 2483.5 MHz are used, and that the
frequencies for mobile object identifiers shall
not be avoided.
■The FeliCa reader/writer function on the
FOMA terminal uses very weak radio waves
which do not require to be licensed as radio
stations.
■The FeliCa reader/writer is operated on the
13.56 MHz frequencies. When you use
another reader/writer nearby, take enough
distance between your FOMA terminal and
the reader/writer. Further, ensure that there
are no radio stations that use the same
frequencies.
■Do not use the modified FOMA terminal.
Using a modified FOMA terminal infringes the
Radio Law.
The FOMA terminals are granted technical regulations
conformity certification as the specified radio equipment
under the Radio Law and bear a “technical conformity
mark ” on the nameplate as evidence of conformity.
Unscrewing the FOMA terminal and modifying internal
components void the technical regulations conformity
certification. Do not use the FOMA terminal in this state,
which infringes the Radio Law.
■Be especially careful not to operate the FOMA
terminal while driving.
You will be imposed punishment if you use the mobile
phone in your hand while driving. If you answer a call
out of necessity, tell the caller with Hands-free that you
will call him/her back, park your car to somewhere safe,
and then dial.
■Use the Bluetooth functions in Japan only.
The Bluetooth functions on the FOMA terminal have
been authorized in compliance with the radio
transmission standards in Japan.
You might be imposed punishment if you use them
overseas.
Notes on handling the FeliCa reader/
writer
Caution
19
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
■Use the FeliCa reader/writer functions in
Japan only.
The FeliCa reader/writer functions on the FOMA
terminal have been authorized in compliance with the
radio transmission standards in Japan.
You might be imposed punishment if you use them
overseas.
20
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Other Options → Page 482
Standard Accessory Kit and Main Options
<Basic package> <Main Options>
pP-09A Handset
(With Warranty and Back Cover P37)
pP-09A CD-ROM
The PDF versions of “Manual for PC Connection”
and “Kuten Code List” are included.
pFOMA AC Adapter 01/02
(With Warranty and Instruction Manual)
pInstruction Manual
Quick Manual included (See page 534)
pBattery Pack P19 pDesktop Holder P34
(With Instruction Manual)
NTT ドコモ
21
Before Using the Handset
Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Navigation Displays and Key Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Main Key Operations from the Stand-by Display . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Viewing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using Icons on Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Desktop Icon> 28
i-Widget Display and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Displaying Description of Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Icons> 31
Private Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Selecting Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
When You Forget Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Guide> 36
Using UIM (FOMA Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Attaching/Removing Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Opening FOMA Terminal by Using a Button
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <One-push Open> 42
Checking Battery Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Battery Level> 42
Turning Power ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Power ON/OFF> 43
Switching to English Display . . . . . . . . . . .<Select Language> 43
Configuring Initial Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Initial Setting> 44
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Set Time> 44
Displaying World Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <World Time Watch> 45
Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone Number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Caller ID Notification> 45
Checking Your Own Phone Number . . . . . . . . <Own Number> 46
Before Using the Handset
22
Part Names and Functions
■For using earphone
Connect an optional connector-terminal-compatible earphone. When using a
connector-terminal-non-compatible earphone, use an optional plug adapter for connection.
pWhen inserting or pulling the plug adapter, take hold of the plug for the handset side and insert or pull
it straight. Be careful not to take hold of the cover of the connector terminal and plug for the handset
side together when you pull it out.
pThe Earphone Plug Adapter for External connector terminal 01 (option) can be connected with a
triple pole mini plug only. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Earphone Plug Adapter
for External connector terminal 01.
Flat plug of the
Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch
Earphone terminal (Flat-plug)
Example for connecting the Flat-plug
Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option)
Plug for the
handset side
"
!
23
Before Using the Handset
Light sensor
・For sensing brightness (See page 103)
pDo not cover the light sensor with your hands or do
not put a sticker on it. Doing so might disable you to
detect the brightness.
Earpiece
・For listening to the other party’s voice
Display
(See page 26)
l Mail key
m Menu key
r Clear key/i-Widget key
・For returning to the previous operation
・For clearing entered text or a phone number
d Start key/Hands-free key
・For making/receiving calls (See page 48 and page 62)
・For talking with Hands-free (See page 61)
Microphone
・For speaking to the other party
Infrared data port
・Used for infrared communication and the infrared
remote control. (See page 358 and page 362)
o Command navigation key
・For operation of function or menu (See page 24)
i i-mode key/i-αppli key
c Camera key/1Seg key
h Power/End key
・For ending calls
・For ending respective functions
・For turning on the power (for at least one second)/
For turning off the power (for at least two seconds)
(See page 43)
Numeric keys
・For entering phone numbers and text
x Multi key
Connector terminal
・For connecting the AC adapter (option), DC adapter
(option), FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/
02 (option), or Stereo Earphone Set 01 (option), etc.
pIntegrated terminal for connecting earphone or for
charging, etc.
Call/Charging indicator
・Flickers for incoming calls/mail and during a call.
(See page 106)
・Lights in red during charging.
・Lights/Flickers when you shoot with the camera.
pThe flickering pattern and color tone of the illumination
might look different depending on the FOMA terminal
you use.
Private window
(See page 31)
FOMA antenna/1Seg antenna
pThe antenna is embedded in the handset. Do not
cover the antenna with your hand for better
communication/receiving.
Speaker
・For sounding ring tones
・For listening to the other party’s voice when
Hands-free is activated (See page 61)
f mark
・The IC card is mounted.
pUse the IC card function placing this mark over the
scanning device. You cannot dismount the IC card.
(See page 295)
Strap hole
Camera
・For shooting portraits and/or landscapes
(See page 214)
・For catching sight of persons and/or landscapes
during a videophone call
microSD card slot
・For inserting microSD card (See page 344)
Back cover
・Remove this when attaching/removing the battery
pack and UIM. (See page 37 and page 39)
pDo not peel off the sticker on the back of the back
cover. If you peel it off, you might not be able to read
and write the IC card.
Charging terminal
< Side ▲ key
・For scrolling up page by page
!> Side ▼ key
・For scrolling down page by page
・For checking for missed calls and new mail
(See page 108)
<Press and hold for at least one second with the
FOMA terminal closed>
・For activating/deactivating Manner Mode
(See page 96)
"One-push open button
(See page 42)
24
Before Using the Handset
When you want to execute the operation shown on the display, press the
corresponding key as below.
■Basic display examples and key assignments
Navigation Displays and Key Operations
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the l key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the m key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the Oo key.
Indicates the direction in which you can scroll
and select items with the Mo key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the c key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the i key.
■Operating command navigation key
Zo
・Moves the cursor or highlighted
display up. (Press and hold to scroll
continuously.)
・Scrolls the page up.
Vo
・Moves the cursor to the right.
・Scrolls forward page by page.
(Press and hold to scroll
continuously.)
Oo
・Fixes the operation.
Co
・Moves the cursor to the left.
・Scrolls back page by page. (Press
and hold to scroll continuously.)
Xo
・Moves the cursor or highlighted
display down. (Press and hold to
scroll continuously.)
・Scrolls the page down.
25
Before Using the Handset
From the Stand-by display, you can execute the following actions by
operating each key:
Main Key Operations from the Stand-by
Display
Key
operation
Press the key for a short time Press and hold the key for at least
one second
+Oo
Shows the display for selecting an
icon, etc. on the Stand-by display.
(See page 30, page 68, page 99)
Sets/Releases Key Lock.
(See page 119)
+ZoShows the Channel list.
(See page 209) —
+XoShows the Search Phonebook
display. (See page 83)
Shows the registration display for the
Phonebook entries. (See page 78)
+CoShows the Received Call list.
(See page 52)
Shows the Received Address list.
(See page 158)
+VoShows the Redial list.
(See page 52)
Shows the Sent Address list.
(See page 158)
+lShows the Mail menu.
(See page 149)
Executes Check New Messages.
(See page 144)
+i
Shows the iMenu. (See page 178) Shows the Software list.
(See page 271)
Shows the i-mode menu.
(See page 178)
+mShows Main Menu.
(See page 32)
Sets/Releases IC Card Lock.
(See page 296)
+cActivates the camera in Photo Mode.
(See page 217) Starts 1Seg. (See page 233)
-dMakes a call. (See page 48) Accesses a voice dial entry.
(See page 89)
-hShows/Clears the icons, etc. on the
Stand-by display. (See page 100) Turns off the power. (See page 43)
+rExecutes i-Widget.
(See page 291)
Resets Main Menu.
(See page 105)
-0Enters “0”. Enters “+”.
-1Enters “1”.
Measures your current location and
executes the GPS function.
(See page 306)
-2Enters “2”.
-3Enters “3”.
-4Enters “4”. Sets/Releases Secret Mode.
(See page 120)
-5Enters “5”. Switches the backlight on/off.
(See page 103)
-6Enters “6”. Sets/Releases Personal Data Lock.
(See page 117)
-7Enters “7”.
-8Enters “8”. Switches View Blind on/off.
(See page 104)
-9Enters “9”.
-aEnters “:”. Activates/Deactivates Public mode
(Drive mode). (See page 67)
-sEnters “#”. Activates/Deactivates Manner Mode.
(See page 96)
-xShows the Multitask Menu.
(See page 374)
Activates a function set by Multi Key
Long Press Setting.(See page 386)
Switches menu functions.
(See page 374)
.<
Switches between the i-αppli
Stand-by display and normal i-αppli
program. (See page 289)
Activates 2in1. (See page 424)
.>Plays back a record message/voice
memo. (See page 70)
Plays back a videophone record
message/movie memo.
(See page 70)
Key
operation
Press the key for a short time Press and hold the key for at least
one second
Before Using the Handset
26
Viewing Display
 

%
$
#
"
!
&
<Private window>
!
Battery level (estimate) (See page 42)
Radio waves reception level (estimate)
Strong Weak
You are out of the FOMA service area or
radio waves do not reach.
During Self Mode (See page 116)
During i-mode (See page 178)
During i-mode communication (See page 178)
During packet communication (The icon differs
depending on the communication status.)
You get out of the service area while
Network Search Mode is set to “Manual”.
(See page 437)
During SSL/TLS communication (See page 179)
(pink) Unread i-mode mail or an SMS message
exists. (See page 142 and page 175)
(dark blue)
The area for i-mode mail and SMS
messages in the FOMA terminal is full.
(See page 142 and page 175)
The area for SMS messages on the UIM
(FOMA card) is full.
(pink) Unread mail exists, and the area for SMS
messages on the UIM (FOMA card) is full.
(dark blue)
Both the FOMA terminal and UIM (FOMA
card) are full.
Area Mail exists. (See page 168)
(yellow)
Unread Messages R/F exist.
(See page 165)
(dark blue)
The area for Messages R/F in the FOMA
terminal is full. (See page 165)
(pink) i-mode mail is held at the i-mode Center.
(See page 144)
(dark blue)
The box for i-mode mail at the i-mode
Center is full. (See page 142)
(yellow)
Messages R/F are held at the i-mode
Center. (See page 165)
(dark blue)
The box for Messages R/F at the i-mode
Center is full. (See page 165)
i-mode mail is held at the i-mode Center
while Receive Option Setting is set to “ON”.
(See page 143)
New i-concier information exists.
(See page 211)
An i-αppli call you did not reply to exists.
(See page 287)
During a voice call
During a videophone call
During 64K data communication
During measuring the current location
(See page 306)
Location Request Set. is set to “ON” or
“Reject numbers unset”, and it is within the
validity period. (See page 312)
Location Request Set. is set to “ON” or
“Reject numbers unset”, and it is out of the
validity period. (See page 312)
A microSD card is inserted.(See page 345)
Data is being read to/written from the
microSD card.
A write-protected microSD card is inserted.
(See page 345)
The inserted microSD card cannot be used.
(See page 345)
A microSD card is inserted, and the FOMA
USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option) is connected in microSD Mode.
(See page 353)
A microSD card is inserted, and the FOMA
USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option) is connected in MTP Mode.
(See page 353)
(blue) A Bluetooth device is connected.
(See page 397 and page 399)
(black) A Bluetooth device is connected and power
consumption is low. (See page 397)
27
Before Using the Handset
pThe clock at the upper right of the display does not
appear when the icon or is displayed.
During Lock All (See page 114)
During Personal Data Lock (See page 117)
During Keypad Dial Lock (See page 119)
During Secret Mode or Secret Data Only
(See page 120)
During IC Card Lock (See page 296)
Both Keypad Dial Lock and Personal Data
Lock are set.
Both Keypad Dial Lock and Secret Mode/
Secret Data Only are set.
Both IC Card Lock and Lock All are set.
Both IC Card Lock and Personal Data Lock
are set.
Both IC Card Lock and Keypad Dial Lock
are set.
Both IC Card Lock and Secret Mode/Secret
Data Only are set.
IC Card Lock, Keypad Dial Lock, and
Personal Data Lock are simultaneously set.
IC Card Lock, Keypad Dial Lock, and Secret
Mode/Secret Data Only are simultaneously
set.
Type of in-use network (See page 433)
You are in the OFFICEED area.
(See page 429)
Timer Lock ON At Close is set.
(See page 118)
During Key Lock (See page 119)
During Multitask (See page 373)
Multiple functions are activated.
(See page 373)
While watching a 1Seg program
(See page 233)
During recording of a 1Seg program
(See page 240)
During recording of a 1Seg program by
Timer Recording (See page 244)
During pause of 1Seg program recording
(See page 240)
During music playback (See page 259)
During music pause (See page 259)
During infrared communication
(See page 358 and page 362)
The FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (option) is connected in
Communication Mode.
The FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (option) is connected in
microSD Mode. (See page 353)
During talk or communication through a
USB Hands-free compatible device
(See page 61)
A USB Hands-free compatible device is
connected. (See page 61)
A USB Hands-free compatible device is
connected in microSD Mode. (See page 61)
Vibrator is set to other than “OFF”.
(See page 94)
Ring Volume is set to “Silent” or
Mail/Msg. Ring Time is set to “OFF”.
(See page 65 and page 95)
During Manner Mode (See page 96)
During Public mode (Drive mode)
(See page 67)
The call cost has exceeded the specified
limit. (See page 390)
An alarm is set.
(See page 244 and page 377)
A Music&Video Channel program is booked.
(See page 250)
Backlight is set to “OFF”. (See page 102)
View Blind is set to “ON”. (See page 104)
Backlight is set to “OFF” and View Blind is
set to “ON”.
!Side Keys Guard is set to “ON”.
(See page 119)
"
USB Mode Setting is set to “microSD
mode”. (See page 353)
USB Mode Setting is set to “MTP mode”.
(See page 353)
#
∼・
Voice mail messages for Number B are held
at the Voice Mail Center in Dual Mode of
2in1. (See page 428)
$∼・
Voice mail messages are held at the Voice
Mail Center. (See page 414)
%∼The number of record messages
(See page 68)
&∼The number of videophone record
messages (See page 68)
Information
pSome characters and symbols on the display and
Private window might be modified or abbreviated.
pThe color liquid crystal display uses high-precision
production technology. The slightest change in the
environment or other factors may result in unlit or
permanently lit pixels, but this is not a manufacturing
defect.
28
Before Using the Handset
■Operation when a status icon is selected
<Desktop Icon>
Using Icons on Desktop
Status icon Notification icon
Desktop icon
Shows the display for Vibrator. (See page 94)
Shows the display for Ring Volume. (See page 65)
Shows the display for Manner Mode Set. (See page 98)
Shows the display for releasing Public mode (Drive mode).
(See page 67)
Shows the display for Notice Call Cost. (See page 390)
Shows the list of Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, TV Timer, or Timer Recording.
(See page 241, page 242, page 376, page 380 or page 384)
Shows the Music&Video Channel display. (See page 250)
Shows the display for Backlight. (See page 102)
Shows the display for View Blind. (See page 104)
Shows the display for “Set./Service” → “Display”.
Shows the display for Side Key Guard. (See page 119)
Shows the display for USB Mode Setting. (See page 353)
∼・ Shows the display for playing back Voice Mail messages.
(See page 415)
∼・ Shows the display for playing back Voice Mail messages.
(See page 415)
∼Shows the display for Rec. Msg/Voice Memo.
(See page 68, page 70, page 94 and page 388)
∼Shows the display for Rec. Msg/Voice Memo.
(See page 68, page 70, page 94 and page 388)
■Operation when a notification icon is selected
Missed call
Shows the Missed Call list. (See page 52)
Missed call to Number B of 2in1
Shows the Missed Call list. (See page 52)
Record message
Shows the Record Message list. (See page 70)
Videophone record message
Shows the Videophone Record Message list. (See page 70)
New i-mode mail or SMS
Shows the Inbox list. (See page 147)
New chat mail
Starts Chat Mail. (See page 172)
New Message R/F
Shows the Message R/F list. (See page 166)
i-αppli did not start automatically
Shows the i-αppli Auto Start Info. (See page 287)
i-αppli call you did not reply to
Shows the i-αppli call logs. (See page 288)
A ToruCa file is received from a scanning device
Shows the ToruCa File list. (See page 300)
A security error occurred on the i-αppli Stand-by display
Shows the Security Error History. (See page 273)
Success in downloading a Music&Video Channel program
Activates Music&Video Channel. (See page 250)
Failure in downloading a Music&Video Channel program
Activates Music&Video Channel. (See page 251)
Missed alarm
Shows the contents of the alarm that could not be notified. (See page 378)
Missed TV timer
Shows the contents of the TV timer that could not be notified.
(See page 245)
29
Before Using the Handset
■Operation when a desktop icon is selected
Timer recording was completed
Shows the contents and results of the timer recording. (See page 245)
Messages are held at the Voice Mail Center
Shows the display for playing back Voice Mail messages. (See page 415)
The Phonebook could not be updated by Data Security Service
Shows the update display for Data Security Service. (See page 124)
Provide Location was executed automatically
Shows Location History. (See page 310)
Provide Location could not be executed automatically
Shows Location History. (See page 310)
You did not respond to a location provision request
Shows Location History. (See page 310)
Software Update is needed
Starts Software Update. (See page 499)
Software Update was executed
Shows the Update Completion display or the reason for not completing.
(See page 500)
Software rewriting is possible
Shows the rewriting confirmation display. (See page 498)
Pattern data was updated automatically
Shows the updated result. (See page 503)
The FOMA terminal and a personal computer are connected by the FOMA
USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)
Shows the display for USB Mode Setting. (See page 353)
Shows the dialing display with the phone number entered.
(See page 48)
Shows the site of that URL. (See page 178)
Shows the site of that URL by Full Browser. (See page 180)
Shows the Message Composition display with the mail address entered.
(See page 130)
Shows the SMS Composition display with the mail address entered.
(See page 174)
Starts the i-αppli program.※ (See page 271)
Shows it on the Picture viewer.※ (See page 318)
※ When the original data is deleted or overwritten, the desktop icon is disabled.
Plays it back by the i-motion player.※ (See page 326)
Plays it back by the Video player.※ (See page 334)
Plays it back by the Chara-den player.※ (See page 337)
Plays it back by the Melody player.※ (See page 340)
Shows it on the PDF viewer.※ (See page 364)
Shows it on the ToruCa viewer.※ (See page 298)
Shows the Bookmark Folder list. (See page 188)
Shows the Private menu. (See page 385)
Shows the Still Image list for the storage location folder of the camera.
(See page 318)
Shows the list of Alarm. (See page 376)
Shows the Calendar display. (See page 380)
Shows the ToDo list. (See page 384)
Shows the list of Text Memo. (See page 390)
Shows the calculator. (See page 390)
Shows the display for 使いかたナビ (Guide). (See page 36)
Shows the Bar Code Reader menu. (See page 226)
Shows the Ir Data Receiving display. (See page 360 and page 361)
Shows the Camera menu. (See page 217 and page 219)
Shows the Bluetooth Function Selection display.
(See page 397, page 399, and page 401)
Starts Voice Recorder. (See page 363)
Shows the i-concier display. (See page 211)
Shows the Music&Video Channel display. (See page 252)
Starts MUSIC Player. (See page 258)
Shows the Viewer display. (See page 233)
Starts i-αppli Program Guide. (See page 238)
30
Before Using the Handset
You can paste up to 15 desktop icons of such as phone numbers, mail
addresses, etc.
1Select “Add desktop icon” from the Function menu of
the item to be pasted YES
pIf the addresses of the sender and another recipient of simultaneous mail are
found or the multiple destination addresses are found when you operate from the
Function menu of the detailed mail display, select a mail address or phone
number to be pasted.
1PressOo.
2Use Mo to highlight an icon, and press Oo().
pUp to five “Desktop icons”
are displayed. If there are
six or more icons, “ ” and
“ ” are displayed.
pA “Notification icon” is
deleted when each function
is executed. To delete all
“Notification icons”, press
and hold r for at least one second from the display in step 1.
Paste Icons to Desktop
Information
pYou may not be able to paste the URL to the desktop depending on the site.
pWhen the URL title exceeds 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters, the excess is
deleted. If no title exists, up to 22 half-pitch characters of the URL excluding “http://” or
“https://” is displayed.
pSome files and data might not be pasted to the desktop.
Proceed to Respective Functions from Icons on Desktop
When a record message
icon is selected
1mSet./ServiceDisplay
Desktop icon
The list of desktop icons pasted to the desktop is
displayed.
2Select the icon whose details are to be displayed.
pYou can show the Function menu also by pressing i( ), while highlighting an
icon from the Stand-by display.
Information
pWhen the notification icon of “Messages are held at the Voice Mail Center” ( )
appears while you are overseas, you cannot operate the Voice Mail function from the
notification icon. Follow the steps of “Operate Voice Mail Service at the Country You
Stay” on page 440.
+m-6-3
Check Details of Desktop Icon
Desktop Icon list
Function Menu of the Desktop Icon List
Add to desktop Put a check mark for the function to be added
l()
Edit title Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters.
However, the number of characters for the title displayed when
you highlight the icon is up to 11 full-pitch/ 22 half-pitch
characters from the beginning of the title.
Sort Select a desktop iconUse Bo to change the order
Oo()
pTo change the order in succession, repeat the above steps.
l()YES
long press set. See page 386.
31
Before Using the Handset
From the i-Widget display, you can simultaneously start multiple Widget
Appli programs and show them on a list.
Widget Appli
You can show a Widget Appli program.
You can show the Widget Appli operation display by
selecting it.
Navigation displays
Navigations corresponding to the key operations are
indicated.
pYou can randomly change the display order of Widget
Appli programs by pressing i[シャッフル (Shuffle)]
from the i-Widget display.
pSee page 291 for detailed operations of i-Widget.
The symbols on the display (such as , , and ) are called icons. You
can check the meanings of them on the display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayIcons
Use Mo to highlight an icon.
Reset desktop The desktop icons are reset to the default.
YES
Delete this YES
Delete all YES
i-Widget Display and Operations
+m-3-6
<Icons>
Displaying Description of Icons
i-Widget display
Various information is displayed on the Private window like the following
examples:
Information is displayed for about 15 seconds in cases such as when you
press </> with the FOMA terminal closed.
When the FOMA terminal is closed, “Missed call” appears.
Press < to display the missed call record. The name is
displayed for the missed call coming from the party stored in the
Phonebook. When there are multiple missed calls, up to three
missed call records are displayed each time you press <.
pIf you have received 30 or more incoming calls after a missed
call, the missed call record disappears.
pMissed call records might not be displayed while another function is activated.
pAfter you display a missed call record, “Missed call” disappears.
When the FOMA terminal is closed, a Feel＊Mail image is played
back, and then “New mail” appears.
When you press <, the latest Feel＊Mail image is played back.
(For Messages R/F, the Feel＊Mail image is not played back.)
When “Mail” on page 102 is set to “ON”, the received date/time,
sender’s address (name), and subject of the mail or the received
date/time and subject of the Message R/F are displayed. The
sender’s name is displayed for the mail coming from the party
stored in the Phonebook. When multiple mail messages or
Messages R/F are received, up to three mail messages or
Messages R/F appear each time you press < with “New mail”
displayed.
Private Window
When a missed call is found
When a new mail message or Message R/F is received
Clock Receiving a call During a voice call
Dialing
32
Before Using the Handset
pPress < to end the playback of the Feel＊Mail image or to clear the received date/
time, and others.
pFor the mail messages and Messages R/F sorted to the box or folder with security set,
the Feel＊Mail images, received date/time, and others are not played back/displayed.
pWhen a mail message or Message R/F comes in while “Receiving display” is set to
“Operation preferred” and a display other than the Stand-by display is shown, “New
mail” appears without showing any information.
pDepending on the setting of “Auto-display”, “New mail” appears without showing any
information when a Message R/F comes in.
pAfter you display the received date/time and others of the received mail or Message
R/F, “New mail” disappears.
pWhen a mail message or Message R/F comes in during a voice call or a videophone
call, information is not displayed even when “Receiving display” is set to “Alarm
preferred”.
pWhen you set “Secret mail display” to “OFF” and you receive a secret mail message in
Normal Mode, a Feel＊Mail image is not played back.
When “i-Channel ticker” on page 102 is set to “ON” and the
FOMA terminal is closed, tickers flow on the Private window.
pPress </> to end the tickers’ flow.
You can change displayed contents by pressing < while clock is shown.
When i-Channel is received
Change Clock Display
Time only Icons and Date/time
Press m of the FOMA terminal to show Main Menu and then execute,
set, or check respective functions. In this manual, the way to call up
functions from Main Menu is described as a standard method.
Menus are classified by functions. (See page 448)
pSome functions can be selected also by the operation other than pressing m. In this
case, the operation by the easier way is described.
pThis FOMA terminal supports Kisekae Tool (see page 105). If you use Kisekae Tool to
change the design of the Menu display, some menu configurations change according
to the usage frequency depending on the type of the menu.
Further, some menu numbers that are assigned to the menu items do not apply.
■Scroll Selection
Main Menu is composed of 12 main menu icons indicating each function.
pIf you select a main menu icon, the Sub-menu Item Selection display appears. If you
further select a sub-menu item, the Lower Sub-menu Item Selection display appears.
pBy repeating selecting, you can set and check the function.
■Menu Number Selection
You can display some functions by pressing m + menu number (see page 448).
■Multitask is Supported
pYou can simultaneously use some functions in Main Menu. (See page 373)
In this manual, the description of the command navigation key operation
(selection of top/bottom/left/right, and press of Oo after selecting/
entering a function item) is omitted. Scroll selection is explained below
using the example of selecting the function “Quality alarm”:
Selecting Menu
Scroll Selection
Description Example of Steps
1
Main menu icon Sub-menu item Function name of lower sub-menu item
Items which appear on the display
No tone. . . . . . . . . Does not sound.
High tone. . . . . . . . High alarm sounds.
Low tone. . . . . . . . Low alarm sounds.
mSet./ServiceTalkQuality alarmSelect an alarm.
33
Before Using the Handset
Select “Set./Service” from Main Menu. Main Menu at purchase differs depending on the
body color. (See page 453)
Select a main menu icon from the menu function
1
pPress *Mo to highlight the icon. Press and hold *Mo to scroll
the icons continuously.
pIf you have not touched any key for 15 seconds, the
Stand-by display returns.
+m
*Mo
*Oo
Main Menu
Select “Talk” from “Set./Service”.
Select “Quality alarm” from “Talk”.
Select a sub-menu item from the menu function
2
Select a desired lower sub-menu item (function)
*Oo
pThe highlighted item is the currently
selected one.
pPress *Xo to highlight the item
below, and *Zo to highlight the item
above.
pPress and hold *Bo to scroll the
items continuously.
pPress *No to scroll page by page.
3
*Oo
p
Press
*Xo
to highlight the item below,
and
*Zo
to highlight the item above.
p
Press and hold
*Bo
to scroll the items
continuously.
p
When the items are listed over
multiple pages, the total number of
pages and the current page number
are shown at the upper right of the
display.
34
Before Using the Handset
Some menu items have even more detailed menus.
The example below shows how to set “Low tone” for “Quality alarm”.
Menu Number Selection is explained below using the following example:
Set or check the function
4
Menu Number Selection
Description Example of Menu Number
*Oo
pThe highlighted item is the currently
selected one.
pPress *Xo to highlight the item
below, and *Zo to highlight the item
above.
pPress and hold *Bo to scroll the
items continuously.
Menu number
<Quality Alarm>
Sounding Alarm when a Line is Nearly Disconnecting
+m-7-5
From the Stand-by display, press m75.
Simple Menu is a menu focusing on only basic functions for easy
operation. By setting “Menu icon setting” to “Simple menu”, you can
show the Simple Menu by pressing m from the Stand-by display.
pSome operating procedures or items which appear on the display in Simple Menu differ
from the ones described in this manual.
pSee “Simple Menu Function List” on page 468 for the contents of Simple Menu.
Call up the function using the menu number
1
Simple Menu
+m-7-5
35
Before Using the Handset
If you press i when “ ” is shown at the lower right of the display,
the Function menu including selectable items such as “Save”, “Edit”,
and “Delete” appears in each operation. The contents of the Function
menu depend on the display from which you show the Function menu.
pWhen the items are listed
over multiple pages, the total
number of pages and the
current page number are
shown at the upper right of
the Function Menu display.
In this manual, the operation of the Function menu is described as
follows:
Function Menu
Description Example for Function Menu
+i
Delete all You can delete all files.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Item displayed in the Function menu
Operating procedures after selecting
an item in the Function menu
An actual operation is done as follows:
Press the numeric key corresponding to the
displayed item number.
When menu items are listed over multiple pages, you can show the previous/next page
by pressing Bo with the uppermost/lowermost item highlighted. You can press No to
scroll through page by page. When / is displayed on the display, you can
scroll through page by page also by pressing m()/c().
pDepending on the display being shown, such as lower sub-menu items, you might be
able to scroll through page by page also by pressing </> instead of No.
To select an item quickly <Direct selection>
Item scroll
Press +i().
Use *Mo to highlight
“Delete all” and press
*Oo().
Enter your Terminal
Security Code and press
*Oo().
Use *Bo to highlight
“YES” and press
*Oo().
Item number
36
Before Using the Handset
With the functions you can select multiple items, put a check
mark for check boxes to select them.
Each time you press
Oo
( ), you can switch
“”
and
“”
.
With some functions, you can put or clear check marks at a time by pressing
i()
and selecting “Select all/Release all”
or by pressing
m(/)
.
p
“”
is placed to the selected item depending on the function.
The Lower Sub-menu Item Selection display is shown. When you press h, the
Stand-by display returns (except during Multitask). The Stand-by display or the former
display automatically returns depending on the function.
Press h. The contents of the setting are abandoned and the Stand-by display or the
former display returns. The confirmation display appears asking whether to abandon the
setting contents depending on the function. You can press r to return to the previous
operation.
Press Bo to highlight “YES” or “NO”, then press Oo().
Check box
After finishing the operation
To cancel the operation midway
When the “YES/NO” selection display appears
For Reset Settings
You can search for the functions you want to know and use, and then
check the operating methods. You can execute some functions from
“
使いかたナビ
(Guide)”. This function is available in Japanese Mode only.
1mステーショナリー
(Stationery)
使いかたナビ
(Guide)
Select an item.
おすすめ機能 (Recommendable functions)
. . . Displays the recommendable functions. Go to step 3.
キーワード検索 (From keywords)
. . . Enter keywords and retrieve. Go to step 2
機能一覧検索 (From Function list)
. . . Retrieves from the function list. Go to step 3.
検索履歴 (Search history)
. . . Displays up to 30 search histories. Go to step 3.
pHighlight each item and press l( ); then the
detailed operating methods are displayed.
pThe 使いかたナビ
(Guide) display appears also by selecting the 使いかたナビ
(Guide) icon “ ” pasted on the desktop at purchase.
pYou can store “使いかたナビ (Guide)” for Multi Key Long Press Setting. (See
page 386)
2Enter a keyword.
Up to 50 search results are displayed.
pYou can enter up to 24 full-pitch/48 half-pitch characters.
3Select a functionSelect an item.
機能の説明 (Description) . . . . . . . . Displays explanations for the function.
操作のしかた (How to operate) . . . Displays the operating method.
この機能を使う (Operate function)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executes the function. Operate each function.
pFor some functions, press Oo( ) several times for selection.
pYou can display explanations about the function also by pressing l()
while highlighting the function.
pTo delete search history, press i( ) and select “1件削除 (Delete this)” or
“全削除 (Delete all)”, then select “YES”.
<Guide>
When You Forget Key Operation
37
Before Using the Handset
The UIM is an IC card that holds your information such as phone
numbers. It can hold data such as Phonebook entries and SMS
messages as well. By sharing a UIM, you can operate multiple FOMA
terminals for multiple purposes.
You cannot use the FOMA terminal for communication such as voice and
videophone calls, i-mode, sending/receiving mail, or packet
communication unless the UIM is inserted.
For details on how to use the UIM, refer to the UIM instruction manual.
When inserting or removing the UIM, take care not to accidentally touch
or scratch the IC.
You need to turn off the power and then remove the battery before you
insert the UIM. (See page 39)
■Inserting
1With the golden IC surface
downward, push the UIM slowly
to the end while pressing the
surface of it.
■Removing
1While sliding the UIM, pull it out
slowly.
Using UIM (FOMA Card)
Insert/Remove
Cut
You can set two security codes, PIN1 and PIN2, for a UIM. (See page 112)
The FOMA terminal has the UIM security function (UIM restriction
function) as a security function to protect your data files.
If you obtain data files by the method below with the UIM inserted, UIM
security function is automatically set to them.
・When downloading images or melodies and so on, from sites or
Internet websites
・When receiving i-mode mail with file attachments
The data files with the UIM security can be browsed, played back, started,
edited, attached to mail, or transferred via infrared rays only when the
UIM used for obtaining is inserted. When the UIM used for obtaining the
data or files is not inserted, or when another UIM is inserted, these
functions are not operable.
pIn the explanation hereafter, the UIM used to obtain data and files is referred to
as “your UIM” and other UIMs as “another person’s UIM”.
Information
pMake sure that you insert/remove the UIM with the FOMA terminal closed and held in
your hand.
pTake care not to force the UIM into place because this can break it.
pTake care not to lose the UIM once you remove it.
pWhen you replace your UIM (except during Omakase Lock), you need to enter the
four- to eight-digit Terminal Security Code after turning on the power. When you enter
the correct Terminal Security Code, the Stand-by display appears. If you enter the
incorrect Terminal Security Code five times in succession, the power turns off.
(However, you can turn on the power again.)
Security Code
Security Function of UIM
38
Before Using the Handset
pWhen the UIM is not inserted or when another person’s UIM is inserted, the following
types of data and files are displayed with the restrictions symbol, “ ”:
・Videophone record messages ・Movie memos ・Screen memos
・Templates ・i-αppli programs ・Images
・i-motion files ・Chara-den images ・Melodies
・Machi-chara images ・Kisekae Tool files ・PDF files
・Chaku-uta®/Chaku-uta Full® music files ・Downloaded dictionaries
・Files attached or pasted to i-mode mail in the Inbox
・Files attached to i-mode mail in the Outbox/Draft (except the data shot or edited
with the FOMA terminal)
・Messages R/F with files (melodies or images) attached or pasted
・Images inserted into Deco-mail text
※This function applies to the pre-installed i-αppli programs, Chara-den images,
Deco-mail pictograms, etc. if they are reinstalled (upgraded) from a site.
※“Chaku-uta” is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc.
pThe preview image for the data file with the UIM security appears as
shown on the right.
♪
♪
♪
♪
♪
If the UIM used for
obtaining data files
or mail messages is
inserted, you can
browse/play back the
data files with the UIM
security.
♪
♪
♪
♪
♪
Unless the UIM used
for obtaining data files
or mail messages is
inserted, you cannot
browse/play back the
data files with the UIM
security.
Your UIM
Another
person’s UIM
Replacing UIMs
If you use the blue UIM with your FOMA terminal, note that following
specifications differ from those of the green/white UIM:
Information
pWhen the UIM security is set for data files, you cannot set them for the functions such
as “Display setting” and “Select ring tone” when another person’s UIM is inserted.
pWhen the data files with the UIM security is set for “Display setting” or “Select ring
tone”, the FOMA terminal works with their default settings if you remove your UIM or
replace it with another person’s UIM. Also, a Machi-chara image is cleared. If you
insert your UIM again, your settings are enabled again.
pThe UIM security function is not set for the data files received using the infrared
communication function or data transmission (OBEX™ communication) function and
the still images/moving pictures shot or edited with the FOMA terminal.
pEven when another person’s UIM is inserted, you can move/delete data files with the
UIM security.
pThe settings of the following functions are stored on the UIM:
・SMS validity period ・SMS center setting ・Select language
・PLMN setting ・PIN1 code, PIN2 code ・PIN1 code entry set
・Validating/Invalidating DOCOMO Certificate 1 and user certificate
Types of UIM (FOMA Card)
Functions UIM Reference
(blue)
(green/white)
Number of digits of the phone number
that can be stored in the UIM Phonebook 20 max. 26 max. 79
Operation of user certificate to use
FirstPass Not available Available 201
Use of WORLD WING Not available Available 432
Use of Service Numbers for “DOCOMO
repair counter” and “General inquiries
<docomo Information Center>”
Not available Available 421
39
Before Using the Handset
Use the FOMA terminal’s dedicated Battery Pack P19.
■Attaching
1While pressing the surrounding
part of “ ”, slide the back
cover (2 mm or more) in the
direction of the arrow to unlock
and remove it.
2
With the arrow mark facing up, fit
the tab side of the battery pack to
the FOMA terminal securely, and
then push the battery pack into
the direction B while pressing it
against the direction A.
■WORLD WING
WORLD WING is the DOCOMO FOMA international roaming service that enables
you to use the current phone number overseas for making and receiving calls using
the UIM (green/white) and service compatible mobile phone.
pYou do not need to subscribe to WORLD WING if you have subscribed to the FOMA
service after September 1, 2005. If you offered that you did not need WORLD WING
at the time you signed up for the FOMA service, or when you have midway canceled
WORLD WING, you are required to take the procedures to newly subscribe to
WORLD WING.
pIf you have signed up for the FOMA service before August 31, 2005, and have not
yet subscribed to WORLD WING, you are required to subscribe to it.
pThis service is not available with some billing plans.
pIf you lose your UIM (green/white) or have it stolen overseas, immediately contact
DOCOMO to take the steps necessary for suspending the use of the UIM. For
inquiries, see “docomo Information Center” on the back page of this manual. Note
that you are still charged the call and communication fees incurred after you lose it or
have it stolen.
Attaching/Removing Battery Pack
Arrow mark
3Put the back cover to the FOMA
terminal as illustrated, slide the
back cover in the direction of the
arrow to attach it.
pMake sure there is no gap between the back
cover and FOMA terminal, and slide the back
cover to does it completely.
If it is not completely closed, you may hurt your hand or fingers because it is
made of metal.
■Removing
1Remove the back cover
following the step 1 of
“■Attaching”, and take hold of
the projection of the battery pack
to lift it up.
Projection
Information
pMake sure that you turn off the power, hold the closed FOMA terminal in your hand,
and then attach/remove the battery pack. Also, take care not to press the one-push
open button when you attach/remove the battery pack.
pIf you try to force the battery pack into place, you could damage the UIM or the
terminal part of the FOMA terminal.
40
Before Using the Handset
Use the FOMA terminal’s dedicated Battery Pack P19.
Life of battery pack
pBattery packs are consumables. The usable time shortens slightly each time they are
charged.
pWhen the usable time of the battery pack becomes half the time it was purchased,
replacing is recommended because the battery pack is nearing the end of its life.
Depending on the use conditions, the battery pack may swell as it nears the end of its
life, but this is not a problem.
pThe life of the battery pack may shorten if you use i-αppli programs, talk on the
videophone, watch 1Seg programs and so on for a long time during charging.
Charging
pFor details, refer to the instruction manuals for the FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 (option),
FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use (option), and FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 (option).
pThe FOMA AC Adapter 01 supports 100 V AC only. The FOMA AC Adapter 02 and
FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use support from 100 V AC through 240 V AC.
pThe shape of the plug for the AC adapter is for 100 V AC (for domestic use). To use the
AC adapter that supports from 100 V AC through 240 V AC overseas, you need to
have a conversion plug adapter that is compatible with the voltage of the country you
stay. Do not use a transformer for overseas travel to charge the battery pack.
pEven during charging, you can still answer calls if the FOMA terminal is turned on. This
will consume the charged amount so that charging will take longer. Also, the standby
time or talk time might be shorter if you charge the battery pack with your FOMA
terminal open.
pIf you have a long time videophone call during charging, the temperature in the FOMA
terminal may rise and charging may be suspended. In such a case, wait for a while and
try charging again.
pRemove and insert the connector slowly and carefully, without using unnecessary
force.
pDo not remove the battery pack during charging.
Charging
To prevent damage to the environment, bring used battery
packs to a docomo service counter, a docomo agent or a
recycle center.
Li-ion 00
Do not charge for long periods of time (several days) with the FOMA
terminal turned on.
pIf you leave the FOMA terminal powered on for long periods of time during charging,
you may not be able to use the FOMA terminal for long duration as expected and the
low battery alarm may sound soon, because the FOMA terminal receives the power
from the battery pack after charging is completed. If this happens, charge the battery
pack correctly. When charging the battery pack again, first remove the FOMA terminal
from the AC adapter (or desktop holder) or DC adapter and then set it again.
Estimated usable time for battery pack (The usable time for the battery pack
varies with the charging time and the remaining life of the battery pack.)
※The continuous talk time is the estimated time that the FOMA terminal can be used for
calls when radio waves can be sent and received normally.
※The 1Seg watching time is the estimated time for when radio waves can be received
normally with the Stereo Earphone Set 01 (option) connected.
※The continuous standby time is the estimated time for when radio waves can be
received normally. The talk/communication time and standby time could be about half
of the estimate and 1Seg watching time could be shorter depending on the charge
level of the battery pack, function settings, other ambient conditions such as
temperature, and the status of radio waves in the area (weak or no radio waves, for
instance). When you use i-mode communication, the talk/communication time and
standby time will be shorter. Further, even if you do not make calls or not execute
i-mode communication, the talk/communication time and standby time will be shorter if
you watch 1Seg programs, compose i-mode mail, start up a downloaded i-αppli
program or the i-αppli Stand-by display, execute data communication or Multiaccess,
use the camera, play back i-motion files, movie files or music, or use Bluetooth
connections.
※The continuous talk time and the continuous standby time may be shortened
depending on the network environment in the country you stay.
Continuous
standby time
FOMA/3G
3G/GSM setting
[3G]
In motion: Approx. 400 hours
3G/GSM setting
[Auto]
Standstill: Approx. 610 hours
In motion: Approx. 380 hours
GSM
3G/GSM setting
[Auto]
Standstill: Approx. 260 hours
Continuous
talk time
FOMA/3G Voice call: Approx. 190 minutes
Videophone call: Approx. 140 minutes
GSM Voice call: Approx. 230 minutes
1Seg watching time Approx. 290 minutes
(when Mobile W-Speed is OFF:
Approx. 320 minutes)
(in ECO Mode: Approx. 410 minutes)
41
Before Using the Handset
※The continuous standby time for standstill is the average number of hours you can use
the FOMA terminal in standstill status when it is closed and can receive radio waves
normally.
※The continuous standby time for in motion is the average number of hours you can
use the FOMA terminal in the combined status of “standstill” “moving” and “out of the
service area” when it is closed, in an area where it can receive radio waves normally.
Estimated time for charging battery pack
※The charging time is an estimate of time for when empty battery pack is charged with
the FOMA terminal turned off. The charging time will be longer if you charge the
battery pack with the power of the FOMA terminal turned on.
AC adapter Approx. 120 minutes DC adapter Approx. 120 minutes
Charge with AC Adapter and Desktop Holder
1Plug the connector of AC
Adapter (option) horizontally
with its engraved side facing
down into the connector
terminal of the Desktop Holder
(option).
2Pull out the AC Adapter's plug,
and plug it into a household
power socket of 100 V AC.
Call/Charging
indicator
Desktop Holder
Engraved
surface
(down side)
AC Adapter
Charging
terminal
Power
socket
AC Adapter’s
plug
Connector
Release
buttons
Connector
terminal
3Set the FOMA terminal onto the desktop holder securely.
Check that the Call/Charging indicator lights in red.
When the Call/Charging indicator flickers, dismount the AC adapter and battery
pack from the FOMA terminal and then re-mount them for charging.
If the symptom persists, troubles with the AC adapter, desktop holder or battery
pack may be involved, so consult a handling counter such as a docomo shop.
pBe sure to set the closed FOMA terminal onto the desktop holder.
pThe charging confirmation tone (see page 95) sounds when charging starts and
ends. However, it does not sound when the power is off or during Manner Mode
or Public mode (Drive mode).
pBe sure to set the FOMA terminal firmly onto the desktop holder. Also, be careful
that the connector cover or a commercial strap is not caught between the FOMA
terminal and desktop holder.
4When charging is completed, hold the desktop holder
with fingers and lift up the head of FOMA terminal to
remove.
pUnplug the AC adapter from the power socket when you are not going to use it for
a long time.
■Indicator and display during charging and when charging is completed
pWhen the FOMA terminal is turned off, the battery icon does not appear.
If you start charging with the battery flat, the Call/Charging indicator might not light
immediately; however, charging itself has started.
Call/Charging indicator Battery icon
Charging Lights in red Blinks
Charging completed Off Lights
42
Before Using the Handset
Insert the connector with the engraved surface
facing up until it clicks. Pull straight the connector
out while pressing the release buttons.
pTo charge the battery, place the cover of the
connector terminal as illustrated. Pull out the
cover of the connector terminal to direction A,
and turn it as direction B.
※
Check the facing direction (front or rear) of the
AC adapter plug and then insert or pull it
horizontally into or out of the FOMA terminal.
Malfunction could result if you try to pull it
forcibly.
■DC adapter (option)
With the DC adapter, you can use a cigarette lighter socket (12 V/24 V) of cars to
charge the FOMA terminal with the battery pack attached.
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the FOMA DC Adapter 01/02.
You can open the FOMA terminal easily by one-push key operation.
(One-push Open)
pYou can open it also manually without using the button.
pYou need to close the FOMA terminal manually. If it does not close, open it fully
and then close it.
When charging only with the AC adapter
Cover
Release
buttons
Engraved
surface
Information
pIf the fuse blows off when charging with the DC adapter, be sure to use a 2A fuse. The
2A fuse is consumables, so purchase at auto parts stores in your neighborhood.
<One-push Open>
Opening FOMA Terminal by Using a Button
One-push open button
When the FOMA terminal is turned on, an estimate of the battery level is
indicated by the icon.
・Almost full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
・Getting low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
・Almost empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pCharge the battery when it is almost empty.
You can check an estimate of the battery level by the display and sound.
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsBattery
Battery level
pThe pictogram disappears in about three seconds.
pThe battery level tone does not sound during Manner Mode or when you set
“Keypad sound” to “OFF”.
Information
pWhen you open the FOMA terminal by pressing the one-push open button, it
might not open fully depending on its direction.
pWhen you open the FOMA terminal by pressing the one-push open button, be
careful not to drop it by its rebound.
<Battery Level>
Checking Battery Level
Check Estimate of Battery Level by Display and Tone
Almost full Getting low Almost empty
※Almost empty.
Charge the battery
pack.
Three beeps Two beeps One beep
43
Before Using the Handset
When the battery runs out, the display on the right appears and
the low battery alarm sounds for about 10 seconds. To stop
this alarm, press any key other than < and >. About one
minute later, the FOMA terminal will be turned off.
pDuring a call, a beeping tone from the earpiece notifies you of
the low battery. About 20 seconds later your call will be cut
and then one minute later the FOMA terminal will be turned
off.
1Press and hold h for at least one
second.
After the Wake-up display (see page 100) is displayed,
the Stand-by display appears.
pIt may take a while for the Wake-up display to appear.
pIf Set Time is set, the current date and time are shown.
pWhen “ ” is displayed, the FOMA terminal is out of
the service area or in the place where the radio waves
do not reach. Move to a location where “ ”
disappears.
Enter the four- to eight-digit Terminal Security Code after turning on the power. When
you enter the correct Terminal Security Code, the Stand-by display appears. If you enter
the incorrect Terminal Security Code five times in succession, the power turns off.
(However, you can turn on the power again.)
Enter the four- to eight-digit PIN1 code after you turn on the power. When you enter the
correct PIN1 code, the Stand-by display appears. See page 112 for PIN1 code.
When the battery is running out
Recharge Battery
display
<Power ON/OFF>
Turning Power ON/OFF
Turn Power On
Stand-by display
When your UIM is replaced (except during Omakase Lock)
When “PIN1 code entry set” of “UIM setting” is set to “ON”
Enter the four- to eight-digit PIN2 code after you turn on the power. When you enter the
correct PIN2 code, the Stand-by display appears. If you press r or h without
entering the correct PIN2 code, “Auto reset setting” is set to “OFF” and the Stand-by
display appears. See page 112 for PIN2 code.
The mail messages “Welcome ドコモ動画 (Welcome DOCOMO moving
picture )” and “緊急速報「エリアメール」のご案内 (Introduction of Early Warning
“Area Mail”)” have been saved by default. Press Oo twice or perform step 1 on
page 147 to show the Inbox list.
1Press and hold h for at least two seconds.
The exit display appears and the power turns off.
pYou cannot turn on the power immediately after turning off the power. Wait a few
seconds.
1m
設定／サービス
(Set./Service)
ディスプレイ
(Display)
バイリンガル
(Select language)
Japanese (
日本語
) or English (
英語
)
p
The following functions are different between Japanese display and English display:
When “Auto reset setting” of “Notice call cost” is set to “ON”
(except during Omakase Lock)
Check Welcome Mail
Information
pEach entry display appears in the order of “PIN1 code” → “Terminal Security Code”
→ “PIN2 code”.
Turn Power Off
+m-1-5
<Select Language>
Switching to English Display
Functions Japanese English
Info Notice Setting 電子音 (Electrical tone)
ボイス (Voice)
OFF
ON
Not available
OFF
“Clock” of Display Setting
→ “Stand-by clock” → “Day of week”
Available Not available
使いかたナビ (Guide) Available Not available
44
Before Using the Handset
If the date and time, Terminal Security Code, Keypad Sound, Location
Request Set., or Font Size Setting is not set, the Initial Setting display
appears when you turn on the power. You can set the initial settings also
from each menu function separately.
1Turn on the powerYES
pWhen the display for entering your Terminal Security
Code, PIN1 code, or PIN2 code appears, follow the
operation on page 43.
2Set the date and time.
You can select “Auto time adjust ON” or “Auto time adjust OFF” for setting the time.
(See page 44)
3Set your Terminal Security Code.
You can set your Terminal Security Code required for setting functions.
(See page 112)
1. Enter “0000”Enter your new Terminal Security Code (four to eight digits)
YES
4Set Keypad Sound.
You can set whether to make a keypad sound. (See page 95)
5Set Location Request Set.
You can set whether to notify your current location for when a GPS location
provision request arrives. (See page 312)
Voice Guidance Available Not available
Functions Japanese English
Information
pWhen you insert the UIM, the “バイリンガル (Select language)” setting is stored on
the UIM.
<Initial Setting>
Configuring Initial Setting
6Set the size of characters.
You can set the size of characters on the display at a time. (See page 109)
You can select whether to correct the time automatically or set it
manually. The time is set/displayed on the 24-hour basis.
1mSet./ServiceClockSet time
Auto time adjust ON or Auto time adjust OFF
Auto time adjust ON
. . . . Corrects the date/time automatically. The setting is completed.
When the time cannot be corrected automatically such as when “ ” is
displayed and the date/time has not been set, the Manual Time Setting
display appears. Follow step 2 to set the date/time.
Auto time adjust OFF
. . . . Sets the date/time manually.
pWhen “Notice call cost” is set to “ON”, you need to enter your Terminal Security
Code.
Information
pWhen an unset function is found, the Initial Setting display for the unset function
appears each time you turn on the power.
pThe completed settings are valid even when total setting is interrupted by an incoming
call or canceled by pressing -h or -r midway.
pWhen the power is automatically turned on by alarm notification, the Initial Setting
display does not appear even if there is any unset function.
pWhen you finish the initial settings, the confirmation display appears telling that
updating software is executed automatically. This display appears only at the first
time, and after that, does not appear until you execute Reset Settings or Initialize.
+m-3-1
<Set Time>
Setting Date and Time
45
Before Using the Handset
2Enter year, month, date and time.
Use Mo to move the cursor and enter numbers by the
numeric keys.
pTo enter one-digit numeral for the date and time, enter
two digits beginning with “0” as in “01” through “09”.
pHighlight “Time zone” and press l( ) to set the
time zone. Use Mo to select a region and press Oo().
This function corrects the time of the FOMA terminal according to the clock information
obtained from the network when you turn on the power.
The time is corrected when you show the Stand-by display with “Auto time adjust ON”
set.
If the time is not corrected for a while after you turn on the power, turn it off and then on
again.
p
Some few second errors might occur. You might not be able to correct the time depending
on the radio wave conditions, or the i-
α
ppli program set for the i-
α
ppli Stand-by display.
pWhen you receive the clock information overseas and the time difference correction
information differs from the previously received one, “Time is adjusted” is displayed and
the time difference is corrected automatically. Press “OK” to update the time and show
Redial, Dialed Calls, Received Calls, sent/received mail messages and others in local
time.
pDepending on the overseas carrier, the time difference might not be correctly adjusted.
In such a case, set a time zone manually.
About date/time correction function
Information
pUnless Set Time is set, the functions which use the clock such as Schedule do not
work correctly. Further, the date/time for redial items and received call records are not
stored.
pThe set time is retained even when the battery pack is replaced, however, it might be
reset if the battery pack is left removed for a long time. In that case, charge the FOMA
terminal and then perform the clock setting.
pWhen “Time zone” is set to other than “GMT +9” or the time difference is corrected
overseas, the sub clock (Japanese date/time, etc.) is displayed on the Stand-by
display.
pThis function supports clock settings from 00:00 on January 1, 2009 through 23:59 on
December 31, 2037.
You can display the time of the specified area on the Stand-by display.
1mSet./ServiceClockWorld time watch
ON or OFF
Use Mo to select an area and press Oo().
You can advance the time displayed for the overseas country you stay
and for a region of World Time Watch by one hour.
1mSet./ServiceClockSummer timeON or OFF
You can set the FOMA terminal to send your phone number to the called
party’s phone when dialing. Your phone number is important
information, so take utmost care when notifying your phone number.
This function is available only when the other party’s phone supports
Caller ID.
<World Time Watch>
Displaying World Time
Information
pWorld Time Watch does not appear when “Display setting” → “Clock” → “Stand-by
clock” → “Position” is set to “OFF”, or when you use the FOMA terminal overseas.
Summer Time
<Caller ID Notification>
Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone
Number
46
Before Using the Handset
You can set whether to notify your caller ID on the network.
1mSet./ServiceNW servicesCaller ID notification
Do the following operations.
pYour phone number (own number) is stored on the UIM.
1mPhonebookOwn number
You can press No to switch the tabs.
pSee page 387 for storing/displaying personal data.
+m-1-7
Set Caller ID Notification to Network
Activate/Deactivate Activate or Deactivate
Check setting You can check the setting contents of “Activate/Deactivate”.
+m-0
<Own Number>
Checking Your Own Phone Number
Own Number display
Phone number tab
List tab
Information
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can switch between Number A and Number B by pressing
*Oo( ) from the Own Number display. “ ” appears for Number A, and “ ”
appears for Number B.
pWhen you replace a UIM with another one while using 2in1, 2in1 Setting is
deactivated. For using 2in1, activate 2in1 Setting.
47
Voice/Videophone Calls
Making Calls/Videophone Calls
Videophone Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Making a Call/Videophone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Switching a Voice/Videophone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using Call Records. . . . . . . . . <Redial> <Dialed Calls> <Received Calls> 52
Using Chaku-moji . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Chaku-moji> 54
Setting Caller ID to Send/Not to Send for Each Call . . . . . . . . . <186/184> 56
Sending Touch-tone Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Pause Dial> 56
Making International Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <WORLD CALL> 57
Setting for International Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . <International Dial Assist> 58
Storing Numbers to be Added to the Beginning of a Phone Number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Prefix Setting> 59
Making a Call Specifying a Sub-address . . . . . . . <Sub-address Setting> 60
Setting Alarm for Reconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reconnect Signal> 60
Making Caller’s Voice Easier to Hear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Speech Quality> 60
Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make Voice Clear . . . <Noise Reduction> 60
Slowing Down the Other Party’s Speaking Speed . . . . . . . <Yuttari Talk> 61
Switching to Hands-free. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Hands-free> 61
Using Hands-free Compatible Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . <In-Car Hands-free> 61
Receiving Calls/Videophone Calls
Receiving a Call/Videophone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Switched between a Call and a Videophone Call by the Other Party. . . 64
Setting Response of Key Operation for Answering Incoming Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Answer Setting> 64
Setting Response for when Opening FOMA Terminal while Ringing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Setting when Opened> 64
Setting Response for when Closing FOMA Terminal during a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Setting when Closed> 65
Adjusting Earpiece Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Volume> 65
Adjusting Ring Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Ring Volume> 65
When You cannot/could not Answer a Voice/Videophone Call
Putting a Call on Hold when You cannot Answer Immediately
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <On Hold> 66
Putting a Call on Hold during a Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Holding> 66
Setting Hold Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Hold Tone Setting> 66
Using Public Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
When You could not Answer an Incoming Call . . . . . . . . <Missed Calls> 68
Recording Voice/Video Messages when You cannot Answer a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Record Message Setting> 68
Recording a Message when You cannot Answer an Incoming Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Quick Record Message> 69
Playing/Erasing Record Messages/a Voice Memo/Videophone Record
Messages/Movie Memos
. . . . . . . . . .<Play/Erase Messages> <Play/Erase Videophone Messages> 70
Making Full Use of Videophone Calls
Using Chara-den . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Useful Functions for Videophone Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Setting Hands-free Videophone . . . . . . . . <Hands-free with Videophone> 74
Setting Image Quality for Videophone Calls . . . . . . . <Visual Preference> 74
Changing Image Displays for Videophone Calls . . . . . . . <Select Image> 74
Redialing as a Voice Call when a Videophone Call cannot be Connected
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Voice Call Auto Redial> 75
Setting for Switching a Voice/Videophone Call during a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Notify Switchable Mode> 75
Selecting Response to Incoming Videophone Calls during i-mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Videophone while Packet> 76
Using Videophone Calls by Interfacing to External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . 76
48
Voice/Videophone Calls
You and the other party can talk viewing each other’s images.
DOCOMO videophones conform to 3G-324M, standardized by the international
standard 3GPP. You cannot connect to the videophone that uses a different format.
p3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project):
This is the regional standards organization for developing common technical
specifications for third-generation mobile telecommunication systems (IMT-2000).
p3G-324M:
This is the international standard for the third generation of mobile videophones.
pP-09A supports only 64 kbps communication speed of the videophone.
You cannot talk on the videophone at 32 kbps communication speed.
■Display during videophone calls
…Received image (The other party’s image through the
camera or substitute image)
…Sent image (Substitute image or Image through your
camera)
…Call duration
※1 When voice sending fails, the other party cannot hear your voice.
When voice receiving fails, you cannot hear the other party’s voice.
※2 When image sending fails, the sent image is not displayed at the other end.
When image receiving fails, the received image is not displayed.
When voice or image sending/receiving fails, it does not recover automatically. You need
to make a videophone call again.
Videophone Calls
…Status
: Voice sending/receiving
(gray): Voice sending/
receiving failed※1
: Image sending/receiving
(gray): Image sending/
receiving failed※2
: Camera image sending
: Still image sending
: Chara-den talking
: Hands-free activated
: Bluetooth
communicating
: Portrait
: Close-up
: Landscape
: Night Mode
: Chara-den Whole
Action Mode
: Chara-den Parts Action
Mode
: DTMF Transmission
Mode
1Enter the other party’s phone number,
starting with the city code.
pWhen 27 or more digits are entered, the lower 26 digits
only are displayed.
pTo store an entered phone number in the Phonebook,
press m( ). Go to step 2 on page 82.
pEven when you are dialing within the same area, you
need to enter the city code before the phone number.
2
Press d or Oo().
p“ ” blinks during dialing, and lights during a call.
Making a Call/Videophone Call
When Making a Voice Call
49
Voice/Videophone Calls
Press l().
p“ ” blinks during dialing and lights during the call.
pPress m during a videophone call to switch between
the substitute image and image through your camera
for sending to the other party.
3Press h to end the call after talking.
When Making a Videophone Call
The digital communication
charging starts from this
display.
Information
pIf you hear the guidance requesting your caller ID (see page 420), follow the steps of
“To notify your caller ID” on page 56 to enter “186” and redial.
pWhen an earphone/microphone (option) is connected, you can hear the other party’s
voice from the earphone. (See page 392)
pIf you close the FOMA terminal during a call, the FOMA terminal works in accordance
with the setting of “Setting when closed”. (See page 65)
pYou can press numeric keys to send touch-tone signals during a call. During a
Chara-den call, you need to switch to DTMF Transmission Mode. (See page 73)
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can make a call after selecting Number A or Number B.
(See page 426)
<For Voice Calls>
pYou can make a voice call also by pressing -d and then entering the party’s phone
number. If you enter a wrong number, press -h to clear the display and then redial.
The other party’s name and icon are displayed if the party’s phone number and name
are stored in the Phonebook. However, the image is not displayed even if it is stored in
the Phonebook.
pIf the same phone number is stored with multiple names in the Phonebook, the name
that comes first in the search order (see page 84) is displayed.
pThe phone number instead of the name is displayed when you make a call during
Personal Data Lock or to the party stored as secret data in the Phonebook.
Each time you press r, the digit on the far right is cleared. If you press and hold r
for at least one second, all the digits are cleared and the Stand-by display returns.
pPress No to move the cursor to the digit you want to clear, and then press r to clear
it. To clear all the digits on and to the right of the cursor, press and hold r for at least
one second.
<For Videophone Calls>
pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated by “Hands-free
w/ V. phone”. (See page 74) However, Hands-free is deactivated during Manner
Mode regardless of “Hands-free w/ V. phone”.
pWhen you make a videophone call with substitute image, note that you will still be
charged for the digital communication, not the voice calls.
pIf you make a videophone call at 110/119/118 from the FOMA terminal, it is
automatically dialed out as a voice call.
pThe international videophone call is available using the DOCOMO international call
service “WORLD CALL”. (See page 57)
Display when dialing
If you entered a wrong phone number
Information
50
Voice/Videophone Calls
The reason why it could not be connected is displayed. (The displayed reason might not
be the same as the actual reason depending on the type of the other party’s phone and
contract for network services.)
If a videophone call could not be connected
Messages Reasons
Check number, then
redial
You have dialed a non-existent phone number.
Busy The other party is busy. (Depending on the receiver’s
phone, this message might be displayed during packet
communication as well.)
Busy with packet
transmission
The packet communication is progress at the other end.
Out of service area/power
off
The other party’s phone is out of the service area or turned
off.
Set caller ID to ON Your caller ID is not notified. (when dialing “visualnet”, etc.)
Your call is being
forwarded
During forwarding
Redial using voice call The other party activates Call Forwarding Service but the
forwarding destination phone does not support videophone
calls.
Upper limit has been
exceeded
Connection failed
The upper limit for the plan with the limit function (Type
Limit, Family Wide Limit) is exceeded.
Please make your call
from the i-mode web page
You did not make a videophone call from the IP (Information
Provider) site among i-mode official sites (at dialing to
V-live).
Connection failed Redial after setting “Activate/Deactivate” of “Caller ID
notification” to “Activate”.
pThis may appear in the case other than above.
If “Voice call auto redial” is set to “ON”, and a videophone call is not connected, a voice
call is automatically made.
pVideophone calls cannot be connected to the phones that do not support the
videophone function, or to the phones that are out of the service area or turned off even
if they are videophones. If you have set “Voice call auto redial” to “ON” and attempt to
dial a phone that does not have the videophone function, the number will be redialed
as a voice call. However, this operation might not work if you call the phone connected
with ISDN-synchronous 64K or the ISDN videophone that does not support 3G-324M
(as of April 2009), or if you dial the wrong number. Note that you could be charged for
the communication.
Auto-redialing
Function Menu while Entering Phone Number
Notify caller ID See page 56.
Prefix numbers See page 59.
Int’l dial assist See page 58.
Select image See page 75.
Multi number You can select a phone number to be notified to the other party.
(See page 423.)
Add to phonebook See page 82.
Compose message You can compose a mail message to send to the phone number
set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 130.
Chaku-moji See page 54.
51
Voice/Videophone Calls
You (caller) can switch between a voice call and a videophone call. This
function is available for the mobile phones that can switch between a
voice call and a videophone call.
When the other party’s phone has a function to switch between the calls,
“ ” is displayed on your phone and you can switch from the voice
call to videophone call.
1During a voice callc()Change
pWhen you select an image
to be sent to the other
party, select “Select
image”. Go to step 2 on
page 75.
pWhen “Cancel” is selected,
the FOMA terminal cancels
switching and returns to the
voice call.
pWhile switching, the voice
guidance is played back.
Switching a Voice/Videophone Call
Switch from a Voice Call to a Videophone Call
When the other party’s phone has a function to switch between calls, you
can switch from a videophone call to a voice call by selecting “CHG to
voice call” from the Function menu.
1During a videophone calli()
CHG to voice callYES
pSelect “NO” on the
confirmation display to stop
switching and to resume
the videophone call.
pWhile switching, the voice
guidance is played back.
Switch from a Videophone Call to a Voice Call
Information
pYou can switch between a voice call and a videophone call repeatedly.
pWhen i-mode or packet communication is in progress, the communication is
disconnected and then the voice call is switched to the videophone call.
pWhen packet communication is in progress at the other end, the message to the
effect that the communication cannot be switched is displayed and the voice call
continues without switching to the videophone call.
pYou cannot switch from a voice call to a videophone call while “Multi calling” is
displayed during a call if you have signed up for Call Waiting Service.
pIt takes about five seconds to switch. Switching may take a longer time depending on
the radio wave conditions.
p
Depending on how the caller’s phone is working or on the radio wave conditions, switching
between a voice call and a videophone call may fail and the connection may be cut off.
pIf you switch between a voice call and a videophone call during a call, the call duration
and call cost are counted respectively for each call. You are not charged while
“Changing” is displayed.
pYou cannot switch between a videophone call and a voice call unless “Notify
switchable mode” on page 75 is set to “Indication ON” at the other end.
pWhen you switch from a videophone call to a voice call, Hands-free is deactivated.
52
Voice/Videophone Calls
The FOMA terminal can store the other party’s phone number and date/
time you have dialed or received. You can call back to the other party.
■Redial
Up to 30 records of dialed voice calls and videophone calls are stored in total, and the
older record of dialing to the same phone number is deleted.
■Dialed Calls
Up to 30 records of dialed voice calls and videophone calls are stored in total, and up to
30 records of 64K data and packet communications are stored in total as well. The older
records of dialing to the same phone number are also retained.
■Received Calls
Up to 30 records of incoming voice calls and videophone calls are stored in total, and up
to 30 records of 64K data and packet communications are stored in total as well. The
older records coming from the same phone number are also retained.
pWhen a call is switched between a voice call and a videophone call, the call of the type
that is dialed/received first is stored.
pWhen more than 30 calls are dialed, the older records are automatically deleted. Even
if you turn off the FOMA terminal, call records are not deleted.
pWhen you use 2in1, up to 30 records for Number A and up to 30 records for Number B
are stored respectively regardless of the mode.
■Icons for Redial, Dialed Calls, and Received Calls
<Redial> <Dialed Calls> <Received Calls>
Using Call Records
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of voice call
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of videophone call
Voice/Video messages are recorded on Record Message
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of international call
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of international videophone
call
Dialed calls of 64K data communication
/※Received calls/missed calls of 64K data communication
Dialed calls of packet communication
/※Received calls/missed calls of packet communication
Received calls of 64K data communication and packet
communication when no external device is connected
Received Chaku-moji message
Records with time difference corrected
※ The unchecked missed call icons are highlighted.
1
Press Vo.
mPhonebookDialed/recv. calls
Dialed calls
The list for call records is displayed.
pPress m( ) to display the Sent Address list.
2Select a call record.
The detailed display for the call record is displayed.
pWhen the other party is stored in the Phonebook, the
phone number, name, and icon are displayed. If the
same phone number is stored with multiple names in
the Phonebook, the name and icon that come first in the
search order (see page 84) are displayed.
1Press Co.
pYou can display the Received Call list also by
mPhonebookDialed/recv. callsReceived calls
All calls or Missed calls.
All calls . . . . . . All the records including missed calls
Missed calls . . The records of missed calls only
In Dual Mode of 2in1, the number of missed calls for
Number A and Number B is displayed respectively.
(If unchecked missed calls are found, the number of them is displayed.)
pPress m( ) to display the Received Address list.
Records for Number B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1)
Use Redial/Dialed Calls
When Using Redial
When Using Dialed Calls
For Redial
For Redial
Use Received Calls
Received Call list
53
Voice/Videophone Calls
2Select a received call record.
pThe other party’s phone number is displayed if it is
provided. If that phone number is not stored in the
Phonebook but recorded as a voice call in Redial,
“Callback” is displayed.
If this caller is stored in the Phonebook, the phone
number, name, and icon are displayed.
If the same phone number is stored with multiple names
in the Phonebook, the name and icon that come first in
search order
(see page 84) are displayed. If there is a call for packet communication, the
sender’s access point name (APN) is displayed.
When the other party’s phone number is not notified, the reason for no caller ID is
displayed.
pFor missed calls, the ring time is displayed on the right of the received date/time.
pWhen a Chaku-moji message is received, it is displayed.
Press d to make a voice call. You can make a voice call also by pressing
Oo( ) from the detailed display. Press l( ) to make a videophone call.
Detailed Received
Call display
To make a call to a displayed redial item, dialed call record, or
received call record
Information
pYou can make a voice call to the most recently dialed or received number by pressing
-d from the Stand-by display and then *No.
p“Callback” is not displayed for incoming videophone calls.
pWhen you make/receive a call with an additional number of Multi Number, the stored
name for the additional number is displayed below the phone number on the detailed
display. If you store a phone number for “Number setting” of “Multi number”, the
phone number is displayed as well.
pDialed call records of 64K data communication are not stored when you use a
Bluetooth device.
pEven if you make a voice call (or videophone call) to the phone number in a received
call record with a Chaku-moji message displayed, the received message is not sent.
pWhen a call comes in from a party who uses a dial-in phone number, a different
phone number might be displayed.
Function Menu while Redial/Dialed Calls/Received Calls is Displayed
Notify caller ID See page 56.
Prefix numbers See page 59.
Int’l dial assist See page 58.
Select image See page 75.
2in1 dial You can select a phone number to be notified to the other
party in Dual Mode of 2in1. (See page 426)
Multi number You can select a phone number to notify the other party. (See
page 423)
Chaku-moji See page 54.
Search location You can access the site of “イマドコかんたんサーチ
(imadoco kantan search)”.
YES
Add to phonebook See page 82.
pYou can store the phone number in the Phonebook also by
pressing m( ) from the detailed display. Go to
step 2 on page 82.
Mail
Compose message You can compose a mail message to send to the phone
number set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 130.
Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message to send to the phone
number set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 174.
Ring time
[Received Call list only]
You can display the ring time for missed calls. Even if you
have set “Missed calls display” of “Ring time” to “Not display”,
the missed calls which stopped ringing within the ring start
time and their ring times are displayed.
Change font size You can switch font sizes for Redial, Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, Sent Address, and Received Address. (See “Dialed/
recv. calls” on page 110)
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 30.
long press set. See page 386.
54
Voice/Videophone Calls
When making a voice call or videophone call, you can send your text
message to tell the subject during calling.
pFor details on Chaku-moji or compatible models, refer to DOCOMO website or “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide [Network Services]”.
pThe sending end is charged, but the receiving end is not charged.
A Chaku-moji message is displayed below a caller. The
Chaku-moji message is stored in Received Calls as well.
pThe Chaku-moji message is displayed only during ringing. It
is not displayed during a call.
pEven when a Chaku-moji message comes in within the ring
start time set by “Ring time”, it is received and recorded in
Received Calls.
pThe Chaku-moji message is not displayed during Lock All, Omakase Lock, or Personal
Data Lock. However, you can check the Chaku-moji message from Received Calls
after the lock is released.
Sent address
[Redial/Dialed Calls only]
See page 158.
Received address
[Received Calls only]
See page 158.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for redial items, dialed call records, or
received call records to be deletedl()YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Delete>
pIf you execute “Delete all” from the Function menu of Redial/Dialed Calls, all records
in both Redial and Dialed Calls are deleted. Even if you execute “Delete this” or
“Delete selected” of Redial, the records are not deleted from Dialed Calls and they are
retained. To delete the dialed call records, delete them from the Function menu while
“Dialed calls” is displayed.
<Chaku-moji>
Using Chaku-moji
When a message is received
You can store up to 10 Chaku-moji messages in the Message list.
1mSet./ServiceNW servicesChaku-moji
Create message
Highlight <Not stored> and press l()
Enter a message.
pTo edit a stored message, highlight it and press l().
pYou can enter up to 10 characters regardless of whether they are pictograms,
symbols, or full-pitch/half-pitch characters.
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
2i
()
Chaku-moji
Do the following operations.
3Press d or Oo().
pPress l( ) to make a videophone call.
pThe Chaku-moji message being sent is displayed while you are dialing.
Store Messages
Make a Call with a Message
Create message You can create a Chaku-moji message just before dialing.
Enter a message.
pYou can enter up to 10 characters regardless of whether they
are pictograms, symbols, or full-pitch/half-pitch characters.
pThe Chaku-moji message created using this function is not
stored in the Message list.
Select message From the Message list, you can select a stored message.
Select a message.
Sent messages From the Sent Message list, you can select a Chaku-moji
message to be sent. Up to 10 sent Chaku-moji messages only
are stored in the Sent Message list. If you send the same
Chaku-moji message, the older one also remains. When the
number of sent Chaku-moji messages exceeds 10, the
messages are deleted from the oldest one.
Select a sent message.
55
Voice/Videophone Calls
Up to 10 sent Chaku-moji messages are stored in Sent Messages, and
you can check for the other party’s phone number and the date/time the
Chaku-moji messages were sent. Older messages sent to the same
phone number are also retained.
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, up to 10 latest records for Number A and Number B can be
displayed in total.
1mSet./ServiceNW services
Chaku-mojiSent messages
. . . . Chaku-moji message successfully sent
. . . . Chaku-moji message unsuccessfully sent
. . . . . . . Chaku-moji message for Number B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1)
pWhen the transmission result is not displayed, “ ” or “ ” is not
displayed.
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the transmission result might not be
displayed correctly.
Information
pWhen a Chaku-moji message has arrived at the other party’s phone, “Transmission
completed” is displayed, and you are charged a transmission fee.
pWhen a Chaku-moji message does not arrive at the other party’s phone such as when
the other party’s phone is not a Chaku-moji compatible mobile phone or the call is not
allowed by “Message disp. settings” at the receiving end, “Transmission failed” is
displayed. In this case, you are not charged a transmission fee.
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the transmission result may not be
displayed at the sending end even if a Chaku-moji message has arrived at the other
party’s phone. In this case, you are charged a transmission fee.
pEven if you make a call sending a Chaku-moji message, the Chaku-moji message is
not displayed and you are not charged a transmission fee (the call is not recorded in
Received Calls at the receiving end) when the other party’s phone is out of the service
area, turned off, during Public mode (Drive mode), or the ring time for Record
Message Setting is set to 0 seconds. Also, the transmission result is not displayed at
the sending end.
pWhen a videophone call is not connected and automatically dialed as a voice call, the
Chaku-moji message is resent as well.
pYou cannot send/receive Chaku-moji messages overseas.
Sent Messages
2Select a sent message.
pWhen the other party’s phone number is stored in the
Phonebook, the phone number, name, and icon are
displayed.
You can set how incoming Chaku-moji messages are displayed.
1mSet./ServiceNW servicesChaku-moji
Message disp. settingsSelect an item.
Display all messages . . . Displays Chaku-moji messages from all callers.
Numbers stored in PB. . . Displays Chaku-moji messages only from the callers
stored in the Phonebook.
Calls with callerID . . . . . . Displays Chaku-moji messages only from the caller
notifying his/her phone number.
Hide all messages . . . . . . Does not display Chaku-moji messages.
Function Menu while “Sent Messages” is Displayed
Store You can store a sent Chaku-moji message in the Message list.
<Not stored>
pYou can store also by pressing l().
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Message Display Settings
Information
pWhen you set to “Numbers stored in PB”, you cannot receive Chaku-moji messages
from the callers stored in the Phonebook B in A Mode of 2in1 (and vice versa).
56
Voice/Videophone Calls
You can set how your FOMA terminal works for incoming Chaku-moji
messages for when “Setting when opened” is set to “Answer”.
1mSet./ServiceNW servicesChaku-moji
Prefer Chaku-mojiON or OFF
ON . . . . Does not answer by opening the FOMA terminal during ringing, so you
can check a Chaku-moji message.
OFF . . . Answers by opening the FOMA terminal while it is ringing.
Each time you dial out, you can set whether to notify your caller ID.
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
2i()Notify caller ID
Don’t notify or Notify caller
pTo release “Notify caller ID”, select “Cancel prefix”. Whether to notify or not
follows the setting for “Activate/Deactivate” of “Caller ID notification”.
You can select whether to notify the other party of your phone number
also by entering “186”/“184” before the other party’s phone number.
Prefer Chaku-moji
<186/184>
Setting Caller ID to Send/Not to Send for
Each Call
Set Caller ID Notification when Making a Call
Set “Notify/Not Notify” by Entering “186/184”
1186→Destination phone numberd or Oo()
pPress l( ) to make a videophone call.
1184→Destination phone numberd or Oo()
pPress l( ) to make a videophone call.
You can send touch-tone signals from your FOMA terminal to use
services such as reserving tickets, checking bank balance, etc.
You need to store a number string to be sent as a touch-tone signal in the
Pause Dial list. If you have inserted a pause (p), you can send a number
string breaking at the point where the pause is inserted.
1mSet./Service
Other settings
Pause dial
l
()
pWhen a number string is already stored, it is displayed.
pTo delete a stored pause dial, press i( ) and select “Delete”, then select
“YES”.
To notify your caller ID
Not to notify your caller ID
Information
pWhen you make a call and hear the guidance requesting your caller ID (see
page 420), follow the steps of “To notify your caller ID” to enter “186” and redial.
pYou cannot set “Caller ID notification” while “ ” is displayed.
+m-8-4
<Pause Dial>
Sending Touch-tone Signals
Store Pause Dial
57
Voice/Videophone Calls
2Enter a number string.
pEnter the pause (p) by pressing and holding a for at least one second.
pYou can use only 0 through 9, s, a to enter a number string and the
pause (p).
pYou can enter up to 128 digits.
pYou cannot enter a pause (p) at the beginning and end of a number string, or
enter it consecutively.
1mSet./Service
Other settings
Pause dial
Oo
()
Enter a phone number
d
or
Oo
()
A voice call is made. Once the line is connected, a number string stored in Pause
Dial is displayed up to the first pause (p).
pWhen the other party’s phone number is stored in the Phonebook, you can
retrieve it selecting from the Search Phonebook display by pressing Bo.
pYou can search for the phone number also from Received Calls by pressing Co
or from Redial by pressing Vo.
2Check that the line is connectedd or Oo()
A number string up to the first pause (p) is sent, and a number string up to the next
pause (p) is displayed.
A number string up to the pause (p) is sent each time you press d or
Oo().
When you have finished sending the last number, the “Talking” display appears.
pTo send multiple pieces of a number string at a time, press and hold Vo for at
least one second, and select “Send at one time”.
Send Pause Dial
Information
pDuring a call, you can send a number string also by displaying the Function menu of
the Pause Dial display.
pSome devices on the receiving end cannot receive signals.
pYou cannot send a number string with pauses during a videophone call.
WORLD CALL is the international call service available from DOCOMO
mobile phones.
When you have signed up for FOMA service, you have contracted to use
“WORLD CALL” (except those who have applied not to use it).
pYou can make calls to about 240 countries and regions.
pThe WORLD CALL charges are added to your monthly bill for FOMA service.
pThe application/monthly fee is free of charge.
pThe service is not available with some billing plans.
pContact “docomo Information Center” on the back page of this manual for inquiries
about WORLD CALL.
pWhen using international carriers other than DOCOMO, contact them.
pThe caller ID might not be notified, or might not be displayed correctly depending on
the carrier. In this case, you cannot make a call by using Received Calls.
You can make international videophone calls to users of the specified 3G mobile phone
carriers overseas and FOMA users. Press l( ) instead of d or Oo()
in the steps of “Enter a Phone Number to Make an International Call”. (See page 58)
pFor the information about connectable countries and telecommunications carriers, refer
to the DOCOMO Global Service website.
pImages sent from the other party may blur on your FOMA terminal or you may not be
able to connect, depending on the other party’s phone used for the international
videophone call.
<WORLD CALL>
Making International Calls
About international videophone calls
58
Voice/Videophone Calls
When you enter a phone number for dialing or storing it in the
Phonebook, press and hold 0 for at least one second to enter “+”. You
can use “+” to make international calls without entering an international
call access code.
pIf you set “Auto assist setting” of “Int’l dial assist” to “ON”, an international call access
code of “IDD prefix setting” is automatically entered.
10(for at least one second)
Enter numbers in order of country/area code
→area code (city code)→destination phone number
d or Oo()Dial
p
When the area code (city code) begins with “0”, enter it except for the “0”. However,
include “0” when making a call to some countries or regions such as Italy.
pPress l( ) to make an international videophone call.
pWhen you select “Dial with orig. No.”, you can make a call without adding an
international call access code.
1Enter numbers in order of 010→country/area code
→area code (city code)→destination phone number
d or Oo()
pYou can make an international call also by entering 009130→010
→country/area code→area code (city code)→destination phone number.
p
When the area code (city code) begins with “0”, enter it except for the “0”. However,
include “0” when making a call to some countries or regions such as Italy.
pPress l( ) to make an international videophone call.
Use “+” to Make an International Call
Enter a Phone Number to Make an International Call
You can make a call adding a country/area code or international call
access code to a phone number. (Except for some countries and regions,
if the phone number starts with “0”, the “0” at the beginning is
automatically deleted.)
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
2i()Int’l dial assist
Select a country/area name
Select a name of International call access code
d or Oo()
pPress l( ) to make an international videophone call.
pWhen the beginning of the phone number is “+”, the display for selecting a
country/area name is not displayed.
pWhen “Japan” is selected as a country/area name, the display for selecting a
name of International call access code is not displayed.
You can set whether to replace “+” at the beginning of a phone number
with an international call access code for when you make an international
call from Japan.
1mSet./ServiceNetwork settingInt’l dial assist
Auto assist settingON or OFF
Select a country/area name
Select a name of International call access code.
pWhen no country/area code or international call access code is stored, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to store it. Select “YES” and go to
step 2 of “Country/Area Code” on page 59 for a country/area code, and go to
step 2 of “IDD Prefix Setting” on page 59 for an international call access code.
International Dial Assist
<International Dial Assist>
Setting for International Calls
Auto Assist Setting
59
Voice/Videophone Calls
You can store up to 27 country/area codes to be added for making
international calls from overseas.
1mSet./ServiceNetwork settingInt’l dial assist
Country/Area Code
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l().
pIf you select a stored country/area name, you can check the stored contents.
2Enter a country/area name Enter a country/area code.
pYou can enter a country/area name of up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
pYou can enter a country/area code of up to 5 digits. But you cannot use #, :, and
+.
You can store up to three international call access codes to be added to
the beginning of a phone number for making an international call.
1mSet./ServiceNetwork settingInt’l dial assist
IDD prefix setting
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l().
pIf you select the stored item, you can check the stored contents.
2Enter a nameEnter an international call access code.
pYou can enter a name of up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
pYou can enter an international call access code of up to 16 digits.
Country/Area Code
IDD Prefix Setting
Function Menu while Country/Area Code /IDD Prefix
Setting is Displayed
Edit Go to step 2 of “Country/Area Code” on page 59 for Country/Area
Code, and go to step 2 of “IDD Prefix Setting” on page 59 for IDD
Prefix Setting.
pYou can edit the item also by pressing l().
Delete this YES
You can store prefix numbers such as international call access codes or
“186”/“184” and add them to the phone number for dialing. You can store
up to seven prefix numbers.
1mSet./ServiceNetwork settingPrefix setting
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l().
pIf you select a stored prefix, you can check the stored contents.
pTo delete a stored prefix, press i( ) and select “Delete this” or “Delete
all” then select “YES”. If you select “Delete all”, you need to enter your Terminal
Security Code.
2Enter a nameEnter a prefix number.
pYou can enter a name of up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
pYou can enter a prefix number of up to 16 digits. The keys for entry are limited to
0 through 9, s and a.
You can add a prefix number to the beginning of phone number when
you make a call.
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Delete this> <Delete all>
pYou cannot delete the country/area code or international call access code set by
“Auto assist setting”.
<Prefix Setting>
Storing Numbers to be Added to the
Beginning of a Phone Number
Prefix Numbers
60
Voice/Videophone Calls
2i()Prefix numbersSelect a name
d or Oo()
pPress l( ) to make a videophone call.
You can set whether to regard the numbers after “:” of a phone number
as a sub-address to access the specified phones or data terminals.
pThe sub-address is a number assigned to identify each ISDN terminal connected to an
ISDN line. It is also used for selecting contents on “V-live”.
1mSet./ServiceOther settings
Sub-address settingON or OFF
You can set an alarm that sounds until a voice call or videophone call is
reconnected after disconnected owing to bad radio wave conditions.
1mSet./ServiceTalkReconnect signal
Select an alarm.
<Sub-address Setting>
Making a Call Specifying a Sub-address
Information
pEven if you set “Sub-address setting” to “ON”, “:” at the top of phone numbers and
“:” immediately after the prefix number or “186”/“184” are not regarded as
sub-address mark-off symbols.
+m-7-7
<Reconnect Signal>
Setting Alarm for Reconnecting
Information
p
The reconnectable time differs depending on the usage status and radio wave conditions.
An estimate is about 10 seconds and the call charge is applied also for that duration.
pWhile you are disconnected, no sound is transmitted to the other party.
Both “Shikkari Talk” and “Natural Talk” make caller’s voice louder or
clearer to hear.
“Shikkari Talk” makes caller’s voice louder in accordance with
surrounding noise.
“Natural Talk” adjusts caller’s voice to have it heard in more natural tone.
1mSet./ServiceTalkSpeech Quality
Select an item
Shikkari+Natural Talk . . . . . . . . Starts both functions at the same time.
Shikkari Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starts “Shikkari Talk”.
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sets to OFF.
The noise sent to the other party is reduced according to the surrounding
noise during a call.
1mSet./ServiceTalkNoise reductionON or OFF
<Speech Quality>
Making Caller’s Voice Easier to Hear
Information
pThis function is available only to the voice heard from the earpiece.
However this might be disabled if you insert into or pull the earphone from the FOMA
terminal, or when you switch to a Bluetooth device.
pIf you have started “Shikkari+Natural Talk”, it might happen that you cannot switch to
the Bluetooth device.
+m-7-6
<Noise Reduction>
Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make
Voice Clear
61
Voice/Videophone Calls
1During a voice callm()
While Yuttari Talk is activated, “ ” is displayed.
pPress m( ) again to return to the normal speed.
When you switch to Hands-free, sound such as the other party’s voice is
audible over the speaker.
1During a call, dialing, or connectingd
When Hands-free is activated, “ ” is displayed.
pPress d again to deactivate Hands-free.
pThe sound volume during a Hands-free call follows the setting specified by
“Volume” (earpiece volume).
pYou can switch to Hands-free even during Manner Mode. Also, you will still hear
voice through the speaker even when you activate Manner Mode during a
Hands-free call.
<Yuttari Talk>
Slowing Down the Other Party’s Speaking
Speed
Information
pYuttari Talk is effective only during a current voice call. The speaking speed returns to
normal one when you end the call, switch calling parties during Multi calling, or switch
from the voice call to a videophone call.
<Hands-free>
Switching to Hands-free
Information
pWhile an earphone/microphone (option) is connected, you cannot hear voice through
the speaker even if you switch to Hands-free.
pKeep the FOMA terminal well away from your ear during a Hands-free call. Otherwise
you could affect or damage your hearing.
pTalk into the FOMA terminal within a distance of about 50 cm.
You can make or receive voice calls from a Hands-free compatible device
such as In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 (option) or a car navigation system by
connecting with your FOMA terminal.
You can connect your FOMA terminal to a Hands-free compatible device
using two ways of connections as follows:
pConnect using a cable (USB connection):
To use/charge via the In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 (option), you need to have the FOMA
In-Car Hands-Free Cable 01 (option).
pConnect using Bluetooth (wireless):
To connect to a Bluetooth communication compatible Hands-free device, you need to
register and connect it to the FOMA terminal.
※For how to operate Hands-free compatible devices, refer to the respective instruction
manuals.
<In-Car Hands-free>
Using Hands-free Compatible Devices
Information
pTo connect using a cable (USB connection), set “USB mode setting” to
“Communication mode”.
p“ ” appears while you are talking or communicating using a USB Hands-free
compatible device.
p“ ” might appear while the FOMA terminal is connected to a USB Hands-free
compatible device, and “ ” while “USB mode setting” is set to “microSD mode”,
depending on the Hands-free device connected.
pThe display or ring tone for incoming calls follows the settings of the FOMA terminal.
pWhen the sound is set to output from a Hands-free compatible device, the ring tone
sounds from that device even when Manner Mode is activated or “Ring volume” of the
FOMA terminal is set to “Silent”.
pThe receiving operation in Public mode (Drive mode) follows the setting of “Public
(Drive) mode”.
pThe receiving operation while Record Message is activated follows the setting of
“Record message setting”.
pWhen the sound is set to output from the FOMA terminal, the operation for when the
FOMA terminal is closed during a call follows the setting of “Setting when closed”.
When the sound is set to output from a Hands-free device, the communication state
does not change regardless of “Setting when closed” even if you close the FOMA
terminal.
62
Voice/Videophone Calls
1When you receive a call, the ring tone
sounds and the Call/Charging indicator
flickers.
pTo vibrate the FOMA terminal for incoming calls, set
“Phone” or “Videophone” of “Vibrator” to other than
“OFF”.
pWhile the phone is ringing for a videophone call,
“Incoming V.phone” is displayed. However, while
ringing for a voice call, this kind of indication is not
displayed.
p“ ” is displayed at the upper left of the phone
number for incoming international calls.
2
Press d or Oo( ) to answer
the call.
Receiving a Call/Videophone Call
Chaku-moji message
(See page 54)
For Answering a Voice Call
Press d
or
Oo
()
to answer
the videophone call.
You can send the substitute image to the other party.
pPress m during a videophone call to switch between
the substitute image and image through your camera
for sending to the other party.
3Press h to end the call after talking.
For Answering a Videophone Call
Information
pIf you close the FOMA terminal during a call, the FOMA terminal works in accordance
with the setting of “Setting when closed”. (See page 65)
pYou might hear beeps (in-call ring tone) during a call.
If you have signed up for any of Voice Mail Service, Call Waiting Service, or Call
Forwarding Service and set “Arrival call act” to “Answer”, the beeps (in-call ring tone)
will sound for another incoming call, enabling you to do the following operations:
Voice Mail Service
. . . . Transfer the call to the Voice Mail Service Center. (See page 416)
Call Waiting Service
. . . . Put your current call on hold and answer the incoming call. (See page 416)
Call Forwarding Service
. . . . Transfer the call to the registered forwarding destination. (See page 419)
pYou can set “Reject unknown” not to accept calls from the phone numbers that are not
stored in the Phonebook.
63
Voice/Videophone Calls
<For Voice Calls>
pWhen “Answer setting” is set to “Any key answer”, the call is put on hold if you answer
the call by pressing .< with the FOMA terminal closed. When “Setting when closed” is
set to “No tone” or “End the call”, the other party hears nothing, and when it is set to
“Hold”, the call hold tone is played back. You can start talking by opening the FOMA
terminal.
<For Videophone Calls>
pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated during a videophone call as
“Hands-free w/ V. phone” has been set to “ON”. (See page 74) However, Hands-free
is deactivated during Manner Mode regardless of “Hands-free w/ V. phone”.
pEven if Call Forwarding Service is set to “Activate”, the call is not forwarded unless the
forwarding destination is a phone compatible with the videophone conforming to
3G-324M (see page 48). Check the phone you are forwarding the call to and then
activate the service. The videophone caller does not hear the guidance to the effect
that the call is forwarded. (The message to the effect that the call is to be forwarded
appears, depending on the receiver’s FOMA terminal.)
pIf a videophone call comes in from the phone number to be rejected by Nuisance Call
Blocking Service, the video guidance for Call Rejection is played back and the call is
disconnected.
Information
When a caller’s phone number is provided
The phone number is displayed. If that phone number is not stored in the Phonebook but
recorded in Redial, “Callback” is displayed.
If the caller’s name, phone number, and image are stored in the Phonebook, the name,
phone number, and icon (or image) are displayed.
p“Callback” is not displayed for incoming videophone calls.
pIf the same phone number is stored with multiple names in the Phonebook, the name
that comes first in the search order (see page 84) is displayed.
pThe phone number but not the name is displayed during Personal Data Lock.
However, when “Phonebook available” is set to “Accept” for “Customize” of Personal
Data Lock, the name is displayed even during Personal Data Lock.
pFor a forwarded call, the forwarder’s phone number is displayed below the caller. (It
might not be displayed in the case of some forwarders.)
pWhen you receive a call to an additional number of Multi Number, the stored name for
the additional number is displayed below the caller. (With a forwarded call, you can
press c( ) to switch to display of the forwarder.)
When a caller’s phone number is not provided
The reason for no caller ID is displayed. (See page 122)
Display for incoming calls
Function Menu while a Call is Ringing
Call rejection You can disconnect the call without answering.
Call forwarding See page 419.
Voice mail See page 416.
64
Voice/Videophone Calls
When you have set “Notify switchable mode” to “Indication ON”, a caller
(the other party) can switch between a voice call and a videophone call.
When the caller (the other party) switches between a voice call and a
videophone call, the message telling that the call is being switched is
displayed, the voice guidance is played back, and then the call is
switched.
pYou (receiving end) cannot switch between a voice call and a videophone call.
You can set to start talking (Any key answer) or to stop the ring tone
(Quick silent) by pressing a key besides d, Oo, m (for videophone
call).
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callAnswer setting
Select a key operation.
Any key answer
You can start talking by pressing any key shown below:
pWhen receiving a videophone call, you can start talking by pressing d, Oo or
m.
Switched between a Call and a
Videophone Call by the Other Party
+m-5-8
<Answer Setting>
Setting Response of Key Operation for
Answering Incoming Calls
Voice call※1※2d, Oo, 0 through 9, a, s, r, m, c※3, No,
<
Quick silent
The following are the keys you can press to stop the ring tone, vibrator or voice
guidance:
When “Setting when opened” is set to “Keep ringing”, you can stop the ring tone,
vibrator or voice guidance also by opening the FOMA terminal. Even if you stop it,
the other party still hears a ringback tone.
pAfter you stop the ring tone, vibrator or voice guidance, you can start talking by
pressing d, Oo, m (for videophone calls).
OFF
You can start talking by pressing a key shown below:
※1 You can activate Any Key Answer or Quick Silent also by pressing l when
five record messages have already been recorded.
※2 During Key Lock, you can activate Any Key Answer and Quick Silent by
pressing and holding < for at least one second.
※3 While “ ” is displayed, you cannot activate Any Key Answer or Quick
Silent by pressing c.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming call
Setting when openedSelect an incoming type
Keep ringing or Answer
Keep ringing . . You can keep the incoming call ringing.
Answer . . . . . . . You can answer the incoming call. For videophone calls, the still
image set for “Substitute image” of “Select image” is sent to the
other party.
Voice call※1※20 through 9, a, s, r, m, c※3, No, <
Videophone call※20 through 9, a, s, r, c※3, No, <
Voice call d, Oo
Videophone call d, Oo, m
Information
pWhile an earphone/microphone (option) is connected, you can press the switch to
start talking, regardless of “Answer setting”. (See page 393)
<Setting when Opened>
Setting Response for when Opening
FOMA Terminal while Ringing
65
Voice/Videophone Calls
1mSet./ServiceTalkSetting when closed
Phone/VideophoneSelect an item.
No tone . . . . . . . The voice is muted. The hold tone does not sound. The setting is
completed.
Hold . . . . . . . . . . The other party hears the hold tone set for “Holding tone” of “Hold
tone setting”. For videophone calls, the still image set for
“Holding” of “Select image” is displayed.
End the call. . . . The call is finished. This is the same operation as pressing h
during a call. The setting is completed.
2Speaker ON or Speaker OFF
Speaker ON . . . . The hold tone sounds from the speaker.
Speaker OFF . . . The hold tone does not sound from the speaker.
1mSet./ServiceTalkVolumeUse Bo or </> to
adjust the earpiece volume.
Adjust the earpiece volume to Level 1 (minimum) through Level 6 (maximum).
pYou can adjust the volume by pressing Zo or </> during a voice call and
calling, Bo or </> during a videophone call, and by pressing and holding Zo
(for at least one second) while you are entering a phone number. Press Bo or
</> within two seconds to adjust it.
+m-1-8
<Setting when Closed>
Setting Response for when Closing FOMA
Terminal during a Call
<Volume>
Adjusting Earpiece Volume
Information
pThe earpiece volume adjusted during a call is retained even after the call ends.
pWhen you adjust the earpiece volume, the sound volume during a Hands-free call is
also adjusted.
You can adjust the ring volume for incoming calls and mail.
1mSet./ServiceSoundRing volume
Select an incoming type
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pThe following icons are displayed on the Stand-by display while “Ring volume” is
set to “Silent”:
: Set for “Phone” or “Videophone”.
: Set for “Mail”, “Chat mail”, “MessageR”, “MessageF”, or “i-concier”.
: Set for “Phone” or “Videophone”, and for “Mail”, “Chat mail”, “MessageR”,
“MessageF”, or “i-concier”.
pIf you have set “Step”, the ring tone is silent for about three seconds, and then the
volume steps up every three seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6.
pWhile the phone is ringing for a voice call or videophone call, you can adjust the
ring volume by pressing Bo. However, you cannot adjust the ring volume in the
following cases:
・When “Ring volume” is set to “Step”
・When “Answer setting” is set to “Quick silent” and you stop the ring tone or
voice guidance
・During Manner Mode
・When a call is cut off within the ring start time specified by “Ring time”
+m-5-0
<Ring Volume>
Adjusting Ring Volume
66
Voice/Videophone Calls
1During ringingh
The FOMA terminal makes three rapid beeps for confirmation and the call is put on
answer-hold (On Hold).
pThe confirmation tone does not sound during Manner Mode or when “Ring
volume” is “Silent”.
pThe other party hears the hold tone set for “On hold tone” of “Hold tone setting”.
For videophone calls, the still image set for “On hold” of “Select image” is
displayed.
2Press d or Oo( ) to release hold and answer
the call.
pIf “Answer setting” is set to “Any key answer”, you can release hold of voice calls
by pressing any key of 0 through 9, a, s, r, m, c, Mo, <, >,
l, or i.
pIf a videophone call is on hold, the substitute image is sent to the other party by
pressing d or Oo( ) to release hold.
1During a callOo ()
pThe other party hears the hold tone set for “Holding tone” of “Hold tone setting”.
For videophone calls, the still image set for “Holding” of “Select image” is
displayed.
pYou can put the call on hold by closing the FOMA terminal during the call if you
have set “Setting when closed” to “Hold”.
<On Hold>
Putting a Call on Hold when You cannot
Answer Immediately
Information
pThe caller is charged for the call even during answer-hold (On Hold).
pIf you press -h during answer-hold (On Hold), the call will be disconnected.
<Holding>
Putting a Call on Hold during a Call
2Press d or Oo( ) to release hold and answer
the call.
pWhen you have put a voice call on hold, you can release the hold also by
pressing r.
pIf a videophone call is on hold, the substitute image is sent to the other party by
pressing d or Oo( ) to release hold.
pIf you have set “Setting when closed” to “Hold” and put a call on hold by closing
the FOMA terminal, you can release hold and answer the call by opening the
FOMA terminal or by connecting an earphone/microphone (option).
If you connect an earphone/microphone to release hold and answer a
videophone call, the substitute image is sent to the other party.
You can set the guidance the other party hears while a call is put on hold.
1mSet./ServiceTalkHold tone setting
On hold tone or Holding toneSelect a hold tone.
Tone 1/2. . .The caller hears the pre-installed guidance in Japanese.
RHAPSODY ON A THEME OF
. . . . . . . . . . .The caller hears the melody. You can set this for “Holding tone” only.
Voice announce
. . . . . . . . . . .The caller hears the sound recorded by “Voice announce”. If it has
not been recorded, this is not displayed.
pPress l( ) to play back a hold tone. Press r to end the demo
playback.
Information
pThe caller is charged for the call even while the call is on hold.
pIf a new call comes in while the current call is put on hold, the hold (Holding) is
released.
<Hold Tone Setting>
Setting Hold Tone
67
Voice/Videophone Calls
Public mode is an auto-answer service that puts importance on manners
in public spaces. Once you activate Public mode, the guidance is played
back telling that you cannot answer the call as you are currently driving
or in a place where you should refrain from speaking on the phone (a
train, bus, movie theater, etc.). Then the call is disconnected.
pVoice Mail Service※1, Call Forwarding Service※1, and Caller ID Display Request
Service※2 work taking priority over Public mode.
※1 If a ring time is set to other than 0 seconds for incoming calls, the service works
after the Public mode guidance.
※2 When the other party notifies you of the phone number, Public mode works.
pPublic mode does not work to the calls from the party set to be rejected by Nuisance
Call Blocking Service.
1Press and hold a for at least one second.
Public mode is activated and “ ” is displayed.
When a call comes in, the guidance “The person you are calling is currently driving
or in an area where cell phone should not be used. Please try again later.” is played
back for incoming calls.
pTo deactivate Public mode, perform the same operation. Then, Public mode is
deactivated and “ ” disappears.
Using Public Mode
Using Public Mode (Drive Mode)
Information
pYou can activate/deactivate Public mode only from the Stand-by display. You can
activate/deactivate Public mode even when “ ” is displayed.
pYou can make calls as usual even during Public mode.
pIf you make an emergency call at 110/119/118, Public mode is released.
pWhen Public mode and Manner Mode are activated simultaneously, Public mode has
priority.
pIf a “User unset” call comes in while “Caller ID request” is set to “Activate”, the Caller
ID Request guidance is played back. (The Public mode guidance is not played back.)
pYou cannot use this function during data communication.
・Even when a call comes in, the ring tone does not sound. The “Missed call” icon
appears on the display and the call is stored in “Received calls”. The guidance is
played back to the caller to the effect that you are currently driving or in an area where
mobile phones should not be used. Then the call is disconnected.
However, when the power is off or “ ” is displayed, the caller hears the
out-of-service area guidance instead of the Public mode guidance.
・The ring tone does not sound and the Call/Charging indicator does not flicker even
when mail or a message comes in. In addition, the set vibrator does not work.
・The ring tone for 64K data communication, alarm tone, charging confirmation tone, the
ring tone for i-αppli call and effect tone at the start of i-Widget do not sound, and a
melody while an i-αppli program is running is not played back.
・The tickers of i-Channel are not displayed.
・See page 67 for how Public mode (Drive mode) and each network service work for
incoming calls when they are simultaneously activated.
Public mode (Power off) is an auto-answer service that puts importance
on manners in public spaces. Once you activate Public mode (Power off),
the guidance is played back telling that you cannot answer the call as
you are currently in a place where the power should be turned off
(hospital, airplane, around priority seat in a train, etc.). Then the call is
disconnected.
1Enter “:25251”d
Public mode (Power off) is set. (Nothing is changed on the Stand-by display.)
After setting Public mode (Power off) and turning off the power, the guidance “The
person you are calling is currently in an area where use is prohibited. Please try
again later.” is played back for incoming calls.
pTo release Public mode (Power off), dial “:25250”.
pTo check the setting for Public mode (Power off), dial “:25259”.
When Public mode (Drive mode) is activated
Using Public Mode (Power Off)
68
Voice/Videophone Calls
The setting stays activated until you dial “:25250” to deactivate Public mode (Power
off). You cannot deactivate the setting just by turning on the power.
The guidance is played back to the caller telling that you are currently in a place where
you should turn off the power. Then the call is disconnected.
The Public mode (Power off) guidance is played back even when you are out of the
service area or out of reach of radio waves.
・See page 67 for how Public mode (Power off) and each network service work for
incoming calls when they are simultaneously activated.
When you could not answer calls (Missed calls), the “Notification icon”
appears on the Stand-by display. You can check Received Calls by
selecting the icon.
1OoOo()
pPress h or r to return
to the former display.
pWhen multiple icons are
found, use Mo to highlight
an icon and press
Oo().
pSee page 31 for when the FOMA terminal is closed.
When Public mode (Power off) is activated
<Missed Calls>
When You could not Answer an Incoming
Call
Notification icon
By activating Record Message, you can play back an answer message to
incoming calls and record callers’ voice/video messages when you
cannot answer them even if you have not signed up for Voice Mail
Service.
You can record up to five messages for voice calls and up to two
messages for videophone calls. Each message can be recorded for up to
20 seconds.
1mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memo
Record message settingON or OFF
Select an answer message.
pPress l( ) to play back the answer message. Press r to end the
demo playback.
pWhen “Japanese 1”, “Japanese 2”, or “English” is set, a beep sounds after
playing back the answer message to the other party. If “Voice announce” is set,
the beep does not sound.
2Enter a ring time (seconds).
pEnter from “000” through “120” in three digits.
pYou cannot set the same ring time for Auto Answer Setting and Record Message
Setting. Set a different time for each.
pWhile Record Message is activated, “ ”∼“ ” (the number of recorded
messages for voice calls) and “ ”∼“ ” (the number of recorded messages
for videophone calls) are displayed.
+m-5-5
<Record Message Setting>
Recording Voice/Video Messages when
You cannot Answer a Call
Activate Record Message
69
Voice/Videophone Calls
For videophone calls, the still image set for “Preparing” of
“Select image” is displayed on the other party’s display while
playing back the answer message, and the still image set for
“Record message” of “Select image” is displayed while
recording.
pTo answer a call while the answer message is being played
back or a voice/video message is being recorded, press
d or Oo().
For videophone calls, press d or Oo( ) to send
the substitute image.
You can answer a call also by pressing the switch on an
earphone/microphone (option). For videophone calls, the
substitute image is sent to the other party.
Incoming calls when Record Message Setting is set to “ON”
Incoming Call Playing back the
answer message
Recording a voice/
video message
The ring time
elapses
Displaying an icon on the
desktop (See page 28)
Information
pRecord Message does not work when “ ” is displayed.
pWhen Public mode (Drive mode) and Record Message are simultaneously activated,
the former has priority and the latter does not work.
pThe priority order of answer messages is as follows: “Setting for Phonebook entry” →
“Group setting” → “Record message setting”.
pIf “Voice announce” selected as an answer message is deleted, the answer message
will be set to “Japanese 1”.
Even if a call comes in while Record Message is not activated, you can
record the caller’s voice/video message just for that incoming call.
1During ringingl() or >
The caller will hear the answer message and then can leave you a voice/video
message.
pDuring Key Lock, press and hold > for at least one second.
pRecord Message does not work when five messages for voice calls and two
messages for videophone calls have already been recorded.
pWhen “Side keys guard” is set to “ON”, Record Message does not work even if
you press > with the FOMA terminal closed.
pWhen Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service is set at the same time as
Record Message, the priority depends on the ring time set for Voice Mail Service or
Call Forwarding Service. To give Record Message priority, set the ring time for
Record Message Setting shorter than that for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding
Service. Even when you do this, Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service works
if there are already five record messages for voice calls and two record messages for
videophone calls.
pYou cannot receive a call from a third party while a voice/video message is being
recorded. The third party will hear the busy tone.
<Quick Record Message>
Recording a Message when You cannot
Answer an Incoming Call
Information
70
Voice/Videophone Calls
1mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memo
Play/Erase msg.
Select a record message or voice
memo.
A beep sounds and playback starts.
pOn the Record Message list, recorded items are indicated by “★”.
pIt is played back at the volume set for “Volume” (earpiece volume).
pWhen playback ends, a double-beep sounds and the message “Playing” is
cleared from the display.
pThe date and time the message/memo was recorded are displayed during
playback. When a caller’s phone number is provided, it is displayed. If the caller is
stored in the Phonebook, his/her name is also displayed.
However, the name is not displayed and the phone number only is displayed in
the following cases:
・When you play back a record message from the caller stored as secret data in
Normal Mode
・When you play back a record message for Number A in B Mode (or vice versa)
while using 2in1
pIf the caller’s phone number is displayed during playback, you can make a voice
call to that phone number by pressing d. Press l( ) to make a
videophone call.
From the Stand-by display, press > to play back the latest record message. When
record messages are not recorded, a voice memo is played back.
+m-5-5
<Play/Erase Messages>
<Play/Erase Videophone Messages>
Playing/Erasing Record Messages/a Voice
Memo/Videophone Record Messages/
Movie Memos
Play Back/Erase Record Messages/a Voice Memo
Record Message list
To play back using .>
Each time you press > during playback, messages are played back in the following
order: the next new record message → the oldest record message → a voice memo.
Press Oo() or r.
1mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memo
Play/Erase VP msg.
Select a videophone record message
or movie memo.
pOn the Videophone Record Message list, recorded
items are indicated by “★”.
pIt is played back at the same volume of the playback
sound of i-motion files.
pThe date and time the message/memo was recorded are displayed during
playback.
From the Stand-by display, press and hold > for at least one second to play back the
latest videophone record message. When videophone record messages are not
recorded, the latest movie memo is played back.
Press Oo() or r.
To skip to next message
To cancel playback midway
Play Back/Erase Videophone Record Messages/Movie Memos
Videophone Record
Message list
To play back using .>
To cancel playback midway
Function Menu of the Record Message List/Videophone
Record Message List
Play You can play back the message.
Erase this YES
pYou can erase the message/memo also by pressing
i( ) during playback.
71
Voice/Videophone Calls
You can set up for sending a Chara-den image to the other party.
pSee page 337 for Chara-den images.
You can set a Chara-den image to be sent to the other party for making a
videophone call.
1Chara-den display/Chara-den listl()
Enter the destination phone number and press l( ) to make a
videophone call.
pWhen the other party’s phone number is stored in the Phonebook, you can
retrieve it selecting from the Search Phonebook display by pressing Bo.
pYou can search for the phone number also from Received Calls by pressing Co
or from Redial by pressing Vo.
Erase rec. msg. You can erase all record messages from the Record Message
list, and can erase all videophone record messages from the
Videophone Record Message list.
YES
Erase movie memo
[Videophone Record
Message list only]
You can erase all movie memos.
YES
Erase all You can erase all record messages and a voice memo from the
Record Message list, and can erase all videophone record
messages and movie memos from the Videophone Record
Message list.
YES
Using Chara-den
Set by Call
Information
pThe priority order of substitute images to be sent to the other party is as follows:
“Setting by call” → “Setting for Phonebook entry” →“Group setting” → “Select image”.
You can set a Chara-den image for “Substitute image” of “Select image”.
1Chara-den display/Chara-den list/Chara-den Recording
displayi()Substitute image
pFrom the Chara-den list, you can set it also by pressing m().
You can perform settings for a Chara-den call. These settings are
effective only for during a videophone call.
1During a Chara-den calli()
Chara-den setupDo the following operations.
Substitute Image
Chara-den Setup
Switch Chara-den Select a Chara-den image.
pIf you switch Chara-den images, the action mode switches to
Whole Action Mode.
Action list You can display the list for actions that you can operate.
pHighlight an action and press Oo( ) to execute the
action. Press l( ) to check the details of the action.
pYou can display the Action list also by pressing a.
Change action You can switch the action mode between Whole Action Mode
( ) and Parts Action Mode ( ).
pYou can switch modes also by pressing l.
SW substitute img. You can switch a substitute image to be sent to the other party to
the still image set for “Pre-installed” of “Select image”.
SW orig. subst. img. You can switch a substitute image to be sent to the other party to
the still image set for “Original” of “Select image”.
At videophone
start-up
Whole Action
Mode
72
Voice/Videophone Calls
You can switch images to be sent to the other party from the substitute
image to the image through your camera.
See page 337 for Chara-den.
1During a videophone callm()
The image through your camera is sent to the other party.
“ ” is displayed while it is being sent.
pPress m( ) again to switch from the image through your camera to the
substitute image.
Useful Functions for Videophone Calls
Switch Images to be sent
Information
pThe priority order of substitute images to be sent to the other party is as follows:
“Setting by call” → “Setting for Phonebook entry” → “Group setting” → “Select image”.
Note that “Setting for Phonebook entry” and “Group setting” are disabled when a
videophone call comes in without notifying the caller ID.
pEven when you make a videophone call sending a substitute image, you are charged
for the digital communication.
You can switch the display locations of the received image and the sent
image.
1During a videophone call, press c().
pEach time you press
c( ), the displays
switch.
Switch Image Display Positions
+c
c
+cc
73
Voice/Videophone Calls
You can adjust the magnification for the camera image to be sent to the
other party. During a videophone call, the maximum magnification is
about 4.4 times for the camera.
1During a videophone call
Use No to adjust the magnification.
pThe former zoom setting returns when the videophone call ends.
Zoom
At videophone start-up WIDE
Function Menu during Videophone Call
CHG to voice call See page 51.
Talk on BT/Phone You can set whether to communicate through the FOMA
terminal or a Bluetooth device. (See page 399)
Send DTMF tone/
DTMF tone OFF
During a Chara-den call, you can switch to the DTMF
Transmission Mode that enables you to enter the data from
the numeric keys and to send DTMF (touch-tone signals). You
can operate it only during a Chara-den call.
p“Send DTMF tone” is displayed when the mode is not DTMF
Transmission Mode and “DTMF tone OFF” is displayed in
DTMF Transmission Mode.
pIn DTMF Transmission Mode, you cannot operate the action
of Chara-den images.
pThe DTMF tone may not be received depending on the
device of a receiving end.
V.phone settings
Visual preference See page 74.
Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the camera image to be sent
to other party to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
At videophone
start-up
0
White balance You can adjust the colors of the camera image to be sent to
the other party, to make the colors look more natural.
Select an item.
Fine weather . . . . . .For talking outdoors in fine weather
Cloudy weather . . .For talking in cloudy weather or in the
shade
Automatic . . . . . . . .For adjusting white balance
automatically
Light bulb . . . . . . . .For talking under incandescent light
Color mode set You can switch the color tone of the camera image to be sent
to the other party.
Select a color tone.
Night mode You can lengthen the camera’s exposure time to make the
camera image to be sent clear in a dark place.
ON or OFF
Focus You can set the focus during a videophone call.
Close-up or Landscape
Chara-den setup See page 71.
Backlight You can select whether to light the display constantly or light
for about 15 seconds after an operation.
Constant light or 15 seconds light
LCD AI See page 103.
Own number You can display your phone number.
Key guide You can display the guide of key operation during a
videophone call.
At videophone
start-up
Automatic
At videophone
start-up
Normal
At videophone
start-up
OFF
At videophone
start-up
Landscape
74
Voice/Videophone Calls
You can set whether to switch to Hands-free automatically for when a
videophone call starts.
1mSet./ServiceVideophone
Hands-free w/ V. phoneON or OFF
pSee page 61 for the operation while Hands-free is activated and how to switch to
Hands-free.
You can set the quality of the received image on the display.
1mSet./ServiceVideophoneVisual preference
Select an image quality.
p“Prefer motion spd” is effective when there is motion in an image. When there is
little motion, the quality becomes better if you set to “Prefer img qual”.
pIf you operate from the Function menu during a videophone call, the setting is
effective only for the current videophone call.
<Hands-free with Videophone>
Setting Hands-free Videophone
<Visual Preference>
Setting Image Quality for Videophone
Calls
Information
pIf the radio wave conditions weaken during a videophone call, the image may appear
like a mosaic.
You can set an image to be sent to the other party.
1mSet./ServiceVideophoneSelect image
Select an item.
On hold. . . . . Sets an image for during answer-hold (On hold).
Holding . . . . . Sets an image for while a call is on hold (Holding).
Substitute image
. . . . . . . . . . . . Sets a substitute image (still image or Chara-den) for when the
camera is off.
Record message
. . . . . . . . . . . . Sets an image while recording a record message.
Preparing . . . Sets an image for while playing back an answer message.
Movie memo
. . . . . . . . . . . . Sets an image for while recording a movie memo.
2Select an image.
Pre-installed. . . For sending a pre-installed still image to the other party.
Original . . . . . . . For sending an appropriate message with a still image stored
using “Set display”.
Chara-den. . . . . For sending a Chara-den image selected by “Substitute image”
from the Function menu while a Chara-den image is displayed.
(See page 71)
(Displayed only when “Substitute image” has been selected in
step 1.)
pPress l( ) to play back a demo to check the still image or Chara-den
image.
pTo change the setting of “Original” or “Chara-den”, press i( ), select
“Change setting”, then select a still image or Chara-den image. If you have
selected “Original”, select a still image after selecting a folder.
<Select Image>
Changing Image Displays for Videophone
Calls
Information
pEven if you delete the still image selected from “Original”, that still image is displayed
to the other party. To change, set by “Change setting” or “Set display”.
75
Voice/Videophone Calls
You can set an image to be sent to the other party for making a
videophone call.
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
2i()Select imageChara-den
pTo cancel the setting by call, select “Release”. The setting is completed.
3Select a Chara-den image.
If a videophone call cannot be connected, it will be automatically redialed
as a voice call.
1mSet./ServiceVideophoneVoice call auto redial
ON or OFF
Set by Call
<Voice Call Auto Redial>
Redialing as a Voice Call when a
Videophone Call cannot be Connected
Information
pThe charges for calls once switched to voice calls are billed at the rates for the voice
calls.
pVoice Call Auto Redial does not work when a videophone call cannot be connected
such as when the line is busy or the other party’s phone is in Public mode (Drive
mode). However, Voice Call Auto Redial works when you make a videophone call to a
phone that does not support the videophone function.
You can let the other party know that your FOMA terminal can switch
between a voice call and a videophone call.
This function is set to “Indication ON” at the time of contract. When
“Notify switchable mode” is set to “Indication ON”, the caller can switch
between the videophone call and voice call.
pYou cannot operate “Notify switchable mode” when you are out of the service area or
radio waves do not reach, or during a call.
1mSet./ServiceVideophone
Notify switchable modeDo the following operations.
<Notify Switchable Mode>
Setting for Switching a Voice/Videophone
Call during a Call
Indication ON YESOK
Indication OFF YESOK
Check indication You can check the setting of the function.
OK
76
Voice/Videophone Calls
1mSet./ServiceIncoming call
V.phone while packetSelect an item.
V.phone priority
. . . .Shows the Videophone Call Receiving display. When you answer the
videophone call, packet communication is disconnected.
Packet downld priority
. . . .Rejects the videophone call and continues the communication.
V.phone answerphone
. . . .Connects the incoming videophone call to the Voice Mail Service Center.
Call forwarding
. . . .Forwards the incoming videophone call to the forwarding destination.
<Videophone while Packet>
Selecting Response to Incoming
Videophone Calls during i-mode
Information
pIf you have not signed up for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service, “Packet
downld priority” works even if you set to “V.phone answerphone” or “Call forwarding”.
You can operate your FOMA terminal from an external device such as
your personal computer for making or receiving videophone calls by
connecting them using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option).
To use this function, you need to install a videophone application
program on a dedicated external device or personal computer, and
further, you need to prepare equipment (commercial item) such as an
earphone/microphone or USB compatible web camera.
pFor operating environments for a videophone application program and how to set or
operate it, refer to the instruction manual or other literature for an external device.
pYou can use “ドコモテレビ電話ソフト (DOCOMO Videophone Software)” as the
application program that supports this function.
You can download “ドコモテレビ電話ソフト (DOCOMO Videophone Software)”
from the DOCOMO website.
Using Videophone Calls by Interfacing to
External Devices
Information
pYou cannot make a videophone call from the external device during a voice call.
pWhen you have signed up for Call Waiting Service, an incoming videophone call from
an external device during a voice call is recorded as a missed call in Received Calls.
The same applies for an incoming voice call, videophone call, and 64K data
communication during a videophone call from an external device.
77
Phonebook
Phonebooks Available for FOMA Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Storing Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . . . . .<Add to Phonebook> 78
Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Setting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Group Setting> 82
Making a Call from Phonebooks . . . . . . . <Search Phonebook> 83
Editing Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Edit Phonebook> 87
Deleting Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Delete Data> 88
Checking Phonebook Storage Status . . . . <No. of Phonebook> 88
Making a Call with a Few Keys Operation . . . . . <2-touch Dial> 88
Accessing Phonebook Entries by Voice . . . . . . . . <Voice Dial> 89
78
Phonebook
You can use two types of Phonebooks, namely the Phonebook in the
FOMA terminal itself, and the Phonebook on the UIM.
Phonebooks Available for FOMA Terminal
FOMA terminal UIM
Number of entries 1,000 entries 50 entries
Contents of Phonebook
Basic item
Name (Reading) ○○
Group 19 groups 10 groups
Phone number 4 phone numbers 1 phone number
Phone number icon ○—
Mail address 3 mail addresses 1 mail address
Mail address icon ○—
Address ○—
Location information ○—
Birthday ○—
Memo ○—
Image 100 images —
Memory No. From 000 to 999 —
Setting item
Ring tone ○
—
Vibrator ○
Illumination ○
Picture ○
Chara-den 100 Chara-den
images
Mail ring tone ○
Mail vibrator ○
Mail illumination ○
Answer message ○
Restrictions
Restrict dialing
○—
Call rejection
Call acceptance
Call forwarding
Voice mail
Secret code ○—
Storage in Secret Mode or
Secret Data Only ○—
○: Can be stored. —: Cannot be stored.
pYou can set your UIM into another FOMA terminal and use the UIM Phonebook
entries.
You can store Phonebook entries in the FOMA terminal (Phone) or on the
UIM.
1Xo(for at least one second)Phone or UIM
The Edit Name display appears. Go to step 2 and enter a name.
2Do the following
operations.
pYou can press No to switch
between the “Basic item” tab and
“Settings” tab for the FOMA
terminal’s Phonebook.
Contents of Group
Name ○○
Ring tone
○—
Vibrator
Illumination
Picture
Chara-den
Mail ring tone
Mail vibrator
Mail illumination
Answer message
<Add to Phonebook>
Storing Phonebook Entries
FOMA terminal UIM
For the FOMA
terminal
For the UIM
79
Phonebook
Name You can enter the name of the person or company in kanji,
hiragana, katakana, alphabetic characters, or numerals.
Enter a name.
pFor the FOMA terminal, you can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32
half-pitch characters. You can enter pictograms and symbols as
well.
pFor the UIM, you can enter up to 10 full-pitch characters/21
half-pitch alphanumeric characters. (Half-pitch katakana
characters cannot be entered.) When the entry contains both
full-pitch and half-pitch characters, you can store up to 10
characters from the beginning regardless of full-pitch or
half-pitch characters.
Reading You can enter the reading in half-pitch katakana, alphabetic
characters, or numerals.
Edit a reading.
pFor the FOMA terminal, you can enter up to 32 half-pitch
characters. You can enter half-pitch symbols as well.
pFor the UIM, you can enter up to 12 full-pitch characters/25
half-pitch alphanumeric characters. (Half-pitch katakana
characters cannot be entered.) When the entry contains both
full-pitch and half-pitch characters, you can store up to 12
characters from the beginning regardless of full-pitch or
half-pitch characters.
pIf the displayed reading is acceptable, you do not need to edit it.
However, depending on the characters entered for names or
entering method, they are not reflected in the reading.
p
If you enter “
ゎ
(reduced size)” or “
ヮ
(reduced size)” for a name,
“
ワ
(half-pitch, regular size)” (for the FOMA terminal) and “
ワ
(regular size)” (for the UIM) are displayed in the reading field.
Group In the FOMA terminal, 19 groups are available. On the UIM, 10
groups are available.
Select a group.
pWhen the storage is completed with no group selected, the
Phonebook entry is stored in “No setting”.
Phone number
You can store up to four phone numbers per Phonebook entry in the
FOMA terminal. You can set an icon for each phone number to
categorize mobile phone numbers, office phone numbers, and so on.
You can store only one phone number per Phonebook entry on the
UIM.
Enter a phone number.
pEnter from the city code for the phone numbers.
pYou can enter up to 26 digits. However, you can enter up to 20
digits for blue UIMs.
pPress and hold a for at least one second to insert a pause (p)
into the phone number you store. However, you cannot insert
the pause (p) to the beginning of phone number or insert it
consecutively. The pause (p) inserted to the end of phone
number is not stored.
pIf you insert “:” in the middle of a phone number, you cannot
make a call. However, the phone number is recorded in Redial
or Dialed Calls.
pYou can store the phone number which includes “#” such as
that for information service as well.
Select an icon.
pIf you have stored a phone number in the FOMA terminal,
another “ <Phone number>” will appear in the
Add-to-Phonebook display. To store another phone number,
select “ <Phone number>”.
Mail address You can store up to three mail addresses per Phonebook entry in
the FOMA terminal. You can set an icon for each mail address to
categorize mobile phone addresses, home addresses, and so on.
You can store only one mail address per Phonebook entry on the
UIM.
Enter a mail address.
pThe mail address can consist of up to 50 half-pitch alphabets,
numerals or symbol characters.
pWhen the mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”,
store the phone number only.
pFor the FOMA terminal, you can set a secret code as well. (See
page 87)
Select an icon.
p
If you have stored a mail address in the FOMA terminal, another
“ <Mail address>” will appear in the Add-to-Phonebook display.
To store another mail address, select “ <Mail address>”.
80
Phonebook
Address Enter a ZIP codeEnter a postal address.
pYou can enter up to 7 digits for the zip code.
pYou can enter up to 50 full-pitch/100 half-pitch characters for the
postal address. Further, you can enter pictograms as well.
pYou cannot enter “〒” or “-” (hyphen) in the zip code.
Location
information
Select an item.
By position loc.
. . .Measures the current location (see page 306) and store the
location information. After checking the location information,
press Oo().
From loc. history
. . .Select a piece of location information from Location History
(see page 310) and store it.
Attach from image
. . .Stores the location information from an image. Select a
folder, then the image.
From own number
. . .Stores the location information from “Own number”. Enter
your Terminal Security Code and press Oo().
pTo delete the stored location information, select “Delete location
info”.
Birthday Enter a birthday.
pYou can enter the birthday from January 1, 1800 through
December 31, 2099.
pYou can check the birthday from Schedule. (See page 380)
Memo Enter a memo.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.
Further, you can enter pictograms as well.
Image The stored still image is displayed when you call up the
Phonebook entry.
Select an item.
Select image . . . You can store a still image in Data Box.
Shoot image . . . You can store the shot still image.
Perform step 2 through step 3 on page 217.
pTo release the stored still image, select “Release image”.
pThe size of a still image you can store is Stand-by (480 x 854) or
smaller and up to 300 Kbytes in JPEG format or GIF format.
pIf you store a still image larger than 72 x 54 dots, it is displayed
shrunk on the detailed Phonebook display.
pIf you store a still image larger than 240 x 180 dots, it is
displayed shrunk on the Call Receiving display.
pWhen “Disp. PH-book image” is set to “ON”, the stored still
image is displayed for an incoming call. However, when another
image is stored for “Picture”, that image is preferentially
displayed for the incoming call.
Memory No. Enter a memory number.
pEnter a three-digit number of “000” through “999”.
pThe lowest empty memory number “010” through “999” is
entered in advance.
If “010” through “999” are all occupied, the lowest empty
memory number from “000” through “009” is entered.
Ring tone You can set a ring tone for when a voice call or videophone call
comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select ring tone
Go to step 2 on page 92.
pTo release the stored ring tone, select “Release ring tone”.
Vibrator You can set a vibration pattern for when a voice call or
videophone call comes in from the person stored in the
Phonebook.
Select vibratorSelect a vibration pattern.
pTo release the stored vibrator, select “Release vibrator”.
81
Phonebook
Illumination You can set an illumination pattern for when a voice call or
videophone call comes in from the person stored in the
Phonebook.
Select illuminationSelect an item.
pTo release the stored illumination, select “Release illumination”.
Picture You can set an image to be displayed for when a call comes in
from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select pictureSelect a type of imageSelect a folder
Select an image.
pTo release the stored image, select “Release picture”.
Chara-den The stored Chara-den image is displayed as a substitute image
for videophone calls with the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select Chara-denSelect a Chara-den image.
pTo release the stored Chara-den image, select “Release
Chara-den”.
Mail ring tone You can set a ring tone for when a mail message comes in from
the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select ring tone
Go to step 2 on page 92.
pTo release the stored mail ring tone, select “Release ring tone”.
Mail vibrator You can set a vibration pattern for when a mail message comes
in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select vibratorSelect a vibration pattern.
pTo release the stored mail vibrator, select “Release vibrator”.
Mail illumination You can set an illumination pattern for when a mail message
comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select illuminationSelect an item.
pTo release the stored mail illumination, select “Release
illumination”.
3Press l().
pIf you have not entered any name, “ ” is not displayed and you cannot
store the entry.
When the low battery alarm sounds
The Phonebook entry you are editing is saved automatically. The confirmation display
appears asking whether to resume editing when you continue editing after charging the
battery or when you operate step 1 on page 78 and select the storage location for the
interrupted Phonebook entry after changing to a charged battery.
Recall. . . . You can resume editing the Phonebook entry.
New . . . . . You can edit a new Phonebook entry. In this case, the interrupted data is
retained. If you execute “Add to phonebook” after storing the new Phonebook
entry, the confirmation display appears again.
pOnly the most recently interrupted entry is retained.
pIf you resume editing the data but then cancel editing without storing it, that data will be
abandoned. Once you recall the data, be sure to store it.
If you receive a call or mail
You can respond it leaving the edited data as it is, thanks to the Multitask function.
To return to the Phonebook Edit display, press and hold x for at least one second to
switch the menu. You can return to the Phonebook Edit display also by ending the call or
mail function.
Answer
message
You can set an answer message for Record Message by
Phonebook entry.
Select answer messageSelect an answer message.
pTo release the stored answer message, select “Release answer
message”.
Phonebook entries while editing
82
Phonebook
You can store the displayed or selected phone number, mail address,
and still image in the FOMA terminal’s or UIM’s Phonebook.
1Call up/Select an item to be storedi()
Add to phonebook
pWhen you operate from the detailed mail display, select “Store” from the Function
menu and then select “Add to phonebook”.
pTo store the address of the sender (or of another recipient of simultaneous mail)
of the received mail or the destination address of the sent mail into the
Phonebook, select “Store” from the Function menu and then select “Store
address”. If the addresses of the sender and another recipient of simultaneous
mail are found or the multiple destination addresses are found, select a mail
address or phone number to be stored.
pTo store a still image in the Phonebook, select “Set display” from the Function
menu and then select “Phonebook”.
pWhen “Add to phonebook” is displayed on the Scanned Code Result display for
Bar Code Reader, select “Add to phonebook”; then other information in the
scanned code besides the phone number or mail address is entered into each
field.
Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail
Address in Phonebook
Operation Storable items
While a phone number is entered Phone number
While a redial item, dialed call record, or received call
record is displayed Phone number
While Sent Address or Received Address is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While a site or screen memo is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While the text of Message R/F or mail is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While the data scanned by Bar Code Reader is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While a ToruCa file is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While your current location is displayed Location information
While the location history is displayed Location information/
Phone number/Mail address
While a registered LCS client is displayed Name/Phone number
While the Still Image list or a still image is displayed Still image
2Phone or UIMSelect a storing method.
New . . . Go to step 2 on page 78.
Add . . . Adds data to the existing Phonebook entry. When storing data on the
UIM, “Overwrite” is displayed.
3Select a search methodSearch the Phonebook
Select a Phonebook entry to be storedOo()
The phone number or mail address is entered automatically.
pSee step 2 on page 78 to edit other items in the Phonebook entry.
pWhen you store into the FOMA terminal’s Phonebook, you can remain the
original entry and store a new entry into a different location by changing the
memory number.
4l()YES
pIf you store the entry in the UIM Phonebook, select “Overwrite” to overwrite the
original entry, or select “Add” to store it as a new entry.
You can utilize the Phonebook by sorting the entries by group such as
“Company” or “Friend”, or by your interest such as “Baseball” or
“Ceramic art”. You can set a ring tone, vibration pattern, or illumination
by group.
1mPhonebookGroup setting
pThe groups on the UIM are indicated by “ ”.
pTo reset the group names and respective settings by group, which have already
been stored, press i( ), select “Reset group”, and then select “YES”.
Information
pThe Phonebook entry does not store the information of “Notify caller ID” included in
Redial/Dialed Calls. To set Caller ID Notification, add “186”/“184” to the phone
number and store it.
pCharacters that cannot be stored may be replaced by spaces or deleted, and then
stored.
pYou may not be able to store the information from some sites into the Phonebook.
<Group Setting>
Setting Groups
83
Phonebook
2Highlight a group and press l()
Select an item to be setSet the contents.
pWhen you select “ Group name”, enter a group name. You can store up to 10
full-pitch/21 half-pitch characters. However, you can store only up to 10
characters (regardless of full-pitch or half-pitch characters) when you enter both
full-pitch and half-pitch characters for a UIM group name.
pSee step 2 on page 78 for the operations of the other items. However, you cannot
set for groups on the UIM.
pSelect a stored group, or press i( ) and select “Check setting” to check
its settings. However, you cannot check the settings of the groups on the UIM.
3Press l().
You can retrieve stored Phonebook entries by eight search methods.
1XoDo the following operations.
pThe display for the same search method as the
previous one appears once you have carried out a
search. Press r to show the Search Phonebook
display.
pYou can show the Search Phonebook display also by
mPhonebookSearch phonebook.
<Search Phonebook>
Making a Call from Phonebooks
Search Phonebook
display
All? You can show all Phonebook entries.
p
The tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 84)
Reading? You can enter the reading of the other party’s name from the first
character and search. You do not need to enter the full reading.
Enter a part of the readingBo
p
The tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 84)
2Select an entryd or Oo()
pWhen the entry contains multiple phone numbers, or when you searched by “Mail
address?”, press Mo from the detailed display to select a phone number.
pYou can make a videophone call by pressing l().
Group? You can show Phonebook entries stored in a specified group.
Select a group.
p
The tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 84)
pIf you press i( ) on the Group list, the Function menu
for “Group setting” is displayed.
Memory No.?
[FOMA terminal only]
You can search for the entry by the memory number assigned
when it was stored in the Phonebook.
Enter the memory number.
pEnter from “000” through “999” in three digits.
p
The tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 84)
pFrom the Stand-by display, you can press d and then press
Bo to display the Memory No. Dial display. From there you can
make a voice call by entering the memory number of the phone
number.
Name? You can enter the other party’s name from the first character and
search. You do not need to enter the full name.
Enter a part of the nameBo
Phone number? You can enter a part of the other party’s phone number and
search. You can search for the entry even from the middle of
phone number.
Enter a part of the phone numberBo
pYou can display the Phonebook list also by entering a part of
the phone number from the Stand-by display or the “Talking”
display, and pressing Bo.
Mail address?
You can enter a part of the other party’s mail address and search.
You can search for the entry even from the middle of mail address.
Enter a part of the mail addressBo
2-touch dial?
[FOMA terminal only]
You can show the list of Phonebook entries in memory number
000 through 009.
pPhonebook entries not yet stored or being set with secret are
displayed as ＜−−−＞.
84
Phonebook
The Phonebook entries are searched in the order of readings you entered for storing, as
follows:
“Space at the beginning of the reading”
→
“Japanese syllabary (
ア、イ、ウ、エ、オ、... ン
)”
→
“Alphabet (A, a, B, b, ...Z, z)”
→
“Numerals (0 through 9)”
→
“Symbols”
→
“No reading”.
For “All?” and “Reading?”, searching is done in the following order:
“Japanese syllabary (
ア、イ、ウ、エ、オ、... ン
)”
→
“Alphabet (A, a, B, b, ...Z, z)”
→
“Space
at the beginning of the reading”
→
“Numerals (0 through 9)”
→
“Symbols”
→
“No reading”.
※The Memory No. Search searches in the order of the memory numbers.
When you search from “All?”, “Reading?”, “Group?”, or
“Memory No.?”, the tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook
list. With “All?” and “Reading?”, the entries are sorted by every
column of reading, with “Memory No.?” by every 100 of the
memory number, and with “Group?” by every group.
Press No to display the Phonebook entries in the tab at left or
right. However, when there are 12 or more Phonebook entries
in a tab, pressing m(), c(), or </> brings up the previous or next
page.
pAfter you search by “Reading?”, you can move the cursor to the “ア” through “ワ”, “英”,
and “他” tab by pressing each numeric key from the list. When you successively press
the same numeric key, you can move the cursor within the same column.
<Example>Press 5 to display the “ナ” tab. Each time you press 5, the cursor
moves to the top of “ニ” “ヌ” and so on.
pAfter you search by “Group?”, you can move the cursor to the top of each column in the
tab by pressing each numeric key from the list. When you successively press the same
numeric key, you can move the cursor within the same column.
<Example>Press 5 to move the cursor to the top of the “ナ” column. Each time you
press 5, the cursor moves to the top of “ニ” “ヌ” and so on.
Information
pIn a search method other than “Group?” and “2-touch dial?”, enter nothing and press
*Bo; then you can search all through the Phonebook.
p
When no Phonebook entry is found that matches the condition you entered by
“Reading?” or “Memory No.?”, the entry that is the closest to the condition is displayed.
Search order
About Phonebook List
Phonebook list
pAfter you search by “Memory No.?”, you can move the cursor to the “000~” to “900~”
tab by pressing each numeric key from the list.
<Example>Press 5 to move the cursor to the “500~” tab.
pYou can make a voice call to the phone number stored for the name highlighted on the
Phonebook list, by pressing d. Also, press l( ) to make a videophone call.
When multiple phone numbers are stored for the name, the one stored first will be
dialed.
pFor the Phonebook entry stored on the UIM, “ ” is displayed.
pFor the Phonebook entry stored with i-concier information, “ ” is displayed.
p“ ” appears for the Phonebook entries set to A by Phonebook 2in1 Setting, “ ”
appears for the Phonebook entries set to B, and “ ” appears for the Phonebook
entries set to common data. (Only in Dual Mode)
pWhen you refer to the Phonebook from a GPS compatible i-αppli program, “ ”
appears for the Phonebook entries which contain the location information.
Use No to highlight a tab, then the detailed contents are displayed.
pFor the Phonebook entry stored
on the UIM, “ ” is displayed on
the memory number field.
pWhen Notify Caller ID is set to
“Notify caller”, “ ” appears,
and when set to “Don’t notify”,
“ ” appears.
pUnder the still image, “ ”
appears for the Phonebook
entries set to A by Phonebook
2in1 Setting, “ ” appears for
the Phonebook entries set to B,
and “ ” appears for the
Phonebook entries set to
common data. (Only in Dual
Mode)
pWhen a Phonebook entry contains the setting for Multi Number or Chaku-moji, the set
contents are displayed in the Item list/Phone Number display.
Item list
The first stored phone number, mail address, postal address, birthday, and memo are
displayed. When i-concier information is stored, a postal address, URL, and memo
obtained from i-concier are displayed instead of a postal address, birthday, and memo.
Phone number
About the detailed display
Detailed Phonebook
display (Item list)
Group
Reading
Name
Memory No.
Still image
Notify caller ID
85
Phonebook
Mail address
pWhen you select the item, you can compose an i-mode mail message with that mail
address entered into the address field.
Personal information
pWhen you select a postal address, the GPS compatible i-αppli program set by “Select
map” of “GPS settings” starts to show the map. When you highlight a postal address
and press l( ), the full display appears.
pWhen you select the location information, the Function menu of the location information
appears. (See page 307)
pWhen you select a memo or still image, the full display appears.
i-concier information
pWhen you select a postal address, the GPS compatible i-αppli program set by “Select
map” of “GPS settings” starts to show the map. When you highlight a postal address
and press l( ), the full display appears.
pYou can display a site or Internet website when you select a URL, select “i-mode
Browser” or “Full Browser”, and then select “YES”. When you highlight a URL and
press l( ), the full display appears.
pWhen you select a memo, the full display appears.
pIf you have not subscribed to i-concier, the i-concier information tab does not appear.
Settings
pWhen you select each item, a demo is played back.
Press Oo() or r to end the demo.
Function Menu of the Phonebook List
New You can store a new Phonebook entry.
Go to step 1 on page 78.
Attach to mail You can send an i-mode mail message with the
Phonebook entry attached.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
Search location You can access the site of “イマドコかんたんサーチ
(imadoco kantan search)”.
YES
Move/copy
Copy to microSD See page 346.
Connect to Center See page 124.
Sort You can change the display order.
Select a type of order.
pYou can sort Phonebook entries in reverse order by
selecting “Ascending” or “Descending”.
pYou cannot sort on the Phonebook list with tabs
displayed.
Change font size You can switch font sizes for the Phonebook and on the
displays within “Phonebook settings”, etc.
(See “Phonebook” on page 109)
Send Ir/ trans/BT
Send Ir data
Send phonebook See page 360.
Send all phonebook See page 361.
transmission
Send phonebook See page 362.
Send all phonebook See page 363.
Send to Bluetooth
Send phonebook You can send the Phonebook entry using Bluetooth
communication.
Select a Bluetooth device to be sentYES
pWhen no Bluetooth devices are registered, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to search.
pSee page 397 for registering and connecting Bluetooth
devices.
Send all phonebook You can send all Phonebook entries using Bluetooth
communication.
Select a Bluetooth device to be sent
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
pWhen “Session number setting” of “Bluetooth settings” is
set to “ON”, enter your Terminal Security Code and then
a session number.
pWhen no Bluetooth devices are registered, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to search.
pSee page 397 for registering and connecting Bluetooth
devices.
86
Phonebook
Delete data See page 88.
Set secret/Release secret You can activate/deactivate Secret for the Phonebook
entry.
pIf you select “Set secret” in ordinary mode (not in “Secret
mode” or “Secret data only”), enter your Terminal
Security Code.
Information
<Send to Bluetooth>
pYou cannot send Phonebook entries from the UIM.
pSee page 395 for the Bluetooth function.
Function Menu of the Detailed Phonebook Display
Notify caller ID See page 56.
Prefix numbers See page 59.
Int’l dial assist See page 58.
Select image See page 75.
2in1 dial You can select a phone number to notify the other party in
Dual Mode of 2in1. (See page 426)
Multi number You can select a phone number to be notified to the other
party. (See page 423)
Chaku-moji See page 54.
Search location See page 85.
Edit data
Edit phonebook Go to step 1 on page 87.
Sort phone number/
Sort mail address
Select a phone number or mail address
Use Bo to change the orderOo()
pFrom the detailed display, press No to highlight an
item to be sorted. The items you can select from the
Function menu differ depending on the highlighted
item.
pTo change the order in succession, repeat the above
steps.
l()
Move/copy
Copy to UIM See page 392.
Copy to microSD See page 346.
Copy to phone See page 392.
Connect to Center See page 124.
Copy item
Copy name You can copy the name of Phonebook entry.
Copy phone number/
Copy mail add./
Copy address/
Copy location info/
Copy birthday/
Copy memo/Copy URL
You can copy each item of Phonebook entry.
pFrom the detailed display, press Mo to highlight an item
to be copied. The items can be selected in the Function
menu differ depending on the highlighted item.
Mail
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to send to the
mail address.
Go to step 3 on page 130.
Attach to mail You can send an i-mode mail message with the
Phonebook entry attached.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message to send to the phone
number set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 174.
Change font size You can switch the font size for the Phonebook and on the
displays within “Phonebook settings”, etc.
(See “Phonebook” on page 109)
Restrictions See page 121.
87
Phonebook
Secret code You need to add the recipient’s secret code when sending
i-mode mail to anyone who has registered a secret code.
Once you set the secret code for the mail address in the
Phonebook entry, it will be added automatically whenever
you send mail to that address.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSet code
pFrom the detailed display, press Mo to highlight a phone
number or mail address to be set with a secret code.
pTo check the secret code, select “Check code”.
pTo release the secret code, select “Release code”.
Enter a four-digit secret codeYES
pIn the Function menu, “Secret code” is indicated by “★”,
after it is set.
pEnter a four-digit number for secret code. You cannot set
“0000”.
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 30.
long press set. See page 386.
Send Ir/ trans/BT
Send Ir data
Send phonebook See page 360.
Send all phonebook See page 361.
transmission
Send phonebook See page 362.
Send all phonebook See page 363.
Send to Bluetooth
Send phonebook See page 85.
Send all phonebook See page 85.
1Detailed Phonebook displaym()
Select an item to be editedEdit the contents.
pSee step 2 on page 78 for how to edit the Phonebook entry.
pEven if you edit the Phonebook entry in the FOMA terminal (Phone), you can
remain the original contents in the original location and store the edited contents
in the different location by changing the memory number.
2l()YES
pIf you edited the UIM Phonebook entry, select “Overwrite” to overwrite the original
contents, or “Add” to save the contents as a new entry.
Delete data See page 88.
Set secret/Release secret See page 86.
Information
<Secret code>
pYou cannot set secret codes for UIM Phonebook entries.
pThe secret code can be added only when the recipient’s mail address is in the form of
“phone number” or “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”. It cannot be added to any other
form of mail address.
pIf you have stored the mail address as “phone number＋secret code@docomo.ne.jp”,
you cannot reply to mail messages from the party of that mail address. After changing
the mail address to “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, set the secret code.
<Edit Phonebook>
Editing Phonebook Entries
88
Phonebook
1Detailed Phonebook displayi()Delete data
Do the following operations.
1Phonebook listi()Delete data
Do the following operations.
<Delete Data>
Deleting Phonebook Entries
Delete from the Detailed Phonebook Display
Phone number/
This item
YES
pHighlight an item to be deleted by pressing Mo from the
detailed display.
pYou cannot delete information obtained by i-concier.
This phonebook YES
Delete from the Phonebook List
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for Phonebook entries to be deleted
l()YES
pYou can check or uncheck entries all at once by pressing
i( ) and selecting “Select all in tab/Select all/Release
all in tab/Release all”.
pPerform the same operation as that of “Delete all” when you
have selected all Phonebook entries including secret ones.
Delete all in tab You can delete all the Phonebook entries for the displayed tab.
YES
Delete all You can delete all Phonebook entries including secret entries.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES
1mPhonebookNo. of phonebook
Phone
Phonebook . . .The number of Phonebook entries stored in the FOMA terminal
(Phone)
Secret . . . . . . .The number of Phonebook entries stored as secret data
(Displayed in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only)
Image. . . . . . . .The number of Phonebook entries in which still images are stored
Chara-den . . . .The number of Phonebook entries in which Chara-den images are
stored
Voice dial. . . . .The number of Phonebook entries set as voice dial entries
Rest . . . . . . . . . : The number of phone numbers that can still be stored
: The number of mail addresses that can still be stored
UIM
Phonebook . . .The number of Phonebook entries stored on the UIM
When the entry is stored in memory number “000” through “009” in the
FOMA terminal’s Phonebook, you can dial the phone number just by
pressing the lowest one digit of memory number and d.
1Numeric key (0 to 9)d or Oo()
pYou can make a videophone call by pressing l().
<No. of Phonebook>
Checking Phonebook Storage Status
Information
pWhen you use 2in1, the number of Phonebook entries for the mode in use is
displayed. (See page 427)
<2-touch Dial>
Making a Call with a Few Keys Operation
Information
pWhen the Phonebook entry contains multiple phone numbers, the first phone number
will be dialed.
pWhen you set “Restrict dialing” to a Phonebook entry of memory number 000 through
009, set it to the first phone number in the Phonebook entry.
89
Phonebook
Just vocalize the other party’s voice dial name and then the Phonebook
entry is accessed for making a call.
You can store up to 100 voice dial entries selecting from among the
Phonebook entries stored in the FOMA terminal (Phone).
1mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Voice dial setting<New>
pYou can edit the stored voice dial name by pressing l( ). Go to step 3.
pTo delete the stored voice dial entry, press i( ) and select “Delete” or
“Delete all” and then select “YES”.
2Search the PhonebookSelect a Phonebook entry.
The display for search method you used last time appears.
pThe “★” mark is added to the Phonebook entry stored in the Voice Dial list.
3Enter a voice dial name.
pYou can enter up to 22 half-pitch katakana characters.
pThe reading (katakana only) of the Phonebook entry is displayed as the voice dial
name. Correct the name to the easy-to-identify words.
pWhen you store a Phonebook entry of memory number from 000 through 009 as
secret data, make a call to that entry in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only.
<Voice Dial>
Accessing Phonebook Entries by Voice
+m-2-6
Voice Dial Setting
Information
Information
pThe voice dial name set by this function is effective only for calling up a voice dial
entry. For the voice guidance function, the reading (name) stored in the Phonebook is
read aloud.
pWhen multiple similar voice dial names are stored or when the voice dial name is
short, the recognition rate lowers and a wrong voice dial entry (Phonebook entry)
might be accessed. In this case, rename the existing voice dial name and store it.
pYou cannot store “ボイスセッテイ (Boisusettei)” as a voice dial name.
By your voice, you can access the Phonebook entry you set in the Voice
Dial list. When “Read aloud settings” is set to “ON” and “Voice dial” is
checked, the operation is guided by the voice guidance.
1d(for at least one second)
As soon as the voice recognition start tone sounds,
vocalize the voice dial name.
Start vocalizing within four seconds after the voice recognition start tone sounds.
Once the voice is recognized as a voice dial entry, the detected result is displayed.
pYou cannot change the volume of the voice recognition start tone. The voice
recognition start tone does not sound during Manner Mode.
pIf you say the word “ボイス設定 (Boisusettei)”, the display of “Voice settings”
appears. (See page 90)
pWhen “Auto voice dial” is set to “ON”, the display for Auto Voice Dial appears
after the voice is recognized as a voice dial entry. Then about two seconds later,
the FOMA terminal automatically dials out.
2
Highlight a detected result and press
d
or
Oo
().
The first phone number in the selected Phonebook entry is dialed.
pYou can show the detailed Phonebook display by pressing l().
Highlight a phone number and press d or Oo( ) to make a voice call.
Also, you can make a videophone call by pressing l().
Dial from Phonebook by Voice
Information
pWhen you vocalize, keep your mouth away from the microphone about 10 cm. If your
voice is too distant, it may be difficult to recognize your voice.
pPronounce the voice dial name as clearly as possible.
pBefore and after voice production, avoid making the sounds unrelated to the voice dial
name such as clearing your throat, clicking your tongue, noisy breathing or other
noise.
pVocalize in quiet, noise-free locations.
pWhile vocalizing, do not put your fingers over the microphone, or press or brush the
keys.
90
Phonebook
You need to set “Voice headset dial” to “ON” and open the FOMA
terminal in advance.
1Press and hold the switch of the earphone/microphone
(option) for at least one second.
2Perform the operations of “Dial from Phonebook by
Voice” on page 89.
pYou can make a call also by pressing the switch of the earphone/microphone
instead of pressing d or Oo.
You can access a voice dial entry with the FOMA terminal closed as well.
You need to set “Voice headset dial” to “ON” in advance, and connect
with the Bluetooth device using the Headset service or Hands-free
service.
pFor using the Hands-free service, the Bluetooth device needs to support a voice
recognition function.
1Press the switch of the Bluetooth device.
pYou can access a voice dial entry also by pressing and holding < for at least one
second when the FOMA terminal is closed.
2Access a voice dial entry following the voice guidance.
Once the voice is recognized as a voice dial entry, the detected result is displayed.
pThe FOMA terminal automatically dials out about two seconds after the voice
guidance informing of dialing finishes.
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsVoice settings
Do the following operations.
To access a voice dial entry using an earphone/microphone
To access a voice dial entry using a Bluetooth device
Voice Settings
Auto voice dial You can automatically make a call to the phone number
accessed by voice.
ON or OFF
Voice headset dial You can access the voice dial entries by using an earphone/
microphone (option) or Wireless Earphone Set 02 (option).
ON or OFF
Read aloud settings See page 374.
Read aloud volume See page 375.
Read aloud speed See page 375.
Read aloud output See page 375.
Read aloud valid
set.
See page 375.
91
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Sound Settings
Changing Ring Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Select Ring Tone> 92
Setting Sound Effects of Ring Tone or Melody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Melody Effect> 93
Informing You of an Incoming Call by Vibration . . .<Vibrator> 94
Using Recorded Sound as Ring Tone . . . <Voice Announce> 94
Changing Ringback Tone . . . . . . . . . . . <Melody Call Setting> 94
Setting Keypad Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Keypad Sound> 95
Setting Charging-start/end Tones. . . . . . . . . <Charge Sound> 95
Sounding Alarm when a Line is Nearly Disconnecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Quality Alarm> 95
Setting Ring Time for Mail and Messages R/F
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Mail/Message Ring Time> 95
Sounding Ring Tone from Earphone Only
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Headset Usage Setting> 96
Muting Tones from FOMA Terminal . . . . . . . . <Manner Mode> 96
Selecting Manner Mode Type . . . . . . . . . .<Manner Mode Set> 97
Screen/Light Settings
Changing Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Display Setting> 99
Displaying an Image Stored in Phonebook while Ringing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Display Phonebook Image> 101
Setting Displays for Private Window . . . . . . <Private Window> 102
Displaying Arrival Information by Opening FOMA Terminal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Received Mail/Call at Open> 102
Setting Lights for Display and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . <Backlight> 102
Adjusting Quality of Display Automatically . . . . . . . . .<LCD AI> 103
Making Display Hard to See from People Around
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <View Blind> 104
Setting Quality of Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Image Quality> 104
Setting Color Combination for Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Color Theme Setting> 104
Setting Displays for Main Menu. . . . . . . . . <Menu Icon Setting> 104
Using Kisekae Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Kisekae Tool> 105
Setting Machi-chara Image . . . . . . . . . . . .<Set to Machi-chara> 106
Setting Color and Others of Call/Charging Indicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Illumination> 106
Checking Missed Calls and New Mail by Tone and Call/Charging
Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Info Notice Setting> 108
Changing Character Font. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Font> 108
Changing Font Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Font Size Setting> 109
Setting Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
92
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set a ring tone for each incoming type.
If you select an i-motion file, the i-motion file is played back with sound
for incoming calls/messages. (Chaku-motion)
pThe ring tone is the PCM sound source, chord of 128 tones, and ADPCM compliant.
pSee “Add to Phonebook” on page 78 for setting a ring tone by Phonebook entry, and
see “Group Setting” on page 82 for setting it by group.
■Ring Tone List (pre-installed)
+m-1-3
<Select Ring Tone>
Changing Ring Tone
Display Title Name of Lyricist/Composer
Pattern 1 ーー
Pattern 2 ーー
Pattern 3 ーー
Pattern 4 ーー
Pattern 5 ーー
Rush & Chase Rush & Chase ー
Seaside Resort Seaside Resort ー
PARADE OF THE
WOODEN※
PARADE OF THE
WOODEN SOLDIERS
Composer:
JESSEL LEON
SUMMERTIME SUMMERTIME Composer:
GERSHWIN GEORGE
TRITSCH TRATSCH
POLK※
TRITSCH TRATSCH
POLKA OP 214
Composer:
STRAUSS JUN JOHANN
SOMEDAY MY PRINCE
WI
SOMEDAY MY PRINCE
WILL COME
Composer:
CHURCHILL FRANK E
SONATINE※SONATINE
Composer:
WOLFGANG AMADEUS
MOZART
PEER GYNT SUITE NR
1
PEER GYNT SUITE NR
1 OP 46/
MORGENSTEMNING
Composer:
GRIEG EDVARD HAGERUP
Old Type Phone ーー
Steelpan ーー
Minimal※ーー
Documentary※ーー
Magical Stick※ーー
Smart Beep ーー
※3D sound is supported. See page 93 for 3D sound.
(Note) The names of lyricists and composers are described conforming to the JASRAC
website.
Whole part of long titles may not be displayed due to restriction of the display
size.
■i-motion (pre-installed)
1mSet./ServiceSoundSelect ring tone
Select an incoming type.
pSelect an item and press l( ) to check the contents actually played
back or displayed.
2Select ring toneSelect a type of ring tone.
Melody . . . . . . . . . . . Sets a melody as a ring tone.
MUSIC. . . . . . . . . . . . Sets a Chaku-uta Full® music file as a ring tone.
imotion . . . . . . . . . Sets an i-motion file as a ring tone. (Chaku-motion/
Chaku-uta®)
Voice announce . . . Sets the sound recorded by “Voice announce” as a ring
tone. The setting is completed.
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sets a ring tone off. The setting is completed.
3Select a folderSelect a ring tone.
pIf you select “MUSIC” in step 2, select “Fullsong ring tone” or “Point ring tone”.
(See page 264)
pSee page 193 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
Ukulele ーー
Waterdrop ーー
Display Title Name of Lyricist/Composer
Display Title Name of Lyricist/Composer
美ら海 クマノミと仲間
美ら海 クマノミと仲間
たち (CHURAUMI
KUMANOMITONAKAMA
TACHI)
ー
93
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Information
pYou can set the Call Receiving display by selecting “Phone” or “Videophone”, and
then by selecting “Select calling disp.”. Go to step 2 on page 100.
pYou can set the Mail Receiving display by selecting “Mail”, “Chat mail”, “MessageR” or
“MessageF”, and then by selecting “Select receiving disp.”. Go to step 2 of “Set
Stand-by Display” on page 99.
pThe priority order of ring tones is as follows: “Read aloud settings” → “Setting for
Phonebook entry” → “Group setting” → “Select ring tone” (“Select ring tone” of “Multi
number” when a call comes in to the additional number, and “Ring tone set. for No. B”
of “2in1 setting” when a call comes in to Number B while using 2in1).
pThe ring tone or images set at purchase might be played back or displayed for
incoming calls or messages, depending on the combination of this function and
“Display setting”.
pSee “imotion info” to check whether the i-motion file can be set for a ring tone.
pWhen you set an i-motion file containing video and sound for a mail ring tone, you can
press -r or others to stop the ring tone.
pWhen you set an i-motion file containing video and sound for a ring tone
(Chaku-motion), it is played back taking priority over “Display setting”. However, if you
set a voice-only i-motion file for the ring tone, the image set by “Display setting” is
displayed.
pWhen you set an i-motion file containing video and sound for “Select calling disp.”, the
i-motion file is played back taking priority over this function for incoming calls.
However, if you set an i-motion file containing only video for “Select calling disp.”, the
ring tone selected for this function is played back for incoming calls.
pYou cannot set an i-motion file which contains video for “i-concier”.
pWhen different types of mail — i-mode mail, SMS messages, chat mail, or Messages
R/F — are received at the same time, the priority order of ring tone as follows: “Chat
mail” → “i-mode mail/SMS” → “MessageR” → “MessageF”. If you receive the same
type of mail simultaneously, the ring tone corresponding to the mail you have received
last works.
pFor melodies downloaded, attached to mail, or prohibited from being attached to mail
or being output from the FOMA terminal, a playing part may be specified in advance.
When a play-part-specified melody is set for a ring tone, only the specified part is
played back.
You can set whether to add stereophonic sound effects to the playback
tone of i-motion files, melodies, ring tones, and effect tones.
1mSet./ServiceSoundMelody effect
Do the following operations.
3D Sound is a function that creates stereophonic sound and spatially-moving sound
through the use of the Stereo Earphone Set. 3D Sound compatible i-αppli games, ring
tones, and i-motion files enable you to enjoy live-like feeling of sounds.
+m-6-4
<Melody Effect>
Setting Sound Effects of Ring Tone or
Melody
Stereo&3DSound You can play back 3-dimensional sound from the Stereo
Earphone Set (option). This is effective for the i-αppli effect tones
or ring tones.
ON or OFF
Position to play You can set the play start position of the melody that has been set
for the ring tone or alarm tone.
Select an item.
Play all. . . . . . . . Plays back from the beginning of the melody.
Play portion . . . Plays back from the start position set for the
melody.
3D Sound
Information
pStereognostic sense might differ depending on the person. If you feel strange, switch
“Stereo&3DSound” to “OFF”.
94
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set the vibrator to notify you of incoming calls and mail.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callVibrator
Select an incoming typeSelect a vibration pattern.
pWhen “Melody linkage” is set, the FOMA terminal vibrates in time with the
vibration pattern stored in the melody.
pWhile selecting a vibration pattern, you can check the selected vibration.
However, you cannot check the vibration when you select “Melody linkage”.
pThe following icons are displayed on the Stand-by display while “Vibrator” is set to
other than “OFF”:
: You set “Phone” or “Videophone”.
: You set “Mail”, “Chat mail”, “MessageR”, “MessageF”, or “i-concier”.
: You set “Phone” or “Videophone”, and set “Mail”, “Chat mail”, “MessageR”,
“MessageF”, or “i-concier”.
+m-5-4
<Vibrator>
Informing You of an Incoming Call by
Vibration
Information
pThe priority order of vibrators is as follows: “Setting for Phonebook entry” → “Group
setting” → “Vibrator”.
pEven when “Melody linkage” is set, the FOMA terminal vibrates with “Pattern 2” if an
i-motion file or melody with no vibration pattern is set for the ring tone.
pBe careful not to leave the FOMA terminal on a desk or similar places with the vibrator
activated; when a call comes in, the FOMA terminal might move and fall by vibration.
You can set the sound recorded with the FOMA terminal for a ring tone
(including a ring tone for Number B of 2in1), On-hold tone/Holding tone,
alarm for “Alarm”, “Schedule”, “ToDo”, and “TV timer”, and answer
message for Record Message.
You can record only one item for about 15 seconds.
1mLifeKitRec.msg/voice memoVoice announce
Record
pTo suspend recording midway, press Oo(), h, or r. The contents
recorded to that point are saved.
pThe tone beeps about 5 seconds before the recording time (for about 15
seconds) ends. When recording ends, the tone beeps twice, and the former
display returns.
pThe recording is suspended when a call comes in, when an alarm for “Alarm”,
“Schedule”, “ToDo”, “TV timer”, or “Timer recording” sounds, or when you switch
displays using Multitask while recording. (The contents recorded to that point are
saved.)
pTo play back the recorded sound, select “Play”. To suspend playback midway,
press Oo(), h, or r.
pTo erase the recorded sound, select “Erase”, then select “YES”.
Melody Call is a service that enables you to change the ringback tone
phone the callers hear to a melody you like.
For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [Network Services]”.
pMelody Call is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis.
1m
Set./Service
Incoming call
Melody Call setting
YES
Operate following the instructions on the display.
+m-5-5
<Voice Announce>
Using Recorded Sound as Ring Tone
<Melody Call Setting>
Changing Ringback Tone
95
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
1mSet./ServiceSoundKeypad soundON or OFF
The confirmation tone sounds twice when charging starts/ends.
1mSet./ServiceSoundCharge soundON or OFF
Information
pMelody Call is not available for incoming videophone calls.
pWhen you select “YES” from the confirmation display asking whether to connect to the
site, the line is connected to the i-mode site. You are not charged a packet
communication fee for connecting to the site for settings, however, you are charged
for connecting to the IP site, i-mode menu site, and free melody corner.
+m-3-0
<Keypad Sound>
Setting Keypad Sound
Information
pYou cannot change the volume for keypad sound.
pIf you set this function to “OFF”, the battery level tone (see page 42) and respective
warning tones do not sound.
pThe keypad does not make a sound when you press .<, while the phone is ringing,
during playback of an i-motion file, or during playback of a movie file.
pWhen you press .> with the FOMA terminal closed, the FOMA terminal works
following “Info notice setting” on page 108.
<Charge Sound>
Setting Charging-start/end Tones
Information
pYou cannot change the volume for charge sound.
pThe charging confirmation tone does not sound when the power is turned off, when a
display other than the Stand-by display is shown or during Manner Mode or Public
mode (Drive mode).
When a call is nearly disconnecting midway due to bad radio wave
conditions, an alarm sounds to inform you right before disconnection.
1mSet./ServiceTalkQuality alarm
Select an alarm.
No tone . . . . . Does not sound.
High tone. . . . High alarm sounds.
Low tone . . . . Low alarm sounds.
You can set the duration of the ring tone which sounds for incoming
i-mode mail, SMS messages, Chat mail, Messages R/F, and i-concier
information.
1mSet./ServiceSoundMail/Msg. ring time
Select a type of mail or messageON or OFF
Enter a ring time (seconds).
pEnter in two digits from “01” through “30”.
+m-7-5
<Quality Alarm>
Sounding Alarm when a Line is Nearly
Disconnecting
Information
pYou might be disconnected without hearing an alarm if radio wave conditions
deteriorate suddenly.
+m-6-8
<Mail/Message Ring Time>
Setting Ring Time for Mail and Messages R/F
96
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set from where you sound the ring tone and alarm for when you
connect an earphone/microphone (option).
1mSet./ServiceSoundHeadset usage setting
Headset and speaker or Headset only
+m-5-1
<Headset Usage Setting>
Sounding Ring Tone from Earphone Only
Information
pEven when you set to “Headset only”, the ring tone sounds from both the earphone
and speaker about 20 seconds after ringing starts. However, the tone does not sound
from the speaker but sounds from the earphone only even after 20 seconds have
elapsed if the tone sounds for the operations other than incoming calls, incoming mail,
and alarm notification.
pEven when you set to “Headset only”, the tone sounds from the speaker when any
earphone/microphone is not connected or at the start of shooting with the camera.
pIn the following cases, the tone sounds from the earphone when an earphone/
microphone is connected, and from the speaker when it is not connected, regardless
of this setting:
・While watching a 1Seg program
・During playback of a video file
・During playback of an i-motion file
・During playback of a movie file
・During playback of a melody
・While an i-αppli program is running
・During playback of a music file by MUSIC Player
・During playback of a Music&Video Channel program
pDo not wind the cord of the earphone/microphone around the FOMA terminal.
pThe FOMA terminal may pick up noise if you take the cord of the earphone/
microphone close to the FOMA terminal during a call.
Just by pressing a key, you can set to mute the tones from the FOMA
terminal, such as a ring tone and keypad sound.
You can use “Manner mode set” to select Manner Mode functions from
three types; “Manner mode”, “Super silent”, or “Original”.
While “Manner mode” or “Super silent” is activated, or while “Mic
sensitiv.” is set to “Up” in “Original”, you can talk softly on the phone but
your voice can still be heard clearly at the other end.
1Press and hold s for at least one second.
Manner mode selected in “Manner mode set” is set.
pDuring a call or while calling, you can activate Manner Mode by pressing and
holding s for at least one second.
pWhen the FOMA terminal is closed, you can activate Manner Mode by pressing
and holding > for at least one second.
pDuring Manner Mode, “ ” is displayed. The settings you selected for “Manner
mode set” are also displayed.
: Indicates that “Vibrator” will work to notify events.
/ / : Indicate that “Ring volume” has been set to “Silent”.
<Manner Mode>
Muting Tones from FOMA Terminal
Information
pEven if
you activate Manner Mode, the shutter sound and focus lock tone of the camera
sound.
pIn Manner Mode, if you try to play back a melody, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to play it back. Select “YES” to play back the melody at the volume set
for “Phone” of “Ring volume”. If the setting is “Silent” or “Step”, the volume is Level 2.
97
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Press and hold s for at least one second. During a call or calling, two beeps sound
and the message that is released appears.
pWhen the FOMA terminal is closed, you can release Manner Mode also by pressing
and holding > for at least one second.
pIn Manner Mode, if you do the following operations, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to play back voice or music.
・Watching a 1Seg program
・Playing back a video file
・Playing back an i-motion file
・Playing back a movie file
・Playing back a music file by MUSIC Player
・Playing back a Music&Video Channel program
Select “YES” to play it back at the volume set for each player. When you change the
volume level, it is played back at the set volume for the next time.
pWhen an earphone/microphone (option) is connected, the sound comes out of the
earphone. The confirmation display asking whether to play back sound or music files
during Manner Mode does not appear. Further, the playback tone does not sound
from the speaker even if you unplug the earphone/microphone while playing back
sound or music files by each player.
pWhen “Phone” of “Ring volume” is set to “Silent” and you play back a melody attached
to a received mail message during Manner Mode, the melody does not sound from
the earphone even when an earphone/microphone (option) is connected.
To release Manner Mode
Information
You can select one of three types of operations for Manner Mode.
■Operations during Manner Mode
+m-2-0
<Manner Mode Set>
Selecting Manner Mode Type
Manner
Mode
Super
Silent Original
Record message Set value of
Record message ON or OFF
Vibrator※1ON ON or OFF
Phone volume Silent Silent through Level 6 and step①
Mail volume Silent Silent through Level 6 and step②
Alarm volume※2Silent Silent through Level 6 and step
Memo tone ON OFF ON or OFF③
Keypad sound OFF ON or OFF④
Microphone sensitivity Up Normal or Up
Low voltage alarm tone
(Low battery alarm) OFF
ON or OFF
When “LV alarm tone” is set to “ON”, it
works with the same set value as
①
.
※3
Confirmation tone for
selecting ring tone Silent
Works with the same set value as
①・②
.
On hold tone Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※4
Holding tone Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※5
ToruCa-received tone and
ToruCa failed-to-receive tone
Silent Works with the same set value as ①.
Confirmation tone for
recording voice announce ON OFF Works with the same set value as ③.
Battery level tone Silent Silent
Voice recognition start tone Silent Silent
Confirmation tone for checking
missed calls and new mail
Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※6
Playback tones of attached
melody Silent Silent
Effect tones of
Decome-Anime Silent Silent
Warning tones Silent
Works with the same set value as
④
.
98
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
※1 Vibrator works for the following tones:
Ring tones and alarm tones for “Alarm”, “Schedule”, “ToDo”, “TV timer” and “Timer
recording”
The vibration pattern is the same one as you set on page 94. However, if the
pattern you set on page 94 is “OFF”, “Pattern 2” applies.
Confirmation tone for checking missed calls and new mail
The FOMA terminal vibrates for about 1 second when you have missed calls or
new mail messages and vibrates for about 0.2 second when you have no missed
calls and new mail messages.
※2 When “Prefer manner mode” on page 377 is set to “OFF”, the tone sounds at the
volume set for Alarm.
※3 The tone sounds at Level 1 when ① is “Silent”.
※4 The tone sounds at Level 2 when ① is “Step”.
※5 The tone sounds at Level 1 when ① is not “Silent”.
※6 The tone sounds at Level 6 when ① is not “Silent”.
※7 When “Prefer manner mode” on page 242 is set to “OFF”, the tone sounds at the
volume set for TV Timer.
※8 The tone does not sound when ① is “Step”.
Schedule alarm Silent Works with the same set value as ①.
ToDo alarm Silent Works with the same set value as ①.
TV timer alarm Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※7
Timer recording alarm Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※8
Shutter sound/focus lock
tone of the camera Level 4 Level 4
Confirmation tone for
selecting a shutter sound OFF
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※4
Switching to Hands-free by
“Hands-free w/ V. phone” OFF OFF
Read aloud volume Silent Silent
Effect tones of Flash movies
Silent Silent
Effect tones at the start of
i-Widget
Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※4
Manner
Mode
Super
Silent Original You can select from among standard “Manner mode” to inform you of
incoming calls or mail by the vibrator, “Super silent” to erase sounds
including confirmation tones from the earpiece, or “Original” to
customize operations.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callManner mode set
Manner mode, Super silent or Original
Do the following operations.
Record msg. ON or OFF
pEven if you select “ON”, the ring time is fixed to about 13
seconds and cannot be changed when “Record message
setting” on page 68 is set to “OFF”.
pSee page 68 for Record Message Setting.
Vibrator You can set the FOMA terminal to vibrate for incoming calls and
mail.
ON or OFF
pSee page 94 for Vibrator.
Phone vol. You can adjust the ring volume for incoming voice calls and
videophone calls.
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pSee page 65 for Ring Volume.
Mail vol. You can adjust the ring volume for i-mode mail, SMS messages,
Messages R/F, and i-concier information.
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pSee page 65 for Ring Volume.
Alarm vol. Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pSee page 376 for Alarm.
Memo tone You can set the FOMA terminal to sound a confirmation tone
when a record message is played back, a voice memo is
recorded or played back, and a movie memo is recorded.
ON or OFF
Keypad sound ON or OFF
pSee page 95 for Keypad Sound.
Mic sensitiv. Normal or Up
99
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
2Press l().
You can set the Stand-by display which appears on the display. On the
Stand-by display, you can randomly show the images in a specified
folder, and set moving pictures shot by the FOMA terminal or i-motion
files downloaded from sites for the Stand-by display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Stand-by displaySelect a type of image.
pWhen you select “Calendar/schedule”, select a display format, and then select
“BG image ON” or “BG image OFF”. When you select “BG image OFF”, the
setting is completed.
pWhen you select “Random display”, select a folder and then select “Every hour”
or “Every day” for the switching interval of the Stand-by display. The setting is
completed.
pWhen you select “iαppli display”, select an i-αppli program. The setting is
completed.
2Select a folderSelect an image.
pOn the Stand-by display, the image smaller than the display is shown in
equivalent dimensions or enlarged to fit to the display size, depending on the
image size.
pSee page 193 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
LV alarm tone ON or OFF
pSee page 43 for LV Alarm Tone (low battery alarm).
+m-5-6
<Display Setting>
Changing Displays
Set Stand-by Display
You can display schedule events of the day (up to 10) or
calendar in the set format on the Stand-by display. You can
check the schedule events or calendar and can set schedule
events (see page 379) with ease.
You can access the schedule events or calendar by pressing
Oo from the Stand-by display. Highlight an item to be
operated and press Oo().
pWhen you select a schedule event, you can confirm the
previous or next schedule events by pressing Bo.
You can display the detailed schedule display by pressing
Oo().
pWhen you select the calendar, you can display the previous or next calendar by
pressing Mo.
You can set a schedule event by pressing Oo().
It is played back when you display the Stand-by display, press h from the Stand-by
display, or open the FOMA terminal. The first frame is displayed as the Stand-by display.
It is played back when you display the Stand-by display, press h from the Stand-by
display, or open the FOMA terminal. The image stopped such as by pressing h during
playback of a Flash movie is displayed as the Stand-by display.
pWhen a Flash movie which shows a clock or the like is set, the date/time is not updated
during pause. When you play back the Flash movie by pressing h, the date/time is
corrected.
pIf you set a Flash movie containing a progressive type FLV file, the FLV file is not
played back.
It is played back when you display the Stand-by display, press h from the Stand-by
display, or open the FOMA terminal. The first frame is displayed as the Stand-by display.
pPress Bo or </> during playback to adjust the volume.
Press Oo, l, i, m, c, No, r, d or h to end the playback.
pIf you play back an i-motion file during Manner Mode, the sound is not played back.
When Calendar/Schedule is set
When an original animation or animation GIF is set
When a Flash movie is set
When an i-motion file is set
For
“Calendar+schedule”
100
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Press h from the Stand-by display.
Calendar, schedule events, status icons, notification icons, and desktop icons are
cleared. Press h again to show the icons and others.
When a Flash movie is set for the Stand-by display, however, the following operations
are performed:
・When you press h during playback of a Flash movie, the playback pauses.
Press h again to clear the icons and others.
Not to display icons on the Stand-by display
Information
pThe schedule list shows the today’s schedule events whose start time has not come,
and the today’s schedule events set as “All day”. Holidays are not displayed.
pSome i-motion files might not be correctly displayed.
pYou cannot set a still image larger than the Stand-by (480 x 854) or in excess of 500
Kbytes for the Stand-by display.
pWhen a folder selected for “Random display” includes images which cannot be set for
the Stand-by display, pre-installed images might be displayed.
pYou cannot set some images or i-motion files for the Stand-by display or for Random
display. Also, some images may not be displayed with correct display direction.
pThe sound of Flash movies cannot be played back.
pWhen you show the Stand-by display, the Flash movies such as a clock and the
animation GIF files stop moving after a certain period of playback.
You can set an image or message to be displayed for when the power is
turned on.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Wake-up displaySelect a type of image.
pIf you select “Message”, enter a message. You can enter up to 50 full-pitch/100
half-pitch characters.
pIf you select “My picture” or “imotion”, go to step 2 of “Set Stand-by Display” on
page 99.
pSee page 193 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
You can set an image for the Dialing/Call Receiving display, Mail
Sending/Mail Receiving display, and Checking display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Select a type of display.
pWhen “Incoming call” or “Videophone incoming” is selected, select “Select calling
disp.”.
pWhen “Mail receiving” is selected, select “Select receiving disp.” and go to step 2
of “Set Stand-by Display” on page 99.
pIf you select “Dialing”, “Videophone dialing”, “Mail sending”, “Check new
messages”, or “Mail/msg. rcpt result”, go to step 2 of “Set Stand-by Display” on
page 99.
pSelect “Incoming call”, “Videophone incoming” or “Mail receiving” and press
l( ) to check the contents actually displayed or played back.
2Select a type of image.
Go to step 2 of “Set Stand-by Display” on page 99.
Set the Wake-up Display
Information
pYou cannot set some images or i-motion files for the Wake-up display. Also, some
images may not be displayed with correct display direction.
pThe sound of Flash movies cannot be played back.
Set Displays for Dialing/Calling and Others
101
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Information
pWhen you select “Incoming call”, “Videophone incoming”, or “Mail receiving”, select
“Select ring tone” to set the ring tone. Go to step 2 on page 92.
pThe priority order of displays for call receiving is as follows: “Setting for Phonebook
entry” → “Group setting” → “Disp. PH-book image” → “Display setting”. However,
when “Incoming call” or “Videophone incoming” of “Read aloud settings” is set to
“ON”, the default image is displayed.
The same order applies if a call comes in to Number B while using 2in1. However,
when you set an i-motion file containing video and sound for a ring tone
(Chaku-motion) by “Ringtone set. for No. B”, it is played back as Chaku-motion, taking
priority over this function.
pWhen you set an i-motion file containing video and sound for a ring tone
(Chaku-motion), it is played back for incoming calls, taking priority over this function.
However, if you set a voice-only i-motion file, the image set by this function is
displayed.
pWhen you set an i-motion file containing video and sound for “Select calling disp.”, the
i-motion file is played back taking priority over “Select ring tone” of “Incoming call” for
incoming calls. However, if you set an i-motion file containing only video for “Select
calling disp.”, the ring tone selected for “Select ring tone” of “Incoming call” is played
back.
pThe images or ring tone set at purchase might be displayed or played back for
incoming calls or messages, depending on the combination of this function and
“Select ring tone”.
pYou cannot set some images for “Display setting”. Also, some images may not be
displayed with correct display direction.
pThe sound of Flash movies is not played back.
You can set images for battery icons or antenna icons.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Battery icon or Antenna iconSelect a folder
Select an image.
pYou cannot change icons such as “ ” or “ ”.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Icon colorColor or Monochrome
pYou cannot change the battery icon and antenna icon.
If the caller ID notified by the caller matches the phone number stored in
the Phonebook, the still image stored in the Phonebook is displayed.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming call
Disp. PH-book imageON or OFF
Set Battery Icon or Antenna Icon
Information
pThe image you can set for battery icons is a GIF image of 70 x 25 dots.
(A battery icon is composed of an image of 14 x 25 dots.)
pThe image you can set for antenna icons is a GIF image of 44 x 50 dots.
(An antenna icon is composed of an image of 22 x 25 dots.)
Show Icons in Color/Monochrome
<Display Phonebook Image>
Displaying an Image Stored in Phonebook
while Ringing
Information
pThe priority order of displays for call receiving is as follows: “Picture for Phonebook
entry” → “Picture for group” → “Image for Phonebook entry” → “Display setting”.
However, when “Incoming call” or “Videophone incoming” of “Read aloud settings” is
set to “ON”, the default image is displayed.
102
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
1mSet./ServiceDisplayPrivate window
ON or OFFDo the following operations.
+m-9-3
<Private Window>
Setting Displays for Private Window
Clock You can set the display pattern of the clock.
Pattern 1, Pattern 2, Pattern 3 or Pattern 4
Orientation You can set the direction of the clock to be displayed.
Pattern 1 or Pattern 2
Brightness You can adjust the brightness to Level 1 (dark) through Level 3
(bright).
Select a brightness level.
Called You can display the phone number (name when stored in the
Phonebook) of the caller during ringing.
ON or OFF
You can set whether to display a Chaku-moji message.
ON or OFF
Mail You can display the received date/time and others of the mail
message or Message R/F. (See page 31)
ON or OFF
pThe received date/time and others of the mail messages or
Messages R/F in the box or folder with security set are not
displayed.
i-Channel ticker ON or OFF
pYou can set for each mode of 2in1. When 2in1 is deactivated, it
becomes common with the setting in A Mode.
Disp. connection You can set whether to display animations/characters during
communication.
ON or OFF
When you have a missed call, new mail message, new chat mail message,
or new Message R/F, the detailed Missed Call display/Inbox list/Chat Mail
display/Message R/F list is displayed at opening the FOMA terminal.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayRecv. mail/call at open
ON or OFF
1mSet./ServiceDisplayBacklight
Do the following operations.
<Received Mail/Call at Open>
Displaying Arrival Information by Opening
FOMA Terminal
Information
pWhen newly received messages and missed calls are found, the detailed Missed Call
display appears.
pWhen a new mail message, chat mail, Message R/F are simultaneously received, the
messages are displayed in the order of the chat mail message, i-mode message,
Message R, and Message F.
+m-7-0
<Backlight>
Setting Lights for Display and Keypad
Lighting You can set whether to light the backlight in ordinary time.
ON or OFF
pIf you set to “OFF”, “ ” appears on the Stand-by display.
Also, you can set whether to activate Power Saver Mode for the
display.
ON (Power saver mode) or OFF (Constant light)
Enter a light time (seconds).
pEnter from “060” through “999” in three digits.
103
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Press and hold 5 for at least one second.
pWhile an i-αppli program is running or you are entering characters, you cannot switch
the backlight on/off by pressing and holding 5 for at least one second. Also,
depending on the Decome-Anime message or Flash movie, you may not be able to
switch the backlight on/off while it is displayed.
Charging Standard or Constant light
Standard
. . . . . . . . .Lights during charging in the same setting as
it lights in ordinary time.
Constant light
. . . . .When 15 seconds elapse without any
operation during charging, the backlight
switches to Level 1. It does not switch to
Power Saver Mode.
pWhen an AC adapter (option) or another device is connected,
the backlight lights following the setting of this function even
after charging is completed.
Area You can set the range the backlight lights in.
LCD+Keys or LCD
Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the backlight for the display to
Level 1 (dark) through Level 5 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
pWhen “Auto setting” is set, the backlight set by “Area” is
automatically adjusted according to the ambient brightness that
has been detected by the light sensor.
Soft light You can set whether to light the backlight softly for the display.
ON or OFF
pEven if you set to “OFF”, the backlight might light softly for some
functions.
To switch the backlight on/off by pressing one key
Information
pWhen “Lighting” is set to “ON”, the backlight stays lit while a call is coming in and the
area specified by “Area” lights for about 15 seconds when you turn on the power,
touch the keys, or open the FOMA terminal. The backlight stays lit while the camera is
activated, during playback of an i-motion file, or during playback of a movie file. When
“OFF” is set, it does not light. However, it stays lit during a moving picture shoot
regardless of the “Lighting” setting.
pSee page 73 for Backlight during a videophone call.
pSee page 246 for Backlight for while watching a 1Seg program.
You can set whether to automatically adjust the brightness of the display
backlight and to compensate the image quality according to that
brightness during playback of i-motion files/movie files, Music&Video
Channel programs, or video files, during a videophone call, or while
watching a 1Seg program.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayLCD AION or OFF
pIf you operate the setting from the Function menu during a videophone call or
watching a 1Seg program, the setting is effective only for the current videophone
call or 1Seg program.
pWhen you display the text of i-mode mail or Messages R/F, the lighting time varies
according to the length of the text.
pIf “Power saver mode” is set to “ON (Power saver mode)” and the specified time
elapses without doing any operations, the FOMA terminal switches to Power Saver
Mode and the display goes off. However, the FOMA terminal might not switch to
Power Saver Mode depending on the function in use.
pWhen an i-motion file is set for the Stand-by display, the Stand-by display changes to
Power Saver Mode after ending the playback and a standby time elapses.
pThe display appears when you operate the FOMA terminal, receive a call, or receive
i-Channel tickers. However, the receiving display does not appear when you receive a
call in Public mode (Drive mode).
pIf you press the switch of an earphone/microphone (option) in Power Saver Mode, the
Power Saver Mode is released but the operation such as dialing is not made.
However, if you press and hold the switch of the earphone/microphone for at least one
second during a call (except Multi calling), the Power Saver Mode is released and the
call ends.
<LCD AI>
Adjusting Quality of Display Automatically
Information
Information
pIf you set to “ON”, the brightness is adjusted within the level specified for “Brightness”
of “Backlight”. The brightness is adjusted also while you are selecting a menu item.
pThis function is disabled during Play Background.
104
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can adjust the contrast of the display so that it is hardly viewed from
a slanted angle.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayView blindON or OFF
Select a contrast.
pWhen “ON” is set, “ ” appears on the Stand-by display.
p
While selecting a contrast level, you can check the selected contrast on the display.
Press and hold 8 for at least one second.
pWhile an i-αppli program is running, a PDF file is displayed, or you are entering
characters, you cannot switch View Blind on/off by pressing and holding 8 for at
least one second. Also, depending on the Decome-Anime message or Flash movie,
you may not be able to switch View Blind on/off while it is displayed.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayImage quality
Select an item.
Normal . . . . . Normal image quality
Vivid . . . . . . .Vivid image quality
Dynamic . . . .Dynamic image quality in which motion is emphasized
You can set the display color pattern of characters, backgrounds, and so on.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayColor theme setting
Select a color theme.
pWhile selecting a color theme, you can check the selected color theme on the
display.
<View Blind>
Making Display Hard to See from People
Around
To switch View Blind on/off by pressing one key
<Image Quality>
Setting Quality of Display
+m-8-6
<Color Theme Setting>
Setting Color Combination for Display
You can change the icons and the background images of Main Menu.
1ml()Select a pattern.
pSee page 34 for Simple Menu.
2When you select “Customize” in step 1, select a menu
icon or background image to be changed
Select a folderSelect an image.
Repeat step 2 and set menu icons and a background image.
pWhile selecting a menu icon or background image, press l( ) to confirm
the currently set image.
pTo reset the menu icon and background image set to “Customize” to “スタンダー
ド (Standard)” in the “Pre-installed” folder, press i( ) and select “Reset”
or “All reset”, then select “YES”.
pSee page 193 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
Information
pYou cannot change the color for icons and images displayed in multiple colors, the
DOCOMO pictograms, and the Internet websites (sites) supporting i-mode.
+m-5-7
<Menu Icon Setting>
Setting Displays for Main Menu
Information
pThe image you can set for “Customize” is a JPEG or GIF image whose size is
Stand-by (480 x 854) or smaller and up to 500 Kbytes. Perform “Change size” or “Trim
away” for other images.
pWhen the image you set “Customize” is deleted, “スタンダード (Standard)” in the
“Pre-installed” folder returns.
pWhen you activate Personal Data Lock while “Customize” is set, the default image is
displayed. However, when “Display setting” is set to “Accept” for “Customize” of
Personal Data Lock, the image set for this function is displayed.
pWhen you set “Customize”, the main menu icons do not switch even if you switch
“Select language”.
105
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can use Kisekae Tool to change the ring tone, Stand-by display,
menu icons and others at a time.
pSee page 192 for details on how to download Kisekae Tool files.
pSee page 343 for the operation from Data Box.
■Functions that can be set with Kisekae Tool
pFunctions that can be set differ depending on the Kisekae Tool file.
pThe changes of functions you can respectively set according to the mode of 2in1 are
reflected to A Mode only, regardless of the mode at changing. The other changes of
functions are applied to the all modes of 2in1.
1mSet./ServiceKisekae
Highlight a Kisekae Tool file and press l()
YES
p“★” is added to the Kisekae Tool file collectively set at the moment.
pDepending on the selected Kisekae Tool file, the confirmation display might
appear asking whether to change the font size. When you select “NO”, you might
not be able to set the Kisekae Tool file correctly.
<Kisekae Tool>
Using Kisekae Tool
・Select ring tone
・Display setting
・Color theme setting
・Menu icon setting
・Font
・Disp. call/receive No.
・Ticker font size set.
・Ticker color set.
・Ticker scroll speed
・i-αppli call sound
・Positioning ring tone
・Tone
Information
pFor the functions set by Kisekae Tool, each setting display is shown with “Follow
Kisekae Tool” highlighted. You can separately change each setting, however, if you
want to reset to the setting by Kisekae Tool, you need to perform collective settings
again. You cannot select “Follow Kisekae Tool”.
pIf you use Kisekae Tool to change the design of the Menu display, some menu
configurations change according to the usage frequency depending on the type of the
menu. Further, some menu numbers that are assigned to the menu items do not
apply.
You can reset the functions changed by Kisekae Tool.
1mi()Reset
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item
YES
Reset disp. /sound. . . . Resets all of “■Functions that can be set with Kisekae
Tool” to the default.
Reset menu screen . . . Resets Main Menu to the default. You can reset also by
pressing and holding r for at least one second from
the Stand-by display and selecting “YES”.
Reset menu log . . . . . . Resets the operation records of Main Menu to the
default.
Function Menu of Main Menu
Change launcher You can manually replace the items on Main Menu.
Select a destination to save toYES
Disp. default MENU You can temporarily show Main Menu of “Normal”.
pOnce you close Main Menu of “Normal”, the currently set Main
Menu returns.
Reset See page 105.
Reset Changed Design
Information
pEven if you perform “Reset disp. /sound” or “Reset menu screen”, you cannot reset
“Font size setting”.
pEven if you execute “Reset menu screen”, the Main Menu items you have manually
replaced by “Change launcher” are not reset.
106
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
When Machi-chara is set, a Machi-chara image appears on the Stand-by
display to tell you missed calls, new mail messages, new i-concier
information and others.
pSee page 192 for downloading Machi-chara images.
pSee page 339 for the operations from Data Box.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayMachi-chara
Set to Machi-chara
pTo release Machi-chara, select “Release Machi-chara”.
2Highlight a Machi-chara image and press l().
p“★” is added to the currently set Machi-chara image.
<Set to Machi-chara>
Setting Machi-chara Image
Information
pThe Machi-chara image is not displayed in the following cases:
・During Lock All ・During Personal Data Lock ・During Omakase Lock
・While an icon or another is selected on the Stand-by display
However, when “Display setting” is set to “Accept” for “Customize” of Personal Data
Lock, Machi-chara images are displayed even during Personal Data Lock.
pSome Machi-chara images change their appearance according to the elapsed time,
total calls duration, and number of mail messages sent/received after setting. If you
move these Machi-chara images to the microSD card or execute “Reset all info”, they
return to the default state.
1mSet./ServiceIllumination
Do the following operations.
<Illumination>
Setting Color and Others of Call/Charging
Indicator
All illum. setting You can set all illumination items at one time.
Select a pattern.
Incoming
illumination
See page 107.
Illumination in talk You can set the illumination for during a call.
Select an item.
pWhile selecting an item, you can check the flickering of the Call/
Charging indicator.
p
It flickers in the same color while Record Message is working,
during answer-hold (On Hold), or while a call is on hold (Holding).
Missed/unread
illum.
The Call/Charging indicator flickers at about 5-second interval for
missed calls, new mail messages, new chat mail messages, new
Messages R/F, i-αppli calls you did not reply to, or new i-concier
information.
Select an item.
OFF when checked. . . The Call/Charging indicator flickers until
you check missed calls or others.
OFF after 24hours. . . . Even if you do not check missed calls or
others, the Call/Charging indicator
automatically goes off after it flickers for
24 hours.
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Call/Charging indicator does not
flicker.
pIt does not flicker in Public mode (Drive mode), during Lock All,
and during Omakase Lock. Flickering does not resume even
after Public mode (Drive mode) or each lock is released except
when new i-concier information is found.
Music&Video Ch
illum.
The Call/Charging indicator flickers at about 5-second interval for
about 30 minutes when obtaining Music&Video Channel
programs is completed.
ON or OFF
107
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Illum. when closed
The Call/Charging indicator lights when the FOMA terminal is closed.
ON or OFF
Hourly illumination You can be notified of the specified time (every hour at 0 minutes)
by the tone and light of the Call/Charging indicator.
Select a pattern.
OFF . . . . . . . The Call/Charging indicator does not light.
Pattern 1 . . . A fixed tone sounds and the Call/Charging indicator
lights in the fixed color.
Pattern 2 . . . The tone and light of the Call/Charging indicator
change by time.
pWhile selecting a pattern, you can check the lighting of the Call/
Charging indicator and the time tone.
p“Hourly illumination” does not work while a display other than
the Stand-by display is shown, or Lock All or Omakase Lock is
activated.
pTime tone sounds at the volume set for “Phone” of “Ring
volume”. It sounds at Level 2 when “Step” is set.
MUSIC illumination The Call/Charging indicator flickers when you start playback by
MUSIC Player.
ON or OFF
Bluetooth
illumination
The Call/Charging indicator flickers during connecting to
Bluetooth devices.
ON or OFF
pIt flickers at about 5-second interval for about 5 minutes when
the connection is completed.
IC card illumination The Call/Charging indicator lights/flickers when you place the
FOMA terminal over an IC card scanning device or during iC
communication.
ON or OFF
pIt does not light/flicker during IC Card Lock.
Side key
illumination
You can set the illumination for when you press < with the
FOMA terminal closed.
Select an item.
pWhile selecting an item, you can check the flickering of the Call/
Charging indicator.
pThe lighting duration varies depending on the illumination.
Check settings You can check the setting contents for “Incoming illumination”,
“Illumination in talk”, “Hourly illumination” and “Side key
illumination”.
You can set an illumination for each incoming type.
1mSet./ServiceIlluminationIncoming illumination
Do the following operations.
+m-8-9
Incoming Illumination
Select color Select an incoming typeSelect an item.
pTo make the indicator light in colors “Color 1” to “Color 12” in
order, select “Gradation”.
pWhile selecting an item, you can check the lighting/flickering
of the Call/Charging indicator.
Set pattern You can set the lighting pattern of the Incoming Illumination.
Select a pattern.
Standard . . . . . . . . .Lights in the same pattern repeatedly.
Melody linkage . . . .Lights with the ring tone.
Color setting
Edit color name Select a colorEnter a name.
pYou can edit “Color 1” through “Color 12” only.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Adjust color tone Select a colorAdjust the color tone.
pYou can adjust the color tone of “Color 1” through “Color 12”
only.
pUse Bo to select a color and use No to change the color
tone.
Information
<Select color>
pThe priority order of incoming illumination is; “Setting for Phonebook entry” → “Group
setting” → “Select color”.
<Set pattern>
pThe Call/Charging indicator lights in specified pattern for each illumination when
“Select color” is set to other than “Color 1” through “Color 12” and “Gradation”.
pThe Call/Charging indicator lights by “Standard” when an i-motion file or melody with
no flickering pattern is set for the ring tone.
108
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
With the FOMA terminal closed, you can check for missed calls, new
mail, new chat mail, new Messages R/F, record messages, and voice mail
messages by pressing >. To use this function, you need to set “Side
keys guard” to “OFF” in advance.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callInfo notice setting
Select an item.
ON※ . . . Notifies you whether there are missed calls, new mail, new chat mail, or
new Messages R/F by the electronic sound and flickering of the Call/
Charging indicator.
OFF . . . . Turns off the information notice.
※When “Select language” is set to “日本語 (Japanese)”, you can select “電子音
(electronic sound)” or “ボイス (voice)”. With “ボイス (voice)”, Japanese
electronic voice and flickering of the Call/Charging indicator notify you of new
chat mail, new mail, missed calls, record messages and voice mail messages in
this order.
When you have a missed call, new mail, new chat mail, or new Message R/F
(When the “Missed call” icon, “New mail” icon, “Chat mail” icon, or “Message R/F” icon is
displayed on the Stand-by display.)
When “Info notice setting” is set to “ON”, a double-beep tone sounds and the Call/
Charging indicator lights for about five seconds.
When “Info notice setting” is set to “ボイス (voice)” on the Japanese display, a beep tone
sounds and a voice message announces that you have new mail, a missed call, and so
on, and the Call/Charging indicator lights for about five seconds.
pWhen “Info notice setting” is set to “ボイス (voice)” on the Japanese display, and a
new Message R/F is found, a voice message announces that you have new mail.
pWhen you press > again while the voice is being played back, you can stop it.
When you have no missed calls, new mail, new chat mail, or new Message R/F
When “Info notice setting” is set to “ON”, or “ボイス (voice)” on the Japanese display, a
triple-beep tone sounds, and the Call/Charging indicator flickers for about five seconds.
Even when “Info notice setting” is set to “ボイス (voice)”, the notice is not made by voice.
+m-6-5
<Info Notice Setting>
Checking Missed Calls and New Mail by
Tone and Call/Charging Indicator
If you press
.>
while the FOMA terminal is closed
1mSet./ServiceDisplayFont
Font 1, Font 2, or Font 3
Information
pYou cannot check for the mail messages held at the i-mode Center by this function.
pThe confirmation function might not work depending on the function being activated.
pThe sound volume for electronic sound cannot be changed.
p“ボイス (voice)” sounds at the volume set for “Phone” of “Ring volume”. It sounds at
Level 2 when “Step” is set.
pWhen “Phone” of “Vibrator” is set to other than “OFF”, the Call/Charging indicator and
vibrator notify you of missed calls, new mail, and new chat mail.
pThe vibrator notifies the information as follows:
・Vibrates for about 1 second when you have a missed call, new mail, or new chat
mail message.
・Vibrates for about 0.2 second when you have no missed calls, new mail, or new
chat mail message.
pIf you open the FOMA terminal during notification, it stops.
+m-6-6
<Font>
Changing Character Font
Information
pSome characters are displayed in “Font 1” regardless of the setting of this function.
pYou cannot change the font of a phone number entry or clock display.
109
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set the font and color of names stored in the Phonebook and
phone numbers displayed on the following displays:
■Font of dial number
・Dialing/Call Receiving display ・Dialed Calls/Received Calls/Detailed Redial display
・Detailed Sent Chaku-moji message
■Font color
・Dialing/Call Receiving/Talking display ・Dialed Calls/Received Calls/Redial
・Detailed Sent Chaku-moji message ・Sent/Received Address list
pWhen you use 2in1, the setting here applies to Number A. To specify for Number B,
operate “Disp. call/receive No.” of “2in1 setting”.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callDisp. call/receive No.
Do the following operations.
Set Character Font and Color of Phone Numbers
Font of dial number Select a pattern.
Font color Select a color.
pYou can switch between 16 color and 256 color by pressing
c().
pYou can reset the set color by pressing i().
Information
pIf you change the background color by “Color theme setting” or “Kisekae Tool”, the
font color automatically changes as well.
pYou cannot change the color of pictograms.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayFont size setting
Do the following operations.
<Font Size Setting>
Changing Font Size
Set at one time You can set all the changeable items such as font size at a time.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small
pThe confirmation display might appear asking whether to
change the font size of the menu as well. When you select
“YES”, the menu icons are changed to “Enlarge menu” while
“Extra large” or “Large” is set, and they are changed to “Normal”
while “Standard” or “Small” is set.
pWhen “Extra large” is set, “Phonebook” and “Dialed/recv. calls”
are set to “Large”.
pWhen “Small” is set, “Phonebook” and “Dialed/recv. calls” are
set to “Standard”.
Mail You can set the font size for the detailed mail display, detailed
Message R/F display and for “Mail settings”.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small
pWhile the detailed mail display is shown, press i() to
select “Display” and then select “Font size set.”. You can
change the font size also by pressing 3, or pressing and
holding No for at least one second.
However, another mail message is displayed when you press
and hold Vo for at least one second while “Extra large” is set,
or you press and hold Co for at least one second while “Small”
is set.
pYou cannot change the font size of the Decome-Anime text or
Deco-mail pictograms.
i-mode You can set the font size for sites and “i-mode settings”.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small
Phonebook You can set the font size for the Phonebook and “Phonebook
settings”.
Large or Standard
pYou can set also by mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Font size settingPhonebook.
110
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set the display pattern and others of the clock on the Stand-by
display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay settingClock
Stand-by clockDo the following operations.
pDuring operation or when you press l( ) while “Stand-by clock” is
highlighted, you can check the clock actually displayed. However, it might differ
from the actual one depending on the setting of each function.
Dialed/recv. calls You can set the font size for the Redial, Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, Sent Address and Received Address.
Large or Standard
pYou can set also by mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Font size settingDialed/recv. calls.
Character input You can set the font size for the character entry display, Message
Composition display, or SMS Composition display.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small
Information
pDepending on the function, characters might not be displayed in the set size.
pWhen “Extra large” or “Large” is set, some items displayed for each operating
procedure differ from the ones displayed for when “Standard” or “Small” is set.
+m-5-6
Setting Clock Display
Set Stand-by Clock Display
+l()
Position
You can set the clock position.
Select a pattern.
+i()
Pattern
You can set the display pattern of the clock.
Select a pattern.
+m()
Display size
Largest, Large, or Small
pYou cannot change the clock size of World Time Watch and the
sub clock.
2Press Oo().
pThe setting of this function might not be reflected depending on the settings of
other functions or the condition of the FOMA terminal.
You can set a display pattern of Icon Clock at the upper right of the
display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay settingClock
Icon clockSelect a pattern.
+c()
Day of week
When “Select language” is set to “日本語 (Japanese)”, you can
select “日本語 (Japanese)” or “英語 (English)”.
pThe setting here applies to the clock display on the Private
window as well.
pIf you set to “英語 (English)”, the region names of World Time
Watch are displayed in English as well.
Set Icon Clock Display
111
Security Settings
Security Code
Security Codes Used for FOMA Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Changing Terminal Security Code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Change Security Code> 113
Setting PIN Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<UIM Setting> 113
Releasing PIN Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Restricting Operations and Functions on Mobile Phone
Restricting Others from Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Lock All> 114
Using Omakase Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Omakase Lock> 115
Using Self Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Self Mode> 116
Hiding Phonebook Entries and Schedule Events
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Personal Data Lock> 116
Setting Lock by Closing the FOMA Terminal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Timer Lock ON At Close> 118
Locking Keypad Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Keypad Dial Lock> 118
Restricting Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Key Lock> 119
Restricting Side Key Operation. . . . . . . . . <Side Keys Guard> 119
Restricting Outgoing/Incoming Calls or Messages
Setting not to Display Redial/Received Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Record Display Set> 119
Protecting Phonebook Entries and Schedule Events from
Prying Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . <Secret Mode> <Secret Data Only> 120
Applying Secret for Mail in Mailbox . . . .<Secret Mail Display> 120
Setting not to Display Mail in Mailbox without Permission
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Mail Security> 121
Setting Restrictions on Phonebook Entries . . .<Restrictions> 121
Setting Response to Incoming Calls without Caller ID
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Call Setting without ID> 122
Delaying Start of Ringing Operation . . . . . . . . . . <Ring Time> 123
Rejecting Incoming Calls from Phone Numbers which are not
Stored in Phonebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reject Unknown> 123
Rejecting Incoming Videophone Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Reject Videophone> 124
Using Data Security Service . . . . . . . .<Data Security Service> 124
Resetting Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reset Settings> 125
Deleting Saved Data All at Once. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Initialize> 126
Resetting Data by Remote Control. . . . . . . . . <Remote Reset> 126
Other Security Settings
Other Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
112
Security Settings
For some functions of the FOMA terminal, you need to enter your
security code. In addition to the Terminal Security Code for operating
respective mobile phone functions, the Network Security Code to use
network services, and i-mode password are available. These security
codes help you utilize your FOMA terminal.
The Terminal Security Code is set to “0000” at purchase but you can
change it by yourself. (See page 113)
When the display for entering the Terminal Security Code appears, enter
your four- to eight-digit code and press Oo().
pWhen you enter your Terminal Security Code, the entered
numbers are indicated by “_” and not displayed.
pIf you have entered wrong numbers or nothing for about 15
seconds, a warning tone sounds and a warning message is
displayed; then the display prior to entering the Terminal
Security Code returns. Check the correct code and retry entering numbers.
Security Codes Used for FOMA Terminal
■Cautions on security codes
pYou should avoid using the numbers for security codes such as denoting your birth
date, part of your phone number, local address number, room number, “1111” or
“1234” that is easily decoded by a third party. Also make sure that you take a note of
the security codes you have selected just in case you forget them.
pTake care not to let others know your security codes. Even if your security codes are
known and used by a third party, we at DOCOMO take no responsibility in any event
for the resultant loss.
pIf you do not remember your respective security codes, you need to bring an
identification card such as your driver’s license, the FOMA terminal and UIM to the
handling counter of a docomo shop.
For details contact “docomo Information Center” on the back page of this manual.
Terminal Security Code
This is a four-digit number required for your identification to give orders/
apply at a docomo shop, docomo Information Center, or “お客様サポート
(User support)” site, or when you use respective network services. This
is determined at the time of contract but can be changed by yourself.
If you have “docomo ID/Password” for “My docomo”, the overall support
site for personal computers, you can use a personal computer to take
proceedings of changing your Network Security Code to new one.
Further, you can change it by yourself from “各種設定（確認・変更・利
用） [Respective settings (Confirmation/Change/Use)]” of “お客様サポー
ト (User support)” from i-mode.
※For “My docomo” and “お客様サポート (User support)”, see the inside of
the back page of this manual.
The four-digit “i-mode password” is required to register/delete My Menu,
apply for/cancel Message Services or i-mode pay services, etc. (Some
information providers may provide you with their specific password.)
The i-mode password is “0000” at the time of your contract, but you can
change it by yourself. (See page 180)
From i-mode, you can change the i-mode password by following
operation:
“iMenu” → “English” → “Options” → “Change i-mode Password”
For the UIM, you can set two security codes, namely the PIN1 code and
PIN2 code. These security codes are “0000” at the time of your contract,
but you can change them by yourself. (See page 114)
The PIN1 code is a four- to eight-digit number for checking the user each
time the UIM is inserted into the FOMA terminal or each time the FOMA
terminal is turned on, to prevent the unauthorized use by the third party.
By entering your PIN1 code, you can make or answer calls, or use
functions in the FOMA terminal.
The PIN2 code is a four- to eight-digit number for executing Reset Total
Cost, using the user certificate or applying for the issue of it, etc.
Network Security Code
i-mode Password
PIN1 Code/PIN2 Code
113
Security Settings
pIf you purchase a new FOMA terminal and use the existing UIM with the new FOMA
terminal, use the PIN1 code and PIN2 code you have set previously.
When the PIN1 Code/PIN2 Code Entry display appears, enter your four- to
eight-digit PIN1 code/PIN2 code and press Oo().
pThe entered PIN1 code/PIN2 code is displayed as “_”.
pIf you enter a wrong PIN1 code/PIN2 code three times in
succession, it is locked and the FOMA terminal cannot be
used. (The remaining number of times you can enter appears
on the display.)
When you enter the correct PIN1 code/PIN2 code, the
remaining number of times you can enter will return to three
times.
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even from
the PIN1/PIN2 Code Entry display.
The PUK (PIN unblock code) is the eight-digit number for releasing the
PIN1 code and PIN2 code lock state. You cannot change this code by
yourself.
pIf you enter a wrong PUK (PIN unblock code) 10 times in succession, the UIM is
locked.
PUK (PIN Unblock Code)
For PIN1 code
Wrong entry 3 times in succession
Entry OK Wrong entry 10 times
in succession
Security when the power turns on
Set new PIN code Consult the handling
counter of a docomo shop
Enter PUK (PIN unblock code)
Enter PIN1 code Enter PIN2 code
Operation of user certificate
Connecting to FirstPass sites
Change the default for the Terminal Security Code required for operating
functions to your own four- to eight-digit code so that you can make full
use of the FOMA terminal. Make sure you take a note of the security code
you have changed just in case you forget it.
1mSet./ServiceLock/Security
Change security code
Enter the current Terminal Security Code.
pIf you enter the code for the first time, enter “0000”.
2Enter a new Terminal Security Code (four to eight digits)
YES
You can set the FOMA terminal not to work unless you enter your PIN1
code when turning on the power.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityUIM setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
PIN1 code entry setON or OFF
Enter the PIN1 code.
pSee page 112 for the PIN1 code.
+m-2-9
<Change Security Code>
Changing Terminal Security Code
<UIM Setting>
Setting PIN Code
PIN1 Code Entry Set
114
Security Settings
You need to have set “PIN1 code entry set” to “ON” to change the PIN1
code.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityUIM setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Change PIN1 code or Change PIN2 code
Enter the current PIN1 code/PIN2 code.
pSee page 112 for the PIN1 code/PIN2 code.
2Enter a new PIN1 code/PIN2 code (four to eight digits).
pThe entered PIN1 code/PIN2 code is displayed as “_”.
3Enter the new PIN1 code/PIN2 code again.
If you enter a wrong PIN1 code/PIN2 code three times in succession on
the display requiring its entry, it is locked and the FOMA terminal cannot
be used. In this case, release the PIN1 code/PIN2 code lock and set a new
PIN1 code/PIN2 code.
1Enter the PUK (PIN unblock code)
(eight digits).
pThe entered unblock code is displayed as “_”.
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even
from the PUK Entry display.
2Enter a new PIN1 code/PIN2 code (four to eight digits).
pThe entered PIN1 code/PIN2 code is displayed as “_”.
Change PIN1 Code/Change PIN2 Code
Releasing PIN Lock
3Enter the new PIN1 code/PIN2 code again.
If you set Lock All, you can do no operations other than answering calls
and turning on/off the power.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock all
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
“ ” and “Lock all” appear and Lock All is set.
pTo release Lock All, enter your Terminal Security Code from the Stand-by
display. Even if you turn off the power, Lock All will not be released.
<Lock All>
Restricting Others from Using
Information
pYou cannot make calls during Lock All. However, you can make emergency calls at
110/119/118. Select “YES” from the confirmation display for dialing.
pYou can receive calls, but the callers’ data such as their names and images stored in
the Phonebook are not displayed except for their phone numbers. Further, the default
ring tone sounds.
pGPS Location Provision is available even during Lock All.
pIf you fail to release Lock All five times in succession, the power to the FOMA terminal
turns off. However, you can turn it on again.
pYou can receive mail messages or Messages R/F during Lock All; however, the
Receiving or Reception Result display for incoming mail messages and Messages R/
F does not appear. The icons such as “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appear after Lock All is
released.
pDuring Lock All, the notification icons, desktop icons, and schedule events are not
displayed on the desktop except “ ”, “ ”, and “ ”. When Lock All is
released, they are displayed.
pThe tickers of i-Channel are not displayed during Lock All.
pThe default Wake-up display appears during Lock All even when an i-motion file has
been set for the Wake-up display.
pEven if you set Lock All, IC Card Lock is not activated.
115
Security Settings
When you have lost your FOMA terminal or in other cases, you can lock
your personal data (such as Phonebook entries) and the IC Card function
of Osaifu-Keitai by contacting DOCOMO. Omakase Lock protects your
important privacy and Osaifu-Keitai. Also, if Omakase Lock cannot be set
at subscription but the communication to your FOMA terminal becomes
available within one year, the lock will be automatically set. However, if
you cancel or halt the line contract, change your phone number, or have
your new UIM issued (only when you specify a phone number to lock it)
at the loss of the UIM, etc., the lock will not be automatically set even
within one year.
To release the lock, contact DOCOMO by phone, etc.
※If you are a member of the DOCOMO Premium Club, you can use this service as
often as you need without handling charge. If you are not, the service is available on
chargeable basis. (However, you are not charged if you apply for this service at the
same time as applying for the suspension of the line or during suspension.) Further, if
you have signed up for Keitai Anshin Pack (Mobile Phone Security Package), you can
use Omakase Lock within the flat-rate fee of Keitai Anshin Pack (Mobile Phone
Security Package).
※Even during Omakase Lock, your FOMA terminal corresponds to the location
provision request of GPS function if “Location request set.” is set for permission.
pFor details on Omakase Lock, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA
version”.
<Omakase Lock>
Using Omakase Lock
■Setting/Releasing Omakase Lock
0120-524-360 Business hours: 24 hours
※You can set/release also from My docomo site via a personal computer or other
devices.
“Omakase lock” is displayed on the Stand-by display.
pDuring Omakase Lock, all the key operations are locked and respective functions
(including IC card functions) are disabled, except for answering voice calls/videophone
calls, putting them on answer-hold (On Hold), turning on/off the power, adjusting the
earpiece volume and adjusting the ring volume.
pYou can receive voice calls and videophone calls, but the callers’ data such as names
and images stored in the Phonebook are not displayed except for their phone
numbers. In addition, the ring image and ring tone are reset to the default. When you
release Omakase Lock, the former settings return.
pMail messages received during Omakase Lock are held at the i-mode Center.
pYou can turn on/off the power, however, Omakase Lock is not released by turning off
the power.
pGPS Location Provision is available even during Omakase Lock.
pNote that neither the UIM nor the microSD card is locked.
When Omakase Lock is set
Information
pEven while another function is working, Omakase Lock applies after finishing that
function.
pOmakase Lock can be set even when another lock function is set. However, if you
have set Public mode (Drive mode) before setting Omakase Lock, you cannot receive
voice calls and videophone calls.
pOmakase Lock cannot be set/released when the FOMA terminal is out of the service
area, turned off, or used overseas. Besides Omakase Lock might not be set
depending on your use, etc.
pWhen you have signed up for Dual Network Service and are using the mova service,
Omakase Lock cannot be set.
pEven when the contractor and the user of the FOMA terminal differ, the FOMA
terminal will be locked if the contractor offers to DOCOMO.
pYou can release Omakase Lock only when the UIM of the same phone number at
locking is inserted in your FOMA terminal. If you cannot release it, contact “docomo
Information Center” on the back page of this manual.
116
Security Settings
You can disable all phone calls and communication functions.
During Self Mode, the caller hears the guidance to the effect that radio
waves do not reach or the power is turned off. If you use DOCOMO Voice
Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service, you can use these services in
the same way as when the FOMA terminal is turned off.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecuritySelf modeYES
OK
“ ” appears and Self Mode is set.
pTo release Self Mode, perform the same operation.
<Self Mode>
Using Self Mode
Information
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even during Self Mode. In this case,
Self Mode is released.
pYou cannot receive mail messages, Area Mail messages, or Messages R/F during
Self Mode.
pEven if a call comes in during Self Mode, the icons notifying you of “Missed call” or
presence of Voice Mail messages do not appear after releasing Self Mode.
Including the functions which use personal information, you can set the
following functions not to be used.
<Personal Data Lock>
Hiding Phonebook Entries and Schedule
Events
・Desktop
・Record message
・Play/Erase msg.
・Select image
・Add to phonebook
・Group setting
・Search phonebook
・No. of phonebook
・Phonebook settings
・Voice dial
・Voice announce
・Kisekae Tool
・Machi-chara
・
Feel
＊
Mail image playback
・Restrictions
・Reject unknown
・Reset settings
・Initialize
・Mail
・Mail group
・Chat group
・i-mode
・Full Browser
・Bookmark
・i-Channel
・i-concier
・Camera
・Bar code reader
・1Seg
・Music&Video Channel
・MUSIC
・MUSIC player
・i-αppli
・i-Widget
・IC card content
・ToruCa
・GPS function
・Still image
・i-motion file
・Movie file
・Video
・Chara-den
・Melody
・microSD card
・Infrared communication
・iC communication
・Voice recorder
・PDF viewer
・Document viewer
・Alarm
・Schedule
・ToDo
・Alarm setting
・Own number
・Voice memo
・Movie memo
・Text memo
・UIM operation
・“Number setting” and
“Select ring tone” of Multi
number
・Data transfer
117
Security Settings
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityPersonal data lock
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Activate/Deactivate
“ ” appears and Personal Data Lock is set.
pYou can set Personal Data Lock also by pressing 6 for at least one second
from the Stand-by display.
pTo release Personal Data Lock, perform the same operation. When Timer Lock
ON At Close is set and Lock OFF At Open is activated, the display for releasing
Personal Data Lock appears also by opening the FOMA terminal.
When you select a function which cannot be used during Personal Data Lock, the
display for entering your Terminal Security Code appears depending on the function.
When you enter your Terminal Security Code, “ ” is cleared and you can temporarily
use the function.
pWhen you show the Stand-by display while no menu function is activated, Personal
Data Lock is set again.
Setting/releasing Personal Data Lock
To temporally release Personal Data Lock
Information
pDuring Personal Data Lock, some notification icons and desktop icons such as
“Record message”, “Phone number”, “URL” and “Mail address” do not appear,
however, they reappear when you release Personal Data Lock.
pDuring Personal Data Lock, the “Pre-installed” substitute image is sent to the other
party if you send the substitute image during a videophone call.
pIf you set “Lock all” during Personal Data Lock, “ ” is cleared and “ ” appears
instead.
pYou cannot set Personal Data Lock while “Reject unknown” is set.
Even during Personal Data Lock, you can release the lock for some
functions such as a notice of alarm and mail receiving.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityPersonal data lock
Enter your Terminal Security CodeCustomize
Do the following operations.
Setting Performance During Personal Data Lock
Alarm tone
Alarm Accept or Not accept
Schedule alarm Accept or Not accept
ToDo alarm Accept or Not accept
TV timer Accept or Not accept
Timer recording Accept or Not accept
Incoming call act
Mail receiving Accept or Not accept
Information
receiving
Accept or Not accept
Phonebook
available
You can set whether to refer to the Phonebook for an
incoming call.
Accept or Not accept
Display/Tone
Display setting You can set whether to activate the setting contents for
“Display setting”.
Accept or Not accept
Select ring tone You can set whether to activate the setting contents for
“Select ring tone”.
Accept or Not accept
i-Channel ticker Accept or Not accept
118
Security Settings
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Timer lock ON at close
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Personal data lock or IC card lock
Select an elapse time.
If you set to other than “OFF”, “ ” appears and then Timer Lock ON At Close is
set. The display asking whether to activate “Lock OFF at open” also appears.
Information
<Mail receiving>
pWhen “Not accept” is set, you can automatically receive Messages R/F, i-mode mail
messages, chat mail messages, and SMS messages during Personal Data Lock;
however, the Receiving or Reception Result display does not appear. Further, the
receiving operation such as ringing/vibration does not work, so you are not notified of
receiving. The icons such as “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appear after Personal Data Lock is
released.
pWhen “Not accept” is set, you cannot check a missed call or new mail during Personal
Data Lock, by pressing .> with the FOMA terminal closed.
<Display setting>
pWhether to validate/invalidate the setting contents for “Stand-by display” of “2in1
setting” is also set.
<Timer Lock ON At Close>
Setting Lock by Closing the FOMA Terminal
Information
pWhen the Stand-by display is not shown, or when another function is working with the
Stand-by display shown, the lock is not activated even after the specified time
elapses. However, when another function ends after closing the FOMA terminal, the
lock is activated after the specified time elapses.
pWhen “Reject unknown” is set, Personal Data Lock is not activated even after the
specified time elapses.
pWhen a call or mail message comes in after closing the FOMA terminal, or when you
open it, the elapsed time counter returns to 0 seconds.
You can set to show the display for releasing each lock for when you
open the FOMA terminal after Personal Data Lock or IC Card Lock is set
by “Timer lock ON at close”.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Lock OFF at openEnter your Terminal Security Code
Personal data lock or IC card lockON or OFF
You can lock dialing from the numeric keys. When using the FOMA
terminal for business purposes, private use of the FOMA terminal can be
prevented.
■Unavailable operations
・Dialing from the numeric keys
・Initial setting
・Phonebook (storing, editing, deleting, copying from the microSD card,
backing up/restoring by the microSD card, sending/receiving using Infrared rays,
sending/receiving using iC communication, and sending/receiving using Bluetooth
communication)
・Phone To/AV Phone To function
・Mail To function
pWhen this function is activated, the lock is temporarily released if you release each
lock. However, it is re-locked when the specified time elapses after closing the FOMA
terminal.
pIf you set “Key lock” during Timer Lock ON At Close, “ ” is cleared and “ ”
appears instead.
Lock OFF at open
Information
<Keypad Dial Lock>
Locking Keypad Dial
119
Security Settings
■Available operations
・Dialing from the Phonebook or Voice Dial
・Dialing from Redial, Dialed Calls, Received Calls, Sent Address, or Received Address
(Only phone numbers stored in the Phonebook)
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityKeypad dial lock
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
“ ” is displayed and Keypad Dial Lock is set.
pTo release Keypad Dial Lock, perform the same operation.
You can disable the keys except h.
1Press and hold Oo for at least one second.
“ ” appears and Key Lock is set.
pTo release Key Lock, perform the same operation.
Information
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 using numeric keys even during
Keypad Dial Lock.
pIf you set Keypad Dial Lock, you can send mail only when the address is called up
from the Phonebook and when the address stored in the Phonebook is called up from
Sent Address or Received Address.
<Key Lock>
Restricting Key Operation
Information
pYou cannot turn off the FOMA terminal during Key Lock. You cannot switch display/
nondisplay of icons and other indications by pressing -h from the Stand-by display.
pEven during Key Lock, you can answer an incoming call by pressing -d.
pEven during Key Lock, Quick Record Message works when you press and hold .> for
at least one second while a voice call or videophone call is arriving.
pYou can operate an earphone/microphone (option) and Bluetooth devices regardless
of the setting of this function.
pGPS Location Provision is available even during Key Lock.
You can disable the side keys < and > for when the FOMA terminal is
closed.
You can prevent operation errors in a bag.
1ma(for at least one second)
“ ” appears and “Side keys guard” is set to “ON”.
pTo set to “OFF”, perform the same operation.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callRecord display set
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
Received calls . . . . . . . . Sets whether to display Received Calls and Received
Address.
Redial/Dialed calls . . . . . Sets whether to display Redial, Dialed Calls and Sent
Address.
2ON or OFF
pWhen you set “Received calls” to “OFF”, you cannot play back record messages
of voice calls, either.
<Side Keys Guard>
Restricting Side Key Operation
<Record Display Set>
Setting not to Display Redial/Received
Calls
120
Security Settings
In ordinary mode, you cannot access/refer to Phonebook entries or
schedule events stored as secret data. In Secret Mode, you can select
whether to store the stored/edited Phonebook entries/schedule events as
secret data or as ordinary data. The Phonebook entries/schedule events
you have stored/edited in Secret Data Only are stored as secret data.
You can access/refer to all the data files in Secret Mode but can access/
refer to only the secret data files in Secret Data Only.
1mSet./ServiceLock/Security
Secret mode or Secret data only
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
When “Secret mode” is selected, “ ” appears and Secret Mode is activated.
When “Secret data only” is selected, “ ” blinks, the number of stored secret data
items is displayed, and then Secret Data Only is activated.
pSecret mode is activated also by pressing and holding 4 for at least one
second from the Stand-by display and entering your Terminal Security Code.
pIf you call up a Phonebook entry or schedule event in Secret Mode, “ ” stays lit
for ordinary data and “ ” blinks for secret data.
pTo deactivate Secret Mode or Secret Data Only, perform the same operation, or
press and hold 4(for at least one second) or press h from the Stand-by
display.
In Secret Mode or Secret Data Only, select “Release secret” from the Function menu of
the Phonebook entry or schedule event to be released.
<Secret Mode> <Secret Data Only>
Protecting Phonebook Entries and
Schedule Events from Prying Eyes
+m-4-0
Activate Secret Mode
+m-4-1
Activate Secret Data Only
To change secret data to an ordinary Phonebook entry or
schedule event
You can set whether to display the mail (secret mail) message from the
sender or to the destination address that matches secret data in the
Phonebook.
1lMail settingsSecret mail display
Enter your Terminal Security CodeON or OFF
Information
pOnly the Phonebook entries in the FOMA terminal can be stored as secret data.
pWhen you make a call to the party stored as secret data, his/her name is not
displayed but the phone number is displayed on the Dialing/Talking display.
pIf you call up a secret entry to make a call or send mail, the record is not stored in
“Redial”, “Dialed calls” or “Sent address”.
pIf you simultaneously activate “Lock all” and “Secret mode” or “Secret data only”,
deactivating “Lock all” deactivates “Secret mode” or “Secret data only”.
<Secret Mail Display>
Applying Secret for Mail in Mailbox
Information
pEven when “Secret mail display” is set to “OFF”, you can check secret mail in Secret
Mode or in Secret Data Only.
pWhen “Secret mail display” is set to “OFF”, and any secret address is included in
addresses of simultaneous mail, that mail message is not displayed.
pWhen “Secret mail display” is set to “OFF”, and any secret member is included in chat
members, chat mail messages of all chat members are not displayed.
pWhen “Secret mail display” is set to “OFF”, Area Mail messages are not displayed in
Secret Data Only.
121
Security Settings
You can set the security function for the Inbox, Outbox and Draft of the
Mail menu.
You need to enter your Terminal Security Code to display the mail
messages in security-activated boxes.
1lMail settingsMail security
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Put a check mark for boxes to be setl()
pWhen security is set, “ ” is added to the set box in the Mail menu.
Restrict Dialing
You can disable making voice calls and videophone calls to phone numbers other than
specified ones. When you use the FOMA terminal for business use, this function is
useful for preventing the private use. Call up the specified Phonebook entry and press
d or Oo( ) to make a voice call. (Press l( ) to make a videophone
call.) You can specify up to 20 phone numbers.
Call Rejection
You can reject voice calls and videophone calls from specified phone numbers. You can
set only the calls you do not want to receive to be rejected. The caller hears a busy tone.
You can specify up to 20 phone numbers.
This function is valid only when the other party notifies his/her phone number. It is
advisable to activate “Caller ID request” and “Call setting w/o ID” simultaneously.
<Mail Security>
Setting not to Display Mail in Mailbox
without Permission
Information
pIf you set security for the Outbox and Inbox, mail addresses are not stored in Sent
Address and Received Address.
<Restrictions>
Setting Restrictions on Phonebook Entries
Call Acceptance
You can receive voice calls and videophone calls only from specified phone numbers.
You can set only the calls you want to accept to be connected. You can specify up to 20
phone numbers.
This function is valid only when the other party notifies his/her phone number. It is
advisable to activate “Caller ID request” simultaneously.
1Detailed Phonebook displayi()
Restrictions
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
Restrict dialing. . . .You can dial the specified phone numbers only.
Call rejection. . . . . .You can reject calls from the specified phone numbers.
Call acceptance . . .You can accept calls from the specified phone numbers only.
Call forwarding. . . . See page 419.
Voice mail . . . . . . . .See page 416.
The set item is indicated by “★”.
pWhen a Phonebook entry contains multiple phone numbers, press Mo on the
detailed display to highlight the phone number you will set Restrictions for.
pTo set Restrict Dialing for multiple phone numbers, first set Restrict Dialing and
press r to return to the detailed Phonebook display; Mo to highlight the phone
number to be set for Restrict Dialing and continue the operation.
If you press h to return to the Stand-by display, additional settings cannot be
done. To do additional settings, release Restrict Dialing for the set phone number
and activate Restrict Dialing again, including the released phone number.
pTo release Restrictions, perform the same operation.
Restrict Dialing/Call Rejection/Call Acceptance
Information
pYou cannot set this function for Phonebook entries stored as secret data, and in the
UIM Phonebook.
pIf you activate “Personal data lock” while “Call rejection” or “Call acceptance” is set,
you can accept all incoming calls.
pYou cannot operate the following while “Restrict dialing” is set:
・Calling up/Referring to phone numbers other than specified
・Keypad dial (except for the calls to the specified phone numbers)
・Dialing from Received Calls (except for the calls from the specified phone numbers)
・Storing/Editing/Deleting Phonebook entries, copying Phonebook entries from the
microSD card, backing up/restoring by the microSD card, and copying Phonebook
entries to the UIM
122
Security Settings
1mPhonebookRestrictions
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
pThe set item is indicated by “★”.
pTo release all the Phonebook entries set with Restrictions, press i(),
select “Release”, and then select “YES”.
2Select a Phonebook entry.
The phone number set with Restrictions is displayed.
pTo release “Restrictions” per phone number, select the phone number you want
to release and select “YES”.
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even if you set “Restrict dialing”.
pWhen a call comes in from the phone number set with “Call rejection”, or from other
than the phone number set with “Call acceptance”, the call is stored in “Received
calls” as a missed call record and the “Missed call” icon appears on the Stand-by
display. Also, the caller hears a busy tone even if you have set Voice Mail Service or
Call Forwarding Service to “Activate”. However, if you set the ring time for Voice Mail
Service or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, when the FOMA terminal is out of
the service area, or when the power is turned off, the busy tone will not be played
back, activating Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service.
pYou can receive SMS messages or i-mode mail messages regardless of the setting of
“Call rejection” or “Call acceptance”.
Check/Release Restrictions on Phonebook Entries
Information
You can set whether to receive (accept) or not to receive (reject) a voice
call and videophone call according to the reason for no caller ID. There
are three reasons; “Unavailable”, “PublicPhone”, and “User unset”.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityCall setting w/o ID
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
Unavailable . . . . Calls from the other party who cannot notify his/her phone
number such as calls from overseas or from land-line phones
via call forwarding services.
(However, the caller ID might be notified depending on the
telephone companies the calls go through.)
PublicPhone . . . Calls from public phones, etc.
User unset . . . . . When the caller has set the caller ID not to be notified.
2Accept or Reject
pIf you select “Accept”, go to step 2 on page 92 to select a ring tone.
If you select “Same as ring tone”, the ring tone will be the one selected in “Phone”
of “Select ring tone”.
+m-1-0
<Call Setting without ID>
Setting Response to Incoming Calls
without Caller ID
Information
pIf you select “Reject”, the ring tone does not sound even if a call comes in, the call is
stored in “Received calls” as a missed call record and the “Missed call” icon appears
on the Stand-by display. Also, the caller hears a busy tone even if you have set Voice
Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service to “Activate”. However, if you set the ring time
for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, when the FOMA
terminal is out of the service area, or when the power is turned off, the busy tone will
not be played back, activating Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service.
pYou can receive SMS messages or i-mode mail messages regardless of this setting.
123
Security Settings
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callRing time
Do the following operations.
+m-9-0
<Ring Time>
Delaying Start of Ringing Operation
Ring start time You can set the FOMA terminal not to start ringing operation
immediately for when a voice call or videophone call comes in
from the party whose phone number is not stored in the
Phonebook. This function is effective as a countermeasure for
blocking nuisance calls such as one ring phone scam (one-giri).
ON or OFFEnter a start time (seconds).
pEnter from “01” through “99” in two digits.
Missed calls display You can set whether to display the call disconnected within the
time specified for “Ring start time” in Received Calls.
Display or Not display
Information
pWhen a call comes in from the party whose phone number is stored in the
Phonebook, the FOMA terminal starts ringing as soon as the call comes in even if
“186”/“184” is added to the phone number. However, during Personal Data Lock
(except for when you set “Phonebook available” to “Accept” for “Customize”), or for
the call from the party whose phone number is stored as secret data, ringing starts
according to the setting for this function.
pIf the ring start time is longer than the ring time for Record Message Setting, the
ringing operations do not start, activating Record Message instead. To activate
Record Message after starting the ringing operations, set the longer ring time for
Record Message Setting than the ring start time. The same applies to the ring time for
Voice Mail Service, Call Forwarding Service, and Auto Answer Setting.
You can reject voice calls and videophone calls from the party whose
phone number is not stored in the Phonebook.
This function is valid only when the other party notifies his/her phone
number. It is advisable to activate “Caller ID request” and “Call setting
w/o ID” simultaneously.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityReject unknown
Enter your Terminal Security CodeAccept or Reject
<Reject Unknown>
Rejecting Incoming Calls from Phone
Numbers which are not Stored in
Phonebooks
Information
pIf a call comes in from the party whose phone number is stored as secret data, the call
is not rejected, regardless of this setting.
pIf you simultaneously activate “Reject unknown” and “Call acceptance” of
“Restrictions”, the latter has priority.
pWhen a call comes in from anyone whose phone number is not stored in the
Phonebook while you set this function to “Reject”, the call is stored in “Received calls”
as a missed call record, and the “Missed call” icon appears on the Stand-by display.
Also, the caller hears a busy tone even if you have set Voice Mail Service or Call
Forwarding Service to “Activate”. However, if you set the ring time for Voice Mail
Service or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, when the FOMA terminal is out of
the service area, or when the power is turned off, the busy tone will not be played
back, activating Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service.
pEven when this function is set to “Reject”, the FOMA terminal follows the setting of
“Call setting w/o ID” if each setting of “Call setting w/o ID” is set to “Accept”.
pYou can receive SMS and i-mode mail messages regardless of this setting.
pYou cannot set “Reject unknown” during Personal Data Lock.
pYou cannot set “Reject unknown” to “Reject” while “Ring start time” of “Ring time” is
set to “ON”.
124
Security Settings
1mSet./ServiceVideophoneReject videophone
Enter your Terminal Security CodeON or OFF
This service enables you to save the Phonebook, images, mail
messages, ToruCa files, and schedule events (hereafter, “saved data
files”) in your FOMA terminal to the DOCOMO’s Data Storage Center and
to restore them when you unexpectedly lose your handset or change
models. Further, you can notify the concerned parties of your mail
address change at a time. You are not charged a packet communication
fee for sending the multi-address notice mail. If you have a personal
computer (My docomo), you can use this service more conveniently.
pFor details on Data Security Service, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version”.
pData Security Service is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis (You
need to subscribe to i-mode to apply for Data Security Service).
1Display of the data file to be savedi()
Move/copyConnect to Center or Store in Center
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
pYou do not need to select “Move/copy” depending on the function.
pWhen you operate from the Inbox list, Outbox list, Draft list, or Still Image list, put
a check mark for the data files to be saved and press l().
You can select up to 10 data files.
<Reject Videophone>
Rejecting Incoming Videophone Calls
<Data Security Service>
Using Data Security Service
Save to Data Storage Center
Note that if you delete Phonebook entries from your FOMA terminal and save
the Phonebook to the Data Storage Center, the Phonebook entries on the
Data Storage Center are also deleted. When you restore the Phonebook from
the Data Storage Center to your FOMA terminal, do the following operations.
1iEnglishMy Menu
電話帳お預かり (Data Security Service)
お預かりデータ確認 (Check saved data)
Enter your i-mode password.
pWhen you have subscribed to i-concier, operate iEnglishMy Menu
お預かり／ｉコンシェル (Data Storage/i-concier)
お預かりデータ確認 (Check saved data)Enter your i-mode password.
2
Select “
ケータイへダウンロード
(Download to mobile
phone)” from the Phonebook on the Data Storage Center
OK
pDownload starts in about 15 seconds. Wait for a while with the Stand-by display
shown.
On the site of the Data Storage Center, you can set so as to periodically
update and save the Phonebook entries in your FOMA terminal to the
Data Storage Center.
Information
pYou cannot save the data files stored on the UIM or microSD card.
pYou cannot save the files attached to mail.
pYou cannot save the following images:
・Images whose sizes exceed 100 Kbytes
・Images whose output from the FOMA terminal is prohibited
・Images other than in JPEG or GIF format
Restoring to your FOMA terminal
Information
pWhen the Phonebook entries saved to the Data Storage Center exceeds the number
of Phonebook entries storable in the FOMA terminal’s Phonebook, the excess entries
cannot be updated.
Auto-update of the Phonebook
125
Security Settings
1mLifeKitData Security Service
Do the following operations.
You can configure settings for Data Security Service.
1mi-concierl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
自動お預かり／更新設定 (Automatic saving/Update
settings)Follow the instructions on the display.
Information
pThe data files are not automatically updated while another function is working at the
time of Auto-update.
pIf the data files cannot be updated, the notification icon of “ ” (Data Sec. Service
UD) appears on the desktop. Select “ ” to show the update display.
Setting Data Security Service
Connect to Center See page 124.
Exchanging history You can display the records of communication with the Data
Storage Center.
Select a record.
pSelect a communication completion time in the list to switch to
the detailed display.
PB image sending You can set whether to save images set for the Phonebook
entries to the Data Storage Center.
ON or OFF
Information
<Exchanging history>
pUp to 30 records are saved. When more than 30 records are saved, the older records
are overwritten.
<PB image sending>
pYou cannot save the images whose output from FOMA terminal is prohibited.
Using Data Security Service with i-concier
自動お預かり／更新設定
(Automatic saving/Update settings)
You can check the data files at the Data Storage Center.
1mi-concierl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
お預かりデータ確認 (Check saved data)
Follow the instructions on the display.
You can update the data files at the Data Storage Center and in the FOMA
terminal.
1mi-concierl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
お預かりデータ更新 (Update stored data)
Put a check mark for data files to be updated
l()Enter your Terminal Security Code
YES
You can show the records of communication with the Data Storage Center.
1mi-concierl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
お預かり通信履歴 (Communication records of saving)
Select a record.
p
Select a communication completion time from the list to show the detailed display.
You can reset the items indicated by of “Function List” to their
default. (See page 448)
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsReset settings
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
お預かりデータ確認 (Check saved data)
お預かりデータ更新 (Update stored data)
お預かり通信履歴 (Communication records of saving)
+m-2-3
<Reset Settings>
Resetting Function Settings
Information
pYou cannot execute “Reset settings” while a Bluetooth device is connected or on
standby for connection.
126
Security Settings
You can delete the saved data and reset the setting contents of each
function to the default.
See “Function List” on page 448 for the setting at purchase.
pThe pre-installed data files are not deleted.
pAll the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli programs except “iD 設定アプリ (iD appli)” are
deleted. However, they might not be deleted depending on your usage state.
pThe data files stored in the pre-installed i-αppli programs are deleted. However, the
data files stored in Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli programs that have not been
deleted are not deleted.
pThe protected data files are also deleted.
pAll the stored data files are deleted regardless of the mode of 2in1.
pEven if you have deleted the pre-installed data files, they are restored when you
execute “Initialize”. However, if you delete the pre-installed i-αppli programs, they are
not restored.
pCharge the battery full before initializing the FOMA terminal. When the battery level is
not enough, you may not be able to initialize the FOMA terminal.
pDuring initialization, never turn off the power of the FOMA terminal.
pYou cannot use other functions during initialization. Also, you cannot receive calls or
mail messages.
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsInitialize
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES
When initializing ends, the power automatically turns off and then turns on and the
“Initial setting” display appears.
pAfter you execute “Reset settings”, the i-Channel tickers are not displayed. Then,
when the information is automatically updated or you press *Zo to receive the latest
information, the tickers automatically flow.
<Initialize>
Deleting Saved Data All at Once
Information
Information
pYou cannot execute “Initialize” while a Bluetooth device is connected or on standby for
connection.
pYou cannot delete the data saved to, stored in, or set for the UIM or the microSD card.
pYou cannot delete the setting of data communication set by a personal computer.
If you contract with the service of this function (Business mopera anshin
manager), you can initialize the data files (memory within the handset/
microSD card/UIM) of the target FOMA terminal by the offer from you
(administrator).
The display appears telling that operation is disabled and the initialization starts.
pWhen Remote Reset launches, all the key operations are locked and you cannot
operate the functions except for answering voice calls and answer-hold (On Hold).
When the initialization starts, you cannot use all the functions.
pWhen Remote Reset launches while the phone is ringing or during a call, all the key
operations except for d and h are locked. When initialization starts, ringing or the
call automatically finishes.
pTo restore the i-αppli programs, download them from the “P-SQUARE” site. For
downloading, you are charged an additional communication fee.
pAfter you execute “Initialize”, the i-Channel tickers are not displayed. Then, when the
information is automatically updated or you press *Zo to receive the latest
information, the tickers automatically flow.
pAfter you initialize the FOMA terminal, you cannot automatically obtain Music&Video
Channel programs. Access the Setting Confirmation display from the Music&Video
Channel menu to reflect the program setting.
pInitialization may take a while if the data to be deleted is bulky.
<Remote Reset>
Resetting Data by Remote Control
Information
■Inquiries
docomo Business Online
From personal computers http://www.docomo.biz (in Japanese only)
※You may not be able to access due to system maintenance, etc.
When Remote Reset launches
Information
p“Set time” is not initialized.
pThe microSD card might not be initialized when the FOMA terminal is connected to a
personal computer.
127
Security Settings
Besides introduced in this chapter, the following functions/services for
the Security Settings are available:
Other Security Settings
Functions/Service name Purposes
Reference
page
IC Card Lock To protect the IC card function from
being used illegally 296
Nuisance Call Blocking Service To prevent crank calls or vicious sales
calls from incoming 419
Caller ID Request To prevent the incoming call that does
not notify a caller ID 420
FirstPass To ensure safe and reliable data
communication by using electronic
authentication services
※Limited to FirstPass sites
201
Software Update To update software programs in the
FOMA terminal when necessary 497
Scanning Function To protect the FOMA terminal from
data liable to cause trouble 502
Receive Option To receive necessary mail only from
among the large volume of incoming
mail
143
i-mode Disaster Message Board
Service
Refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version”
Change Mail Address
Spam Mail Prevention
(Reject Mail with URL)
(Reject/Receive Mail Settings)
(Kantan Mail Settings)
(Reject Mass i-mode Mail Senders)
(SMS Rejection Settings)
(Reject Unsolicited Ad Mail)
(Confirm Settings)
Suspend/reactivate Mail
Limit Mail Size
Keitai-Osagashi Service
imadoco kantan search
Functions/Service name Purposes
Reference
page
Information
pThe priority order of functions simultaneously set to prevent nuisance calls is as
follows: “Nuisance Call Blocking Service” → “Call rejection” → “Reject unknown/Call
setting w/o ID” → “Ring time”.
128
129
Mail
i-mode Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Composing i-mode Mail/Deco-mail
Composing and Sending i-mode Mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Compose Message> 130
Creating and Sending Deco-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Creating and Sending Decome-Anime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Using a Template to Create Deco-mail/ Decome-Anime
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Template> 138
Attaching a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Attachments> 140
Receiving and Operating i-mode Mail
Receiving i-mode Mail Automatically . . . .<Mail Auto-receive> 142
Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively . . . . . . . <Receive Option> 143
Checking New i-mode Mail . . . . . . . . <Check New Messages> 144
Replying to Received i-mode Mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reply> <Reply with Quote> 144
Forwarding Received i-mode Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Forward> 145
When i-mode Mail with Files Attached/Pasted is Received . . . 145
Operating Mailbox
Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox/Draft
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Inbox> <Outbox> <Draft> 147
How to See Inbox/Outbox/Draft List and Detailed Display . . . . 149
Managing Mail Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Using Mail History
Displaying Sent/Received Mail Record
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Sent Address> <Received Address> 158
Configuring Mail Settings
Sorting Mail Automatically to Each Folder . . . . . . <Auto-sort> 159
Creating Mail Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Mail Group> 162
Setting Mail and Messages R/F . . . . . . . . . . . . <Mail Settings> 162
Using Message Services
Receiving Messages R/F Automatically
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Receive Message R/F> 165
Reading Received Messages R/F . . . . <Display Message R/F> 166
Using Early Warning “Area Mail”
Early Warning “Area Mail” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Receiving Early Warning “Area Mail” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Setting Early Warning “Area Mail”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Early Warning “Area Mail” Settings> 168
Using Chat Mail
Using Chat Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Chat Mail> 169
Creating Chat Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Chat Group> 173
Using SMS
Composing and Sending SMS . . . . . . . . . . . <Compose SMS> 174
Receiving SMS Automatically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Receive SMS> 175
Checking New SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Check New SMS> 175
Setting SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <SMS Settings> 176
130
Mail
Once you subscribe to i-mode, you can exchange e-mails over the
Internet as well as among i-mode phones.
You can attach files (photos, moving picture files, etc.) within 2 Mbytes in
total (up to 10 files) besides mail text. The i-mode mail also supports
Deco-mail, so you can change the font color, font size, and background
color of mail text. You can use the Deco-mail pictograms, so you can
easily send expressive messages.
Further, it supports Decome-Anime of Flash movies with messages and
images inserted.
pFor details on i-mode mail, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA
version”.
You can compose and send i-mode mail messages.
You can save up to 1,000 sent i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages to the Outbox.
See page 133 for creating a Deco-mail message.
1ll()
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can
select your sender’s address by
“ChangeFromAddr A/B” (see
page 426). “ ” instead of “ ”
is displayed when no sender’s
address is set, and “ ” instead
of “ ” is displayed when the
sender’s address is set for
Address B.
i-mode Mail
<Compose Message>
Composing and Sending i-mode Mail
Message
Composition display
Address field
Subject field
Attachment field
Text field
(When you enter
text, the number of
bytes is displayed.)
2Select the address fieldSelect an item.
Phonebook. . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number or
mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail address and press
Oo().
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address and press
Oo().
Mail group . . . . . . . . . Select a mail group.
Enter address . . . . . . Enter a mail address or phone number.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pIf the destination is an i-mode phone, you can send mail also by entering only the
part preceding the “@” mark of a mail address.
pSee page 131 for sending to multiple destination addresses.
pSee page 132 for deleting an added address.
3Select the subject fieldEnter a subject.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.
4Select the attachment fieldSelect an item.
pSee page 140 for how to select an attachment.
5Select the text fieldEnter text.
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch
characters.
pSee page 132 for pasting a header or signature.
pSee page 406 for the Function menu while entering
(editing) characters.
6Press l().
The animation display during transmission appears and the mail message is sent.
pTo cancel sending midway, press Oo( ) or press and hold r(for at least
one second). However, the mail message might be sent depending on the timing.
Message Entry
display
131
Mail
7OK
Information
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the characters might not be displayed
correctly at the destination.
pIf you send an i-mode mail message with a pictogram entered to another carrier’s
mobile phone, the pictogram is automatically converted into a similar pictogram at the
receiving end. Depending on the model or function of the receiving end’s mobile
phone, however, the pictogram might not be correctly displayed or be converted into a
character or “=” when no corresponding pictogram is found.
pWhen the sent mail messages stored in the FOMA terminal exceed the maximum
number/size of storage, they are deleted from the oldest one. However, protected
sent mail messages are not deleted.
pYou cannot compose an i-mode mail message when sent mail messages in the
Outbox are saved to the maximum number/size of storage and all of them are
protected, when 20 draft mail messages are saved, or when the Draft is full.
Release the protection for sent mail messages, or send/delete draft mail messages,
and then operate again.
pWhen you select “Compose message” from the Function menu such as when
entering a phone number, the mail address is entered as a destination address if the
phone number and mail address are stored in a Phonebook entry. When multiple mail
addresses are stored in the Phonebook entry, the first mail address is entered.
pIf you try to send the mail whose address is a phone number headed by “184”/“186”,
the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete prefix numbers and send
the mail.
pWhen a destination phone number or mail address is stored in a Phonebook entry,
the name stored in the Phonebook entry is displayed in the address field.
pYou cannot send mail to the addresses that include a comma (,).
pYou can enter an address in the To, Cc and Bcc fields.
pIf a Phonebook entry with a secret code is set as a destination address, the secret
code will be automatically added at sending. Even if a secret code is set for the
Phonebook entry, however, it will not be added and the i-mode mail message will be
sent as ordinary one unless the destination address is a phone number or “phone
number@docomo.ne.jp”.
p
If you store the secret code and send mail to a mail address other than that of DOCOMO
mobile phones, you might not receive the error message for unknown address.
pThe recipients might not be able to receive the full length of the subject depending on
their phones.
pYou can send up to 2,000 full-pitch characters in text to the i-mode phone of the mova
service.
pEach line feed is counted as one full-pitch character, and a space is counted as one
full-pitch or half-pitch character.
pThe mail message you entered a Deco-mail pictogram becomes a Deco-mail
message.
Function Menu of the Message Composition Display
Information
Send You can send the mail message.
Go to step 7 on page 131.
Preview Check the address, subject, text and attachments before
sending.
pYou can send the mail message by pressing l().
Save When composing or editing the mail, you can save it to the
Draft.
Operate receiver
Add receiver You can add multiple addresses in the address field to send
the same i-mode mail to multiple recipients simultaneously.
You can send the same mail to up to five addresses at the
same time.
Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select
a phone number or mail address.
Sent address. . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Enter address . . . . . . . Enter a mail address or phone
number.
pTo consecutively add addresses, select <Not entered> and
repeat the above operations.
pPress i( ) and select “Delete receiver” to delete
the selected mail address. Select “YES”.
pPress i( ) and select “Change rcv. type” to change
the type of mail. (See page 132)
pSelect an entered mail address on the Mail Composition
display to show the Address list.
l()
132
Mail
Delete receiver You can delete the selected address when there are multiple
addresses.
YES
Change rcv. type Select a receiving type.
To . . . . . This is the direct destination address. “To” recipients
are displayed at the receiving ends.※
Cc . . . . . Specify to let parties know the mail contents in
addition to the direct recipients. “Cc” recipients are
displayed at the receiving ends.※
Bcc . . . . Specify to hide the recipients from others. “Bcc”
recipients are not displayed at the receiving ends.
※They might not be displayed depending on the mobile
phone, device, or mail software of the receiving end.
Operate att. file
Activate camera You can shoot a still image or moving picture to attach to mail.
Select a shooting mode.
pSee page 217 and page 219 for how to shoot.
Attach file See page 140.
Delete att. file See page 142.
Template
Load template You can read in a Deco-mail template and create a Deco-mail
message.
pWhen the text has already been entered, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to delete the text.
Select a template.
The contents of the template are entered into the text.
pWhile selecting a template, press l( ) to check the
contents of the template.
pSee page 133 for creating a Deco-mail message.
Save template You can save the Deco-mail message you are creating as a
template.
YES
pSee page 194 when templates are stored to the maximum.
pSee page 138 for how to check the stored template.
Add header/sig. You can paste a header/signature at the beginning or ending
of the text of the i-mode mail message.
Add header or Add signature
pYou need to store the header/signature beforehand. (See
page 164)
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can select a signature to be
pasted from “Address A” or “Address B”.
ChangeFromAddr A/B In Dual Mode of 2in1, you can select a sender’s address. (See
page 426)
Information
<Operate receiver>
pYou cannot add any addresses if the address field for “To”, “Cc”, and “Bcc” already
contains five addresses in total or contains no addresses.
pYou cannot send i-mode mail if the “To” field is blank.
<Save template>
pThe subject of i-mode mail you are composing will be the title of the template. If no
subject is entered, the title takes the name of “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”.
(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)
<Add header/sig.>
pYou cannot paste a header/signature if the text, including the header/signature, would
exceed 5,000 full-pitch or 10,000 half-pitch characters.
pIf the decoration such as font color or font size is set for the top or end of text, the
header or signature will be decorated as well.
133
Mail
When editing an i-mode mail message, you can change the size of the
font and the color of the background as well as inserting images, thus
composing your own original mail.
You can create Deco-mail also using the templates (patterns).
(See page 138)
1Perform the operations in step 1 through step 4 on
page 130.
2Select the text fieldDecorate the text using Palette.
pSee page 134 for how to use Palette.
dSelect one of decorationsEnter text.
Enter textd(Select area)
Go to “Select area” on page 135.
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters. (The number of
characters you can enter decreases depending on the decoration.)
pOnce you decorate the mail text, “ ” appears.
Creating and Sending Deco-mail
Entering characters
Activated
decoration
Preview
Font color
Font size
Swing
Moving
font effect
Word
alignment
Deco-mail
pictogram
Ticker
Blink
Background
color
Insert line
Insert image
To enter text after selecting decorations
To set decorations after entering text
3Press Oo().
The Message Composition display is displayed.
Go to step 6 on page 130.
You can decorate the text of i-mode mail using Palette.
You can set multiple decorations for one point.
pYou cannot combine Word Alignment, Ticker, and Swing for one point.
pLines are inserted by Line Insert with the color specified by Font Color.
pIf Word Alignment, Ticker, or Swing is specified, the images and moving font effects
are inserted with the specified state.
pYou can enter Deco-mail pictograms using “Insert image”, and by “Pictograms” on the
Function menu as well.
Information
pEven if you delete the decorated characters, only the decoration data remain and the
number of characters you can enter might decrease. Clear the decoration and then
delete the characters. If you delete the characters by pressing and holding -r for at
least one second, the characters as well as the decoration data are deleted.
pWhen you reply with quote to a received Deco-mail message or you forward it, the
decorations and inserted images are entered in text as they are.
pIf you use a template containing an image unable to attach to mail for sending, the
image is deleted.
pWhen you send a Deco-mail message in excess of 10,000 bytes, the mail message
with the URL for browsing is received at some destination i-mode phones. However,
only the mail text without the URL for browsing might be received at some models.
pDecorations might not be correctly displayed if you send/receive Deco-mail messages
to/from the devices such as personal computers.
pThe movement of Ticker/Swing, blink and animation playback stop when a certain
period has passed.
Decorations
134
Mail
■How to use Palette
Press d from the Message Entry display to display Palette.
pWhen the cursor is over the decorated character, the Palette
appears with the icon for the set decoration depressed.
Highlight the depressed icon and press Oo( ); then
you can change, complete or cancel the decoration. You can
release the area selection also by pressing r while the
area is selected.
pPress i( ) to close Palette. You can close Palette
also by pressing r while you are operating on it.
Switch operations
You can switch between the operation of Palette and the
operation of entering text, each time you press d. You can
move the cursor and enter text with Palette displayed.
pAfter you enter text, the text entry operation returns.
When you use Palette in succession, press d and operate it.
■How to operate Decoration
Palette operation
Insert image
Font effect You can convert characters to a mark and insert it into the
text. The mark animates in various ways and conveys your
feelings to the other party.
Select a moving font effectEnter text.
pTo delete the moving font effect, move the cursor to the
moving font effect and press r.
My picture You can insert the image stored in “My picture” into the text of
mail.
Select a folderSelect an image.
pTo delete the image, move the cursor to the image and
press r.
Camera You can insert the image shot by the camera on the spot into
the text of mail.
Shoot a still image.
pThe image size of the camera is Sub-QCIF (128 x 96), QCIF
(176 x 144) or QVGA (240 x 320).
pTo delete the image, move the cursor to the image and
press r.
pSee step 2 and step 3 on page 217 for how to shoot.
Font color You can change the color of characters and lines to be
entered.
Select a colorEnter text.
pYou can switch between “20 Color” and “256 Color” by
pressing l().
pIn the font color changing mode, “ ” is displayed at the
upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter
text.
Background color
You can change the background color of the mail text.
Select a color.
pYou can switch between “19 Color” and “256 Color” by
pressing l().
Insert line You can insert a horizontal line into the mail text.
The line feed is inserted automatically, and the line is inserted.
pTo delete the line, move the cursor to the line and press r.
Undo You can return to the former status of the set decoration. You
can do it up to twice.
pYou can undo the operation also by pressing and holding
d for at least one second.
Reset all decor. You can release all the decorations.
YES
pIf you have inserted an image, the message “In-line image is
deleted” is displayed.
135
Mail
Select area You can set Font Color, Blink, Font Size, Word Alignment,
Ticker and Swing over the selected text you have entered.
You can also change the set decoration, add another
decoration, or cancel Blink, Ticker or Swing.
Select a start point.
pYou can select all text by pressing i( ) and
selecting “YES”.
Select an end point.
Set, change, add or cancel each decoration.
p“ ” is displayed at the upper right of the display
during selecting decoration area.
<Set, change, or add decoration>
Select an icon and set, change, or add decorations.
pSelect another icon in succession to change the multiple
decorations or add decorations.
pWhen Blink, Ticker, or Swing has been set, reselect each
icon and complete decorations.
<Release Blink, Ticker, or Swing>
Select the icon for Blink, Ticker, or Swing
Select the same icon again.
Font size You can change the size of characters to be entered.
Select a font sizeEnter text.
pIn the font size changing mode, “ ” or “ ” is displayed at
the upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter
text.
Select blink You can make characters to be entered blink.
Enter text.
The set characters are blinking.
pIn the blink setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper right
of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d (Reset blink)
Select ticker You can make characters to be entered and images to be
inserted flow (moving from right to left).
Enter text.
The line feed is inserted automatically and “ ” is displayed
before and after the cursor.
pIn the ticker setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper
right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d (Reset ticker)
The line feed is inserted automatically.
Select swing You can make characters to be entered and images to be
inserted swing (moving to left and right back).
Enter text.
The line feed is inserted automatically and “ ” is displayed
before and after the cursor.
pIn the swing setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper
right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d (Reset swing)
The line feed is inserted automatically.
Word alignment You can change the position of characters to be entered and
images to be inserted.
Select a word alignmentEnter text.
The line feed is inserted automatically, and the alignment is
set.
pIn the word alignment setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the
upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter
text.
136
Mail
Information
<Insert image>
pYou can insert up to 20 types of images within 90 Kbytes in total. However, you can
insert up to 2 types of Flash movies. Even if the inserted images are 20 types or
fewer, the number of inserted images reaches maximum depending on the operation
and the confirmation display for re-editing appears.
pIf multiple same images are inserted, they are counted as a single type of file. If you
copy/paste the image already inserted, that image is regarded as the same image
and handled as a single type of file. However, if you insert the same Flash movie, it is
handled as the second type of files.
pYou can apply Blink, Ticker, Swing, and Word Alignment to the inserted images,
however, you cannot apply them to Flash movies.
<Font color>
pIf you move the cursor to the character for which another color is set, the setting
changes to that color.
pThe color for pictograms is also subjected to the specified font color. To restore the
color to ordinary one, select “指定なし/Default”.
pYou cannot change the color of Deco-mail pictograms.
<Background color>
pYou cannot change the background color when editing the header or signature.
<Font size>
pIf you move the cursor to the character for which a different font size is set, the font
size is changed to that size of the character.
pYou cannot change the size of the Deco-mail pictogram.
<Select blink>
pYou cannot make Deco-mail pictograms blink.
Decome-Anime is a mail service which enables you to create expressive
mail messages which have Flash movies with messages and images,
using Decome-Anime templates.
You can create them using templates pre-installed or purchased on the
IPs (Information Providers) site.
1lCreate new Decome-Anime
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can select your sender’s
address by “ChangeFromAddr A/B” (see page 426).
“ ” instead of “ ” is displayed when no sender’s
address is set, and “ ” instead of “ ” is displayed
when the sender’s address is set for Address B.
2Perform the operations in step 2 through step 4 on
page 130.
Creating and Sending Decome-Anime
Edit Decome-Anime
display
Preview
Create Decome-Anime
display
137
Mail
3Select the text fieldPhone or microSDHighlight a
Decome-Anime template and press l ().
pWhen a Decome-Anime template is already selected, the Edit Decome-Anime
display appears. Go to step 4.
pYou can show the preview of the Decome-Anime template by selecting it.
pDepending on the Decome-Anime template, you cannot edit contents.
pWhen you send the contents of the Decome-Anime template as they are, go to
step 5.
pYou cannot edit the Decome-Anime text when you re-edit it from the Draft or
Outbox or when you forward it from the Inbox.
4Select the contents field to be edited.
Select the character entry fieldEdit characters.
Select the image entry field
Select a folder, and select the image to be changed.
pYou can show the preview by pressing m( ) from the Edit
Decome-Anime display or selecting “ Preview” from the character entry
field.
pWhen you enter characters, you cannot set decoration for them and cannot enter
Deco-mail pictograms. In addition, you cannot paste header or signature.
pWhen you insert a line feed in the middle of a line, the number of characters you
can enter decreases.
pWhen the total size of Decome-Anime template, characters, and images exceeds
90 Kbytes, you can no longer enter characters and images.
pDepending on the Decome-Anime template, you might not be able to insert
images even if the total size is 90 Kbytes or less.
pAs the fonts and display position of images and characters are fixed, you cannot
edit them.
pDepending on the character entry field, 」 (red) which shows the line feed position
or (orange) which shows the nonenterable area may appear on the Character
Entry (Edit) display.
5l()
The editing of the Decome-Anime message is completed.
Go to step 6 on page 130.
To edit characters
To change images
Information
pYou cannot create a Decome-Anime message when sent mail messages in the
Outbox are saved to the maximum number/size of storage and all of them are
protected, when 20 draft mail messages are saved, or when the Draft is full.
pThe images you can insert into Decome-Anime messages are GIF files (including
animation GIF), JPEG files, and SWF files.
pWhen animation GIF files or SWF files are inserted, the volume overflow for sending
might occur.
pEven when sending fails, you cannot re-edit it.
pIn the character entry field of some Decome-Anime templates, the text such as “使い
方 (how to use)” is pre-entered. Delete it before sending.
pWhen you send a Decome-Anime message, the mail message with the URL for
browsing is received at some destination i-mode phones. However, only the
Decome-Anime text without the URL for browsing might be received at some models.
pYou cannot use the received Decome-Anime message as a template.
Function Menu of the Create Decome-Anime Display
Send You can send the Decome-Anime message.
Go to step 7 on page 131.
Preview You can check the playback of Decome-Anime message before
sending.
pSee page 139 for how the Decome-Anime messages are
played back.
pPress i( ) to return to the Create Decome-Anime
display.
Save You can save the Decome-Anime message you are creating to
the Draft. After saving, you cannot re-edit the text of the
Decome-Anime message.
YES
pWhen you save it before selecting a Decome-Anime template, it
is saved as an i-mode mail message.
Operate receiver See page 131.
Operate att. file See page 132.
138
Mail
The template is the form data in which text and images are inserted.
Deco-mail templates and Decome-Anime templates are available.
Besides pre-installed templates, you can download templates from sites
(see page 192). You can save the sent/received/created Deco-mail
messages as the Deco-mail templates (see page 132 and page 157). You
can edit the saved Deco-mail templates using Palette. You cannot edit the
Decome-Anime templates.
pYou can delete the pre-installed templates. You can re-download them from the
“P-SQUARE” site (see page 193). When you use a UIM other than the one used for
downloading, the UIM security function (see page 37) is set for them.
Template You can read in a Decome-Anime template to create a
Decome-Anime message.
Phone or microSDHighlight a Decome-Anime template
and press l().
Go to step 4 on page 137.
pIf any Decome-Anime template is selected, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to discard the current contents
to read in the new one.
ChangeFromAddr
A/B
In Dual Mode of 2in1, you can select a sender’s address. (See
page 426)
Function Menu of the Edit Decome-Anime Display
Template See page 138.
Preview See page 137.
Delete You can delete the entered image. The image entry field
becomes blank.
Quit editing You can end the editing of the Decome-Anime message.
Go to step 6 on page 130.
<Template>
Using a Template to Create Deco-mail/
Decome-Anime
1lTemplateDeco-mailSelect a template.
pPress l( ) to
create a Deco-mail
message using the
contents of the template.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
pEven if you set “Header/
signature” to automatically
paste the header or
signature, you cannot paste
it.
pSee page 193 when you
select “Search by i-mode”.
Deco-mail Template
Deco-mail Template
list
Detailed Deco-mail
Template display
Function Menu of the Deco-mail Template List
Compose message You can create a Deco-mail message using the contents of
the template.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
Sort You can change the order of displayed templates.
Select an order.
Edit title Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters.
Info You can display the file size, saved date and time of the
template, and whether it contains images.
No. of templates You can display the number of saved templates.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for templates to be deleted
l()YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
139
Mail
1lTemplateDecome-AnimePhone or microSD
pSee page 193 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
Function Menu of the Detailed Deco-mail Template Display
Compose message You can create a Deco-mail message using the contents of the
template.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
Edit You can edit the contents of the template and save it.
Edit the textOo()YES or NO
YES . . . Overwrites and saves.
NO . . . . Saves as a separate file.
pSee step 2 and step 3 on page 133 for how to edit the text.
pSee page 194 when the templates are stored to the maximum.
Save insert image You can save images inserted into the template or Deco-mail
text, and set them as the Stand-by display and Wake-up display.
Select an imageYESSelect a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 192.
pSee page 194 when images are stored to the maximum.
Information
<Edit>
pThe title name when saved as a separate file takes “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”
(Y: Year, M: Month, D: Date, h: hour, m: minute).
<Save insert image>
pDeco-mail pictograms are saved to the “お気に入り (Favorite)” folder in the
“Deco-mail pictograms” folder.
Decome-Anime Template
2Select a template.
The preview of the template
is displayed.
pPress l( ) to
create the Decome-Anime
message with the template
contents. Go to step 2 on
page 136.
The animation is played back automatically. The effect tones may sound and the FOMA
terminal may vibrate for some Decome-Anime messages. Further, you can operate from
the playback display or preview of some Decome-Anime messages by using Bo, Oo,
0 through 9, s, or a.
pPress m( ) to pause the animation and effect tone during playback. Press
m( ) again to resume the animation playback.
pThe effect tone sounds following the setting of “Auto-start attachment”. Each time you
show the preview from the Decome-Anime Template list, the effect tone sounds
regardless of the setting.
pThe effect tone does not sound during Play Background.
pThe FOMA terminal vibrates regardless of the setting of “Vibrator” or “Manner mode
set”.
p
Some Decome-Anime messages refer to the phone information in your FOMA terminal.
To permit the use of the information in your FOMA terminal, set “Phone info use setting”
in “i-mode Browser set.” of “i-mode settings” to “Valid”. (“Valid” is set at purchase.)
pThe FLV file contained in a Flash movie is not played back.
Decome-Anime
Template list
Preview
When you show the Decome-Anime Playback display or
preview
140
Mail
You can send an i-mode mail message with files attached.
You can attach following files:
・Still image ・Melody ・i-motion file ・ToruCa file
・PDF file ・Phonebook entry ・Schedule event ・ToDo item
・Bookmark ・Word ・Excel ・PowerPoint ・SD other files
You can attach up to 10 files within 2 Mbytes in total.
Function Menu of the Decome-Anime Template List
Create Deco-Anime You can create a Decome-Anime message using the contents
of the template.
Go to step 2 on page 136.
Preview You can display the preview of the Decome-Anime template.
Edit title Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Copy to microSD See page 346.
Copy to phone See page 347.
Info You can display the title, file name, format, and whether it set
with file restriction.
Ir/ transmission
Send Ir data See page 360.
Send all Ir data See page 361.
transmission See page 362.
Delete
Delete this See page 138.
Delete selected See page 138.
Delete all See page 138.
<Attachments>
Attaching a File
pYou cannot attach files prohibited from being attached to mail or being output from the
FOMA terminal.
pRegardless of the “File restriction” setting, you can attach the still images/moving
pictures shot with your FOMA terminal or the files received via infrared rays.
pWhen you attach a file, another attachment field appears on the Message Composition
display.
pDepending on the destination i-mode phone, only the compatible files are received
within the memory space of that phone.
pIt might take a time to send the i-mode mail depending on the size of attached files.
1Message Composition display
Select the attachment field
Do the following operations.
Picture Select a folderSelect an image.
pSelect an attached image to display it. Press r to return to the
former display.
Melody Select a folderSelect a melody.
pSelect an attached melody to play it back. Press any key to stop
the playback.
imotion Select a folderSelect an i-motion file.
pSelect the attached i-motion file to play it back. Press r
during playback or stop the playback to return to the former
display.
ToruCa When the ToruCa file is a ToruCa file (details), it is attached as a
ToruCa file (details).
Select a folderSelect a ToruCa file.
pSelect the attached ToruCa file to preview it. Press r to return
to the former display.
PDF Select a folderSelect a PDF file.
pSelect an attached PDF file to display it. Press r to return to
the former display.
141
Mail
2Go to step 2 on page 130.
pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether to attach the file, select
“YES”. If you select “YES (default)”, the same confirmation display does not
appear afterward. If you select “NO”, the attached files of 100 Kbytes or larger are
deleted.
Phonebook Select a search methodSelect a Phonebook entry
Oo()
pWhen you specified a search method last time, the Phonebook
entry is searched by that method.
pSelect the attached Phonebook entry to display the details.
Press i() or r to return to the former display.
Schedule Select a dateSelect a schedule eventOo()
pSelect the attached schedule event to display the details. Press
r to return to the former display.
ToDo Select a ToDo itemOo()
pSelect the attached ToDo item to display the details. Press r
to return to the former display.
Bookmark Select a bookmark.
pSelect the attached bookmark to display the title, address, and
others of the bookmark. Press i() or r to return to
the former display.
Document file You can attach a file of Word, Excel, and PowerPoint.
Select a folderSelect a file.
Other You can attach a file stored in “SD other files”.
Select a folderSelect a file.
Information
<Picture>
pThe images are not sent as the attachments to i-mode terminals of the mova service;
they are sent in the form of URLs for browsing images and automatically attached with
expiry dates, and can be obtained by selecting URLs. The mail text that can be sent to
an i-mode terminal of the mova service is up to 184 full-pitch characters (369 bytes).
(When the acceptable number of characters for the mova terminal at the receiving
end is “250 full-pitch characters”)
When multiple files are attached, the files are deleted and just the mail text is sent.
pThe i-mode phone of the mova service cannot receive GIF images.
pYou can attach a Flash movie as well.
pWhen the file is a JPEG image whose size is larger than 2 Mbytes (except
Progressive type files), it is converted to 2 Mbytes or less.
pThe still image might not be received correctly or not be displayed or coarsely
displayed depending on the model at the receiving end.
<Melody>
pMelodies stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the melodies to the
FOMA terminal. (See page 349)
pIf the receiving end is other than P-09A, the sent melody might not be played back
correctly or the attachment might be deleted.
pYou cannot receive the attached melody on the i-mode phone of the mova service.
<imotion>
pSome i-motion files cannot be attached to mail or their file sizes may become larger or
smaller.
pi-motion files stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy them to the
FOMA terminal. (See page 349)
pDepending on the mobile phone of the receiving end, i-motion files cannot be correctly
received/displayed, might become coarse, or might be converted into consecutive still
images.
When sending a moving picture to other than the 2 Mbytes compatible model, it is
advisable to shoot with the following settings:
File size setting: Mail restrict’n (S)
Image quality: Normal
<ToruCa>
pToruCa files stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the ToruCa files to
the FOMA terminal. (See page 299)
142
Mail
You can delete a selected attached file or all attached files.
1Message Composition display i()
Operate att. fileDelete att. file
Delete this or Delete allYES
pTo delete a single file, highlight a file to be deleted.
When the FOMA terminal is in the service area, i-mode mail, SMS
messages and SMS reports automatically arrive. (See page 143 for
receiving i-mode mail after selecting it.)
When a mail message arrives, “ (pink)” appears at the top of the
display.
You can save up to 2,500 received i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages.
1When i-mode mail arrives, “ (pink)”
blinks and the message telling its
arrival appears.
When receiving is completed, the display shows the
number of received i-mode mail messages and
Messages R/F.
pYou can display the Inbox list by selecting “Mail”.
pTo cancel receiving midway, select “Cancel” or press and hold r for at least
one second while “Mail Receiving...” is displayed. However, the mail message
might be received depending on the timing.
pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds, “ ” (see page 28) appears on
the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies depending on
the setting for “Mail/Msg. ring time”.)
Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the Inbox list.
pSee page 31 for when the FOMA terminal is closed.
Delete Attached File
<Mail Auto-receive>
Receiving i-mode Mail Automatically
Reception Result
display
Information
pYou can automatically receive up to 100 Kbytes of an i-mode mail message including
attached files. You can manually obtain the attached files in excess of 100 Kbytes
from the i-mode Center. (See page 145)
pWhen the received mail messages exceed the maximum number/size of storage,
they are deleted in order of mail in the “Trash box” folder and older received mail.
However, unread or protected mail messages are not deleted.
pWhen the unread or protected mail messages in the Inbox has reached the maximum
number/size of storage, no new mail can be received and “ (dark blue)” is displayed.
To receive i-mode mail, delete received mail or read unread mail or release protection
of mail until “ (dark blue)” clears, and then perform “Check new messages”.
pYou can receive i-mode mail with melodies, still images, or other files attached. You
can receive incompatible attached files but you cannot display them.
pWhen you receive mail from a device that can set To, Cc and Bcc, you can check
whether the message was sent to you as To, Cc or Bcc.
pMail Messages received in the following cases are held at the i-mode Center:
・When the power is off ・During a videophone call
・During Self Mode ・When you are out of the service area
・During infrared communication ・While connecting to the FirstPass center
・During Omakase Lock ・During iC communication
・While copying to the microSD card
・While connecting to the Data Storage Center
・When the space of the Inbox is full with protected or unread messages
pWhen i-mode mail messages are held at the i-mode Center, “ (pink)” appears, and
when they are held to the maximum, “ (dark blue)” appears.
143
Mail
1Reception Result displayMail
Select an i-mode mail message to be
displayed.
pFor a Decome-Anime message, the Decome-Anime
Playback display appears. Press i( ) to show
the detailed display.
pPress and hold No for at least one second from the
detailed i-mode mail display to change the size of
characters. (See “Mail” on page 109.)
You can check the titles of i-mode mail messages held at the i-mode
Center and select them to receive, or delete them at the Center before
receiving.
To use this function, set “Receive option setting” to “ON” beforehand.
When “Receive option setting” is set to “ON”, you cannot receive i-mode
mail messages automatically. When a mail message comes in the i-mode
Center, “ ” is displayed.
Display Newly Received i-mode Mail
Information
pUndisplayable characters are replaced by spaces, etc.
pWhen the number of characters in the text of received i-mode mail exceeds the
maximum, “/” or “//” is inserted at the end of the text and the excess part is deleted
automatically.
pThe still image automatically displayed at opening might not be correctly displayed.
When the image is larger than the screen size, it is displayed shrunk with a
proportional ratio retained.
pSome decorations inserted into the decorated mail (HTML mail) sent from a personal
computer might not be displayed correctly.
<Receive Option>
Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively
You can set whether to select and receive necessary i-mode mail only.
1lMail settingsReceive option settingON or OFF
1lReceive optionOperate following the procedure
described in “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version”.
pWhen “Receive option setting” is set to “OFF”, the display to the effect that it will
be set to “ON” appears.
Press Oo( ) to set “Receive option setting”.
pYou can show the Receive Option display also by i
メニューリスト (Menu List)メール選択受信 (Receive Option).
Receive Option Setting
Select and Receive Mail Messages
Information
pEven when Receive Option Setting is set to “ON”, you will still receive all mail
messages if you execute “Check new messages”. If you do not want to receive all
mail messages, remove a check mark from “Mail”. (See page 163)
pWhen you show the Receive Option display, the “ ” icon goes off. Also, the “ ” icon
goes off if you turn the power off or show the mail display.
pYou cannot select SMS messages for receiving.
144
Mail
i-mode mail messages and Messages R/F arriving at the i-mode Center
are automatically sent to your FOMA terminal. However, the messages
will be held at the i-mode Center if your FOMA terminal cannot receive
mail because it is turned off or out of the service area, or when Receive
Option Setting is set to “ON”.
When “ (pink)” is displayed, receive mail by checking the i-mode Center.
See “Receive option” when “ ” is displayed.
1Press and hold l for at least one second.
“ (pink)” and “ (yellow)/ (yellow)” blink, the message “Checking...” is
displayed, and then you receive i-mode mail messages and Messages R/F.
As the checking results, the number of newly received i-mode mail messages and
Messages R/F is shown.
pYou can also execute “Check new msg.” during a voice call by pressing
i().
pTo cancel receiving midway, press and hold r for at least one second.
However, the mail message might be received depending on the timing.
<Check New Messages>
Checking New i-mode Mail
Information
pWhen icons such as “ (dark blue)”, “ (dark blue)/ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)”
are displayed, the FOMA terminal cannot receive any more i-mode mail messages or
Messages R/F. Delete unnecessary mail and messages, read unread mail and
messages, or release protection. (Read and unprotected mail and messages are
automatically deleted from the oldest one.)
pEven when i-mode mail messages are held at the i-mode Center, the “ (pink)” icon to
that effect, or the “ (dark blue)” icon telling that messages are held to the maximum
at the i-mode Center might not appear. (This happens if mail arrives at the Center
when, for instance, your FOMA terminal is off.)
pYou can select items to be checked by “Set check new messages”.
pYou cannot use this function to receive SMS messages. Use “Check new SMS” to
receive them.
By “Rep.w/ i-mode mail”, you can reply with a normal i-mode mail
message, and by “Rep. w/ Deco-Anime”, you can reply with a
Decome-Anime message. By “Reply with quote”, you can quote the text
of your received i-mode mail to reply. You cannot use “Reply with quote”
for Decome-Anime messages and SMS messages.
1Inbox list/Detailed Received Mail displayi()
Reply/forwardRep.w/ i-mode mail,
Rep. w/ Deco-Anime or Reply with quote
pPress l( ) to reply by i-mode mail.
pIf other recipients of the simultaneous mail are found, you can choose whether to
reply to the sender only or to all addresses.
Select “To sender” or “To all”.
pJust one quotation mark (see page 164) is added to the beginning of the text in
the i-mode mail to be replied with quote.
2Enter a subject and text, and then send.
When you have selected i-mode mail, go to step 3 on page 130.
When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 3 on page 174.
After you send mail, “ ” changes to “ ”.
<Reply> <Reply with Quote>
Replying to Received i-mode Mail
Information
pFor the sender’s address that cannot be replied to (such as when the mail address
exceeds 50 half-pitch characters), “ ” is displayed.
p“Re:” is prefixed to the subject of the mail message to be replied or replied with a
quotation. When the subject exceeds 100 full-pitch characters, the excess is deleted.
(When “Re:” has already been prefixed, it changes to “Re2:” and will be counted up to
“Re99:”.)
pEven if the i-mode mail text contains pasted data, you cannot quote it in your reply.
Also, you cannot quote it when using the DOCOMO keitai datalink or infrared
communication function. See page 150 for pasted data.
pIf the Deco-mail text contains images prohibited from being attached to mail or being
output from the FOMA terminal, such images will be deleted when you reply.
145
Mail
You can forward the i-mode mail or SMS messages to others.
1Inbox list/Detailed Received Mail displayi()
Reply/forwardForward
pYou can forward also by pressing m( ) from the Inbox list.
2Enter a subject and address, and send the mail.
When you have selected an i-mode mail message or a Decome-Anime message,
go to step 2 on page 130.
When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2 on page 174.
After you send mail, “ ” changes to “ ”.
<Forward>
Forwarding Received i-mode Mail
Information
p“Fw:” is prefixed to the subject of the mail message to be forwarded. When the subject
exceeds 100 full-pitch characters, the excess is deleted. (When “Fw:” has already
been prefixed, it changes to “Fw2:” and will be counted up to “Fw99:”.)
pWhen you forward an i-mode mail message with a file you have not obtained yet, the
file information is deleted.
pEven if the i-mode mail text contains pasted data, you cannot quote it in your
forwarding mail. Also, you cannot quote it when using the DOCOMO keitai datalink or
infrared communication function. See page 150 for pasted data.
pWhen a mail message is forwarded and a ToruCa file (details) that contains data
whose output from the FOMA terminal is prohibited is attached to the mail message,
the attached file returns to a ToruCa file before receiving details.
pWhen a mail message on the microSD card is forwarded, the attached file is deleted.
pWhen you “Forward” an SMS message received to Number B in Dual Mode of 2in1,
the sent SMS message is retained in the Outbox or Draft, even if you switch to A
Mode.
You can receive up to 2 Mbytes of the attached files on your FOMA
terminal. However, if attached files exceed 100 Kbytes, only information
of all or part of attached files is received. You need to obtain attached
files again from the i-mode Center.
The FOMA terminal supports following files:
・Still image ・Melody ・i-motion file ・Movie file
・ToruCa file ・PDF file ・Phonebook entry ・Schedule event
・ToDo item ・Bookmark ・Word ・Excel ・PowerPoint
You cannot play back or display the files other than above. You can save
them to any folder in “SD other files”, or use the i-mode mail to forward
them.
You can use “Attachment preference” to select the files to be received.
pWhen multiple data items are pasted, they might not be displayed.
You can obtain the receive option attached files held at the i-mode
Center.
1Detailed Received Mail display
Select an attached file which has not
been obtained.
After obtaining is completed, files are played back/
displayed.
When i-mode Mail with Files Attached/
Pasted is Received
Obtain Receive Option Attached Files
Information
pYou cannot obtain the attached files when the unused memory space in the Inbox is
smaller than the files.
146
Mail
You can play back or display the attached/pasted files already obtained.
1Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail
displaySelect an attached file.
The file is played back or displayed.
pFor a movie file or document file, the confirmation display appears telling that you
cannot play it back/display it. Play it back/display it after saving it to the microSD
card.
pFor the files which are not supported by the FOMA terminal, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to save them.
pYou can display only the first item when a file of Phonebook entries, schedule
events, ToDo items or bookmarks is attached.
Play Back/Display Attached or Pasted Files
Information
pWhen the sender’s device is other than P-09A, the received melodies might not be
played back correctly.
pWhen the first attached file is an obtained still image, that still image only is
automatically displayed when the mail message is opened. The size of a still image
displayed automatically is up to 8M (2448 x 3264).
pWhen the image size is larger than the screen, it is displayed shrunk.
pYou cannot play back a melody in excess of 100 Kbytes.
pYou cannot play back a Flash movie in excess of 100 Kbytes.
pThe FLV file contained in a Flash movie is not played back.
pYou cannot display a ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte and ToruCa file (details) in
excess of 100 Kbytes.
You can save the attached or pasted files that you have obtained. You
can set some files for a ring tone, or an image on the Stand-by display,
Wake-up display, or other displays.
1Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail
display/Detailed Message R/F display
Highlight an attached file and press i()
Operate fileSave attached fileYES
pMovie files are saved to the destination folder in “SD movie” folder of “Movie”.
pDocument files are saved to the destination folder in “Document viewer”.
pThe files not supported by the FOMA terminal are saved to the destination folder
in “SD other files”.
pEven if the files are supported by the FOMA terminal, some of them cannot be
saved to the FOMA terminal depending on the file such as an invalid data file or
whose size is too large. In that case, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to save it to the microSD card. When you save it, it is saved to a
destination folder in “SD other files”.
pThe confirmation display might appear telling that a part of the file cannot be
saved depending on the attached file.
2Select a destination or folder to save to.
For melodies, go to step 3 on page 193.
For still images, go to step 3 on page 192.
pBookmarks are saved according to each information of i-mode or Full Browser.
pIf the maximum number of files has already been saved to the microSD card or
there is no usable memory space when you save SD other files, movie files, or
document files, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete
unnecessary files to save new files. Select “YES”, and select unnecessary files
from the displayed list in Data Box to delete them. See page 194 when files other
than SD other files, movie files, or document files are stored to the maximum.
Save Attached or Pasted Files
147
Mail
You can save up to 2,500 received i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages.
You can save up to 30 Area Mail messages separately from i-mode mail
messages and SMS messages.
You can check the received i-mode mail messages, SMS messages, and
Area Mail messages.
pWelcome mail messages have been saved by default.
1lInboxSelect a folder.
pSee page 166 for displaying Messages R/F.
Information
pYou cannot save a melody in excess of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA terminal.
pYou cannot save a Flash movie in excess of 500 Kbytes to the FOMA terminal.
pYou cannot save a ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte and ToruCa file (details) in excess
of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA terminal.
<Inbox> <Outbox> <Draft>
Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox/Draft
Display Mail from Inbox
Inbox Folder list
2Select a mail message.
pWhen you select an unread
mail message, “ (pink)”
changes to “ ”.
pFor a Decome-Anime
message, the
Decome-Anime Playback
display appears. Some
Decome-Anime messages
are played back repeatedly.
Press i( ) to
show the detailed Received
Mail display. See page 139
for how the Decome-Anime
messages are played back.
pUse No to check other
mail messages. When you press No to show the Decome-Anime message
from the detailed Received Mail display, the Decome-Anime Playback display
does not appear.
pWhen the mail text is long, use Bo to scroll the display to check it. Further, you
can press m()/c() or </> to scroll page by page. You
cannot scroll the Decome-Anime messages.
Inbox list Detailed Received
Mail display
Information
pYou are not charged a communication fee for welcome mail messages.
pYou cannot reply to welcome mail messages.
pThe attached melody, effect tone of the Flash movie in mail text, and effect tone of
Decome-Anime text sound following the setting of “Auto-start attachment”. However,
when a mail message with an attached melody includes the effect tone of the Flash
movie in mail text or effect tone of Decome-Anime text, the melody is preferentially
played back. The effect tone does not sound.
pThe melody and effect tone do not sound during Play Background.
pThe FLV file contained in a Flash movie is not played back.
148
Mail
You can save up to 1,000 sent i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages.
You can check the sent i-mode mail messages and SMS messages.
1lOutboxSelect a folder.
2Select a mail message.
pFor a Decome-Anime
message, the
Decome-Anime Playback
display appears. Press
i( ) to show the
detailed Sent Mail display.
See page 139 for how the
Decome-Anime messages
are played back.
pUse No to check other
mail messages. When you
press No to show the
Decome-Anime message
from the detailed Sent
Mail display, the
Decome-Anime Playback display does not appear.
pWhen the mail text is long, use Bo to scroll the display to check it. Further, you
can press m()/c() or </> to scroll page by page. You
cannot scroll the Decome-Anime messages.
Display Mail from Outbox
Outbox Folder list
Outbox list Detailed Sent Mail
display
Information
pThe attached melody, effect tone of the Flash movie in mail text, and effect tone of
Decome-Anime text sound following the setting of “Auto-start attachment”. However,
when a mail message with an attached melody includes the effect tone of the Flash
movie in mail text or effect tone of Decome-Anime text, the melody is preferentially
played back. The effect tone does not sound.
pThe melody and effect tone do not sound during Play Background.
You can edit and send i-mode mail messages and SMS messages in the
Draft. You can save up to 20 i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages.
1lDraft
2Select a mail message.
When you select an i-mode mail message, go to step 2 on page 130. When you
select a Decome-Anime message, press l( ) and go to step 2 on
page 136. When you select an SMS message, go to step 2 on page 174.
Display Mail from Draft
Draft list
Information
pWhen you select the i-αppli mail folder, the mail-linked i-αppli that supports the folder
starts.
149
Mail
■Mail menu
Inbox, Outbox, and Draft might have the following marks:
■Inbox Folder list
Folder status
“ ” appears when unread messages are found,
and “ ” appears when Mail Security is activated.
Folder name
How to See Inbox/Outbox/Draft List and
Detailed Display
Unread mail messages or messages are
stored in the Inbox.
Failed-to-send mail messages are stored in the
Outbox.
Draft mail messages are stored in the Draft.
“Mail security” is activated.
(displayed also for chat mail)
Ordinary folder
i-αppli mail folder
Message R folder
Message F folder
Trash box folder
■Inbox list and detailed Received Mail display
Mail status and type
“ ” appears when protection is set.
Received date and time
The Inbox list shows the time for the mail received today, and shows the date for the
mail received until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and time the mail
was received. The Japanese date and time the mail was received from the Center is
displayed.
Phone number or mail address of the sender or of another recipient of simultaneous mail
(pink) Unread mail
Read mail
Forwarded mail
Replied mail
Type of the received mail (Detailed display only)
Sender’s mail address (Detailed display only)
Sender’s mail address that cannot be replied to (Detailed display only)
Recipient’s mail addresses of simultaneous mail (Detailed display only)
Recipient’s mail addresses of simultaneous mail that cannot be
replied to (Detailed display only)
Inbox list
For “Date+sender/
receiver subject”
 
Inbox list
For “Date+subject”
Detailed Received
Mail display
150
Mail
Subject
The number of characters you can display on the list varies depending on the setting
of “Mail list display”, and “Mail” of “Font size setting”. When a file is attached, it is
decreases by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top.
For SMS messages or Area Mail messages, the beginning of the text is displayed.
(“SMS” or “Area Mail” is displayed on the detailed display.)
Attached or pasted data
The detailed display shows the data volume as well.
<For Inbox list (Date+sender/receiver subject) and detailed Received Mail display>
“ ” is added to each icon when you execute “Delete att. file” (Detailed display only).
(blue) SMS messages in the
FOMA terminal
SMS messages on the UIM
Area Mail
Melody file
Image file
Inserted image file (List only)
i-motion file
Movie file
ToruCa file
PDF file
Document file
Phonebook entry file
Schedule event or ToDo item
file
Bookmark file
Other files
Attached file before obtaining
(Detailed display only)
Attached file suspended to be
obtained (Detailed display only)
Attached file failed to be
obtained (Detailed display only)
i-αppli start information
(List only)
i-αppli mail (List only)
Multiple files (List only)
Multiple pasted files
File with the UIM security
<For Inbox list (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>
Feel＊Mail icon
When you press c( ) from the Inbox list on the display, the Feel＊Mail image
is played back. See page 164 for Feel＊Mail.
Text of mail
■Outbox Folder list
Folder status
“ ” appears when Mail Security is activated.
Folder name
Ordinary folder
i-αppli mail folder
Attached file
i-αppli mail
File with the UIM security
151
Mail
■Outbox list and detailed Sent Mail display
Mail status
“ ” appears when protection is set.
Sent date and time
The Outbox list shows the time for the mail sent today, and shows the date for the mail
sent until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and time the mail was sent.
“ ” appears when the date/time is corrected.
Recipient’s phone number or mail address
(pink) Mail successfully sent
Mail failed to be sent
Simultaneous mail successfully sent to all addresses
(gray) Simultaneous mail sent to some addresses
(pink) Simultaneous mail failed to be sent to all addresses
Mail address successfully sent (Detailed display only)
Mail address failed to be sent (Detailed display only)
Outbox list
For “Date+sender/
receiver subject”
 
Outbox list
For “Date+subject”
Detailed Sent Mail
display
Subject
The number of characters you can display on the list varies depending on the setting
of “Mail list display”, and “Mail” of “Font size setting”. When a file is attached, it is
decreases by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top.
For SMS messages, the beginning of the text is displayed. (“SMS” is displayed on the
detailed display.)
Attached data
The detailed display shows the data volume as well.
<For Outbox list (Date+sender/receiver subject) and detailed Sent Mail display>
“ ” is added to each icon when you execute “Delete att. file” (Detailed display only).
<For Outbox list (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>
Text of mail
(blue) SMS messages in the
FOMA terminal
SMS messages on the
UIM
SMS report received [List
(Date+sender/receiver
subject) and detailed
display only]
Melody file
Image file
Inserted image file (List only)
i-motion file
Movie file
ToruCa file
PDF file
Document file
Phonebook entry file
Schedule event or ToDo item
file
Bookmark file
Other files
i-αppli mail (List only)
Multiple files (List only)
File with the UIM security
Attached file
i-αppli mail
File with the UIM security
152
Mail
■Draft list
Mail status
Saved date and time
The Draft list shows the
time for the mail saved
today, and shows the date
for the mail saved until
yesterday. “ ” appears
when the date/time is
corrected.
Recipient’s phone
number or mail address
Subject
The number of characters you can display on the list varies depending on the setting
of “Mail list display”, and “Mail” of “Font size setting”. When a file is attached, it is
decreases by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top.
For SMS messages, the beginning of the text is displayed.
Attached data
<For Date+sender/receiver subject>
(pink)
Ordinary mail
Simultaneous
mail
(blue) SMS messages
For “Date+sender/
receiver subject”
 
For “Date+subject”
Melody file
Image file
Inserted image file
i-motion file
Movie file
ToruCa file
PDF file
Document file
Phonebook entry file
Schedule event or ToDo item
file
Bookmark file
Other files
Multiple files (List only)
File with the UIM security
<For (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>
Text of mail
Attached file
File with the UIM security
Information
pSee “Mail list display” on page 162 to change a method to display the Inbox/Outbox/
Draft list.
pWhen “Name in phonebook” of “Mail list display” is checked, the name stored in the
Phonebook is displayed as sender or recipient. However, when the sender’s mail
address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, the name is not displayed even when
“phone number@docomo.ne.jp” is stored in the mail address field in a Phonebook
entry. Store the phone number part only to display the name. When a sender’s/
recipient’s phone number or mail address matches a Phonebook entry stored as
secret data, the name is not displayed. It is displayed in Secret Mode or Secret Data
Only.
Even when a sender’s/recipient’s phone number or mail address matches a
Phonebook entry not stored as secret data, the name is not displayed in Secret Data
Only. Switch to Secret Mode or release Secret Data Only to display the name.
pWhen “Message” of “Mail list display” is not checked, the text does not appear on the
Inbox/Outbox/Draft list.
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, “ ” is displayed at the end of the subject or sender’s/
receiver’s address on the list for received mail messages to Address B/Number B, or
sent/draft mail messages from Address B.
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, “ ” instead of “ ” is displayed at the upper left of the
detailed display for the mail messages received to/sent from Address B of 2in1.
153
Mail
Managing Mail Messages
Function Menu of the Inbox Folder List/Outbox Folder List
Operate folder
Add folder You can add a new folder. You can add up to 22 folders to
each of “Inbox” and “Outbox”.
Enter a folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Edit folder name You can edit the names of the added folders only.
Edit the folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Sort folder You can sort folders. You can sort the added folders,
Message R/F folder, and the i-αppli mail folders.
Use Bo to sort the orderOo()
Delete folder All the mail messages including secret mail in the folder will be
deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Open folder You can display the mail messages in the i-αppli mail folder
without running mail-linked i-αppli.
Read all
[Inbox Folder only]
You can change unread mail in the folder to already-read mail.
YES
Sort
Re-sort in this You can re-sort mail messages in the folder following the
sorting conditions specified by “Auto-sort”.
YES
pWhen the folder is applied with Mail security (see page 153),
you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
Re-sort in all You can re-sort mail messages in all Inbox/Outbox folders
following the sorting conditions specified by “Auto-sort”.
YES
pWhen the folder applied with Mail security (see page 153) is
found, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
Auto-sort See page 159.
Mail security You can set the folder to open only when you enter your
Terminal Security Code.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
pTo release it, perform the same operation.
Ir/ transmission
Send all Ir data See page 361.
All transmission See page 363.
No. of messages You can display the number of stored received mail
messages, Messages R/F, and sent mail messages.
Delete
DEL all read mails
[Inbox Folder only]
You can delete all the read mail messages including secret
mail in all Inbox folders. All the read SMS messages on the
UIM are deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
DEL all recv. mails
[Inbox Folder only]
You can delete all the mail messages including secret mail in
all Inbox folders. All the received SMS messages on the UIM
are deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
DEL all sent mails
[Outbox Folder only]
You can delete all the mail messages including secret mail in
all Outbox folders. All sent SMS messages on the UIM are
deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
154
Mail
Information
<Delete folder>
pYou cannot delete an i-αppli mail folder if corresponding mail-linked i-αppli exists.
If the software program does not exist, you can delete the i-αppli mail folder, but this
will delete both folders created in the Outbox Folder list and Inbox Folder list.
<Re-sort in this> <Re-sort in all>
pYou cannot re-sort the mail messages in the “Chat” folder and “Trash box” folder.
pMail messages which do not apply to the sorting conditions are sorted into the “Inbox”
or “Outbox” folder.
<Mail security>
pYou can neither delete the Mail-Security-activated folder nor edit its name.
Function Menu of the Inbox List/Outbox List/Draft List
Reply/forward
Rep.w/ i-mode mail
[Inbox only]
See page 144.
Rep. w/ Deco-Anime
[Inbox only]
See page 144.
Reply with quote
[Inbox only]
See page 144.
Forward
[Inbox only]
See page 145.
Edit
[Outbox only]
You can re-edit the sent mail message and send it again.
When you have selected an i-mode mail message, go to
step 2 on page 130.
When you have selected a Decome-Anime message, go
to step 2 on page 136.
When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2
on page 174.
pYou can re-edit also by pressing l().
Protect
Protect ON/OFF
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can protect the mail message so that it is not
overwritten and deleted. You can protect all the received
and sent messages. (2,500 received messages, 1,000
sent messages)
The protected one is indicated by “ ”.
pTo release protection, perform the same operation.
pYou can switch between protected and unprotected also
by pressing 1 from the detailed Received Mail display
or detailed Sent Mail display.
ProtectSLCT. ON/OFF
[Inbox/Outbox]
Put/Remove a check mark for mail messages to be
protected/unprotectedl()
pA check mark is placed to the mail already protected.
Move/copy
Move
[Inbox/Outbox]
Select a destination folder
Put a check mark for mail messages to be moved
l()YES
Move to trash
[Inbox only]
You can move mail messages to the “Trash box” folder.
The mail messages moved to the “Trash box” folder are
preferentially overwritten (deleted).
Put a check mark for mail messages to be moved to
the trash boxl()YES
UIM operation
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can copy or move the mail message to the UIM or
FOMA terminal. (See page 392)
Copy to microSD See page 346.
Store in Center See page 124.
Search/sort
Search mail
155
Mail
Search sender/
Search receiver
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a mail address or
phone number of a sender or recipient.
“Search sender” for received mail and “Search receiver” for
sent mail are displayed respectively.
Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and
select a phone number or mail
address.
Received address . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Sent address. . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Enter address . . . . . . Enter the mail address or phone
number.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
Search subject
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a subject.
Enter a subject.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch
characters.
Search
subject+msg
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a subject or text.
Enter a part of a subject or text.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch
characters.
Sort
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can change the order of displayed mail messages.
Select an order.
Filter
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can display the mail messages only that satisfy the
condition.
Select a type.
Display all
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can re-display all mail messages in “By date↑” order
after using Search Mail, or the Sort or Filter function.
Mail history
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can display the history of sent/received mail from the
sender or to the recipient being selected or displayed. Up
to 1,000 histories are displayed in the chronological order
from the most recent one.
Select a sender’s or destination address.
The target sent/received mail histories are displayed.
. . . . Sent mail
. . . . Received mail
pSelect a history to show the detailed Received Mail
display or detailed Sent Mail display. Press r to return
to the former display.
pYou can display also by pressing 7 on the detailed
Received Mail display or detailed Sent Mail display.
Color label
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can color the characters on the Inbox list and Outbox
list for classifying mail. Select “Default” to set ordinary font
color.
Select a color.
List setting You can select the item to be displayed on the list. You can
also switch between the name stored in the Phonebook
and the mail address/phone number for the display in the
sender’s/destination address field.
You can set to list the mail messages by subject
depending on the setting of “Mail list display”.
Select an item to be displayed.
pYou can switch each time you press c() from
the Outbox list and Draft list.
Ir/ transmission
Send Ir data See page 360.
Send all Ir data
[Draft only]
See page 361.
transmission See page 362.
All transmission
[Draft only]
See page 363.
156
Mail
No. of messages You can display the number of stored received mail
messages, sent mail messages and draft mail messages.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for mail messages to be deleted
l()YES
Delete read mails
[Inbox only]
You can delete all the read mail messages in the folder.
YES
Delete all SMS-R
[Inbox only]
You can delete all the SMS reports. While SMS reports are
displayed by the Search Mail function or Filter function,
only the displayed SMS reports are deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
DEL all frm folder
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can delete all mail messages in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Delete all
[Draft only]
You can delete all the draft mail messages.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Edit>
pTo use “Mail group” for destination addresses, delete all the entered addresses, press
+l( ) to complete the deletion, and then re-select the address field.
<Protect>
pYou cannot protect mail messages in the “Trash box” folder.
pYou cannot compose an i-mode mail message when sent mail messages are saved
to the maximum number/size of storage and all of them are protected.
<Move to trash>
pIf you move unread mail to the Trash box, it changes to read mail.
<Search subject> <Search subject+msg>
pEven if you set “No title”, you cannot search for the i-mode mail whose subject is not
entered and displayed as “No title”.
<Color label>
pColor Label applied to the mail messages is released when they are copied to the
microSD card, copied/moved to the UIM, copied/moved from the UIM or sent via
infrared rays or iC transmission.
pColor Label applied to the SMS messages on the UIM is released when the UIM is
dismounted and then mounted.
Function Menu of the Detailed Received Mail Display/
Detailed Sent Mail Display
Information
Reply/forward
Rep.w/ i-mode mail
[Received Mail only]
See page 144.
Rep. w/ Deco-Anime
[Received Mail only]
See page 144.
Reply with quote
[Received Mail only]
See page 144.
Forward
[Received Mail only]
See page 145.
Edit
[Sent Mail only]
See page 154.
Resend
[Sent Mail only]
You can re-send the sent mail message.
YES
Protect ON/OFF See page 154.
Move/copy
Copy Select an item to be copied.
pSee page 410 for how to copy.
pWhen the addresses of the sender and another recipient
of simultaneous mail are found or the multiple destination
addresses are found, select a mail address or phone
number to be copied.
157
Mail
Read map You can display a map by selecting a postal address or
others in the mail text.
Select a start pointSelect an end point.
GPS compatible i-αppli program starts via the selected
character string. (See page 196)
Move Select a destination folder.
Move to trash
[Received Mail only]
You can move the mail to the “Trash box” folder. The mail
messages moved to the “Trash box” folder are
preferentially overwritten (deleted).
YES
UIM operation You can copy or move the mail to the UIM or FOMA
terminal. (See page 392)
Copy to microSD See page 346.
Store in Center See page 124.
Operate file
Save attached file See page 146.
Save insert image See page 139.
Save D-pictograms
[Received Mail only]
You can save Deco-mail pictograms in the mail text at
once. You can save up to 20 of them.
YES
pSee page 194 when the Deco-mail pictograms are
stored to the maximum.
pSee page 318 for how to check the stored Deco-mail
pictograms.
Save as template You can save the sent/received Deco-mail message as a
template.
YES
pSee page 194 when the templates are stored to the
maximum.
pSee page 138 for how to check the stored template.
Property You can display the file name and file size of the image
inserted into the text.
Select an image.
Delete att. file YES
Store
Store address See page 82.
Add to phonebook See page 82.
Auto-sort You can store a sender or subject as a sort condition.
(See page 159)
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 30.
long press set. See page 386.
Mail history See page 155.
Color label See page 155.
Display
Name/address You can display the sender’s/destination address by the
name stored in the Phonebook or by the mail address/
phone number.
pYou can switch also by pressing 5.
Scroll See page 162.
Font size set. See “Mail” on page 109.
Display SMS report
[Sent Mail only]
You can check the result of the SMS message you sent, or
the date and time it arrived at the destination. To receive
the SMS report, set “SMS report request” to “ON”.
Ir/ transmission
Send Ir data See page 360.
transmission See page 362.
Delete YES
pYou can delete the mail message also by pressing 0.
158
Mail
Sent and received i-mode mail messages and SMS messages are stored
in Sent Address and Received Address, up to 30 messages each. You
can check the list for the mail addresses and phone numbers. When you
exchange mail messages with the same mail address or phone number,
the older one is deleted.
pWhen you use 2in1, up to 30 records for Address A (Number A) and up to 30 records
for Address B (Number B) are stored respectively regardless of the mode.
1Press and hold Vo for at least one
second.
: i-mode mail successfully sent
: SMS message successfully sent
: i-mode mail failed to be sent
: SMS message failed to be sent
: Time-difference corrected time
pPress m( ) from the Sent Address list to display Redial. When the Sent
Address list is displayed from Dialed Calls, you can press m( ) to display
Dialed Calls.
Information
<Resend>
pIf you re-send a failed-to-send mail message, it is saved as the sent mail message. If
you re-send the failed-to-send simultaneous message to all addresses, it is saved as
the sent mail message.
<Save as template>
pYou cannot execute this function while a mail message is shown in the multiwindow.
<Sent Address> <Received Address>
Displaying Sent/Received Mail Record
When Using Sent Address
Sent Address list
Press and hold Co for at least one
second.
: i-mode mail
: SMS message
: Time-difference corrected time
: i-mode mail message/SMS received to Address B/
Number B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1)
pPress m( ) from the Received Address list to display Received Calls.
2Select a record to be displayed.
The detailed display of the Address list is displayed.
pWith an SMS message for which the other party’s phone number is not notified,
the reason for no caller ID is displayed.
pTo send i-mode mail to the displayed address, press Oo( ) and go to
step 3 on page 130. To send an SMS message to the displayed phone number,
press Oo( ) and go to step 3 on page 174.
pTo store in the Phonebook, press m( ). Go to step 2 on page 82.
When Using Received Address
Received Address
list
Function Menu while Sent/Received Address is Displayed
Add to phonebook See page 82.
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message. The mail address
is entered in the address field.
Go to step 3 on page 130.
Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message. The phone number is
entered into the address field.
Go to step 3 on page 174.
159
Mail
Dialing When the mail address is stored in a Phonebook entry, you
can make a voice call or videophone call to the phone number
stored in the Phonebook.
Select a dialing type.
pWhen you select “Select image”, select an image to be sent
to the other party during a videophone call. To cancel the
setting, select “Release”.
pWhen multiple phone numbers are stored in a Phonebook
entry, you can dial the first phone number.
Dial
pThe set item is indicated by “★”.
pTo make an international call, select “Int’l dial assist”, select
an international call access code, and follow the procedure
above after selecting “Dialing” from the Function menu. (See
page 58)
pTo set Caller ID Notification, select “Notify caller ID”. (See
step 2 of “Set Caller ID Notification when Making a Call” on
page 56)
Feel＊Mail
[Received Address only]
The Feel＊Mail image is played back. See page 164 for Feel
＊Mail.
pYou can play back the Feel＊mail image also by pressing
c().
Change font size You can switch the font sizes for Redial, Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, Sent Address, and Received Address. (See
“Dialed/recv. calls” on page 110)
Redial/Dialed calls
[Sent Address only]
You can display the Redial list or the Dialed Call list.
Received calls
[Received Address only]
You can display the Received Call list. All received calls (all
calls) are displayed.
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 30.
long press set. See page 386.
Delete
You can automatically save the mail messages that satisfy the set
conditions to the specified folder. This function applies to only the added
folders and i-αppli mail folders.
1Inbox Folder list/Outbox Folder listi()Sort
Auto-sort
Follow the operation of the Function menu list on page 160 to set “Auto-sort”.
If you select a folder for which Auto-sort conditions have been set, the Auto-sort
Setting display appears.
You can specify a sort condition and folder from the detailed Sent/
Received Mail display.
1Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail
displayi()StoreAuto-sort
Do the following operations.
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for records to be deleted
l()YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Auto-sort>
Sorting Mail Automatically to Each Folder
Auto-sort Storing
Address sort You can set the displayed sender’s/recipient’s address for a
sorting condition.
Select a folder.
pWhen multiple addresses are found, select an address.
Subject sort You can edit the displayed subject and set it for a sorting
condition.
Edit the subjectSelect a folder.
160
Mail
The confirmation display appears asking whether to change the condition or to overwrite
it. Select “YES” to release the set condition and set the new one.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to change the condition. Select “YES”
to release the condition set for another folder and to set it for the selected folder.
pYou cannot change the setting for a Mail-Security-activated folder.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to add the address.
To change the condition
When the same condition is set for another folder
When storing another address for the folder set for “Address
sort”
Information
pYou can store a total of 700 addresses in all folders.
pWhen multiple conditions match, sorting is done in the priority below.
iαppli mail sort
Subject sort
Reply impossible/Send impossible
Address sort (Look-up address/Enter address)
Address sort (Look-up mail group)
Address sort (Look-up group)
Sort all
pMail messages sent simultaneously to multiple members cannot be sorted by
“Address sort” or “Send impossible”.
pArea Mail messages are not sorted by “Address sort”.
Function Menu of the Auto-sort Setting Display
Address sort
Look-up address You can look up a mail address or phone number in the
Phonebook or Received/Sent Address and set it to the folder
for sorting.
Select an item.
Phonebook. . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select
a phone number or mail address.
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Look-up group You can set a group to be sorted into the folder.
Select a group.
Look-up mail group You can set a mail group to be sorted into the folder.
Select a mail group.
Enter address You can directly enter a mail address or phone number to be
sorted into the folder.
Enter a mail address or phone number.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pWhen the mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”,
enter the phone number only. You can sort SMS messages
as well if you enter the phone number only.
Subject sort You can enter the subject of i-mode mail messages to be
sorted into the folder. One subject can be set per folder.
Enter a subject.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.
Reply impossible You can set reply-disabled mail messages to be sorted. You
can set for only one folder.
Send impossible You can set failed-to-send mail messages to be sorted. You
can set for only one folder.
Sort all You can set all mail messages to be sorted.
161
Mail
iαppli mail sort You can set to sort all mail messages into the i-αppli mail
folder. You can set this for only one i-αppli mail folder each in
the Inbox and Outbox. When “iαppli mail sort” is set, other
sort settings are disabled.
YES
Edit addr/subj You can edit and store the mail address, phone number, and
subject set for the folder.
Edit the mail address, phone number or subject.
List setting You can switch whether to display the destinations by the
name stored in the Phonebook or by the mail address or
phone number.
Name or Address
pYou can switch also by pressing c().
Release
Release this You can release the sort condition. (The item is deleted from
the Auto-sort Setting display.)
YES
Release selected You can select mail addresses or phone numbers, and
release the sort condition for them. (The items are deleted
from the Auto-sort Setting display.)
Put a check mark for mail addresses or phone numbers
to be releasedl()YES
Release all You can release all sort conditions. (The items are deleted
from the Auto-sort Setting display.)
YES
Information
<Look-up group>
pOn the Auto-sort Setting display, “ ” is added to the top of the name.
pYou cannot set groups on the UIM.
pThe secret mail messages received in ordinary mode (not in “Secret mode” or “Secret
data only”) are not sorted into the folder.
<Look-up mail group>
pOn the Auto-sort Setting display, “ ” is added to the top of the mail group name.
You can set sort conditions with a combination of ordinary sort conditions and sort
conditions by Address A/Address B of 2in1 (2in1 sort setting). You can set/check the
2in1 sort in Dual Mode. The sort conditions you set are valid in all modes of 2in1.
When you newly specify sort conditions and select an item from the Function menu list
on page 160, the display for specifying Address A/Address B appears. You can set the
2in1 sort also from the Auto-sort Setting display.
Default . . . . . .Does not specify sorts by Address A/Address B.
Address A . . . Specifies sorts by messages received to/sent from Address A.
Address B . . . Specifies sorts by messages received to/sent from Address B.
pYou can set only one type of the 2in1 sort to a folder.
pYou can set the same sort conditions to “Address A” and “Address B”. However, the
sort conditions you have set to Address B are automatically cancelled when you
deactivate “2in1setting”.
pThe 2in1 sort setting is set to “Default” when you newly specify a sort condition in A
Mode/B Mode of 2in1.
pYou can show only the sort conditions of “Address A” and “Default” in A Mode, and
those of “Address B” and “Default” in B Mode of 2in1. Even if you edit the sort
conditions, the 2in1 sort setting is not changed.
pWhen you execute “Auto-sort” from the detailed mail display, you cannot select a folder
to which you have set a 2in1 mail address which differs from that of the displayed mail
message, as a sorting destination.
pThe 2in1 sort setting is set to “Default” when you newly specify a sort condition by
“Auto-sort” from the detailed mail display.
<Subject sort>
pWhen the subject matches sort conditions for multiple folders, it is sorted to the folder
nearest to the “Inbox” folder or “Outbox” folder.
pEven if you set “No title”, the i-mode mail titled with “No title” because of no entry
cannot be sorted.
pSMS messages cannot be sorted by subject.
<Sort all>
pYou cannot sort SMS reports or SMS messages that have been directly received on
the UIM.
While you are using 2in1
Information
162
Mail
You can store mail addresses by group. You can send mail to regular
destinations.
You can store up to five addresses per group, and up to 20 groups.
1mPhonebook
Phonebook settingsMail group
Select a Mail group to be stored.
pWhen mail addresses are stored in a Mail group,
“ ” appears at the lower left of the display. Press l() to compose
i-mode mail to a selected Mail group set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 130.
2Highlight <Not stored> and press
l().
pIf you select a stored mail address, the Mail Group
Address Confirmation display appears.
3Enter a mail address.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pWhen you store multiple mail addresses, repeat step 2 and step 3.
+m-2-6
<Mail Group>
Creating Mail Group
Mail Group list
Detailed Mail Group
display
Function Menu of the Mail Group List
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to the Mail group.
Go to step 3 on page 130.
Edit group name Enter a name of the Mail group.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Reset group name You can reset the name of Mail group to the default.
YES
1lMail settingsDo the following operations.
Function Menu of the Detailed Mail Group Display/Mail
Group Address Confirmation Display
Edit address Go to step 3 on page 162.
pYou can edit the address also by pressing l().
Look-up address You can call up a phone number or mail address in the
Phonebook, Sent Address, or Received Address to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo().
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo().
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Mail Settings>
Setting Mail and Messages R/F
Scroll You can set the number of lines that are scrolled at a time for
when you press Bo from the detailed mail display, detailed
Message R/F display, Message Composition display and preview
display.
Select the number of lines.
Font size setting See “Mail” on page 109.
Mail list display You can set items to be displayed on the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list
by using radio buttons or check boxes.
Select a display formatl()
Message display You can set whether to display received mail in standard display
(from the top) or from the text.
Standard or From message
163
Mail
Mail security See page 121.
Secret mail display See page 120.
Auto color label You can specify the text color of the sender, received date/time
and others on the Inbox list by mail address. You can store up to
10 items.
<Not stored>Select an item.
Phonebook. . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo().
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo().
Enter address . . . . . . Enter a mail address or phone number.
pTo change the set color, press i( ) and select “Select
color”.
pTo delete the set item, press i( ) and select “Delete”
→ “Delete this” or “Delete all” and select “YES”. If you select
“Delete all”, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
Select a color.
Pred. conv. at reply You can set whether to preferentially display the words contained
in the subject and text of the received mail message as
conversion candidates when you reply to, reply with quote to, or
forward it.
ON or OFF
Header/signature See page 164.
Set check new
messages
You can select items to be checked from among i-mode mail,
Message R and Message F, for when you perform “Check new
messages”.
Put a check mark for the items to be checked
l()
Auto-display See page 165.
Receiving display You can set whether to display the Message Receiving and
Reception Result displays, even during operation of another
function.
Alarm preferred or Operation preferred
Alarm preferred
. . . Prioritizes the Message Receiving and Reception Result
displays when you have new mail.
Operation preferred
. . . Prioritizes the display of the current operation when you have
new mail.
Receive option
setting
See page 143.
Attachment
preference
You can set whether to receive the attached file with an i-mode
mail message. The attached files for which you remove a check
mark are held at the i-mode Center. (Even when you put a check
mark, if attached files exceed 100 Kbytes, all or part of attached
files are held at the i-mode Center.)
Put a check mark for items to be receivedl()
pPut a check mark for “Tool data” to receive Phonebook entries,
schedule events, ToDo items, and bookmarks.
pPut a check mark for “Other” to receive movie files, document
files, and files unsupported by the FOMA terminal.
Auto-start
attachment
You can set whether to play back the attached or pasted
melodies or sound effect automatically for when you display the
text of mail, or message R/F.
ON or OFF
Feel＊Mail See page 164.
Chat setting See page 172.
Check settings You can check each of “Mail settings”.
Information
<Message display>
pEven if “From message” is set, the message might not be displayed from the text
depending on the number of characters in the text.
<Auto color label>
pEven when you set this function, the text color of the mail message already received
does not change.
164
Mail
You can store a header, signature and quotation mark. Also, you can set
whether to automatically paste the header or signature.
1lMail settingsHeader/signature
Do the following operations.
<Set check new messages>
p If you do not want to receive Messages R and Messages F by “Check new
messages”, change these settings to “ ”.
<Auto-start attachment>
pYou cannot play back attached or pasted melodies or sound effect during Play
Background regardless of the setting of “Auto-start attachment”.
Header/Signature
Information
Header The header is the sentence such as greeting at the beginning of
the text.
Select the header fieldEnter a headerl()
p
You can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters.
pIf you do not want the header to be pasted automatically, select
“Insert” to change “ ” to “ ”. See page 132 for adding a
header by mail message.
Signature The signature is your name and other information, placed at the
end of the text.
Select the signature fieldEnter a signature
l()
p
You can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters.
pIf you do not want the signature to be pasted automatically,
select “Insert” to change “ ” to “ ”. See page 132 for
adding a signature by mail message.
pYou can set respective signatures for Address A and Address B
of 2in1. In Dual Mode of 2in1, select a signature to be set from
“Address A” or “Address B”.
pIf you put a check mark for “Insert”, the signature for Address A
or Address B is automatically pasted according to the mode of
2in1. In Dual Mode, the corresponding signature is
automatically pasted when sender’s address is set. Even if you
switch sender’s addresses, the pasted signature is not
automatically switched.
Feel＊Mail reproduces the atmosphere of a mail message by actions of
45 types of animated characters. Once you activate Feel＊Mail, a
Feel＊Mail image is played back after you receive an i-mode mail/SMS
message.
pTo end the playback, press h or r.
1lMail settingsFeel＊Mail
Do the following operations.
Quotation marks The quotation mark is the symbol indicating a quotation from
received mail for when you reply to mail.
Enter a quotation mark.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Information
pYou can set decorations in a header and signature.
pEven if you have put a check mark for “Insert”, the header and signature cannot be
pasted when you compose i-mode mail from a template or i-αppli.
pYou cannot paste the header, signature, and quotation marks to Decome-Anime
messages and SMS messages.
Feel＊Mail
Disp. /play new one A Feel＊Mail image is played back after you receive an i-mode
mail/SMS message.
ON or OFF
pWhen this function is set to “OFF”, a Feel＊Mail icon does not
appear on the Received Address list/detailed Received Address
display, the Inbox list, and the detailed Received Mail display
even while “Disp. /play in history” is set to “ON”.
165
Mail
Message services automatically deliver information you want to your
FOMA terminal.
When the FOMA terminal is in the service area, Messages R/F
automatically arrive from the i-mode Center.
When a Message R/F arrives, “ (yellow)” or “ (yellow)” appears at the
top of the display.
You can save up to 100 each of received Messages R/F.
1When a Message R/F arrives,
“ (yellow)” or “ (yellow)” blinks and
the message telling its arrival appears.
After the message is received, the number of received
mail messages and Messages R/F is displayed.
pYou can display the Message R/F list by selecting
“MessageR” or “MessageF”.
pIf “Auto-display” is set to other than “OFF”, the contents of received Message R/F
are automatically displayed. They are displayed for about 15 seconds.
pIf no keys are pressed for the specified duration, “ ” or “ ” (see page 28)
appears on the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies
depending on the setting for “Mail/Msg. ring time”.)
Press Oo, highlight “ ” or “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the
Message R/F list.
pSee page 31 for when the FOMA terminal is closed.
Disp. /play in
history
A Feel＊Mail icon appears on the Received Address list/detailed
Received Address display, the Inbox list, or the detailed Received
Mail display.
ON or OFF
<Receive Message R/F>
Receiving Messages R/F Automatically
Reception Result
display
Information
pReceived Messages R/F are not automatically displayed while a display other than
the Stand-by display is shown, while an i-αppli program is running, during Public
mode (Drive mode), during Lock All, or during Personal Data Lock.
You can set how to automatically display Messages R/F received during
standby or a voice call.
1lMail settingsAuto-display
Select an option for automatic display.
pWhen the Messages R/F exceed the maximum number/size of storage, they are
deleted from the oldest one. However, unread or protected Messages R/F are not
deleted.
pWhen the FOMA terminal cannot receive any more Messages R/F, “ (dark blue)” or
“ (dark blue)” is displayed. Delete unnecessary Messages R/F, read unread
Messages R/F or release protection.
pWhen the icon “ (yellow)” or “ (yellow)” is displayed, the i-mode Center holds
Messages R/F. When the icon “ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)” is displayed, the
i-mode Center can hold no more Messages R/F. Perform “Check new messages” to
receive them.
pEven after Messages R/F are displayed automatically, they are still displayed as
unread ones in the Message R/F list. However, if you scroll through the messages
during automatic display, they will be indicated as read ones.
pMessages R/F received in the following cases are held at the i-mode Center:
・When the power is off ・During a videophone call
・During Self Mode ・When you are out of the service area
・During infrared communication ・While connecting to the FirstPass Center
・During Omakase Lock ・During iC communication
・During copy to microSD
・While connecting to the Data Storage Center
・When the space for Messages R/F is full with protected or unread messages
Auto-display
Information
Information
pWhen you receive Messages R/F during a voice call, the message is displayed
automatically after the call ends.
pThe Messages R/F are not displayed automatically when “Mail security” is set for
“Inbox”, or when “Mail security” is set for “MessageR” folder or “MessageF” folder.
166
Mail
1lInboxMessageR or MessageF
Select a Message R/F to be displayed.
pWhen you select an unread
Message R/F, “ (pink)”
changes to “ ”.
pUse No to check other
Messages R/F.
pWhen the text of Message
R/F is long, use Bo to
scroll the display to check
it. Also, you can press
m()/c()
or </> to scroll page by
page.
■Message R/F list and detailed Message R/F display
Status of Message R/F
“ ” appears when protection is set.
<Display Message R/F>
Reading Received Messages R/F
Detailed Message R/F
display
Message R/F list
(pink) Unread Message R/F
Read Message R/F
Detailed Message
R/F display
Message R/F list
Received date and time
The list shows the time for the Message R/F received today, and shows the date for
the Message R/F received until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and
time the Message R/F was received.
Subject
The data attached or pasted
The detailed display shows the data volume.
Text of message
The phone number stored in the Phonebook is displayed by the name stored in the
Phonebook.
Valid melody file
Valid image file
Valid ToruCa file
Multiple attached files
Multiple pasted files
File with the UIM security
Function Menu of the Message R/F List
Protect
Protect ON/OFF You can protect a Message R/F not to be overwritten or
deleted.
You can protect up to 50 messages (Message R and
Message F each).
Protected messages are indicated by “ ”.
pTo release protection, perform the same operation.
Unprotect all YES
Search/sort
Sort You can rearrange the displaying order.
Select a displaying order.
Filter You can display only Messages R/F that satisfy the condition.
Select a displaying type.
167
Mail
Display all After you execute “Sort” or “Filter”, you can reset it and list all
Messages R/F by “By date ↑”.
No. of messages You can display the total number of Messages R/F stored in
the FOMA terminal, as well as the number of unread
messages and protected messages.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for Messages R/F to be deleted
l()YES
Delete read mails You can delete all read Messages R/F.
YES
DEL all frm folder You can delete all Messages R/F.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Search/sort>
pTo return to the former status, execute “Display all”.
pIf you close the list and re-open it, you can return to the list of all items.
Function Menu of the Detailed Message R/F Display
Protect ON/OFF See page 166.
Operate file
Save attached file You can save attached or pasted files. (See page 146)
Save insert image You can save the attached image and set it as the Stand-by
display, Wake-up display, or another display. (See page 139)
Save BG image YESSelect a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 192.
Save D-pictograms You can save the all Deco-mail pictograms inserted into the
text. (See page 157)
This service enables you to receive reports such as emergency
earthquake alerts distributed from the Japan Meteorological Agency.
pYou can receive Area Mail messages without i-mode contract.
pYou cannot receive Area Mail messages in the following cases※1:
・During Omakase Lock
・During Self Mode
・During international roaming
・During a voice call
・During a videophone call
・While copying data files between FOMA terminal and the microSD card
・During infrared communication
・During iC communication
・When you are out of the service area
・When the power is off
pYou might not be able to receive Area Mail messages in the following cases※1※2:
・During i-mode communication
・During data communication
・While accessing the Data Storage Center
・While updating software program
・While updating the pattern data
※1 You cannot receive the message once you failed to receive it.
※2 Even when you could receive it, the contents are not automatically displayed.
pThe contents are not automatically displayed when you receive them in the following
cases:
・During Public mode (Drive mode)
(When “Manner/Public mode set” is set to “Follow each mode set.”.)
・While operating the microSD card
・During streaming playback of i-motion file or movie file
Add to phonebook See page 82.
Delete YES
Early Warning “Area Mail”
168
Mail
When an Area Mail message arrives, the ring tone for Area Mail sounds.
“Ring volume”, “Ring time”, and “Vibrator” follows the settings of “Mail”.
When an emergency earthquake alert arrives, a dedicated buzzer (alert)
sounds, and the vibrator works to notify you. Further, the contents are
automatically displayed. “Ring volume” is fixed to “Level 4”, and
“Vibrator” is fixed to “Melody linkage”, so you cannot change their
settings. You can use “Area Mail settings” to set “Beep time”.
Up to 30 Area Mail messages are saved separately from i-mode mail
messages and SMS messages in the Inbox.
pJust after purchase, the buzzer sounds and the vibrator works regardless of the setting
of Manner Mode or Public mode (Drive mode) because “Manner/Public mode set” is
set to “Ring”.
1When an Area Mail message arrives,
“ ” lights, the message telling its
arrival appears, and the Call/Charging
indicator flickers.
pIf you press any key, the former display returns.
pThe contents of some Area Mail messages might be automatically displayed
when you receive them. To clear it, press Oo, r, or h.
pSee page 147 for displaying Area Mail messages.
Receiving Early Warning “Area Mail”
Reception Result
display
Information
pWhen a new Area Mail message comes in with 30 Area Mail messages saved, they
are deleted from the read oldest one. When all 30 messages are not read, they are
deleted from the oldest one.
pWhether the details of a received Area Mail message are displayed or not depends on
the setting by the Area Mail message provider.
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, you may not be able to receive Area Mail
messages.
1lArea Mail settingsDo the following operations.
<Early Warning “Area Mail” Settings>
Setting Early Warning “Area Mail”
Receive setting You can set whether to use Area Mail.
Yes or No
Beep time You can set the duration the beep sounds.
Enter a beep time (seconds).
pEnter it in two digit, from “01” through “30”.
Manner/Public mode
set
You can set an operation for when an Area Mail message is
received in Manner Mode or Public mode (Drive mode).
Select an item.
Ring. . . . The buzzer or ring tone sounds, and the vibrator
works regardless of the setting of Manner Mode or
Public mode (Drive mode).
Follow each mode set.
. . . . . . . . Follows the setting of Manner Mode or Public mode
(Drive mode).
Check ring tone You can check how the buzzer, ring tone, vibrator, and Call/
Charging indicator work for when “Quake Early Warning” or
“Disaster/Evacuation” is received.
Quake Early Warning or Disaster/Evacuation
Other menu
169
Mail
Receive entry You can register Message IDs for receiving information other
than Quake Early Warning and Disaster/Evacuation. You can
register up to 20 IDs.
pYou do not need to operate “Receive entry” for receiving
only Quake Early Warning and Disaster/Evacuation.
<New>Enter your Terminal Security Code
Enter a registration nameEnter a Message ID.
pTo edit a registered Message ID, highlight it, press
l( ), and then enter your Terminal Security Code.
pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters for
an arbitrary registration name. For a Message ID, enter 4
half-pitch characters specified by the service provider.
pYou can edit it also by selecting “Edit” from the Function
menu. Select “Delete this” or “Delete all” and enter your
Terminal Security Code. Then you can delete one or all
Message IDs.
pYou cannot edit/delete “Quake Early Warning” and
“Disaster/Evacuation”.
Information
<Receive entry>
pThe buzzer does not sound when you receive a quake early warning when “Follow
each mode set.” is set with the manner setting by “Manner mode” or “Super silent”.
However, the buzzer sounds with “Original” set to sound any of the following tones.
When every setting is set to mute, the buzzer does not sound:
・Phone volume ・Mail volume ・Alarm volume
・Memo tone ・Keypad sound
pEven when “Follow each mode set.” is set and “Vibrator” of “Original” is set to “OFF”,
the vibrator works if you receive a quake early warning.
You can send or receive chat mail messages to and from multiple
persons on a single display. To use Chat Mail, you need to store chat
members. You can easily store them by creating chat groups.
You can store up to six chat members including the user (yourself).
1lChat maili()
Chat member<Not recorded>
Enter a mail address.
pTo edit a stored member, select the member.
pWhen the mail address is “phone
number@docomo.ne.jp”, store the phone number only.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
<Chat Mail>
Using Chat Mail
Store Chat Members
Chat Member list
Information
pIf you edit the mail address of the stored member, the member’s name and image are
changed.
170
Mail
Function Menu of the Chat Member List
Edit You can edit the mail address.
Go to step 1 on page 169.
Refer address You can look up a phone number or mail address in the
Phonebook, Received Address, or Sent Address to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook. . . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select
a phone number or mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Received address . . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo().
Change member
Chat group You can store the members stored in a chat group as chat
members.
Group list or Member list
Group list . . . . . You can select members by chat group.
Member list . . . You can select members from all the
members stored in chat groups.
pIf you select “Group list”, select a chat group.
The members from the selected group are stored.
pIf you select “Member list”, check the members you want to
store and press l().
pIf you have already stored chat members, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to replace all the chat
members.
1lChat mail
2Oo()Enter characters.
pYou can enter up to 250 full-pitch/500 half-pitch
characters.
3Press l().
The chat mail message is sent.
The sent chat mail message is displayed at the top of the
Chat Mail display.
4The display for receiving chat mail
appears and a chat mail message is
received.
The received chat mail message is displayed at the top of
the Chat Mail display.
Repeat step 2 through step 4 to send and receive chat mail messages.
Mail group You can store the mail addresses stored in Mail group as chat
members.
Select a Mail group.
pIf you have already stored chat members, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to replace all the chat
members.
Display setting You can check the chat member’s name, image, background
color, and mail address.
pYou can press No to switch members.
pThe mail address of the user (yourself) is not displayed.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete all YES
Exchange Chat Mail Messages
Chat Mail display
171
Mail
5rYES or NO
YES . . . . You can delete read and sent chat mail message from the “Chat” folder.
NO . . . . . You do not delete read and sent chat mail message from the “Chat”
folder.
Chat Mail ends.
pYou can end Chat Mail also by pressing h.
pWhen no sent and received chat mail messages are found, the confirmation
display does not appear.
■Chat Mail display
Image
The image you have stored in Chat Group is
displayed.
Member name
The chat member’s name store in the chat
group is displayed. Also, the name is displayed
with a specified background color.
pWhen the name is not stored in the chat
group, up to eight half-pitch characters from
the beginning of the mail address are
displayed. When the mail address is stored in
the Phonebook, up to four full-pitch/eight
half-pitch characters from the beginning of
the name are displayed.
Broadcast mark
Displayed when the chat mail message set with multiple addresses is received.
(blue): All addresses are stored in Chat Member.
(dark blue): Addresses that are not stored in Chat Member are found.
Sent/Received date and time
The date and time the chat mail message was sent/received are displayed. The time is
displayed for the chat mail messages sent/received today and the date for the chat mail
messages sent/received until yesterday.
Text
The text of chat mail message is displayed. The number of characters of the text to be
displayed is up to 250 full-pitch/500 half-pitch characters.
If the text exceeds four lines, is displayed and you can switch the pages by pressing
No.
pYou cannot switch the page of the text on the Chat Mail history.
pThe text of the chat mail message successfully sent is displayed in black. The text of
the chat mail message failed to be sent is displayed in gray.
Current
Chat mail
Chat Mail
history

Input box
Entered characters (characters to send) are displayed from the beginning by a factor of
one line.
When a chat mail message arrives during standby, “ ” appears on the
desktop.
Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ); then Chat Mail starts
up.
Information
pThe communication fee for when you send chat mail messages to multiple chat
members is the same as for sending a chat mail message to one member. (However,
the information volume for the added address increases the communication fee.)
pWhen “Receive option setting” is set to “ON”, you cannot exchange chat mail
messages.
pWhen the Inbox is full of unread or protected mail messages, you cannot exchange
chat mail messages. Delete unnecessary mail messages or read unread mail
messages, or release the protection and then operate.
pAttached files or pasted data are not displayed.
pSent/Received chat mail messages are saved to the “Chat” folder.
pThe subject of a sent chat mail message is “チャットメール (chat mail)” (half-pitch
characters).
pEven when the chat mail text on the Chat Mail display contains the phone number,
mail address, or URL, the Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, and Web To functions are
not available. However, those functions will be available when Chat Mail is finished
and chat mail message is brought up from the “Inbox” or “Outbox”.
pDuring playing back a music file by MUSIC Player, a tone for the chat mail message
does not sound.
pIn B mode of 2in1, you cannot use Chat Mail.
If You Receive Chat Mail during Standby
Information
pMessages are recognized as chat mail messages in the following cases:
・When the sender’s address or destination address is stored in Chat Member or in a
chat group
・When the subject contains “チャットメール (chat mail)” (all full-pitch or all half-pitch
characters)
pEven when you receive a chat mail message from a member of a chat group other
than Chat Member while Chat Mail is running, “ ” appears.
172
Mail
If you start Chat Mail from a mail address or from a chat group that is not stored in Chat
Member, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete stored member and
start Chat Mail.
Select “YES”; then the current chat members are deleted and the sender’s mail address
or chat group members are stored in Chat Member.
If you start Chat Mail from the desktop
The sender’s mail address is stored in Chat Member. When the sender’s mail address
has been stored in a chat group, the members in that chat group are stored in Chat
Member. However, the mail address selected as the destination is only the mail address
of the sender.
If you start Chat Mail from Chat Group
The chat group members are stored in Chat Member. All members of the group are
selected as the destination.
If you start Chat Mail from the desktop or Chat Group
Function Menu of the Chat Mail Display
Send You can send the chat mail message.
Select receiver From among chat members, you can select destination
addresses to send the chat mail messages to.
Put a check mark for destination addresses to send the
messages tol()
Chat member You can store chat members. (See page 169)
Broadcast address You can check the destination addresses you have
simultaneously sent a chat mail message to.
pWhen there are destination addresses that are not stored in
Chat Member, the confirmation display appears asking whether
to store them in Chat Member. If you store them in Chat
Member, select “YES” and put a check mark for the destination
addresses to be stored and press l().
Reload You can receive chat mail messages that you could not
automatically receive. If you receive a new chat mail message,
the Chat Mail display is updated.
View first line You can display the latest chat mail message.
View last line You can display the oldest chat mail message.
1lMail settingsChat setting
Do the following operations.
Delete read mails You can delete all the received read chat mail messages and
sent chat mail messages including secret mail and chat mail
messages failed to send.
YES
Information
<Broadcast address>
pYou can store up to six members (including yourself) in Chat Member.
Chat Setting
Sound setting You can set a tone for when you send/receive a chat mail
message on the Chat Mail display.
Select a folderSelect a tone.
pThe tone does not sound when a chat mail message comes in
from a member not stored in Chat Member.
Chat image You can set whether to display images on the Chat Mail display.
ON or OFF
User setting You can set the name and image of the user (yourself).
Select the name fieldEnter a user name.
pYou can enter up to four full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters.
pIf you do not change the user name, go to the next step.
Select the image fieldSelect a folderSelect an image.
173
Mail
You can store the mail addresses you want to exchange chat mail per
group.
By storing multiple members in a group, you can set them as chat
members at a time.
You can store up to five mail addresses per group. You can create up to
five groups.
1mPhonebook
Phonebook settingsChat group
Select a chat group to be stored.
pWhen the selected chat group has any member,
“ ” appears at the lower left of the display.
If you press l( ), Chat group members are stored in Chat Member and
Chat Mail starts. Go to step 2 on page 170.
2Highlight <Not stored> and press
l().
pIf you select a stored mail address, the Chat Group
Address Confirmation display appears.
3Enter a mail address.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pWhen the entered mail address is stored in the Phonebook, and the image is
stored in the Phonebook, the image is also set.
pWhen the mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, store the phone
number only.
pWhen you store multiple mail addresses, repeat step 2 and step 3.
+m-2-6
<Chat Group>
Creating Chat Group
Chat Group list
Detailed Chat Group
display
Function Menu of the Chat Group List
Activate chat The members in the chat group are stored as chat members and
Chat Mail starts.
Go to step 2 on page 170.
Edit group name Enter a chat group name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Reset group name You can reset the name of the chat group to the default.
YES
Function Menu of the Detailed Chat Group Display/Chat
Group Address Confirmation Display
Edit You can edit the mail address.
Go to step 3 on page 173.
pYou can edit also by pressing l().
Refer address You can look up a phone number or mail address in the
Phonebook, Sent Address, or Received Address to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . .Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . .Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo().
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo().
Change member You can store members from a Mail group in the chat group.
Mail groupSelect a Mail group.
pIf you have already stored members in the chat group, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to replace all the
members.
Member setting You can set the member’s name and image. You can switch
members by pressing No.
Select the member name fieldEnter a member’s name.
pYou can enter up to four full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters.
pNot to change the member’s name, go to the next step.
Select the picture fieldSelect a folderSelect an image.
Delete YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
174
Mail
You can compose and send SMS messages. You can save up to 1,000
sent SMS messages including i-mode mail messages to the Outbox.
pYou can send and receive SMS messages to and from subscribers of overseas
carriers other than DOCOMO. For the countries and overseas carriers available for the
service, refer to the DOCOMO Global Service website.
pYou can move/copy the sent SMS messages to the UIM. (See page 391)
1lCompose SMS
2Select the address fieldSelect an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number.
Sent address . . . . . . . . Select a phone number and press Oo().
Received address. . . . Select a phone number and press Oo().
Enter address . . . . . . . Enter a phone number.
Only one address can be specified.
pYou can enter up to 21 digits (including “+”).
pWhen the address is that of overseas carriers other than DOCOMO, enter “+”
(press and hold 0 for at least one second), “country/area code”, and
“destination mobile phone number” in that order. When the mobile phone number
begins with “0”, enter the phone number except for the “0”. Also, you can enter
“010”, “country/area code”, and “destination mobile phone number” in that order
to send SMS messages. (When you reply to SMS messages received from
overseas, enter “010”.)
3Select the text fieldEnter text.
pThe number of characters you can enter differs depending on the “SMS input
character”.
4Press l().
The animation display during transmission appears and mail is sent.
5OK
<Compose SMS>
Composing and Sending SMS
SMS Composition
display
Address field
Text field
Information
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the characters might not be sent
successfully to the destination.
pWhen the sent mail messages exceed the maximum number/size of storage, they are
deleted from the oldest one. However, protected sent mail messages are not deleted.
pYou cannot compose an SMS message when sent mail messages in the Outbox are
saved to the maximum number/size of storage and all of them are protected, when 20
draft mail messages are saved, or when the Draft is full.
Release the protection for sent mail messages, or send/delete draft mail messages,
and then operate again.
pEven if “Activate/Deactivate” of “Caller ID notification” is set to “Deactivate”, the caller
ID is notified to the other party you send an SMS message to. If you attempt to send
an SMS message to the phone number headed by “184”/“186”, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to delete prefix numbers and send the mail.
pIf you set “SMS report request” to “ON”, you cannot send SMS messages to the
i-mode phone of the mova service.
p“+” is valid only at the beginning of the address.
pYou cannot send the message to addresses that include any characters other than
numbers, “#”, “:” and “+”.
pYou cannot start a new line while editing the text.
pThe special symbols (see page 475) are replaced by half-pitch spaces.
pEach space is counted as a character.
pYou cannot reply to the SMS message whose sender is User unset/PublicPhone/
Unavailable.
pIn B Mode of 2in1, you cannot compose SMS messages.
Function Menu of the SMS Composition Display
Send You can send the SMS message.
Go to step 5 on page 174.
Preview Before sending, you can check the address and the text contents.
pPress l( ) to send the SMS message.
Save You can save the SMS message you are composing or editing to
the Draft.
pYou cannot save the message when the address field and text
field are blank.
SMS report req. See page 176.
SMS valid. per. See page 176.
SMS input char. See page 176.
175
Mail
You can save up to 2,500 received SMS messages including i-mode mail
messages.
pYou can move/copy the received SMS messages to the UIM. (See page 391)
1When an SMS message arrives,
“ (pink)” lights and the message
telling its arrival appears.
When receiving ends, the display shows the number of
received SMS messages.
pYou can display the Inbox list by selecting “Mail”.
pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds, “ ” (see page 28) appears on
the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies depending on
the setting for “Mail/Msg. ring time”.)
Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the Inbox list.
pSee page 31 for when the FOMA terminal is closed.
1Reception Result displayMail
Select an SMS message to be
displayed.
pPress and hold No for at least one second from the
detailed SMS display to change the size of characters.
(See “Mail” on page 109)
<Receive SMS>
Receiving SMS Automatically
Reception Result
display
Information
pWhen the unread or protected messages in the Inbox has reached the maximum
number/size of storage, no new messages can be received and “ (dark blue)” is
displayed. To receive SMS messages, delete mail in the Inbox or read unread mail or
release protection until “ (dark blue)” clears, and then perform “Check new SMS”.
pWhen you receive concatenated SMS messages, they are displayed on the Inbox list
in order of arrival at the FOMA terminal.
Display Newly Received SMS Messages
When SMS messages arrive at the SMS Center, they are automatically
sent to your FOMA terminal, but will be held at the SMS Center if your
FOMA terminal cannot receive messages such as when it is off or out of
the service area.
You can receive the messages by “Check new SMS”.
1lCheck new SMS
2Return
If the Center holds SMS messages, the FOMA terminal automatically receives
them.
Information
pDepending on the characters entered in the received SMS message, spaces might be
displayed.
pWhile the sender’s address (phone number) is highlighted in the displayed SMS
message, you can press *Oo( ) to make a voice call or videophone call to the
displayed number (the Phone To/AV Phone To function).
Further, if the sender’s phone number is stored in the Phonebook, the stored “name”
is highlighted. In this case, you can dial the phone number in the same way.
pA Short Mail message is received as an SMS message on the FOMA terminal. When
the sender does not notify you of the phone number, the reason is displayed in the
sender’s field.
<Check New SMS>
Checking New SMS
Information
pSome SMS messages are not delivered immediately after checking.
pWhen “ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)”, etc. are displayed, you cannot receive any
more SMS messages. Delete unnecessary mail, read unread mail, or release
protection. (Read and unprotected messages are automatically deleted from the
oldest one.)
pYou cannot use this function to receive i-mode mail or Messages R/F. Use “Check
new messages” to receive i-mode mail or Messages R/F.
176
Mail
You can set whether to request an SMS report for when sending an SMS
message.
The SMS report lets you know that your SMS message was delivered to
the destination.
You can check received SMS reports in the “Inbox” folder.
1lSMS settingsSMS report requestON or OFF
pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the
setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.
You can set the period that the SMS Center holds an SMS message sent
but unsuccessfully delivered due to the out-of-service area, etc.
1lSMS settingsSMSvalidity period
Select a holding period.
pIf you select “None”, the stored SMS message is re-sent after a certain period of
time and deleted from the SMS Center.
pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the
setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.
<SMS Settings>
Setting SMS
SMS Report Request
SMS Validity Period
You can set the characters you can enter into the text of SMS messages.
You can set to enter only half-pitch alphanumeric characters and
half-pitch symbols.
1l
SMS settings
SMS input character
Select an item.
Japanese (70char.) . . . You can enter full-pitch and half-pitch characters. You
cannot enter pictograms except “ ” and “ ” (see
page 471). You can enter up to 70 characters for the text.
English (160char.). . . . You can enter only half-pitch alphanumeric characters
and half-pitch symbols. You can enter up to 160
characters for the text.
pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the
setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.
You can set the address and “Type of number” for the SMS Center. This
setting is for getting any service other than SMS Service you currently use.
1lSMS settingsSMS center settingUser setting
Enter an addressInternational or Unknown
pYou can enter up to 20 half-pitch characters for the address. However, if “#” or
“:” is included, you cannot set it for “International”.
pYou can reset User Setting to “DOCOMO” by ResetEnter your Terminal
Security CodeYES.
SMS Input Character
SMS Center Setting
※Normally, you do not need to change this setting.
177
i-mode/Full Browser
i-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Accessing Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <iMenu> 178
Using My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <My Menu> 179
Changing i-mode Password . . . . <Change i-mode Password> 180
Full Browser
Displaying Websites Designed for PC . . . . . . . <Full Browser> 180
Displaying a Site
Viewing and Operating Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Displaying Site Viewed in the Past. . . . . . . . . . . . . <Last URL> 187
Displaying Internet Websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Enter URL> 187
Saving Websites or Sites for Quick Access . . . . <Bookmark> 188
Saving Site Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Screen Memo> 189
Downloading Images, Melodies, etc. from Sites
Saving Images from Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Save Image> 192
Downloading Data from Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Download> 192
Flash Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Uploading Images, Moving Pictures, etc. to Sites
Uploading Files to Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Useful Functions of i-mode
Operations from Highlighted Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Setting i-mode
Setting i-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <i-mode Settings> 197
Using Certificates
Operating SSL/TLS Certificates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<SSL/TLS Certificate Setting> 201
Setting FirstPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Operate Your Certificate> 201
Changing Hosts for Certificate Issue
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Center Host Setting> 203
178
i-mode/Full Browser
i-mode is a service that enables you, by using the display of the FOMA
terminal supporting i-mode (i-mode phone), to use online services such
as site access, Internet access, and i-mode mail.
pi-mode is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis.
pFor details on i-mode, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.
i-mode
■Before Using i-mode
pContents of sites and websites (Internet websites) are generally protected by
copyrights law. Data such as text and images that you obtained to the i-mode phone
from sites and Internet websites can be used for personal entertainment but cannot
be used in whole or in part, as it is or after modification, for commercial purposes or
redistributed, unless you have permission from the copyright holders.
pIf you replace the UIM with another one or turn on the power with the UIM not
inserted, you cannot display/play back files, depending on the model, such as still
images/moving pictures/melodies obtained from sites, attached files (still images/
moving pictures/melodies and other files) sent/received by mail, screen memos, or
Messages R/F.
pWhen the file whose display and/or playback is restricted by the UIM is set for the
Stand-by display or specified ring tone, the FOMA terminal works with the default
contents when you replace the existing UIM with new one or turn on the power with
the UIM not inserted.
You can use a variety of services offered by IPs (Information Providers).
From the display of the FOMA terminal, you can check your bank
balance, reserve tickets, and do similar tasks. (IPs offer different types of
services. Some of them need to be applied for separately.)
1Press i.
While you are online, “ ” blinks.
p“ ” blinks while you are using the i-mode service
(during i-mode standby).
pTo cancel while accessing a site other than iMenu,
select “Cancel”. To cancel while obtaining a page, press
l().
pTo end i-mode, press hand select “YES” while the
site is displayed. “ ” goes off and i-mode ends. It may
take longer to end i-mode.
pWhen you set “i-mode button setting” to “Display i-mode
menu” in “Common settings” of “i-mode settings”, the
i-mode menu is displayed after pressing i from the
Stand-by display.
2Select an item (link).
Repeat selecting items (links) to display the desired site.
pYou can select underscored items on the displayed site. When you select an
item, it is highlighted.
pIf there is a number at the head of the item showing the link, you can connect to
that link directly by pressing the numeric key corresponding to that number.
(Some sites cannot be connected.)
<iMenu>
Accessing Sites
179
i-mode/Full Browser
The display for establishing authentication appears. When obtaining is completed, the
SSL/TLS page appears and “ ” lights.
pTo cancel during authentication, select “Cancel”. To cancel obtaining the SSL/TLS
page after authentication, press l().
pYou can display SSL/TLS※-compatible pages via i-mode and Full Browser.
※SSL/TLS are the safer data communication systems using authentication/encryption
technology to protect your privacy. SSL/TLS pages prevent eavesdropping and
information alteration during communication by exchanging encrypted data files.
Further, server authentication prevents web spoofing, thus making your personal
information such as credit card number or postal address exchanged safer.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to close the SSL/TLS page. Select
“YES” to display an ordinary site; “ ” goes off.
To obtain an SSL/TLS site (SSL/TLS page)
To return to a non-SSL/TLS site
Information
pDepending on the site, you may need to apply for the service in writing separately, or
to pay information fees to use it.
pThe maximum display size of the images on the site is 480 x 1324 dots. If an image is
larger than 480 x 1324 dots, it is displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio retained.
pDepending on the site, “ ” might be displayed when the image is not correctly
displayed.
pDepending on the site or data, you might not be able to download or save melodies,
PDF files, software programs, and others.
pWith some Internet websites (sites) supporting i-mode, the color setting might make
the text difficult or impossible to see.
pWhen the file size of the page you have received exceeds the maximum obtainable
size of a page, receiving is suspended. The data obtained so far might be displayable
by selecting “OK”. When you have accessed a page by i-mode, you might be able to
display the page in Full Browser by selecting “Switch to FB”.
pWhen you are asked from the site to send information about music you have played
back on the FOMA terminal, the confirmation display appears for about sending your
music information. Select “YES” to send the information (title names, artist names,
and played dates) of the music played back on the FOMA terminal. The sent music
information is used for the IP (information provider) to provide customized information
to you.
iMenu is available in English.
1iEnglish
English iMenu is displayed.
By registering your favorite sites in My Menu, you can access them easily
from the next time.
You can register up to 45 sites.
1Call up a page to be registeredRegister My Menu
pThe page configuration differs depending on the site.
2Select the i-mode password text box
Enter your i-mode password決定 (OK)
pThe entered i-mode password is displayed as “＊”.
pSee page 112 for the i-mode password.
pWhen SSL/TLS communications automatically start, a confirmation display appears
asking whether to do communications. Select “YES” to communicate. Select “YES
(default)” not to show the same confirmation display afterward.
Change to iMenu in English
Information
Information
pEnglish iMenu differs from Japanese iMenu.
pSome items in Japanese iMenu are not available for English iMenu.
pGenerally, “What’s New” is updated every other Monday.
<My Menu>
Using My Menu
Register Sites in My Menu
180
i-mode/Full Browser
1iEnglishMy MenuSelect a site to be accessed.
The i-mode password (four digits) is required to apply for/cancel
Message Services or i-mode pay services, and to configure i-mode mail
settings.
Pay careful attention to keep your i-mode password secret.
1iEnglishOptionsChange i-mode Password
Select the “Current Password” text box
Enter your i-mode password (four digits).
pWhen you enter your i-mode password for the first time, enter “0000” (four zeros)
which is set at a time of your contract.
pThe entered numeral is displayed as “＊”.
2Select the “New Password” text box
Enter a new i-mode password (four digits).
pEnter your own i-mode password.
3Select the “New Password (Confirmation)” text box
Enter your new i-mode password (four digits)Select
pEnter the same password that you entered in step 2.
Information
pSome sites cannot be registered in My Menu.
pWhen you subscribe to a pay site in the Menu list, it is automatically registered in My
Menu.
Access Sites from My Menu
Information
pThe Dual Network Service user might not be able to use the FOMA terminal to view
My Menu registered by the mova terminal, and vice versa.
<Change i-mode Password>
Changing i-mode Password
You can browse Internet websites designed for PCs using the Full
Browser function. You can display even the Internet websites that cannot
be correctly displayed by i-mode. However, you cannot display or
correctly display some Internet websites.
pThe data such as Home URL or Bookmarks registered via Full Browser cannot be
used for i-mode. The contents set by Full Browser are invalid for i-mode.
pNote that you are charged a high communication fee for the massive data
communication such as browsing Internet websites having many images or
downloading data files. For details on the packet communication fee, refer to “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.
1mi-modeFull Browser Home
The Internet website set as Home URL is displayed.
pWhen “FB usage setting” is set to “NO”, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to start Full Browser. Highlight “Yes” and select “OK” to switch settings of
“FB usage setting”, then Full Browser starts up.
Further, you can access a site for signing up a flat-rate service via i-mode by
selecting “To sign up a packet flat-rate service, click here”.
pTo end Full Browser, press h with an Internet website displayed and select
“YES”.
Information
pNote that if you do not remember the i-mode password, you need to bring an
identification card such as your driver’s license to the handling counter of a docomo
shop.
<Full Browser>
Displaying Websites Designed for PC
Information
pYou can display up to 1 Mbyte of data per page.
pIt may take long to display some Internet websites.
pYou cannot use the following functions in Full Browser:
・Phone To function ・i-αppli To function ・Media To function
181
i-mode/Full Browser
Two modes, “Keitai mode” and “PC layout mode”, are available for the
display of Full Browser.
1m
i-mode
i-mode settings
Full Browser set.
Display mode setting
PC layout mode or Keitai mode
PC layout mode
. . . Displays an Internet website in the same format as when it is displayed on
your personal computer in 800 (width) x 1400 (height) dots. You can browse
Internet websites by scrolling upward, downward, and sideways.
Keitai mode
. . . Displays an Internet website to fit in the display width of the FOMA terminal.
You do not need to scroll sideways; you can browse Internet websites only by
scrolling upward and downward.
pWhen you show an Internet website, you can switch the display modes each time
you select “Change disp. mode” of “Settings” from the Function menu.
Press l( ) from the display of Full Browser to switch to
“Operation mode”. The operation palette is displayed in Operation Mode,
and you can enlarge/reduce the display size and switch the windows.
Bo: Enlarges/reduces the display size.
No: Switch the windows.
pWhen you press i( ) in Operation Mode, the key
operation guide is displayed.
pTo scroll the display, press m() or c().
Switch Display Mode
Use Operation Mode
You can switch to Full Browser to show the Internet websites incorrectly
displayed by i-mode.
1While a page to be shown in Full Browser is displayed
i()Full BrowserSwitch to FBYES
Basic operating methods while a site is displayed are explained.
…: Accessing via i-mode
: Accessing via Full Browser
…: Displaying a screen memo
: Displaying a captured image
…: Displaying in the multiwindow
…Window number/Number of windows
…: During communication in another window
: During communication in another frame
…: PC layout mode
: Keitai mode
…: Displaying in an enlarged frame
…: Normal pointer : Selecting a link
: Obtaining or processing data : Drag mode
: Dragging an object : Selecting a text input field
: Selecting a Flash movie : Selecting an operable Flash movie
: Selecting a text-enterable Flash movie
Switch from i-mode to Full Browser
Information
pWith Full Browser, note that the billing system differs from that of i-mode.
pWhen you switch to Full Browser with multiple windows opened, the pages in other
windows are closed and you cannot return to those pages by -m().
pYou cannot correctly display some Internet websites.
Viewing and Operating Sites
About Site Viewing Display

182
i-mode/Full Browser
■Operations while a site is displayed
※For i-mode, each time of pressing l( ) switches between the page move
operation and display scroll operation.
Operation
Key operation
i-mode Full Browser
Keitai mode PC layout mode
Return to previous
page
m()
※
Forward to next page c()
※
Scroll display Bo
(Mo while a pointer
is displayed.)
Bo
(Mo while a pointer
is displayed.) or </
>
Mo
Move highlighted Mo—
Switch to Drag mode
(Only while a pointer
is displayed)
—
Oo(for at least one
second)
Scroll the displays
page by page
</> or
m()/
c()
※
pTo move to the
top/end of the
page, press and
hold the key for at
least one second.
a/s
pTo move to the top/end of the page,
press and hold the key for at least one
second.
Reload —0
Display Bookmark
Folder list —1
Information
pWhen you try to switch the key operation functions by pressing +l(), a
confirmation display appears asking whether to switch them. Select “YES” to switch.
Select “YES (default)” not to show the same confirmation display afterward.
The FOMA terminal saves the files such as the displayed Internet
websites to a temporal storage area called a cache. By pressing
m() or c( ), you can show the page stored in the cache
without communicating.
You can move even between i-mode and Full Browser.
pThe FOMA terminal starts communication when you show a page that exceeds the
cache size of the FOMA terminal or that is configured (created) to always read its latest
information.
pWhen i-mode or Full Browser ends, the cache is cleared.
1Press m() to return to the previous page.
Press c( ) to go to the next page.
By pressing m( ) repeatedly, you can move back through the pages that you
have displayed so far. However, if you display a different page (“D”) from the previous
page (“B”), you cannot return to “C” from “D” even when you press m( ) twice.
Instead, the pages are displayed in the order of “D” → “B” → “A”.
Return to Obtained Previous Page/Go to Obtained Next Page
To turn pages
<When the page display sequence is
“A”→“B”→“C”→“B”→“D”>
…Page display sequence
…Sequence when you move back
from the display “D”
ABC
D
mm
m
Information
pWhen you display a screen memo on the way, you cannot move to pages shown
previous to the screen memo.
183
i-mode/Full Browser
You can open a new window and simultaneously open up to five sites.
(Multiwindow)
pYou can switch the simultaneously opened sites to show one by one.
1While a site is displayedi()Window
Open new windowSelect an item.
Link . . . . . . . . Opens a new window to show a page of the highlighted link.
Bookmark . . . Opens a new window to show a site stored in Bookmark. (See
page 188)
Last URL . . . . Opens a new window to show the page displayed last.
iMenu Search
. . . . . . . . . . . . Shows “iMenu” via i-mode.
Full Browser Home
. . . . . . . . . . . . Shows an Internet website set as Home URL via Full Browser.
URL enter history
. . . . . . . . . . . . Opens a new window to show an Internet website by selecting from
URL History or entering a URL. (See page 187)
pSee page 185 for how to switch or close the window.
pWhen you display a page stored in cache, you cannot display text or settings you
entered when connected before.
pWhen Flash movies are displayed, the site behavior might differ from the one for
ordinary sites.
Displaying Multiple Sites
Information
Information
pSome sites have links configured to open in new windows. When you open such a
link, the new window opens even if you do not perform above operations.
When you set “Display pointer” of “Pointer/scroll” to “ON”, a pointer
appears on the display. Using this pointer, you can scroll displays, select
a content, etc. You can set “Pointer/scroll” for i-mode and Full Browser
separately.
You can switch to Drag mode by pressing and holding Oo for at least
one second while a pointer is displayed. By switching to Drag mode, you
can operate Drag-mode-compatible contents. In Drag mode, the pointer
is displayed as “ ”.
1Pressing and holding Oo for at least one second while a
pointer is displayed
Select the content to be operated and press Oo.
The pointer switch to “ ”.
2Use Mo to move the contentOo
You can release the content and the pointer returns to “ ”.
pPress and hold Oo for at least one second to release Drag mode.
Operate by the Pointer
Operate by Switching to Drag Mode
Information
pThe feasible operation differs depending on the content.
pIn Drag mode, you can operate the contents only. However, when you select an input
box or you upload a file, Drag mode is released and then you can operate them.
pWhile accessing via i-mode or in Keitai mode of Full Browser, you cannot perform
drag operation.
184
i-mode/Full Browser
You can display sites composed of frames. You can select a frame, and
enlarge each selected frame for displaying.
1While a site with frames is displayed
Use Mo to highlight a frame and press Oo().
pTo return to the display for
all frames, press r, or
select “Others” from the
Function menu and then
select “All frames”.
In sites, you may use the displayed radio buttons, check boxes, text
boxes, and pull down menus.
Display a Site Supporting Frames
All frames Enlarged by frame
Information
pWhen a site has many divided frames, you might not be able to open all frames. “ ”
is added to the frames that you could not open.
Select/Enter Information on Sites
Name Display example Operation/Explanation
Radio
button
: Not selected
: Selected
Radio buttons are for selecting one from multiple
choices.
Check box : Not selected
: Selected
Check boxes are for selecting one or more items
from multiple choices.
When you select an item, the confirmation display might appear asking
whether to send the Phone/Terminal and UIM ID.
pThe “Phone/Terminal and UIM ID” to be sent is used by the IP (Information Providers)
for identifying the user, providing customized information, and judging if the contents
the IP (Information Provider) offers are available on the user’s mobile phone.
pThe “Phone/Terminal and UIM ID” is sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the
Internet, so could be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number,
address, age, and gender are not notified to the IPs (Information Providers) or others,
by this operation.
Text box You can enter characters. Highlight a text box and
press Oo( ) to show the Character Entry
display.
Pull down
menu
You can select an item from the option list. Highlight
a pull-down menu and press Oo( ) to show
the option list.
pYou might be able to select multiple items from
pull-down menus. Each time you use Bo to
highlight an item and press Oo( ), you can
select/release items repeatedly. After selecting
items, press l().
Name Display example Operation/Explanation
Information
pDepending on the site, the display authenticating your user ID or password might
appear.
Enter your user ID and password, and then select “OK”.
Phone/Terminal and UIM ID
185
i-mode/Full Browser
Function Menu while Site is Displayed
Bookmark
Bookmark Go to step 1 of “Display Websites or Sites from a
Bookmark” on page 188.
Add bookmark See page 188.
Screen memo
Screen memo list Go to step 2 on page 190.
Add screen memo See page 189.
Last URL See page 187.
iMenu Search You can return to “iMenu”.
Full Browser Home You can open the Internet website set as Home URL via
Full Browser.
Full Browser
Full Browser Home You can open the Internet website set as Home URL via
Full Browser.
Switch to FB See page 181.
i-mode Browser
iMenu Search You can open “iMenu” by i-mode.
i-mode BRWSR Switch You can switch to i-mode to show the site being displayed
via Full Browser.
Reload The site contents will be updated with the latest
information.
Enter URL/info
Enter URL You can enter a URL to display an Internet website.
Select the text box.
Go to step 2 on page 187.
pThe URL of the displayed site is entered beforehand.
URL enter history See page 187.
Display URL You can display the URL of the displayed site.
Window
Open new window See page 183.
Change window You can switch the windows while a site is displayed in the
multiwindow.
Select a window.
Close window You can close the windows while a site is displayed in the
multiwindow.
YES
Save image See page 192.
Select text area
Copy You can select characters displayed on the site and copy
them.
Select a start pointSelect an end point.
pSee page 410 for how to paste copied characters.
Read map You can select characters displayed on the site and
display the map.
Select a start pointSelect an end point.
Using the characters you selected, GPS compatible i-αppli
program starts. (See page 196)
Settings
Change disp. mode See page 181.
CHG wide scr. mode/
RLS wide scr. mode
You can switch vertical display and horizontal display.
Full display set. See page 198.
Zoom See page 198.
Image display set. See page 197.
Sound setting See page 197.
Script setting See page 197.
186
i-mode/Full Browser
Pointer/scroll
Display pointer See page 197.
Speed See page 197.
Focus while scroll See page 198.
Cookie
Cookie setting You can set whether to validate cookies.
Go to step 1 of “Cookie Setting” on page 200.
Delete Cookies You can delete cookies.
Go to step 1 of “Delete Cookies” on page 200.
Referer setting You can set whether to send a referer.
Go to step 1 of “Referer Setting” on page 200.
FB Home setting You can store the displayed Internet website as Home
URL.
YES
Others
All frames You can return to the display for all frames from the display
for the enlarged frame.
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message with the URL/
image of a displayed site/screen memo pasted or
attached.
Select an item.
Attach URL . . . . . . . . Pastes a URL to the text of an
i-mode mail message.
Attach image . . . . . . Select an image to attach it to an
i-mode mail message.
Insert Deco-mail. . . . Select an image to paste it to a
Deco-mail message.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
pSee page 133 for Deco-mail.
Add to phonebook See page 82.
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 30.
long press set. See page 386.
Change CHR code When characters are not correctly displayed, you can
convert them to the correct ones.
pThis setting is valid only for the site and Internet website
being displayed.
Title You can display the title of the displayed site.
Certificate You can check the subject name, author, validity period
and serial number of the certificate used in SSL/TLS
communication. Up to five certificates are displayed.
Retry You can play back the animation or Flash movie from the
beginning.
pWhen a part of the Flash movie is outside the display
area, the Flash movie might not be played back.
Key guide You can display the key operation guide for the Full
Browser displays.
Information
<Select text area>
pThe maximum number of characters you can select is 5,000 full-pitch or 10,000
half-pitch characters. With “Read map”, you might not be able to select a text area
even within 5,000 full-pitch or 10,000 half-pitch characters.
pDepending on the site, you might not be able to copy.
<Compose message>
pYou cannot paste the URL when it exceeds 256 half-pitch characters (512 half-pitch
characters for Full Browser).
pYou may not be able to attach or paste some images to i-mode mail.
<Change CHR code>
pWhen characters are not correctly displayed, repeat the operation. However, the
previous character is displayed if you repeat the operation four times.
pEven when you repeat this operation, the correct character might not appear.
pIf you change the character code when the correct characters are displayed, wrong
characters might appear instead.
<Title>
pUp to 128 half-pitch/64 full-pitch characters can be displayed for a title.
187
i-mode/Full Browser
Each time you display a site via i-mode or Full Browser, the URL of the
page is stored as “Last URL”. You can store up to 50 URLs for i-mode
and Full Browser in total.
By selecting “Last URL”, you can display the page list you viewed in the
past.
1mi-modeLast URL
Select the page to be displayed.
pAs a browse type icon, “ ” is displayed for the URL accessed via i-mode and
“ ” is displayed for the URL accessed via Full Browser.
pYou can display the URL by pressing i( ) and selecting “Display URL”.
pTo delete the Last URL, press i( ), select “Delete”, and then select
“Delete”, “Delete selected”, or “Delete all”.
1mi-modeEnter URL<NEW>
2Enter a URLi-mode Browser or Full Browser
pYou can enter up to 512 half-pitch alphanumeric characters and symbols.
pFor Full Browser, the confirmation display appears telling that the website might
not be displayed.
<Last URL>
Displaying Site Viewed in the Past
Display Last URL
Information
pDepending on the page, you might not be able to store the page as “Last URL”.
pWhen the stored URLs exceed 50 items, the Last URLs are overwritten automatically,
starting from the oldest one.
pWhen you display pages by the same URL, the URL for the page you displayed last is
stored. When you display the pages by different browsers, each URL is stored
separately.
<Enter URL>
Displaying Internet Websites
Up to 10 entered URLs can be stored in URL History.
1iGo to location
Select a URL to be displayedOK
pAs a browse type icon, “ ” is displayed for the URL
accessed via i-mode and “ ” is displayed for the URL
accessed via Full Browser.
pExcluding “http://” and “https://”, up to 22 half-pitch characters can be displayed.
pYou can edit the URL by selecting the URL’s text box.
Information
pFor i-mode, Internet websites not supporting i-mode or some type of Internet websites
to be connected might not be displayed correctly.
Displaying Websites from URL History
URL History list
Information
pWhen the entered URLs exceed 50 items, the URL histories are overwritten
automatically, starting from the oldest one.
pWhen you newly enter a URL to access a site, that URL is stored as a different history
even if you access the same URL. However, if you switch browsers to access a site
without editing the URL, the URL is stored with the browser type icon switched.
Function Menu of the URL History List
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message with the
highlighted URL pasted to the text.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
pYou can compose it also by pressing l().
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 30.
long press set. See page 386.
188
i-mode/Full Browser
Once you bookmark a frequently accessed site, you can display the page
directly. You can register up to 600 bookmarks for i-mode and Full
Browser in total.
1From the page to be registeredi()
BookmarkAdd bookmarkYES
Select a destination folder.
FB Home setting You can store the site as Home URL of Full Browser.
YES
Delete
Delete YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for URL histories to be deleted
l()YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Bookmark>
Saving Websites or Sites for Quick Access
Add Bookmark
Information
pWhen the number of characters used for a URL exceeds 256 half-pitch characters
(512 half-pitch characters for Full Browser), you cannot store it.
pWhen the title exceeds 12 full-pitch/24 half-pitch characters, the excess is deleted. If
no title exists, the URL excluding “http://” or “https://” is registered.
pEven when the URLs are the same, you can bookmark them separately if the browser
type is different.
pSome pages cannot be bookmarked.
1mi-modeBookmarkSelect a folder
Select a bookmark to be displayed.
p“ ” is displayed for
i-mode bookmarks and
“ ” is displayed for Full
Browser bookmarks, and
the site is accessed via the
browser corresponding to
the selected bookmark.
Display Websites or Sites from a Bookmark
Bookmark Folder list
Bookmark list
Function Menu of the Bookmark Folder List
Operate folder
Add folder You can add a new folder. You can add up to 39 folders in
addition to “Bookmark” and “Screen memo” folders.
Enter a folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Edit folder name Edit the folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Delete folder You can delete the folder and all bookmarks and screen
memos in the folder. You cannot delete the “Bookmark” folder/
“Screen memo” folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Ir/ transmission
Send all Ir data See page 361.
All transmission See page 363.
No. of bookmarks You can check the number of bookmarks stored in all folders
and the number of bookmarks each for i-mode and Full
Browser.
Delete all The folders are not deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
189
i-mode/Full Browser
Function Menu of the Bookmark List
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message with the
highlighted URL pasted to the text.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
pYou can compose it also by pressing l().
Attach to mail You can send an i-mode mail message with the bookmark
attached.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
Move You can move bookmarks or screen memos to another folder.
Select a destination folderPut a check mark for
bookmarks or screen memos to be movedl()
YES
Edit title Edit the title.
pYou can edit the title also by pressing m( ) from the
list.
pYou can enter up to 12 full-pitch/24 half-pitch characters for
a bookmark. If you press Oo( ) with a blank, the URL
without “http://” or “https://” is registered.
pYou can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters for
a screen memo. If you press Oo( ) with a blank, the
screen memo is registered as “No title”.
Copy
Copy URL You can copy the URL of the bookmark.
Select a start point for copying
Select an end point for copying.
pSee page 410 for how to paste copied characters.
Copy to microSD See page 346.
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 30.
long press set. See page 386.
Ir/ transmission
You can save a displayed page as a screen memo.
You can save up to 300 screen memos each for i-mode and Full Browser,
however, the number of screen memos you can save decreases
depending on the data volume.
1From a page to be savedi()Screen memo
Add screen memoYESSelect a destination folder.
When you save a screen memo, the image for preview (captured image) is saved
as well.
pWhen you select “YES (capture only)”, you save captured image only.
pWhen screen memos are saved to the maximum and thus you can save captured
images only, a confirmation display appears asking whether to save the captured
images only. See page 194 for when captured images are also saved to the
maximum.
Send Ir data See page 360.
transmission See page 362.
No. of bookmarks You can display the number of bookmarks stored in the
displayed folder.
Delete
Delete YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for bookmarks or screen memos to
be deletedl()YES
Delete all You can delete all bookmarks or screen memos stored in the
folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
FB Home setting You can store the site as Home URL of Full Browser.
YES
<Screen Memo>
Saving Site Contents
Save as a Screen Memo
190
i-mode/Full Browser
1mi-modeScreen memo
i-mode Browser or Full Browser
pEach time you press l from the Screen Memo Folder
list, you can switch between the screen memo folder of
i-mode and that of Full Browser.
Information
pWhen the title exceeds 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters, the excess is deleted.
pIf you save the data acquisition completion display, its data file is saved as well. (You
cannot save the data acquisition completion display for Chaku-uta Full® music files,
for i-motion files with playable deadline, or for the ToruCa files whose output from the
FOMA terminal is prohibited.) Some data acquisition completion displays cannot be
saved as screen memos. The display other than the data acquisition completion
display is saved with a URL of up to 2,048 half-pitch characters for that page.
pWhen you save SSL/TLS pages, their SSL/TLS certificates are saved as well.
pThe contents entered in the text box and the contents selected with the pull-down
menu, check box, or radio button are not saved to screen memos.
pYou can save up to 500 Kbytes for i-mode and up to 1,024 Kbytes for Full Browser per
page.
However, you can save up to 1,024 Kbytes for the schedule acquisition completion
display, up to 200 Kbytes for the Deco-mail Template acquisition completion display,
up to 100 Kbytes for the Melody/Chara-den image/Decome-Anime template/ToruCa
file (details) acquisition completion display, up to 20 Kbytes for the Download
Dictionary acquisition completion display, and up to 1 Kbyte for the ToruCa acquisition
completion display.
pDepending on the site, you might not be able to save a screen memo.
Display a Screen Memo
Screen Memo
Folder list
2Select a folderSelect a screen memo.
pWhen “FB usage setting”
of “Full Browser set.” of
“i-mode settings” is set to
“No” and you select a
screen memo of Full
Browser, the captured
image is displayed.
pPress m or c from the
detailed Screen Memo
display to check other
screen memos.
pWhen you select a link on a screen memo, the access automatically starts via
i-mode or Full Browser respectively.
Screen Memo list Detailed Screen
Memo display
Information
pThe page saved as a screen memo has the information at the time it was saved. This
might differ from the latest information on the site.
Function Menu of the Screen Memo Folder List
Operate folder
Add folder See page 188.
Edit folder name See page 188.
Delete folder See page 188.
Security ON/OFF You can set the folder to open only when you enter your
Terminal Security Code.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
The folder changes to “ ”.
pTo release it, perform the same operation.
No. of memos You can display the number of stored screen memos and
protected screen memos in all folders.
Delete all You can delete all screen memos. The folders will not be
deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
191
i-mode/Full Browser
Function Menu of the Screen Memo List
Move See page 189.
Edit title See page 189.
Protect ON/OFF You can protect screen memos not to be deleted. You can
protect up to 150 screen memos, however, the number of
screen memos you can protect decreases depending on the
data volume.
Protected items are indicated by “ ” or “ ”.
pTo release protection, perform the same operation.
No. of memos You can display the number of stored screen memos and
protected screen memos in the displayed folder.
Delete
Delete See page 189.
Delete selected See page 189.
Delete all See page 189.
Function Menu of the Detailed Screen Memo Display/while
Captured Image is Displayed
Edit title See page 189.
Protect ON/OFF See page 191.
Display captured You can display the captured image.
Reload You can access the site saved as the screen memo from
the captured image.
Display URL You can display the URL of the screen memo.
Save image See page 192.
Select text area
Copy See page 185.
Read map See page 185.
Settings
Change disp. mode See page 181.
CHG wide scr. mode/
RLS wide scr. mode
You can switch vertical display and horizontal display.
Full display set. See page 198.
Zoom See page 198.
Sound setting See page 197.
Pointer/scroll
Display pointer See page 197.
Speed See page 197.
Focus while scroll See page 198.
Others
All frames See page 186.
Compose message See page 186.
Add to phonebook See page 82.
Certificate See page 186.
Retry You can play back the animation or Flash movie from the
beginning.
pWhen a part of the Flash movie is outside the display
area, the Flash movie might not be played back.
Compose message See page 186.
Delete YES
192
i-mode/Full Browser
You can save the image displayed on a site or screen memo, and then set
it for the Stand-by display, Wake-up display, or another display.
You can save images in SWF format, BMP format, and PNG format, etc.,
besides JPEG format and GIF format. You can save images, frames and
marks for Deco-mail as well.
You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing the memory space with
other data files, however, the number of files you can save decreases
depending on the data volume. (See page 508)
1From a site display/Detailed Screen Memo display
i()Save imageSelect an item.
Save one image. . . . . . . You can save an image. Select an image to be saved.
Save some images . . . . You can save multiple images. Select multiple images to
be saved and press l().
Save all images. . . . . . . You can save storable images at a time from among the
ones displayed on a site.
Save BG image . . . . . . . You can save the image displayed as a background.
pYou cannot save multiple images via Full Browser. Select an image to be saved.
2YESSelect a destination folder.
pFor “Save some images” and “Save all images”, select “Phone” or “microSD”.
When you select “Phone”, Deco-mail pictograms are saved to the “Deco-mail
pictograms” folder, frames and marks are saved to the “Frame/Stamp” folder, and
others are save to the “i-mode” folder.
See page 357 for the storage location for when you select “microSD”.
pSee page 194 when images are stored to the maximum.
3When the confirmation display appears asking whether
to set it as a display, select “YES”.
Go to “Set display” on page 319.
<Save Image>
Saving Images from Sites
Information
pUp to 36 half-pitch characters are saved for a file name. When the file name is not
specified, a part of the downloaded URL or “imageXXX” (XXX denotes numerals) is
saved as the file name.
You can download data files from sites and save them to the FOMA
terminal. You can save some files directly to the microSD card.
You can save melodies, PDF files, Chara-den images, Machi-chara
images, Kisekae Tool files, ToruCa files, templates, dictionaries,
schedule events and others.
■The maximum downloadable size
※1 The memory space is shared with other data files, and the number of files you can
save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 508)
※2 The number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume.
pEven when an image is displayed on the site, it might not be displayed on the Picture
viewer after saving it to the FOMA terminal.
pThe image satisfying the following conditions is saved as a Deco-mail pictogram:
・GIF or JPEG image ・Image of 20 x 20 dots
・Image without file restrictions ・Image of 6 Kbytes or less
pThe transparent GIF (except animation GIF) image whose extension is “ifm” is saved
as a frame or stamp.
pYou can save up to 500 Kbytes per image for i-mode, and up to 1 Mbyte per image for
Full Browser.
pWhen you save multiple images or all images at one time, the background image
cannot be saved.
pYou might not be able to save some images. You can save images in BMP format
and PNG format only to the microSD card.
<Download>
Downloading Data from Sites
Information
Categories Maximum size Maximum number of storable
Melody 100 Kbytes 3,500 max.※1
PDF file 2 Mbytes 3,500 max.※1
Chara-den image 100 Kbytes 3
Machi-chara image 2 Mbytes 3,500 max.※1
Kisekae Tool file 2 Mbytes 3,500 max.※1
ToruCa file 100 Kbytes 495 max.※1
Template (Deco-mail) 200 Kbytes 100 max.※2
Template (Decome-Anime) 100 Kbytes 100 max.※2
Dictionary 20 Kbytes 10
Schedule event 1 Mbyte 2,500
193
i-mode/Full Browser
1Call up a data downloadable siteSelect a data file.
Downloading of the data file starts. When downloading is completed, the data
acquisition completion display appears.
pFor a PDF file, the PDF file is displayed when downloading is completed.
pFor the PDF file that cannot be displayed unless you download all pages, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to download all pages. Select “YES”
to select the destination folder.
pFor the PDF file of which you have not downloaded all the pages, you can
additionally download the remaining pages by “Download remain”.
pSee page 367 for how to save the displayed PDF file to the FOMA terminal. You
can save the PDF file containing pages that have not been downloaded or the
PDF file of which download was suspended midway as well.
pThe password entry display might be displayed depending on the PDF file. Enter
the password, and then select “OK”.
pSee page 365 for operations while PDF file is displayed.
2SaveYESSelect a destination folder.
Chara-den images, templates (Deco-mail), and schedule events are saved to the
FOMA terminal.
Select “Phone” or “microSD” for Machi-chara images, Kisekae Tool files, and
templates (Decome-Anime).
For dictionaries, select “<Not stored>”.
pSelect “Property” to display the information.
pSee page 357 for the storage location for when you select “microSD”.
pSee page 194 when data files are stored to the maximum.
pSee page 189 to save a screen memo.
3Select “YES” to set the downloaded data file to each
function.
pSelect an incoming type when you set a melody as a ring tone.
pSee page 133 or page 136 for using a template to create Deco-mail or
Decome-Anime messages.
Information
pSome downloaded melodies might not be played back successfully.
When you press l( ) to suspend downloading or when downloading is
suspended by an incoming call, the confirmation display appears asking whether to
resume downloading.
Select “YES” to resume downloading the remaining part. Select “NO” to show the data
acquisition completion display. You can save the downloaded part by selecting “Save
pt.” from the data acquisition completion display. When you select “Save pt.”, you can
save it only to “Phone”. You can re-download the rest of the partially saved file from
“Kisekae Tool” or “Machi-chara” in “Data box”.
You can look for your favorite files on the site and download them. The
number of files you can save differs depending on the file you download.
You cannot change the site.
1Each selection displaySearch by i-modeYES
Select a file.
pThe way of downloading differs depending on the file.
pSelect “To i-schedule list” on the i-schedule list.
You can download the pre-installed Chara-den images, Machi-chara
images, Kisekae Tool files, templates, dictionaries, and Deco-mail
pictograms from the “P-SQUARE” site (in Japanese only).
iMenu → メニューリスト (Menu List) → ケータイ電話メーカー
(Mobile Phone Maker) → P-SQUARE
When downloading a Kisekae Tool file or Machi-chara image
is suspended
Search by i-mode
Information
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.
About “P-SQUARE”
QR code for
accessing the site
194
i-mode/Full Browser
If the maximum number of data files is stored or there is not enough memory when you
try to save the data files, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the
unnecessary file and save new one.
pPerform this operation to save the following data:
・Images ・i-motion files ・Movie files ・Melodies
・Chara-den images ・Programs ・Chaku-uta Full® music files
・Machi-chara images ・PDF files ・i-αppli programs ・ToruCa files
・Templates ・Screen memos ・Kisekae Tool files ・Schedule events
1. YESPut a check mark for data files to be deletedl()YES
As the data files except Chara-den images, templates, screen memos, and schedule
events are stored in the same storage area, you can select other files when deleting files.
Select a folder and put a check mark for the files to be deleted. “＊” appears on the folder
which contains the checked files.
“ ” appears when you put it for the files whose amount of data is equal to memory
shortage.
pYou can put or clear check marks at a time by pressing i( ) and selecting
“Select all in page/Release in page”.
pEach time you press d or i( ), or each time you press i( ) and
select “Change disp. mode”, you can switch display/nondisplay of the folder volume
and data volume.
pWhen selecting a file in “MUSIC”, you can show the lower level folders by pressing
l().
pEach time you press r, the upper level folder returns.
pWhen you select a Chaku-uta Full® music file or a movie file, you can check the
contents by pressing i( ) and selecting “Play”.
pFor programs, you need to delete many files when deleting other files because the data
volume per program is large.
pIf the maximum number of programs are stored when you execute “Move program” or
try to save an i-αppli program or ToruCa file, you need to delete at least one file which
belongs to the same type.
pIf there is a security-applied folder for screen memos, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to enable you to select screen memos in that security-applied folder.
When you select “YES”, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
pThe file set for another function is indicated by “★”.
pSee page 275 for deleting mail-linked i-αppli.
pIf you operate this when moving an i-αppli program from the microSD card to the
FOMA terminal, you cannot delete the i-αppli program with its data file on the IC card.
When the data files are stored to the maximum
Flash is an animation technology that treats pictures and sound. Flash
movies make the sites more attractive. You can download Flash movies
to your FOMA terminal and play them back or set them for the Stand-by
display.
■Flash® Video
Flash® Video (FLV) denotes images that can be played back by Adobe Flash Player.
They can be played back via i-mode, Full Browser, as screen memos, and from Data
Box. They can be played back also by setting for the Stand-by display. However, only
the embedded type of FLV files can be saved as screen memos or into Data Box and
can be set for the Stand-by display.
pThe playable FLV files are the following two types:
pDepending on the site, you might not be able to play back the files.
pAs the playback of up to 10 Mbytes of files is supported for progressive type FLV, you
might receive a bulky size of files. Note that you are charged a high packet
communication fee for receiving bulky files.
pYou cannot save the progressive type FLV files in Data Box nor can save them as
screen memos.
■Specifications for FLV playback
pEven when the file format is supported, you might not be able to obtain or playback
some files.
Flash Function
Categories Description
Progressive type playback With this type, the video files that are created
separately from Flash movies are played back while
being downloaded from a delivery server.
Embedded type playback With this type, video files are embedded into Flash
movies as one of source files.
Codec Video Sorenson Spark/On2VP6
Audio MP3
Bit rate Video 400 kbps
Audio 96 kbps
Video size Files of QVGA (320×240) or smaller
Frame rate 15 fps
195
i-mode/Full Browser
You can upload JPEG or GIF images and i-motion files stored in the
FOMA terminal to a site.
1Call up a file uploadable site参照 (Reference)
Picture or imotionSelect a file to be uploaded.
pProcedure for uploading files differs depending on the site.
Information
pThe maximum display size of a Flash movie on the site is 480 x 662 dots. If a Flash
movie is larger than 480 x 662 dots, it is displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio
retained.
pSome Flash movies refer to the phone information in your FOMA terminal. To permit
the use of the information in your FOMA terminal, set “Phone info use setting” to
“Valid”. (“Valid” is set at purchase.)
pYou might be able to operate a pointer for some Flash movies.
pThe effect tone sounds for some Flash movies. To mute it, set “Sound setting” to
“Level 0”.
pThe effect tone and vibrator for the Flash movie set for the Stand-by display do not
work.
pThe effect tone for Flash movies does not sound during Play Background.
pThe FOMA terminal might vibrate for some Flash movies while they are being played
back. The FOMA terminal vibrates regardless of the setting of “Vibrator”.
pWhen you play back a Flash movie after saving to Data Box, microSD card, or Screen
Memo, it might look different depending on the storage location.
pWhen you display a Flash movie via Full Browser, you cannot save it.
pSome Flash movies might not work correctly.
pYou cannot save the Flash movie if an error occurs during playback.
pYou can operate some Flash movies by *Mo or *Oo. Even when “ ” is not
displayed, you can operate some Flash movies. When a Flash movie is displayed via
Full Browser, you can operate it only while a pointer is displayed.
pWhen Flash movies are displayed, the behavior might differ from ordinary sites.
Uploading Files to Sites
You can easily make a call, send mail, display Internet websites, start
1Seg, set TV Timer/Timer Recording using highlighted information
(phone numbers, mail addresses, URLs, melodies, images, and so on)
displayed on sites and in mail.
pThe Web To, Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, i-αppli To, Media To and Address Link
functions might not be available depending on the mail sent from a personal computer
or the site.
pYou might be able to use the Web To, Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, or i-αppli To
function using highlighted information other than a phone number, mail address or
URL.
pThe information is not highlighted in the Decome-Anime.
You can make voice calls or videophone calls by using phone numbers
or similar information displayed on sites and in mail.
pThe Phone To function to make a videophone call is called the AV Phone To function.
1Select a phone number or similar information
Select a dialing type.
pWhen you select “Select image”, select an image to be sent to other party during
a videophone call.
pSelect “SMS” to compose an SMS message to send to the phone number set as
the destination address. Go to step 3 on page 174.
pThe choices for dialing types may not be displayed when the phone number is
prefixed by “tel:” or “tel-av:”. Go to step 2.
2Dial
pTo make an international call, select “Int’l dial assist”. (See page 58)
pTo set Caller ID Notification, select “Notify caller ID”. (See step 2 of “Set Caller ID
Notification when Making a Call” on page 56)
Information
pYou can upload up to 2 Mbytes in total.
pYou cannot upload files that are prohibited from output from the FOMA terminal to
other devices.
Operations from Highlighted Information
Phone To/AV Phone To Function
196
i-mode/Full Browser
You can send mail by using mail addresses or similar information
displayed on sites and in mail.
1Select a mail address or similar information.
The destination mail address is already entered in the address field.
Go to step 3 on page 130.
You can access Internet websites, via i-mode or Full Browser, from URL
or similar information displayed on sites or in mail.
1Select a URL or similar information
i-mode Browser or Full BrowserYES
pWhen the URL or similar one contains the information of i-mode or Full Browser,
you are connected via the function which corresponds to the information.
pTo cancel during connection, select “Cancel”. To cancel while obtaining a page,
press l().
You can start i-αppli programs from URLs (links) displayed on sites and
in mail.
1Select i-αppli informationYES
i-αppli starts.
Mail To Function
Web To Function
i-αppli To Function
Information
pEven if i-mode mail text contains a link to start an i-αppli program, you cannot quote
the link when forwarding or replying to. Also, you cannot quote it when using
DOCOMO keitai datalink or infrared communication function.
You can start 1Seg or set TV Timer/Timer Recording from the information
(links) displayed on sites and in mail.
1Select 1Seg informationYES
1Seg or TV Timer/Timer Recording starts.
pWhen the timer function starts, press l( ) to set TV Timer/Timer
Recording.
To change contents you want to set, go to step 1 of “TV Timer List” on page 241
or step 1 on page 242.
You can display a map from the postal address shown on a site or others
or can use the location information on the GPS compatible i-αppli
program. You can send the location information by i-mode mail as well.
1Select the location information such as postal address
Select an item.
Read map . . . . . . . Starts a GPS compatible i-αppli program set by “Select map”
of “GPS settings” and sends the location information.
Map/GPS αppli. . . Selects and starts a GPS compatible i-αppli program.
Paste to mail . . . . Converts the location information into a URL and composes an
i-mode mail message with the URL pasted to the text.
Check loc. info. . . Displays the details of the selected location information.
Media To Function
Information
pYou may not be able to use the Media To function even if information is highlighted.
Address Link Function
197
i-mode/Full Browser
You can configure settings for i-mode and Full Browser, and settings
common between them. You can configure i-mode settings and Full
Browser settings respectively, and the settings are not shared. However,
only “Sound setting” is shared.
pAmong items changeable from the Function menu while a site is displayed, you can
change “i-mode Browser set.” during i-mode access and “Full Browser set.” during Full
Browser access.
pSelect each setting and press l( ). Then the function explanatory display
appears.
1mi-modei-mode settingsi-mode Browser set.
Do the following operations.
<i-mode Settings>
Setting i-mode
i-mode Browser Settings
Font size setting See “i-mode” on page 109.
Image display setting You can set whether to display images or Flash movies
included on sites or in screen memos.
ON or OFF
Sound setting You can set whether to make an effect tone sound for when
you display a Flash movie while a site or screen memo is
displayed.
Select a sound volume level.
Movie auto play set. See page 208.
Movie in page DL set. You can set whether to obtain moving pictures when you
display Flash® Video on a site.
Select an item.
ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The confirmation display does not
appear. You obtain files automatically.
Confirm always . . . The confirmation display appears each
time you display Flash® Video.
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .You do not obtain files.
Script setting You can set whether to validate JavaScript. JavaScript is a
simple program language that runs on Internet websites. It is
widely used to create Internet websites with movements.
When “Valid” is set, you can use the JavaScript function to
browse Internet websites.
Valid or Invalid
Pointer/scroll
Display pointer You can set whether to display the pointer.
ON or OFF
Speed You can set scroll speed.
High speed, Medium speed, or Low speed
Phone info use setting To display a Flash movie while a site or screen memo is
displayed, the information in the FOMA terminal may be used.
You can set whether to validate the information to be used for
that case.
Valid or Invalid
Cookie setting See page 200.
Delete Cookies See page 200.
Referer setting See page 200.
Window auto-open set. You can set whether to prevent a new window from opening
automatically by JavaScript.
ON or OFF
Information
<Image display setting>
pEven when “ON” is set, images might not be displayed correctly. In this case, “ ” is
displayed.
pWhen “OFF” is set, “ ” is displayed and the data file is not received.
pIf you change “Image display setting” of “i-mode Browser set.”, “Image display setting”
of “User settings” of “1Seg” is also changed.
<Sound setting>
pEven when you set to sound the effect tone, it may not sound depending on Flash
movies.
198
i-mode/Full Browser
1mi-modei-mode settingsFull Browser set.
Do the following operations.
<Script setting>
pSome Internet websites may not be displayed correctly unless “Valid” is set.
pEven when “Valid” is set, it might not work depending on JavaScript.
<Display pointer>
pFor Full Browser, when “OFF” is set, you cannot operate Flash movies.
<Phone info use setting>
pThe available information is as follows:
・Date and time set by “Set time”
・Reception level of radio waves
・Battery level
・Sound volume set by “Phone” of “Ring volume”
・Language selected by “Select language”
・Model name and serial number of FOMA terminal
Full Browser settings
Information
Display mode setting See page 181.
Full display setting You can set whether to display the display of Full Browser in
full display.
ON or OFF
Zoom You can set the display size of the Internet website.
From the Function menu while a site is displayed, you can
enlarge/reduce the display size by each page.
Select a display size.
pIn PC layout mode, you can select a display area by “Select
disp. area” from the Function menu while a site is displayed.
Image display setting See page 197.
Sound setting See page 197.
Movie auto play set. See page 208.
Movie in page DL set. See page 197.
Script setting See page 197.
Pointer/scroll
Display pointer See page 197.
Speed See page 197.
Focus while scroll You can set whether to highlight links while scrolling.
ON or OFF
Phone info use setting See page 197.
Cookie setting See page 200.
Delete Cookies See page 200.
Referer setting See page 200.
Window auto-open set. See page 197.
Full Browser Home set. You can set Home URL.
Select the URL fieldEnter a URLOK
FB permission display When you start Full Browser, you can set whether to show the
confirmation display asking whether to access.
Select an item.
Display always. . . The confirmation display appears asking
whether to access each time you start Full
Browser.
Not display . . . . . . The confirmation display does not appear.
pEven if “Display always” is set, the setting switches to “Not
display” when you select “YES (default)” on the confirmation
display.
FB usage setting You can set whether to use Full Browser.
Yes. . . . Uses Full Browser.
No . . . . Displays the cautions at the start of Full Browser.
Check the cautions, highlight “Yes” and then select
“OK”, then the setting switches to “Yes”, and Full
Browser becomes available.
199
i-mode/Full Browser
1mi-modei-mode settingsCommon settings
Do the following operations.
1mi-modei-mode settingsCheck settings
Select an item.
i-mode Browser set. . . . You can check the setting contents of i-mode Browser
settings.
Full Browser set. . . . . . . You can check the setting contents of Full Browser
settings.
Common settings . . . . . You can check the setting contents of Common settings.
Information
<FB usage setting>
pIf you replace the UIM with a new one when “Yes” is set, the setting switches to “No”.
Common Settings
Certificate setting See page 201.
Secure Trans. serv.
Operate your cert. See page 202.
Center host setting See page 203.
Access point setting See page 199.
i-mode button setting You can set an operation for when you press i.
Select an item.
Display iMenu/Search
. . . You can access “iMenu”.
Display i-mode menu
. . . You can display the i-mode menu.
Information
<i-mode button setting>
pRegardless of the setting, the i-mode menu appears overseas.
Check Settings
You can set the host (APN) to use for receiving services other than
i-mode (DOCOMO).
If you change this setting, you will not be able to use i-mode.
1mi-modei-mode settingsCommon settings
Access point setting
Highlight <Not recorded>and press l()
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
pIf you select a stored host, the setting is changed to the selected one.
pTo delete the stored host, press i( ), select “Delete”, enter your
Terminal Security Code, and then select “YES”.
2Do the following operations.
3Press l().
+m+8+1
Changing a Host from i-mode
(ISP Connection Communication)
※Normally, you do not need to change this setting.
Host name Enter a host name.
pYou can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.
Host number Enter a host number.
pYou can enter up to 99 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
Host address Enter a host address.
pYou can enter up to 30 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
Host address 2 Enter a host address 2.
pYou can enter up to 30 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
200
i-mode/Full Browser
By using cookies, you can effectively access the Internet websites you
have accessed once.
A cookie is the system to temporarily save personal information such as
the date/time or number of times you accessed an Internet website. The
information from the server is written into the FOMA terminal, temporarily
saved, and used for content services.
pIf a cookie is sent, the information such as the date/time or number of times you
accessed an Internet website is sent to the website. Note that even if your information
is detected by a third party by sending a cookie, we cannot be held responsible for that.
However, you may not be able to correctly display or use some Internet websites or
content services unless the cookie setting is valid.
You can set whether to validate cookies. You can set it for i-mode and
Full Browser respectively.
1mi-modei-mode settings
i-mode Browser set. or Full Browser set.
Cookie settingSelect an item.
Valid . . . . Always validates cookies. The confirmation display does not appear
before a cookie is sent or received.
Confirm always (Sending)
. . . . . . . . . Validates cookie’s sending/receiving. The confirmation display appears
each time a cookie is sent.
Confirm always (Receiving)
. . . . . . . . . Validates cookie’s sending/receiving. The confirmation display appears
each time a cookie is received.
Confirm always (Sending/receiving)
. . . . . . . . . The confirmation display appears asking whether to permit a cookie to
be sent or received each time a cookie is sent or received.
Invalid . . . Always invalidates cookies.
pWhen you replace your UIM with another one, “Invalid” is set. If you change the
setting with another UIM inserted, the display for entering your Terminal Security
Code might appear.
Setting Cookie
Cookie Setting
1mi-modei-mode settings
i-mode Browser set. or Full Browser set.
Delete CookiesEnter your Terminal Security Code
YES
The referer denotes the link source information. When a referer is sent,
the information about which page you have accessed from it is sent to
the site.
Note that even if your information is detected by a third party by sending
a referer, we cannot be held responsible for that.
You can set whether to send a referer while an Internet website is open.
You can set it for i-mode and Full Browser respectively.
1mi-modei-mode settings
i-mode Browser set. or Full Browser set.
Referer settingSelect an item.
Valid . . . . . .Sends a referer.
Invalid . . . . .Does not send a referer.
Information
pWhen “Sending”, “Receiving”, or “Sending/receiving” is set, the confirmation display
might consecutively appear asking whether to send/receive (update) cookies
depending on the Internet website.
Delete Cookies
Setting Referer
Referer Setting
201
i-mode/Full Browser
1mi-modei-mode settingsCommon settings
Certificate setting
Highlight a certificate and press i()
Do the following operations.
Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . Certificates issued by the authenticating company and stored
in the FOMA terminal at purchase.
DOCOMO Certificate . . . Certificates required for connecting to the FirstPass Center or
FirstPass sites; they are stored on the UIM (green/white).
User Certificate . . . . . . . . Certificates downloaded from the FirstPass Center by
selecting “Operate your cert.” from “Secure trans. serv.” of
“Common settings” of “i-mode settings”; they are stored on the
UIM (green/white).
<SSL/TLS Certificate Setting>
Operating SSL/TLS Certificates
Certificate info The subject name, author, validity period, and serial number of
the certificate are displayed.
pYou can check the certificate also by pressing Oo()
instead of i().
Valid/Invalid The selected item is invalidated; then “ ” changes to “ ”.
pWhen you select an invalid certificate, it will be validated.
pIf you set a certificate to invalid, you cannot display the sites with
that SSL/TLS certificate.
pYou cannot set “DOCOMO Cert 2” to “Invalid”.
Certificates used for SSL/TLS communication
User certificates verify that you have subscribed to the FOMA service.
Downloaded user certificates are stored on the UIM for the use on
FirstPass sites.
When you cannot display a FirstPass site because the user certificate on
the UIM has expired or the required user certificate is not stored on the
UIM, you can request the issue and download the user certificate from
the FirstPass Center.
pYou can request and download user certificates from the FirstPass Center.
pThis function is not available with the blue UIM.
pThe display and operating method displayed in the FirstPass Center site are subject to
change.
pTo show FirstPass sites, you can use Full Browser as well.
pYou cannot send/receive mail or receive Messages R/F while connected to the
FirstPass Center.
pSet the date and time using “Set time” beforehand to connect to the FirstPass Center.
pThis function is not available overseas.
pWith the FOMA terminal, server authentication and client authentication are performed
for safer data exchange. The site and your FOMA terminal exchange certificates,
check the other party’s certificate and verify each other for safer communication
service. By getting client authentication, you can enjoy more secure communication
services.
pClient authentication is available via the Internet communication from the FOMA
terminal or via the Internet communication with the FOMA terminal connected to a
personal computer. To use the personal computer for the client authentication, you
need to install the FirstPass PC software from the provided CD-ROM.
For details, refer to “FirstPassManual” (PDF format) in the “FirstPassPCsoft” folder on
the CD-ROM. Adobe® Reader® (version 6.0 or higher is recommended) is required to
see “FirstPassManual” (PDF format). If it is not installed in your personal computer,
install Adobe® Reader® from the provided CD-ROM to see it.
For details such as how to use it, refer to “Adobe Reader Help”.
<Operate Your Certificate>
Setting FirstPass
Client Authentication
202
i-mode/Full Browser
You can perform user certificate operations on the site of the FirstPass
Center site.
1mi-modei-mode settingsCommon settings
Secure trans. serv.Operate your cert.English
You need to request the issue of the user certificate before you download
it. When requesting the issue of your user certificate is completed,
download the user certificate. After the downloading is completed, it is
saved on the UIM and the FirstPass sites will be displayable.
1Site display for the FirstPass Center
Request your certificateContinue
pFor an update, the message “Updating user certificate”
is displayed.
pWhen you have already requested the issue of the user
certificate, select “Download your certificate” from the
site display for the FirstPass Center, go to step 3.
Access FirstPass Center
Site display for
the FirstPass Center
Information
pBefore using the FirstPass Center, select “The usage regulation (Japanese only)” and
carefully read the regulation.
pYou are not charged a packet communication fee for connecting to the FirstPass
Center.
Request Issue of User Certificate for Download
2Enter your PIN2 code.
pEnter your PIN2 code within 60 seconds. When the
code is not entered within 60 seconds, the connection is
cut off as an error entry.
pSee page 112 for PIN2 code.
3DownloadContinue
pIf you do not download the user certificate immediately, select “Menu”. From the
confirmation display asking whether to close the SSL/TLS page, select “YES”to
return to the site display for the FirstPass Center.
You can connect to FirstPass sites with your user certificate.
1Call up a FirstPass siteSelect an itemYES
2Enter your PIN2 code.
pEnter your PIN2 code within 60 seconds. When the code is not entered within 60
seconds, the connection is cut off as an error entry.
pSee page 112 for PIN2 code.
Information
pBefore downloading a new or an updated certificate, be sure to request the user
certificate to be issued. User certificates cannot be downloaded until the request for
issue has been made.
Access Sites with User Certificate
Information
pIf you try to connect to the FirstPass site without the user certificate or when its
available period is expired, the confirmation display appears asking whether to
continue connecting to the site. Select “NO”to return to the previous page. Download
or update the user certificate from the FirstPass Center site and then access the site
again.
pThe packet communication fee for accessing the FirstPass site is included in
Pake-hodai, Pake-hodai full or Pake-hodai double.
203
i-mode/Full Browser
You can revoke the downloaded user certificate.
1Site display of the FirstPass CenterOther settings
Revoke your certificateYESEnter your PIN2 code.
pEnter your PIN2 code within 60 seconds. When the code is not entered within 60
seconds, the connection is cut off as an error entry.
pSee page 112 for PIN2 code.
2ContinueContinueContinue
You can set the host for downloading the user certificate.
1mi-modei-mode settingsCommon settings
Secure trans. serv.Center host setting
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l().
pIf you select a stored host, the setting is changed to that host.
pTo delete the stored host, press i( ), select “Delete”, enter your
Terminal Security Code, and then select “YES”.
Request Revocation of User Certificate
Information
pTo use FirstPass after revoking a certificate, you need to apply again for your user
certificate to be issued and then download it.
pSee page 201 for how to view the download user certificate.
<Center Host Setting>
Changing Hosts for Certificate Issue
※Normally, you do not need to change this setting.
2Enter your Terminal Security Code
Do the following operations.
3Press l().
Default URL Enter a default URL.
pYou can enter up to 100 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
Host address Enter a host address.
pYou can enter up to 99 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
■Before Using FirstPass
pFirstPass is DOCOMO’s electronic authentication service. By using FirstPass, client
authentication is enabled, whereby the site and your FOMA terminal exchange
certificates, check the other party’s certificate and perform mutual authentication.
pWhen requesting issue of a user certificate, carefully read “The usage regulation
(Japanese only)” on the display, agree to this, and then make the request.
pYou need to enter the PIN2 code to use the user certificate. Once you have entered
your PIN2 code, all subsequent operations will be deemed to be done by you, so be
careful not to let anyone else use your UIM or PIN2 code.
pIf your UIM is lost or stolen, “docomo Information Center” on the back page of this
manual can revoke your user certificate.
pDOCOMO bears no obligation or responsibility with regard to the sites and
information provided by FirstPass sites. Please solve the problem between you and
FirstPass sites.
pDOCOMO and the CA do not guarantee security when you use FirstPass and SSL/
TLS, so you should use them on your own judgment and responsibility.
204
205
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
Using i-motion/Movie
i-motion/Movie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Downloading i-motion/Movie from Sites
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Download i-motion/Movie> 207
Setting Automatic Replay of i-motion/Movie
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Movie Auto Play Setting> 208
Using i-Channel
i-Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Using i-Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Setting How Ticker is Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Using i-concier
i-concier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Displaying i-concier Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Configuring i-concier Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
206
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
i-motion is a data file composed of video, sound and music, and you can
play it back after downloading from an i-motion compatible site into your
FOMA terminal. You can also set it for a ring tone.
Also, by using high speed communication, you can play back smooth
and high-quality movie files provided by portal sites, movie specialty
sites and other sites on the Internet.
Two types of i-motion files or movie files are available for each. The type
of the obtained i-motion file or movie file differs depending on the site or
file.
You can save up to 10 Mbytes per file. However, note that the file size for
playing back steaming type of movie files is not limited in Full Browser.
pMovie Player supports playback of Windows Media® Video and Windows Media®
Audio.
pWhen downloading or streaming an i-motion/movie file, you might receive a bulky file.
Note that you are charged a high packet communication fee for a bulky sent/received
file such as a movie file of streaming type whose size is not limited in Full Browser. For
the details of the packet communication fee and billing plan, refer to “Mobile Phone
User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.
■Type of i-motion file
i-motion/Movie
Categories Description
Streaming type (cannot be saved) Plays back while obtaining an i-motion file. The
data is deleted after playback, so you cannot play
it back again or save it to the FOMA terminal.
Normal type (can be saved) Plays back after obtaining all the data of an
i-motion file.
Plays back while obtaining an i-motion file. After
obtaining, you can play it back in the same way
as “Plays back after obtaining”.
■Type of movie file
pThe distribution server for streaming type supports Windows Media Services 4.1 and
Windows Media Services 9. You cannot play back a streaming type of movie file
distributed from other than Windows Media Services 4.1 and Windows Media Services
9.
The live distribution that is distributes files in real time and the on-demand distribution
that distributes previously prepared movie files are available as distribution systems.
pSome sites check the operating environment (browser type, OS type, etc.) and might
not enable to play back movie files.
pSee page 327 for the supported file format of movie files.
Categories Description
Streaming type (cannot be saved) Plays back while obtaining a movie file. The data
is deleted after playback, so you cannot play it
back again or save it.
Download type (can be saved) Plays back after obtaining all the data of a movie
file.
Plays back while obtaining a movie file. You can
play it back without re-connection by saving it on
the microSD card after download. Up to 10
Mbytes of a file can be downloaded.
To the microSD card, you can save not only data
files obtained by the FOMA terminal but also
movie files obtained or created on a personal
computer, and then play them back. You can
save a bulky file of up to the space size of
microSD card.
207
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
1Select an i-motion/movie file from an i-motion/movie
obtainable site
The data acquisition starts.
pFor a movie file, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back.
Select “YES”.
pIf it is an i-motion/movie file of streaming type, it is played back while being
obtained.
When “Movie auto play set.” is set to “Valid”, the i-motion file which is playable
while being obtained and the movie file of download type are also played back
while being obtained.
pWhen “Movie auto play set.” is set to “Valid”, the i-motion file which is playable
after obtaining all the data files is automatically played back after obtaining is
completed.
2
Select “Play” from a data acquisition completion display.
See page 326 for the operation during playback.
pSelect “Property” to display the i-motion/movie information. (See “imotion info”
on page 328 and “Contents info” on page 329)
pSee page 189 for saving a screen memo.
pAmong the movie files protected by the license, you can play back the streaming type
of movie files only. You cannot play back the download type of movie files protected by
the license.
pYou might not be able to play back movie files depending on the license setting of the
movie files.
pIf files are stored to the maximum when you try to obtain a license to save it to the
FOMA terminal, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete currently
stored licenses to save a new one. Select “YES” to delete all the stored licenses to
save it. You need to obtain a license again to play back a movie file whose license is
deleted.
<Download i-motion/Movie>
Downloading i-motion/Movie from Sites
Play Back i-motion/Movie Files Obtained from a Site
About license (Windows Media DRM)
When you press l( ) to suspend downloading or when downloading is
suspended by an incoming call, the confirmation display appears asking whether to
resume downloading.
Select “YES” to resume downloading the remaining part. Select “NO” to show the data
acquisition completion display for a partially savable i-motion file. Select “Save pt.” to
save that file to any folder in “imotion” in “Data box”.
You can re-download the rest of the partially saved file from “Data box”.
pThe file name of the partially saved i-motion file is “movie”.
pWhen the playable period or playable deadline of the partially saved i-motion file has
expired, you cannot download the remaining segments of the file. You can delete the
partially saved file when you try to download the file.
The operation differs depending on the type of movie file being obtained or the reason of
suspension.
Streaming type
After the suspension by an incoming call, alarm notification, or disconnection of
communication, the obtaining is in pause state. Press
Oo
( ) to resume playback
from the suspended point.
The display before playback returns when you suspend obtaining by pressing
r
or
h
.
Download type
When you cannot continue downloading after the suspension by an incoming call, alarm
notification, or disconnection of communication, the data acquisition completion display
appears. Select “Play” to play back the obtained segments of the file. Select “Save” to
save the obtained segments of the file. (See “Save i-motion/Movie Files” on page 208)
Select “ResumeDL” to resume obtaining from the suspended point.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to discard the data when you suspend
obtaining by pressing r or h.
pIn the case of download type of movie files, downloading continues even when a voice
call, mail message, or Message R/F comes in or alarm sounds.
pDepending on the accessed site or movie file, you cannot resume from the suspended
point also by pressing Oo( ) or selecting “ResumeDL”. In that case, the
obtaining resumes from the top of the file.
When downloading i-motion file is suspended
When obtaining a movie file is suspended
208
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
Information
pNote that there is no upper size limit for a streaming type of movie file when it is
obtained via Full Browser and you might exchange the unlimitedly bulky file. When
obtaining it, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back.
pDepending on the accessed site or i-motion/movie file, you might not be able to obtain
the data or play it back while obtaining, or play it back after obtaining. Also, you cannot
obtain an i-motion file in ASF format.
pSee page 327 for the file formats of playable i-motion files.
pIn case of normal type of i-motion files, obtaining files continues even when you stop
playback of the files being obtained. In case of download type of movie files, the data
acquisition completion display appears when you stop playback of the files being
obtained.
pEven if “Movie auto play set.” is set to “Valid”, the obtained file is not automatically
played back if it has been played back while being obtained.
pIf it is an i-motion file you can partially save or re-obtain from a partially saved file, you
cannot use other functions while obtaining the i-motion file, playing it back while
obtaining, or showing the acquisition completion display.
pFor an i-motion file that has restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable period,
or playable deadline, “ ” is displayed at the head of the title. An i-motion/movie file
with the playable period restricted cannot be played back before or after the restriction
period (including the case that playable period is expired during download). If you
remove the battery and keep it aside for a long time, the date/time information in your
FOMA terminal might be reset. In that case, you cannot play back the i-motion/movie
file that has restrictions on the playable period and playable deadline. See “imotion
info” and “Contents info” for checking the playback restrictions.
pDepending on the line speed, line state, or radio wave conditions, the playback during
obtaining might be suspended or the images might be distorted. You can repeatedly
play back the normal type of i-motion files and the download type of movie files after
obtaining, but cannot play back the streaming type of i-motion/movie files.
pIf you try to play back a movie file with a low battery, the battery alert tone sounds
regardless of the setting of “Keypad sound”, and the confirmation display appears
asking whether to play it back. When the battery becomes low during playback, the
playback pauses, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to end the
playback.
You can save the obtained i-motion/movie files to your FOMA terminal or
microSD card. You can save up to 250 Mbytes of files in total sharing the
memory space with other data files. (See page 504)
1A data acquisition completion displaySaveYES
Select a destination folder.
pSee page 357 for the storage location for when you save the movie file or save
the i-motion file on the microSD card.
pSee page 194 when i-motion/movie files are stored to the maximum.
You can set whether to validate automatic playback of i-motion/movie
file, for when you have obtained a normal type of i-motion file or
download type of movie file from a site or have selected a screen memo
which contains a normal type of i-motion file or download type of movie
file. You can set it for i-mode and Full Browser respectively.
1mi-modei-mode settings
i-mode Browser set. or Full Browser set.
Movie auto play set.Valid or Invalid
Save i-motion/Movie Files
Information
pDepending on the i-motion/movie file, you might not be able to save the obtained data.
pYou cannot play back partially saved i-motion/movie files from Data Box.
<Movie Auto Play Setting>
Setting Automatic Replay of i-motion/Movie
Information
pNote that a streaming type of i-motion/movie file is played back automatically even if
this function is set to “Invalid”.
209
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
This service distributes information such as news and weather forecast
to i-Channel mobile phones. The automatically received latest
information flows on the Stand-by display by tickers. You can read it on
the i-Channel list by pressing the i-Channel key. (See page 209)
Further, two types of channels, “Basic channel” provided by DOCOMO
and “Favorite channel” provided by IPs (Information Providers) are
available. You are not charged a packet communication fee for
auto-updates of “Basic channel” information.
You are charged a packet communication fee for auto-updates of
“Favorite channel” information which is enabled by registering your
favorite channels. Note that you are separately charged a packet
communication fee for browsing detailed information for both “Basic
channel” and “Favorite channel”.
As for overseas use, you are charged a packet communication fee for
both auto-update and browsing detailed information. Further, the packet
communication fee for the overseas use differs from the one for the
domestic use. For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
[International Services]” or the DOCOMO Global Service website.
pi-Channel is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis (You need to
subscribe to i-mode to apply for i-Channel).
pFor details on i-Channel, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.
pThe i-Channel service is provided in Japanese only.
i-Channel
Information
pWhen the FOMA terminal is turned off or if radio wave conditions are bad such as
when it is out of the service area, you may not be able to receive information even if
you have contracted to the i-Channel service. In that case, select the channel for
unsigned subscribers that appears by pressing *Zo; then you can now receive
information, and tickers flow on the Stand-by display. If your FOMA terminal remains
in the default state, you may not be able to receive information. Press *Zo, and then
information is received and tickers flow on the Stand-by display.
pTo receive i-Channel information overseas, you are charged a communication fee by
channel.
pAfter you cancel the contract for the i-Channel service, the ticker setting is
automatically set to off.
pIf you cancel the contract for the i-mode service before you cancel the contract for the
i-Channel service, the ticker setting remains on.
When “Ticker ON/OFF” is set to “ON”, up to 10 ticker files for the latest
information flow repeatedly on the Stand-by display. If you want to know
more about the information, you can obtain the details from the Channel
list.
1Press Zo.
The Channel list appears regardless of the “Ticker ON/
OFF” setting.
p“ ” blinks during receiving information.
pYou can perform the operation of “Sound setting” (see
page 197) and “Retry” (see page 186) by pressing
i( ) from the Channel list.
2Select an item (link).
Using i-Channel
Channel list
Information
pThe ring tone does not sound and the vibrator does not work even when information
comes in. In addition, the Call/Charging indicator does not light or flicker.
pTickers are not displayed in the following cases:
When the information is automatically updated after that or when you press *Zo to
receive the latest information, tickers automatically flow.
･When the UIM is replaced. ･When “Access point setting” is changed.
･When “Reset i-Channel” is executed. ･When “Reset settings” is executed.
･When “Initialize” is executed.
However, the information might not be automatically updated when “Access point
setting” is changed. To receive the latest information, press *Zo to display the
Channel list.
pWhen “Access point setting” is changed, the i-Channel connecting end is also
changed. (In ordinary, you do not need to change the setting.)
pDepending on your usage state, you might receive information from i-Channel when
you display the Channel list.
pEven if you change “i-mode” of “Font size setting”, the font size for the Channel list
might not change instantly.
210
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
1mi-modei-ChannelDo the following operations.
Setting How Ticker is Displayed
Channel list You can display the Channel list.
Go to step 2 on page 209.
Ticker ON/OFF You can set whether to display tickers on the Stand-by display.
ON or OFF
Ticker font size set. You can set the font size of tickers.
Extra large, Large, or Standard
pYou can check the ticker by pressing l( ). Press r
to return to the former display.
Ticker color set. You can set the background color and font color of ticker.
Select a pattern.
pYou can check the ticker by pressing l( ). Press r
to return to the former display.
Ticker scroll speed You can set the ticker flowing speed.
Select a speed.
pYou can check the ticker by pressing l( ). Press r
to return to the former display.
Reset i-Channel You can initialize the ticker information and set “Ticker ON/OFF”
to “ON”.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
pYou can perform “Ticker ON/OFF”, “Ticker font size set.”, “Ticker color set.”, “Ticker
scroll speed”, and “Reset i-Channel” for each mode of 2in1. However, i-Channel
information is initialized for all modes. Further, when 2in1 is deactivated, they become
common to the settings in A Mode.
<Ticker ON/OFF>
pIn Public mode (Drive mode), or during Lock All, tickers are not displayed.
<Reset i-Channel>
pTickers are not displayed after you execute “Reset i-Channel”. When the information
is automatically updated after that or when you press *Zo to receive the latest
information, tickers automatically flow.
“i-concier” is a service that supports you in leading a happy life just as a
clerk or concierge does. The service holds a variety of your data (area
information about your neighborhood, Schedule, ToruCa, Phonebook,
etc.) and sends information with good timing to you according to your
living area or preference. Also this service automatically updates
schedule events or ToruCa files to the latest ones, and automatically
adds useful information such as about the opening period of various
shops to your Phonebook. i-concier information is notified by a
Machi-chara image (cartoon character that appears on the Stand-by
display).
i-concier
■Before Using i-concier
pi-concier is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis (You need to
subscribe to i-mode to apply for i-concier).
pIf you have not subscribed to Data Security Service (see page 124) but will newly
subscribe to i-concier, you will subscribe to Data Security Service as well as
i-concier.
pThere are two kinds of information; one is sponsored by DOCOMO and the other is
by IPs (Information Providers). You are not charged a packet communication fee for
DOCOMO-sponsored information. You are separately charged a packet
communication fee for IP-sponsored Information when receiving it.
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee for using detailed
information.
pAs for overseas use, you are charged a packet communication fee for both receiving
information and browsing detailed information. Further, the packet communication
fee for the overseas use differs from the one for the domestic fee. For details, refer to
“Mobile Phone User’s Guide [International Services]” or DOCOMO Global Service
website.
pDepending on the contents (information, i-schedule, and others), you might be
separately charged an information fee besides the i-concier monthly fee.
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee for auto-updates of
i-schedule, ToruCa, and Phonebook.
pFor details on i-concier, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA
version”.
211
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
When the FOMA terminal is in the service area, information automatically
arrives.
When information arrives, “ ” appears at the top of the display.
You can save up to 50 received information files. They are overwritten
from the oldest one in order.
1When information arrives, “ ” blinks and the contents
are displayed on the Stand-by display.
pWhen multiple information files are received at a time, the latest one is displayed
on the Stand-by display.
pWhen a display other than the Stand-by display is shown, the message appears
to tell the reception. Select “Confirm” to check the detailed information.
2Select a message.
The detailed information is displayed.
pTo clear the message, press h from the Stand-by display, or highlight the
message and then press r or h.
pHighlight a message and then press c( ) to switch to the display for
selecting a desktop icon. (See page 30)
Receive Information
1mi-concier
Select a piece of information.
pAn unread mark appears for unread information.
pSchedule event files or ToruCa files might be attached
to information, or links are embedded in it for visiting a
site of more detailed or related information. To check
the contents, select the information with an unread
mark.
1i-concier displayl(MENU)
Select an item.
スケジューラへ (To scheduler)
. . . Displays the Calendar display. (See page 380)
トルカへ (To ToruCa)
. . . Displays the ToruCa Folder list. (See page 298)
コンテンツ一覧へ (To the contents list)
. . . Displays respective contents supporting i-concier.
Displaying i-concier Screen
i-concier display
Display Schedule/ToruCa
212
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
1i-concier displayl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
Do the following operations.
You can set whether to show the received information on the Stand-by display.
1mSet./Servicei-concierInformation disp. set.
YES or NO
Configuring i-concier Settings
ｉコンシェルとは
(What is i-concier?)
You can display the explanation about i-concier.
インフォメーション
受信設定
(Information receive
settings)
You can set the contents of received information, etc.
自動お預かり／更新
設定
(Automatic saving/
Update settings)
See page 125.
その他共通設定
(Other common
settings)
You can change the profile or perform setting for overseas use,
etc.
お預かりデータ確認
(Check saved data)
See page 125.
お預かりデータ更新
(Update saved data)
See page 125.
お預かり通信履歴
(Communication
records of saving)
See page 125.
各種手続き（ｉコン
シェル解約）
[Various procedures
(i-concier
cancellation)]
You can cancel a contract of i-concier.
ｉコンシェルご利用
にあたって
(For using i-concier)
You can display the usage rules of i-concier.
Information Display Setting
213
Camera
Before Using Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Shooting Still Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Still Image Shoot> 217
Shooting Moving Pictures. . . . . . . . . <Moving Picture Shoot> 219
Changing Settings for Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Setting Image Size and Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Using Bar Code Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Bar Code Reader> 226
■Copyrights and Portrait Rights
You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute the contents of which a third party holds the copyright such as text, image, music, or software
programs downloaded from websites on the Internet, or recorded using this product, without permission from the copyright holder except for
when the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed by the copyright law.
Note that it may be prohibited to shoot or record live performances or exhibitions even for personal use.
Make sure that you refrain from shooting portraits of other persons and distributing such portraits over the Internet without consent, as this may
violate portrait rights.
pYou may be imposed punishment according to the law and rule (such as the nuisance prevention ordinance) if you use the FOMA terminal to give a remarkable
nuisance and misdeed to the public.
Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you when shooting and sending photos using camera-equipped mobile phones.
214
Camera
･Check the lens for any stain before shooting. If the lens is stained, clean
the lens with a soft cloth. If the lens is stained with fingerprints or
something oily, you will not be able to focus on a subject, or the stains
are reflected on still images/moving pictures you shoot.
･Make sure that you do not let fingers, hairs, or the strap overlap the lens
when shooting.
･Make sure that you hold the FOMA terminal securely with your hands so
that it does not move when shooting. Otherwise, the image may be
blurred, especially in a dark place.
･Do not leave the FOMA terminal with the lens pointing direct to the
sunlight. Pixels may be discolored or burns may result.
･If you shoot under a fluorescent lamp, mercury lamp, or sodium lamp
flickering at high speeds, “flicker symptom”, horizontal stripes flow
from top to bottom or left to right of the display, may result. The color
tone for the image may vary depending on a shooting timing.
･If you shoot a subject containing an area of an extremely high
brightness such as the reflection of sun light, the bright area might be
black-spotted but this is not a malfunction.
･Images shot by the cameras might differ from actual subjects in color
tone and brightness.
･When the battery level is low, you may not be able to save still images/
moving pictures you shoot.
･A slight time lag is found between when you press Oo() or
another key and when you actually shoot. Therefore, if you shoot a fast
moving subject, the subject might be shot with its position slightly away
from the one you see it when you press Oo( ) or another key.
･Do not remove the microSD card while saving files to it. The FOMA
terminal or microSD card could malfunction.
･If you turn off the power while saving a file, an incomplete file may be
saved.
Before Using Camera
Notes for when Shooting Images
･If the battery pack is removed off while saving a file to the FOMA
terminal or microSD card, that data becomes contingent.
･You need to obtain a microSD card separately to use the functions
related to the microSD card.
The microSD card is available at mass retailers for home electric
appliances, etc. (See page 344)
You can use the cameras to shoot
still images/moving pictures.
You can use the focus function for
shooting. (See page 221) The Image
Stabilizer function enables you to
shoot images with less blur. (See
page 222)
You can easily operate the main
functions for shooting not only from
the Function menu but also by
operating the keys.
Use Cameras
Camera
215
Camera
■Operations for shooting
※1 Each time of pressing switches in order of “Photo mode”→“Movie mode”→
“Continuous mode”.
※2 Each time of pressing switches between “ON” and “OFF”.
※3 Each time of pressing switches between “Phone” and “microSD”.
Icon menu operation +l
Photo mode +l
(for at least
one second)
Function menu access +i
Folder jump +m
Shutter/Save *Oo, +0
TELE *Vo
WIDE *Co
Settings for Focus
*Zo
Focus function *Xo, +a
Change camera-mode※1+c
Icons※2.<
Image size -1
Image quality -2
High sensitivity -3
Brightness -4
White balance -5
Photo mode
(When “Scene” is set) -6
Auto timer※2-7
Store in※3-9
End camera
(in ordinary time)
Release focus lock
(when focus is locked)
-r
End camera -h
Information
pWhile the camera is activated, the Call/Charging indicator flickers. You cannot turn off
flickering.
pYou cannot change or mute the volume of the shutter sound. You cannot set a
downloaded melody for the shutter sound, either.
pIf no key operation is done on the Finder display, the camera is automatically
deactivated after about three minutes.
pWhen you shoot in a dark place, ensure to set “Photo mode” to “Night mode” of
“Scene”, or to set “High sensitiv.” to “ON”.
pYou can operate the following by the Icon menu: “Image size”, “Image quality”, “High
sensitiv.”, “Brightness”, “White balance”, “Photo mode” and “Focus”.
On the Finder display, the settings are indicated by bars and icons.
Camera Setting and Finder Display

 
Icon/bar name Icon Description Page
Photo mode Normal
222
Scene
Portrait
Sports
Food
Scenery
Night mode
Backlight
Character
Snow
Sunset
Pet
216
Camera
Camera mode Photo mode 217
Movie mode 219
/ / Continuous mode (Auto, Manual, Auto
bracket) 217
Store in Phone 223
microSD
Number of
recordable
image
—
Number of remaining recordable still
images
pUp to 999 images are displayed.
—
Memory
capacity bar
Memory usage state (estimate) in Movie
mode
pDisplayed in red when the memory space
reaches maximum.
—
File size
setting
Mail restrict’n (S)
222Mail restrict’n (L)
Long time
Image
stabilizer
Auto 222
Shooting
status
During a moving picture shoot 219
Movie type set Records only the video. 223
Recordable
time —Moving picture recordable time (estimate) —
Key guidance — Displays key guidance. —
Top icon Shows the vertical direction for shooting. —
Zoom bar Zooming status 221
Icon/bar name Icon Description Page
Image size
(Photo mode/
Continuous
mode)
Photo
3M (1536 x 2048)
222
2M Wide (1920 x 1080)
2M (1200 x 1600)
1M (960 x 1280)
Stand-by (480 x 854)
/
Continuous shooting
VGA (640 x 480)
/QVGA (240 x 320)
/QCIF (176 x 144)
/Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)
Image size
(Movie mode)
VGA (640 x 480)
222
HVGA Wide (640 x 352)
QVGA (320 x 240)
QCIF (176 x 144)
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)
Image quality Normal
222
Fine
Super fine
Number of
frames for
continuous
shooting
Number of frames at “Manual” shooting in
“Continuous mode” 223
Auto timer ON 225
High sensitivity
ON 223
OFF
Brightness ∼ Brightness of shot image 222
Icon/bar name Icon Description Page
217
Camera
pSee page 318 for how to display saved still images.
1Press c.
pThe Camera menu is displayed by mLifeKit
Camera. You can start also by selecting “Photo
mode” from the Camera menu.
pYou can paste the Camera menu to the desktop. (See
page 30)
White balance Auto
222
Fine
Cloudy
Light bulb
Fluorescent light
Focus Face detection
222
Auto
Close-up
Landscape
<Still Image Shoot>
Shooting Still Images
Shoot a Still Image
Icon/bar name Icon Description Page
Finder display
2Press Oo() or 0.
A still image is shot. The Post View display for confirmation appears.
pIf “Focus” is set to “Face detection” or “Auto”, shooting starts after the focus
operation.
pWhen “Auto save set” is set to “ON”, the still image is automatically saved.
3Press Oo() or 0.
The still image you shot is saved to the “Camera” folder of
“My picture” in the FOMA terminal or to the microSD card.
pSee “Store in” and “Select storage” for selecting a
storage location.
pPress r to cancel the shot still image and return to
the Finder display.
You can continuously shoot still images. You can set the number of
frames, and shooting interval for auto-shooting. (See page 223)
1cc()c()
pThe camera starts in the mode you used last time,
“Auto”, “Manual”, or “Auto bracket”. To change
Continuous Mode, see “Continuous mode” of “Cont.
shooting set.”.
Post View display
Continuous Shooting
Finder display
218
Camera
2Press Oo() or 0.
Continuous shooting starts.
When “Continuous mode” is set to “Manual”, press Oo() or 0 the
number of times of shooting frames. The Post View display for confirmation
appears.
pIf “Focus” is set to “Auto”, shooting starts after the focus operation.
pTo cancel shooting midway, press r. If you shoot in the “Auto” or “Auto
bracket” mode of “Continuous mode”, you can cancel also by pressing
l( ). You can cancel shooting also by closing the FOMA terminal.
pWhen “Auto save set” is set to “ON”, the still images are automatically saved.
3
Select a still image and press c()
Oo() or 0
pPress No from the detailed
display to show the
previous or next still image.
Select still images to be saved and press Oo() or
0l()Save
p“ ” is added to the selected still images.
To select a still image and save it
To select multiple still images and save them
Post View display Detailed display
c
l()Save
The still images you shot are saved to the “Camera” folder of “My picture” in the
FOMA terminal or to the microSD card.
pSee “Store in” and “Select storage” for selecting a storage location.
pPress r from the Post View display to cancel the shot still images and return to
the Finder display.
To save all still images
Information
pThe image quality may be coarse depending on “Image size” or “Display size”.
pWhen you shoot, the tone selected for “Shutter sound” sounds regardless of the
settings such as Manner Mode. The sound volume for shutter tone cannot be
changed.
pEven when a mail message comes in while shooting, the shooting operation
continues. Though unread message icon is displayed, the Mail Receiving display is
not displayed.
pIf you end the camera function by using Multitask while shooting, unsaved still images
are deleted.
pWhen shooting, hold the FOMA terminal securely to avoid blurring images.
Function Menu of the Post View Display in Photo Mode/
Detailed Display in Continuous Mode
Save See page 217 and page 218.
Attach to mail You can save the still image you shot and attach it to an i-mode
mail message.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing
l().
Attach loc. info Select an item.
By position loc.
. . . . Measures the current location (see page 306) and stores
the location information. After checking the location
information, press Oo().
From loc. history
. . . . Select a piece of location information from Location History
(see page 310) and store it.
219
Camera
Set display You can save the shot still image and paste it to the Stand-by
display and others for displaying.
Go to “Set display” on page 319.
pEven when “Store in” is set to “microSD”, the still image is saved
to the FOMA terminal.
Change frame You can replace the frame added to the shot still image with a
new one.
Select a frame.
pPress No to show the previous or next frame.
pTo reselect a frame, press l().
Oo()
pYou cannot release the frame.
Store in See page 223.
Display size See page 223.
File restriction See page 225.
Icon See page 223.
Cancel You do not save the shot still image.
Information
<Attach to mail>
pWhen the file size is larger than 2 Mbytes, the file is converted to 2 Mbytes or less. In
this case, the still images before and after conversion are saved to the “Camera”
folder of “My picture” in the FOMA terminal.
Function Menu of the Post View Display in Continuous Mode
Save See page 218.
Store all/animat’n You can save all the shot still images to store as an original
animation.
Save<New>
Store in See page 223.
File restriction See page 225.
Cancel You do not save the shot still images.
pSee page 326 for playing back the saved moving pictures.
1cc()
pThe Camera menu is displayed by mLifeKit
Camera. You can start also by selecting “Movie
mode” from the Camera menu.
pYou can paste the Camera menu to the desktop. (See
page 30)
2Press Oo() or 0.
Recording starts.
pIf “Focus” is set to “Auto”, shooting starts after the focus operation. While
shooting, the subject is automatically focused regardless of the setting of “Focus”.
3Press Oo() or 0.
Recording ends. The Post View display for confirmation appears.
pRecording automatically ends when a call comes in, the low battery alarm
sounds, or the FOMA terminal is closed during recording.
pWhen “Auto save set” is set to “ON”, or “File size setting” is set to “Long time”, the
moving picture is automatically saved.
Information
<Store all/animat’n>
pWhen “Store in” is set to “microSD”, this function is not available.
pIf you have shot a single still image only, this function is not available.
<Moving Picture Shoot>
Shooting Moving Pictures
Finder display
220
Camera
4Press Oo() or 0.
The shot moving picture is saved to the “Camera” folder
of “imotion” in the FOMA terminal or to the microSD
card.
pSee “Store in” and “Select storage” for selecting a
storage location.
pPress r to cancel the shot moving picture and return
to the Finder display.
When you use a microSD card that you repeatedly save/delete data files to/from, the
writing speed slows down, recording might end midway or the image quality might
deteriorate.
Do the following operations to improve such symptoms:
1. Copy all the data files from the microSD card onto your personal computer as
they are.
pWhen your personal computer is set so as to hide folders and files, change the
settings to display those folders and files, and then operate. For how to change the
settings, refer to the operating manual or Help on the personal computer you use.
pDo not change the names of folders and files copied to the personal computer.
2. Use the personal computer to delete all the data files on the microSD card.
pDo not format the microSD card. The data files might not be played back.
3. Copy the data files copied in step 1 back to the microSD card.
pBe sure to copy them back to the same microSD card. Even if you save the
copyrighted data files on another microSD card, you cannot play them back.
Post View display
If recording ends or the image quality deteriorates while
shooting
Information
pThe shutter tone set by “Shutter sound” sounds when shooting starts and ends
regardless of the settings such as Manner Mode. The sound volume for shutter tone
cannot be changed.
pIf you do key operations while recording, the operation sound may be picked up.
pThe Call/Charging indicator flickers while you are recording.
pWhen you switch the subject you are shooting to a subject with a difference in
perspective, it takes time to focus on the new subject.
pWhen you have difficulty focusing on a subject, switch to another subject. Then the
subject might come into focus.
pThe operating speed of focusing is slowed down in a dark place.
Function Menu of the Post View Display in Movie Mode
Information
Play See page 326.
Save See page 220.
Attach to mail You can save the shot moving picture and attach it to an i-mode
mail message.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing
l().
Set as stand-by You can save the shot moving picture and set it for the Stand-by
display.
Store in See page 223.
Display size See page 223.
File restriction See page 225.
Icon See page 223.
Cancel You do not save the shot moving picture.
Information
<Set as stand-by>
pSome moving pictures might not be displayed correctly.
pSee page 99 for playback of the moving picture set for the Stand-by display.
221
Camera
You can set the camera when shooting images.
You can display the image through the camera in “WIDE” or “TELE”.
The maximum magnification for each size is as follows:
1Finder displayUse No to adjust the magnification.
Changing Settings for Shooting
Use Zoom
Camera mode Size Level of zoom
The maximum
magnifications
(Approx.)
Photo
3M (1536 x 2048) 1 level 1.0 time
2M Wide (1920 x 1080) 1 level 1.0 time
2M (1200 x 1600) 6 levels 1.2 times
1M (960 x 1280) 11 levels 1.6 times
Stand-by (480 x 854) 6 levels 1.2 times
VGA (640 x 480) 11 levels 1.6 times
QVGA (240 x 320) 21 levels 3.2 times
QCIF (176 x 144) 31 levels 5.3 times
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) 31 levels 8.0 times
Continuous
VGA (480 x 640) 11 levels 1.6 times
QVGA (240 x 320) 21 levels 3.2 times
QCIF (144 x 176) 31 levels 5.3 times
Sub-QCIF (96 x 128) 31 levels 8.0 times
Movie
VGA (640 x 480) 11 levels 1.6 times
HVGA Wide (640 x 352) 11 levels 1.6 times
QVGA (320 x 240) 21 levels 2.4 times
QCIF (176 x 144) 31 levels 4.3 times
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) 31 levels 6.0 times
Videophone call - 31 levels 4.3 times
Information
pThe image quality may slightly change when you select “WIDE” or “TELE”.
You can shoot with the camera which focuses on a subject.
pWhen “Focus” is set to “Face detection”, faces are detected in the first place. When a
face is detected, the yellow frame is shown. Up to three faces are detected, and the
image is shot with a single face of them automatically focused according to the face
size and position. When multiple faces of people are found, the frame for a face to be
focused becomes yellow. When the detection fails, the focus function works in “Auto”.
pThe focus function works when you shoot a subject about 10 cm or more away.
1Finder displayXo or a
When a subject is focused, a focus lock tone sounds, the frame becomes green,
and the focus is locked.
When the subject is not focused, the frame becomes red.
pTo cancel the focus locked by pressing Xo or a, press r.
p“TELE” is released in the following cases:
・When you press -h to end the camera
・When a size is changed
・When camera mode is switched
Use Focus Function
Information
Information
pIf “Movie type set” is set to “Voice” in Movie Mode, you cannot use the focus function.
p“Face detection” is available only in Photo Mode.
pEven when “Focus” is set to “Face detection”, you might not be able to detect the face
in the following cases:
・When the face faces sideway or askew
・When the face is at a slant
・When part of the face is covered by glasses, a cap, or shadows
・When the face is extremely small, large, or dim when compared to overall screen
size
・When the face is placed at the edges of the display
pThe distance that faces can be detected by “Face detection” is within about 2.5 m.
222
Camera
Setting Image Size and Image Quality
Function Menu of the Finder Display
CHG camera-mode Select a mode.
pWhen you set to “Continuous mode”, the camera starts in
the mode you used last time; “Auto”, “Manual”, or “Auto
bracket”.
Folder jump
[Photo/Continuous
Mode]
You can show the inside of the storage location of the camera.
Photo mode You can set a photo mode suitable for the scene. When you
change this setting, “Brightness”, “White balance”, “Color
mode set”, and “Focus” of “Camera settings” are changed
according to the selected mode.
Select a photo mode.
Normal . . . You can shoot in normal mode.
Scene . . . . You can select a mode suitable for the scenery
around.
Image size Select an image size.
File size setting
[Movie Mode only]
Select an item.
Mail restrict’n (S). . . You can shoot up to 500 Kbytes.
Mail restrict’n (L) . . . You can shoot up to 2 Mbytes.
Long time . . . . . . . . . You can shoot for a long time. The
moving picture is saved to the microSD
card.
Image quality You can set the image quality for saving.
Select an image quality.
Normal . . . . . .For shooting with standard image quality
Fine . . . . . . . . .For shooting with fairly high image quality
Super fine. . . .For shooting with high image quality
Camera settings
Brightness You can adjust to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
At Camera
start-up
±0
White balance You can adjust the coloring of the image on the Finder display
to create a natural color tone.
Select an item.
Auto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . For adjusting white balance
automatically
Fine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For shooting outdoors in fine weather
Cloudy. . . . . . . . . . . . For shooting in cloudy weather or in
the shade
Light bulb . . . . . . . . . For shooting under incandescent light
Fluorescent light . . . For shooting under fluorescent light
Color mode set Select a color mode.
Normal . . . . . . . . For shooting in normal color
Sepia . . . . . . . . . . For shooting in sepia color
Monochrome . . . For shooting in monochrome
Vivid . . . . . . . . . . For shooting with the vivid contours and
raised color saturation
Natural . . . . . . . . For shooting with the smooth contours and
lowered color saturation
Whitening . . . . . . For shooting faces in bright color
Suntan. . . . . . . . . For shooting faces in dark color
Focus You can set the focus.
Select an item.
Face detection . . . For focusing on a person’s face
Auto. . . . . . . . . . . . For focusing automatically before
shooting (See page 221)
Close-up . . . . . . . . For focusing on a subject in a short
distance
Landscape . . . . . . For focusing on a landscape in a long
distance
p“Face detection” is available only in Photo Mode.
Img. stabilizer
[Photo/Movie Mode]
You can correct camera shake for when shooting.
Auto or OFF
Shoot with frame
[Photo Mode only]
You can shoot a still image with a frame.
ON or OFFSelect a frame.
At Camera
start-up
Auto
At Camera
start-up
Normal
At Camera
start-up
Photo Mode:
Face detection
Continuous/
Movie Mode:
Auto
At Camera
start-up
OFF
223
Camera
Shutter sound You can set a shutter sound. You can set a shutter sound
each for Photo Mode (Continuous Mode) and Movie Mode.
Select a shutter sound.
pWhile selecting a shutter sound, you can check the selected
sound.
Flicker correction You can suppress flicker on the Finder display for shooting.
Auto, Mode 1 (50Hz) or Mode 2 (60Hz)
Storage setting
Store in You can set the storage location for the still images/moving
pictures you shoot.
Phone or microSD
Auto save set You can set whether to automatically save the image after
shooting. When “Store in” is “Phone”, the image is saved to
the “Camera” folder. When “Store in” is “microSD”, the image
is saved to the folder set by “Select storage”.
ON or OFF
File restriction See page 225.
High sensitiv.
[Photo Mode only]
You can shoot with high-sensitivity when shooting.
ON or OFF
Auto timer See page 225.
Cont. shooting set.
At Camera start-up
OFF
Continuous mode
[Continuous Mode
only]
Select a mode.
Auto . . . . . . . . . . Shoots automatically at an interval and with
the number of frames as specified by “Shot
interval” and “Shot number”.
Manual . . . . . . . . Shoots one by one manually with the
number of frames specified by “Shot
number”.
Auto bracket . . . Shoots automatically nine still images at an
interval of about 0.3 second while changing
the brightness and color tone one by one.
pWhen you set to “Manual”, the number of frames for
continuous shooting is indicated on the display.
Shot interval
[Continuous Mode
only]
Select a shooting interval.
pYou can set this only in “Auto” of Continuous Mode.
Shot number
[Continuous Mode
only]
Enter the number of photos.
pWhen “Image size” is set to “VGA (480 x 640)”, you cannot
change “Shot number”.
p
You can set this only in “Auto” or ”Manual” of Continuous Mode.
Movie type set
[Movie Mode only]
You can select whether to record both the video and voice, or
one of them when you shoot the moving picture.
Normal, Video, or Voice
Display size You can set whether to display a still image/moving picture in
the original size (Actual size) or to fit to the screen size on the
Finder display.
Actual size or Fit in display
Common replay mode
[Movie Mode only]
You can set a shooting size appropriate for attaching to
i-mode mail.
YES
pImage Size is set to “QCIF”, File Size Setting is set to “Mail
restrict’n (S)”, and Image Quality (Movie Mode) is set to
“Normal”.
Icon You can set whether to display icons.
ON or OFF
Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of
stored items.
At Camera start-up
Normal
224
Camera
Information
<Photo mode>
pEven if you change the setting of “Brightness”, “White balance”, “Color mode set”, or
“Focus”, each setting changes to appropriate one for each shooting mode when you
change “Photo mode”.
p
Note that the image may blur in Night Mode because the exposure takes a longer time.
<File size setting>
pWhen “Long time” is set, “Store in” is set to “microSD”. If you switch “File size setting”
to other than “Long time” without ending the camera, “Store in” returns to “Phone”.
<Img. stabilizer>
pImage Stabilizer function is only for decreasing the degree of camera shake, so its
effect differs depending on the subject or condition.
pImage Stabilizer might not work effectively in the following cases:
・When the camera shakes to a great extent
・When zooming is in use
・When shooting moving subjects
p“Img. stabilizer” becomes invalid when “Photo mode” of “Camera settings” is set to
“Sports”, “Night mode”, or “Pet” of “Scene” in Photo Mode.
pResidual images might remain in the area where the subject is moving, or noise might
be found in overall area. In that case, set this function to “OFF”.
pIn Movie Mode, the shooting range varies depending on the “Auto” or “OFF” setting
because peripheral pixels are used for the processing by Image Stabilizer.
<Shoot with frame>
pWhen “Image size” is set to “2M (1200 x 1600)” or larger, you cannot shoot with a
frame.
<Flicker correction>
pIf you set to “Auto”, it may take a while to automatically adjust the flicker. In this case,
switch to Mode 1 or Mode 2 according to the power frequency provided in the
shooting location.
<Storage setting>
pSee “Select storage” for how to set a storage location on the microSD card.
pIf you change “File size setting” to “Long time”, “Store in” is set to “microSD” and
“Storage setting” cannot be operated.
pWhen “Auto save set” is set to “ON”, the image is saved to the latest folder if “Select
storage” is not set or the folder set as a destination folder is deleted.
<High sensitiv.>
pWhen “ON” is set, you cannot set “Image size” to “2M Wide (1920 x 1080)” or larger.
pWhen you set “High sensitiv.” to “ON” while “Image size” is set to “2M Wide (1920 x
1080)” or larger, “Image size” is changed to “2M (1200 x 1600)”. If you switch “High
sensitiv.” to “OFF” without changing “Image size” and without ending the camera, it
returns to the image size before you set “High sensitiv.” to “ON”.
<Shot number>
pThe number of shots that can be set differs depending on the image size. The number
of shots that can be set is as follows:
VGA (480 x 640): 4
QVGA (240 x 320): 5 through 10
QCIF (144 x 176): 5 through 20
Sub-QCIF (96 x 128): 5 through 20
<Display size>
pWhen “Image size” is set to “HVGA Wide (640 x 352)” or larger, “Fit in display” always
applies.
pWhen “Image size” is set to “QCIF (176 x 144)” or “Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)”, the image is
enlarged two times at both lengthwise and sidewise when it is displayed in “Actual
size”.
pThe setting for the Finder display is reflected in the Post View display; however the
setting for the Post View display is not reflected in the Finder display.
<Common replay mode>
pYou cannot operate when you set “File size setting” to “Long time”.
Information
225
Camera
You can set the file restrictions for when you save a still image/moving
picture you shoot. The recipient of the file (primary distribution) cannot
attach the received file to i-mode mail.
1Finder displayi()Storage setting
File restriction
or
Post View display in Photo Mode, Movie Mode or
Continuous Mode/Detailed display in Continuous Mode
i()File restriction
2File unrestricted or File restricted
pFrom the Post View display in Continuous Mode, you can change the file
restriction settings for the image you put a check mark on.
File Restriction
Information
pEven when you set “File restriction” to “File restricted”, the still images/moving pictures
can be output from the destination mobile phone by transmitting the images using
infrared communication or by copying them to the microSD card.
pAfter saving, you can use “File restriction” on page 320 to change the settings.
pWhen you set “File size setting” to “Long time” in Movie Mode, “File restriction”
becomes “File unrestricted”.
1Finder displayi()Auto timerON or OFF
Enter a delay time (seconds).
pEnter from “01” through “15”, in two digits.
“ ” appears on the Finder display.
If you press Oo() or 0, a confirmation tone sounds and “ ” blinks. The Call/
Charging indicator flickers every about 1 second until about 5 seconds before shooting.
From about 5 seconds before shooting, the Call/Charging indicator flickers every about
0.5 second, and the confirmation tone sounds every about 1 second. Shooting takes
place after the set delay time has elapsed.
pTo cancel shooting, press l() or r while the Call/Charging indicator is
flickering. Even if you cancel shooting, “Auto timer” stays set to “ON”.
pYou can shoot immediately by pressing Oo() or 0 before the delay time has
elapsed.
pWhen you shoot, a confirmation tone sounds regardless of the settings such as
Manner Mode. You cannot change the sound volume for the confirmation tone.
Auto Timer
At Camera start-up OFF
When Auto Timer is set to “ON”
Information
pYou cannot use Auto timer in “Manual” of Continuous Mode.
pAuto timer is set to “OFF” when shooting ends.
226
Camera
You can use the camera to scan JAN codes and QR codes and store
them as data files. As to CODE 128, download a compatible i-αppli
program and then scan the code to save the data. (See page 273)
From the scanned data, you can make calls, compose i-mode mail
messages, access Internet websites, and so on.
■When scanning with Bar Code Reader
pTake the code as large as possible
within the guide frame.
pAutofocus works when you scan a
code about 10 cm or more away from
it. When you scan a code in the
out-of-focus state, the recognition
rate lowers.
pScan so that the camera is in parallel
with the code.
■JAN Code
JAN Code is a bar code that denotes numerals with
the vertical bars of a different width.
You can scan 8-digit (JAN8) and 13-digit (JAN13)
JAN codes.
p“4942857112597” is displayed when you scan this bar
code with the FOMA terminal.
■QR Code
QR Code is one of the 2-dimensional codes that denotes data in
the vertical and horizontal directions.
Kanji, katakana, alphanumeric characters, and pictograms are
displayed when you scan it. Some QR codes have image or
melody information.
p“株式会社NTTドコモ (NTT DOCOMO, INC.)” is displayed when
you scan this QR code with the FOMA terminal.
<Bar Code Reader>
Using Bar Code Reader
Scanning Code display
Guide frame
■CODE 128
CODE 128 is a bar code that denotes 128
characters of ASCII code (numerals,
alphabets, symbols, etc.) with the vertical
bars of different widths.
pDownload the i-αppli program which supports CODE 128, and then scan the above
code. “NTT DOCOMO” is displayed.
You can store up to 5 scanned codes.
You can scan up to 16 divided QR codes.
1mLifeKitBar code readerScan code
The Bar Code Reader menu is displayed.
pYou can paste the Bar Code Reader menu to the desktop, or can store it for Multi
Key Long Press Setting. (See page 30 and page 386)
2Fit a code to be scanned to the guide frame and press
Xo.
When the subject is focused, a focus lock tone sounds and the cross mark
becomes green.
pPress i( ) and select “Brightness”; then you can adjust brightness to -3
(dark) through +3 (bright).
pPress Co to show the reduced display, and press Vo to return to the former
display.
Scan a Code
At Bar Code Reader
start-up
Brightness: ±0
Zoom: Magnified view
227
Camera
3Press Oo().
The code is scanned. (The shutter tone does not sound.)
pTo cancel scanning, press r or Oo().
pWhen scanning is completed, the scanning completion tone sounds and the Call/
Charging indicator lights. The sound level is fixed and cannot be changed.
However, the tone does not sound in Manner Mode or while “Phone” of “Ring
volume” is set to “Silent”.
p“ ” is displayed for melody files and “ ” or “ ” is displayed for incompatible
or damaged files.
pWhile you are entering (editing) characters, the Scanned Code Result display
does not appear; the Text Data Confirmation display of the scanned code
appears. To enter the scanned code, press Oo( ). To discard it, press
l() or r. The characters that cannot be displayed are replaced by
half-pitch spaces. When the code containing no text data has been scanned, the
code is not correctly displayed.
pIf scanning is not completed in a certain period, the scanning is suspended and
the Scanning Code display returns.
pWhen the scanned code is part of divided QR codes, select “OK” to repeat step 2
and step 3 for scanning the rest of codes.
4i()Save resultOK
The scanned data is stored.
Scanned Code
Result display
Information
pYou cannot scan bar codes or 2-dimensional codes other than JAN codes, QR codes,
or CODE 128.
pScanning may take a long time. Hold the FOMA terminal securely with your hands
during scanning.
pYou may not be able to scan codes correctly depending on scratch, dirt, damage, the
quality of printed material, light reflection, or QR code version.
pYou cannot scan some codes depending on the type or size.
Function Menu of the Scanned Code Result Display
Save result See page 227.
Display list You can show the Bar Code Reader list when one or more files
are stored.
Go to location You can connect to the highlighted URL via i-mode or Full
Browser.
i-mode Browser or Full BrowserYES
pYou can connect to the URL also by highlighting the URL and
pressing Oo().
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to send to the
highlighted mail address. Go to step 3 on page 130.
pYou can compose it also by highlighting the mail address and
pressing Oo().
pWhen you select “Compose message” from the Scanned Code
Result display, the data on the Scanned Code Result display is
entered into the address, subject, and text field.
Dialing You can make a voice call or videophone call to the highlighted
phone number.
Select a dialing type.
pWhen you select “Select image”, select an image to send to the
other party during the videophone call.
pWhen you select “Compose SMS”, you can compose an SMS
message to send to the phone number set as the destination
address. Go to step 3 on page 174.
pYou can make a call also by highlighting the phone number and
pressing Oo().
Dial
pTo make an international call, select “Int’l dial assist”. (See
page 58)
pTo set Caller ID Notification, select “Notify caller ID”. (See step 2
of “Set Caller ID Notification when Making a Call” on page 56)
Add to phonebook See page 82.
Add bookmark You can bookmark the site name and URL.
YES
pSelect “Page title” to edit the title.
OKSelect a destination folder.
228
Camera
Save image You can save the scanned image data to set to the Stand-by
display or other displays.
Select a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 192.
pSee page 194 when images are stored to the maximum.
Save melody You can save the scanned melody data to set it as a ring tone or
other tones.
YESSelect a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 193.
pSelect “ ” to play back the melody.
pSee page 194 when melodies are stored to the maximum.
Save ToruCa You can save the scanned ToruCa file.
Select a destination folder.
pSelect “ ” to display the ToruCa file.
pSee page 194 when ToruCa files are stored to the maximum.
Start iαppli You can start up i-αppli from the scanned data.
YES
Copy Select a start point for copying
Select an end point for copying.
pYou can copy codes of up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch
characters.
pSee page 410 for pasting copied characters.
Information
<Go to location>
pURL can be displayed in up to 512 half-pitch characters.
<Compose message>
pIf the scanned data contains nonenterable characters, you cannot enter it as a mail
address, and those characters may become spaces in the text field.
<Dialing>
pYou cannot make emergency calls by scanning “110”, “119” or “118”.
<Add bookmark>
pYou can display up to 512 half-pitch characters for a URL and can store up to 256
characters from the beginning.
<Save image>
pThe file name and title for the saved image are “imageXXX” (XXX are numerals).
1mLifeKitBar code reader
Saved data
The titles for stored data are displayed from the latest
one.
pSelect a title to show the Scanned Code Result display.
<Save melody>
pThe file name for the saved melody is “melodyXXX” (XXX are numerals).
pFor the melody with no title, the file name is displayed as the title.
pWhen playing back the melody, it is played back at the sound volume set for “Phone”
of “Ring volume”.
Display the Saved Data List
Information
Bar Code Reader list
Information
pThe titles for the scanned data are as follows:
(Example) When the scanned data is saved at 10:00 on November 18, 2009;
Title name: 20091118_1000_0000
・If you store multiple data items for the same date and time, the lower
four-digit numbers increase up to “9999”.
Function Menu of the Bar Code Reader List
Edit title Enter a title.
You can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.
Result You can show the Scanned Code Result display for stored
data.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
229
1Seg
1Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Before Using 1Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Setting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Channel Setting> 231
Watching 1Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Activate 1Seg> 233
Using i-αppli Program Guide. . . . . . . <i-αppli Program Guide> 238
Using Data Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . <Data Broadcasting> 238
Using TV Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<TVlink> 239
Recording a 1Seg Program while Watching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Setting Timer for Watching or Recording 1Seg Programs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <TV Timer> <Timer Recording> 241
Setting 1Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <User Settings> 246
230
1Seg
1Seg is the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service for mobile objects, and it
broadcasts data as well as video and audio. Further, by using i-mode, you can obtain the
detailed information, can participate in quiz programs or can have fun with TV shopping.
For details on the 1Seg service, browse the following websites:
The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting
From personal computers: http://www.dpa.or.jp/english/
From i-mode: http://www.dpa.or.jp/1seg/k/ (In Japanese only)
■Using 1Seg
p1Seg is a service provided by television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations). You are
not charged a communication fee for receiving audio and video. For viewing fee of
NHK, contact NHK.
pThe information displayed in the data broadcasting area contains “Data broadcasting”
and “Data broadcasting site”.
“Data broadcasting” is displayed on airwaves together with video and audio, and “Data
broadcasting site” is displayed by connecting from the information of data broadcasting
to the sites provided by television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations). Also, it might
be connected to “i-mode site”, etc. When connecting to sites, you need to subscribe to
i-mode separately.
pYou are charged a packet communication fee for browsing “Data broadcasting site”
and “i-mode site”.
You might be charged an information fee for using some sites (i-mode pay sites).
pThe ToruCa files might be automatically saved while you are watching a 1Seg
program. When you receive detailed information from the saved ToruCa files, you are
charged a packet communication fee.
■Radio waves
1Seg is one of the broadcasting services receiving radio waves (broadcasting waves)
different from that used for the FOMA services. Accordingly, you cannot watch the
broadcasting when you are out of reach of the broadcasting waves, or when the
broadcasting is suspended regardless of whether you are in or out of the FOMA service
area.
Even when you are in the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service area, reception
condition might be deteriorated or you might not be able to receive programs in the
following places:
・Where the radio tower that transmits broadcasting waves is far away
・Where the radio waves are blocked by geographical features such as mountains or
valleys of high-rise buildings
・Where the radio waves are weak or do not reach, such as in tunnels, underground, or
recesses of buildings
The reception conditions might be improved by moving your FOMA terminal away from
or close to you, or by moving yourself to another place.
1Seg ■Messages on the display when you use 1Seg for the first time
When you use 1Seg for the first time after purchase, the Exemption Clause Confirmation
display appears.
If you select “NO” from the confirmation display which appears after pressing
Oo( ), the same confirmation display does not appear afterward.
pThe Exemption Clause Confirmation display also appears when you replace the UIM
with another one or remove the UIM.
■What is broadcasting storage area?
The broadcasting storage area is a storage area inside the terminal that is exclusive for
1Seg. The information you input according to the instruction on the data broadcasting
program is saved to that broadcasting storage area following the settings of television
entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations). The information to be saved might contain
answers for quiz, and personal information such as membership number, gender, age,
or occupation.
The saved information might be displayed, or be sent to television entrepreneurs
(broadcasting stations) without your re-input when you browse to the data broadcasting
site.
pSee page 248 to erase information in the broadcasting storage area.
When you replace the UIM with another one or remove the UIM, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to reset the broadcasting storage area. Select “YES”,
and reset it. If you select “NO”, the services using the broadcasting storage area are
not available.
■Messages on the display when the information in the broadcasting storage area
is read out
When the information in the broadcasting storage area is used while you are watching a
program, the message “Use saved information? It may include information used by the
same broadcasting group” is displayed.
If you select “YES”, the confirmation display asking whether to read out the stored
information while watching the same program does not appear after that. Further if you
select “YES (default)”, the same confirmation display does not appear afterward.
<Example> When you watch a 1Seg program for the first time
Store the channel list for the area you use. (See page 231)
Before Using 1Seg
How to Watch a 1Seg Program
Channel Setting
1
231
1Seg
Activate 1Seg. (See page 233)
■Battery level
If you try to start 1Seg or 1Seg starts automatically by TV Timer when the battery is low,
the battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to
start it. Also, when the battery becomes low while you are watching or recording a 1Seg
program, the battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking
whether to end 1Seg. The battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting of “Keypad
sound”.
pWhen you do nothing from the confirmation display for about one minute, 1Seg
automatically terminates.
pWhile “Rec. when low battery” is set to “ON”, the confirmation display does not appear
during recording. (See page 247)
pIf the battery level becomes low during recording and recording ends, the video
recorded up to that point is automatically saved.
pDuring Multitask, the battery alert tone sounds but the confirmation display does not
appear. Switch to the viewer display and then operate.
■When a call etc. comes in while you are watching or recording a 1Seg program
When an event shown below occurs while watching or recording a 1Seg program, the
video and audio are suspended, and each function works. Recording is not suspended.
After you finish each function, you can resume watching a 1Seg program. See page 237
for receiving i-mode mail messages, SMS messages or Messages R/F.
pIncoming voice call or videophone call
(To start recording when a call is received, refer to “Rec. program when call”.)
pNotification of Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, or TV Timer
(when “Alarm setting” is set to “Alarm preferred”)
pNotification of Timer Recording
(When the start date/time comes, the FOMA terminal works according to the setting of
“Priority”.)
Activating 1Seg
2
Information
p1Seg is not available while “USB mode setting” is set to “microSD mode” or “MTP
mode” and the FOMA terminal is connected to a personal computer.
p1Seg might automatically start when you end a call by closing the FOMA terminal
during a call. In such a case, be careful not to use the FOMA terminal close to your
ear because audio is output at the sound volume for 1Seg.
pThe life of battery pack may shorten if you watch 1Seg programs for a long time
during charging.
p1Seg is not available overseas.
To watch 1Seg programs, you need to execute Channel Setting and to
select a channel list in advance. You can store up to 10 channel lists.
pThe broadcasting stations you can receive differ depending on the local area. If you
store a channel list of the area for traveling or business trip, you can watch programs in
the area just by selecting the channel list.
pThe remote-control numbers you use with channel selections are previously set for
respective broadcasting stations.
pYou cannot execute Channel Setting during recording of a 1Seg program.
The broadcasting stations you can currently watch are automatically
searched and stored in a channel list.
pYou need to set this function in the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service area.
1m1SegChannel settingAuto channel setting
YES
Searching takes place.
pFrom the Channel list display, press i( ), select “Channel setting” →
“Auto channel set.”.
From the viewer display, press i( ), select “Disp.Ch. /operation” →
“Channel setting” → “Auto channel set.”.
■Important
Note that we cannot be held responsible for loss or changes of the saved contents due
to a malfunction, repair, or other mishandling of the FOMA terminal. Furthermore, we
cannot move the saved information (such as still images, TV links, or information
saved to the broadcasting storage area) when you change your FOMA terminal or
have it repaired.
<Channel Setting>
Setting Channels
Auto Channel Setting
232
1Seg
2YESEnter a title.
pYou can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters.
pWhen you press Oo( ) without entering a title, the title name takes the
name of “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”. (Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)
pTo cancel searching midway, press l() or r; then select “YES”. You
can store the searched broadcasting stations in a channel list.
You can store the broadcasting stations set by prefecture to a channel
list.
1m1SegChannel settingSelect area
Select an areaSelect a prefectureYES
pFrom the Channel list display, press i( ), select “Channel setting” →
“Select area”.
From the viewer display, press i( ), select “Disp.Ch. /operation” →
“Channel setting” → “Select area”.
Information
pWhen the multiple broadcasting stations which have the same remote-control number
are retrieved, the message to the effect that the remote-control number is doubled
appears. Select “OK” and select your area from the Local Area Selection display. The
channels in the area you select are preferentially assigned to remote-control numbers
1 to 12, and channels in the area you do not select are assigned to remote-control
numbers 13 onward.
pThe time to search channels requires for about 30 to 50 seconds. However, it differs
depending on the number of broadcasting stations or airwave conditions, and might
exceed 100 seconds.
Select Area
Information
pDepending on the area, you may not be able to correctly store the broadcasting
stations by “Select area”. In that case, search for the broadcasting stations by “Auto
channel setting”.
You can select a channel list to set the broadcasting stations you receive.
Also, you can edit the channel list already stored.
1m1SegChannel listSelect a channel list.
The channel list you receive
is set, and the detailed
display appears.
pSelect a broadcasting
station to watch a 1Seg
program.
pWhen you select “Disp.Ch.
/operation” from the
Function menu of the
viewer display and select “Channel list”, the viewer display returns after you
select a channel list.
pYou can watch a 1Seg program also by pressing l( ) from the Channel
list display and selecting a broadcasting station.
Select Channel List
Channel list display Detailed Channel list
display
Remote-control number
Function Menu of the Channel List Display
Channel setting See page 231.
Edit title Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters.
Delete YES
pYou cannot delete the channel list currently set.
Function Menu of the Detailed Channel List Display
Remote control No. You can change the broadcasting station set for the
remote-control number.
Select a broadcasting station you want to change
Select the remote-control number to be set.
pIf any broadcasting station has already been set for the
specified remote-control number, the broadcasting stations
switch positions. Repeat the operation to set a broadcasting
station for a remote-control number.
l()YES
233
1Seg
pWhen you use 1Seg for the first time, the Exemption Clause Confirmation display
appears. (See page 230)
pYou can start 1Seg also by using the channel information (links) displayed in the i-αppli
Program Guide, sites, or mail. (See “Media To Function” on page 196)
pBy connecting to the Stereo Earphone Set (option), you can play back the audio from
1Seg programs in stereo sound. Also, you can play back the audio wirelessly by using
a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 400)
1Press and hold c for at least one
second.
1Seg starts from the channel you watched last time.
“ ” is displayed while watching a 1Seg program.
pWhen you have not stored any channel list, the
confirmation display appears. Select “OK” and execute
Channel Setting. (See page 231)
pTo end watching, press h and select “End 1Seg”.
You can switch to play background by selecting
“Change to BGM”.
Delete YES
pWhen you delete all the broadcasting stations in the channel
list, the channel list itself is deleted.
pYou cannot delete the broadcasting station in the channel list
currently set.
<Activate 1Seg>
Watching 1Seg
Viewer display
■About Viewer display
(When “Switch display” is “V. img+Caption+DBC”.)
Video
“ ” appears on the upper right of the display when the data broadcasting linked with
a 1Seg program is found while you are watching on the horizontal display or in the
multiwindow.
Caption
You can set display position of the caption on the horizontal display by “Caption posit.
in w-scr”.
Data Broadcasting
Operation Mode
Video Mode: Operates the video or audio. (See page 233)
Data Broadcasting Mode: Operates the data broadcasting. (See page 238)
Off Timer
“ ” appears while Off Timer is set.
ECO Mode
“ ” appears during ECO Mode.
Channel (Remote-control number)
pWhen a broadcasting station is broadcasting multiple services (programs), “Viewing
service number/Number of all services” is also displayed.
pIf you have searched a channel using Channel Search, the channel (Remote-control
number) might not be displayed.
Airwave Reception Level (estimate)
(
strong) (weak)
“ ” appears out of the broadcasting area.
Guide display
Horizontal display
Vertical display
 
 

234
1Seg
Reception of Caption
“ ” is displayed while caption information is being received.
Sound Volume
Program Information (outline)
The program name is displayed on the vertical display. The channel, start/end time,
and program name are displayed on the horizontal display.
Record Video
“ ” appears during video recording, and “ ” appears during video
recording by Timer Recording. “ ” appears during pause of recording.
Switch Display/Caption
Status of Video Image: ON/OFF/enlarged
Caption: ON/OFF
Icon/Caption
Icon: “ON/OFF” of “Icon”
Caption: Position ( : Lower, : Upper) and OFF
p, ,and are displayed when you operate keys.
pWhile “Icon” is set to “OFF”, the guide display appears on the horizontal display when
you operate keys.
■Channel switching operation (in Video Mode only)
Operation Key operation
Direct channel
selection
Remote control No.1~9 . . . . . 1~9
Remote control No.10. . . . . . . a
Remote control No.11. . . . . . . 0
Remote control No.12. . . . . . . s
Channel selection No
Channel search No(for at least one second)
pEach time of pressing switches channels by searching
receivable broadcasting stations in order of frequency.
pl() or r to suspend
■Operations while watching a 1Seg program
※1 You cannot operate in Data Broadcasting Mode.
※2 You cannot operate from the horizontal display.
※3 This operation shows the program information (outline) when the horizontal display
is shown.
Operation Key operation
Sound volume
adjustment
Bo※1 or </>
Mute/Release mute r※1
Start i-αppli program
guide
l()
※2
Program info l(for at least one second)
Program info (outline)
d
Switch display d while displaying program information (outline)
pEach time of pressing from the horizontal display switches
the setting of “Icon” and “Caption posit. in w-scr”.
Switch display
directions/
Full display
c
pIn Video Mode, each time of pressing switches the display
directions.
pIn Data Broadcasting Mode, each time of pressing switches
between the normal display and the full display.
Record video Oo( )(for at least one second)※1
pOo()
※1 to end
Record still image Oo()
※1
Switch TV/data BC m()
※3
pEach time of pressing switches between Video Mode and
Data Broadcasting Mode.
235
1Seg
Information
pEven when you switch displays by using Multitask while you are watching a 1Seg
program, the audio from the 1Seg program is output. (Play Background) The audio
might not be output, however, depending on the function or program. (See page 479)
pWhen “TV sound while closed” is set to “ON”, the audio is output even if you close the
FOMA terminal while you are watching a 1Seg program. You cannot do anything
other than adjusting the volume when your FOMA terminal is closed.
pThe following might occur depending on the airwave conditions:
・The audio is interrupted. ・The data broadcasting is not operable.
・Block-shaped noise appears on the display or playing stops.
・The video or the data broadcasting is not displayed. (A dark screen appears.)
pThe caption might not be displayed depending on the program.
pThe data broadcasting cannot be displayed on the horizontal display.
pIf you move, the receivable airwaves or broadcasting stations might change being
affected by mountains or buildings. If reception on 1Seg goes bad after moving,
perform “Auto channel setting”; then reception might be improved via different
airwaves or you might be able to watch programs of other broadcasting stations.
pIf you use Channel Search to select channels after you move, etc., you might find the
channels you could not store by “Auto channel setting”. Execute “Add to ch. list” to
store the channels you found, and then you can watch the channel from the next time.
pWhen starting 1Seg or switching channels, it takes a while before you can watch a
1Seg program.
Function Menu of Viewer Display
Program info You can display information of the program you are
watching.
Program guide Seepage238.
Disp.Ch. /operation
Channel info You can display the detailed display of the selected
channel list. Select a broadcasting station to switch to it.
Channel list Go to step 1 of “Select Channel List” on page 232.
Channel setting See page 231.
Add to ch. list You can add the broadcasting station you are currently
watching to the channel list.
YES
pThe broadcasting station is stored in the lowest
number of an unoccupied remote-control number
from 13 onward.
Tune service You can select a program to watch when the same
broadcasting station is broadcasting multiple services
(programs).
Select a channel.
Data broadcasting
Back to data BC You can stop browsing the data broadcasting site and
return to the data broadcasting.
Reload contents You can reload the data broadcasting site being
displayed.
pThe confirmation display appears asking whether to
re-send the data you entered, depending on the site.
Certificate See page 186.
Image display set. See page 197.
Sound setting See page 247.
ToruCa from dataBC See page 303.
Reset settings See page 247.
236
1Seg
TVlink list You can display the TVlink list. (See page 239)
Compose message See page 237.
Settings
Display/operation
Switch display You can switch the contents of the viewer display.
Select an item.
pIf you set to “Enlarged V. img+DBC”, the video on the
vertical display is enlarged. However, the sides of the
video might be cut depending on the program.
pEven if you set to “Data broadcasting”, the audio from
1Seg programs is output.
pThe operation mode automatically switches to Data
Broadcasting Mode when you display data
broadcasting in full display. When you release full
display of data broadcasting, the operation mode
returns to the former mode.
Switch TV/data BC You can switch between Video Mode and Data
Broadcasting Mode while watching a 1Seg program on
the vertical display.
Icon See page 246.
Video
Brightness You can set the brightness of the display light to Level 1
(dark) through 5 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
pIf you set to “Auto setting”, it is adjusted automatically
in accordance with the ambient brightness sensed by
the light sensor.
pThe setting here is valid until you finish watching the
1Seg program. The setting at 1Seg start-up follows
the setting of “Brightness” of “Backlight” on page 102.
Mobile W-Speed See page 246.
Image quality See page 246.
At 1Seg start-up
When “Caption” is
set to “ON”:
V. img+Caption+
DBC
When “Caption” is
set to “OFF”:
Visual image+DBC
At 1Seg start-up
Video Mode
LCD AI See page 103.
Sound
Sound effect
Auto volume See page 246.
Remaster See page 246.
Listening See page 247.
Equalizer See page 247.
Main/sub sound Main sound, Sub sound, or Main+sub sound
Switch audio data Sound 1 or Sound 2
pYou can switch only when audio that can be switched
is found.
TV sound w/ closed See page 247.
ECO mode See page 247.
Off timer When the specified time elapses, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to end watching or
recording a program (except for Timer Recording).
Select a time.
Key guide You can display the guide of key operation during
watching a 1Seg program.
At 1Seg start-up
Main sound
At 1Seg start-up
OFF
Information
<Off timer>
pIn the following cases, the Off Timer confirmation display appears after each
operation finishes:
・In standby state for Timer Recording ・While being recorded by Timer Recording
・While a still image is being saved ・When an unsaved image is left
・During channel search by Auto Channel Setting
237
1Seg
You can compose and send i-mode mail messages while watching a
1Seg program. (Multiwindow)
When you send an i-mode mail message to the FOMA terminal
supporting the “Media To” function by “Recom. channel mail”, the
receiving end can start 1Seg by using the “Media To” function.
pYou cannot operate 1Seg while the Message Composition display is shown. You
cannot show the caption and data broadcasting, either.
pYou can compose SMS messages as well while watching a 1Seg program.
1Viewer displayi()Compose message
Compose message or Recom. channel mail
Compose message
. . . You can compose a new i-mode
mail message.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
Recom. channel mail
. . . You can compose an i-mode mail
message whose text contains the
information of the channel you
are watching.
Go to step 2 on page 130.
pWhen the Message Composition
display is shown, you can switch
between the Message Composition
display and the viewer display (horizontal display) each time you press and hold
c for at least one second.
Send i-mode Mail while Watching
Message
Composition
display
Viewer display
Information
pEven when you show the Message Composition display/detailed Sent Mail display by
Multitask while you are watching a 1Seg program, the display appears in the
multiwindow.
pOnly the audio is output from a 1Seg program without showing the viewer display if
you select “Mail history” from the Function menu of the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list or a
detailed mail display by Multitask while watching a 1Seg program and show the
detailed Sent Mail display of a mail message sent to a person whose mail address is
not stored in the Phonebook.
pWhen “ ” or “ ” appears, press and hold +c for at least one second to switch to
the viewer display and then operate.
The ticker on the viewer display notifies you of the receiving of an i-mode
mail message, SMS message, and Message R/F. You can show the
detailed Received Mail display while you are watching a 1Seg program.
(Multiwindow)
pYou cannot show tickers when “Mail ticker display” is set to “OFF” or during Public
mode (Drive mode).
pOnly the audio is output from a 1Seg program without showing the viewer display when
you show a mail message from the party whose mail address is not stored in the
Phonebook.
pYou cannot operate 1Seg while the detailed Received Mail display is shown. You
cannot show the caption and data broadcasting, either.
pYou can show an SMS messages as well while watching a 1Seg program.
1Receive i-mode mail while viewer display is shown
Press l( ) while the ticker is displayed.
pThe mail ring tone does not sound.
pWhen the detailed Received Mail display
is shown, you can switch between the
detailed Mail display and the viewer
display (horizontal display) each time you
press and hold c for at least one
second.
Receive i-mode Mail while Watching
Detailed
Received
Mail display
Viewer
display
Information
pEven if “Mail ticker display” is set to “Sender+subject”, the titles are not displayed for
Messages R/F, i-mode mail messages, and SMS messages received from the parties
not stored in the Phonebook.
pEven when you show the detailed Received Mail display by Multitask while you are
watching a 1Seg program, the display appears in the multiwindow.
238
1Seg
By using the i-αppli Program Guide, you can select a program from the
program guide to start 1Seg or set TV Timer/Timer Recording. (See
page 279)
1m1SegProgram guide
pPress l( ) from the display of “Gガイド番組
表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote Control)” to
watch the program currently broadcast on the selected
channel.
pFor details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version”.
pWhen “Mail ticker display” is set to “OFF”, “Receiving display” is set to “Alarm
preferred”, and you receive a mail message while watching a 1Seg program, the
Reception Result display appears and the mail ring tone sounds. The mail message is
shown in the multiwindow even when you show it from the Reception Result display.
However, the viewer display does not appear and the audio from a 1Seg program is
not output when you show a mail message from the party whose mail address is not
stored in the Phonebook.
pWhen “ ” or “ ” appears, press and hold +c for at least one second to switch to
the viewer display and then operate.
<i-αppli Program Guide>
Using i-αppli Program Guide
Information
Information
pYou can set the i-αppli Program Guide by “Program guide key” of “Software setting”.
pWhen you use “Gガイド番組表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote Control)”
for the first time, you need to do initial settings.
1Seg enables you to use the data broadcasting in addition to the video
and audio. Various information including still images/moving pictures is
available from the site linked with TV programs.
pSee page 230 for data broadcasting and data broadcasting sites.
1Viewer display (Video Mode)
m()
Video Mode switches to Data Broadcasting Mode and
“ ” appears.
pAudio from a 1Seg program is output even during Data
Broadcasting Mode.
pYou can display only data broadcasting when you press
c( ) in Data Broadcasting Mode. Press
c( ) to return to the former display.
2Select an item (link).
pThe confirmation display appears asking whether to connect to i-mode
depending on the data broadcasting and data broadcasting site.
pYou can scroll displays and move highlighted indications by pressing Bo while a
data broadcasting program or data broadcasting site is displayed.
pYou can go/return to the previous/next page by pressing No while a data
broadcasting site is displayed.
<Data Broadcasting>
Using Data Broadcasting
Information
pEach time you press +m( ), Video Mode and Data Broadcasting Mode are
switched.
pYou cannot display the data broadcasting on the horizontal display.
pYou cannot enter pictograms when you enter characters on data broadcasting or data
broadcasting site.
pDepending on the program, the audio might be output while the i-mode site is
displayed. However, the 1Seg video is not displayed.
pDepending on the program, a tone might be output when you display the data
broadcasting or data broadcasting site. In that case, the output of the 1Seg audio
temporarily stops, and the tone of the data broadcasting is preferentially output.
239
1Seg
You can use the highlighted information on the data broadcasting site to
easily use the functions such as making calls, or sending mail.
Select an item (link) and use the Phone To/AV Phone To or Mail To
function. (See page 195)
Some data broadcasting programs might contain TV links which lead to
the details of the programs or related information site.
From the TV links, you can store the site address information in the
TVlink list and can easily call them up for browsing later.
pWhile the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site is displayed, the confirmation
display might appear asking whether to send the contents you entered on the site or
whether to permit obtaining mobile phone information.
pWhen you select “YES (default)” from the confirmation display for data broadcasting,
the information on data broadcasting might be automatically updated, and you might
be charged a packet communication fee while watching a 1Seg program or playing
back a video. (See page 247)
pIf you move in a place where the airwave is unstable while watching a 1Seg program,
the video, data broadcasting, and data broadcasting site may be automatically
updated. In that case, the top page of the data broadcasting appears, and the
information you have entered into the connected data broadcasting or data
broadcasting site is cleared. Ensure that you watch the data broadcasting and data
broadcasting site in a place where the airwave is stable.
Use Highlighted Information for Various Operations
Information
Information
pDepending on the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site, the function of
composing i-mode mail or storing the Phonebook entries might be automatically used.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to use each function.
<TVlink>
Using TV Link
When you select the item (link) that can be stored in the TVlink list, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to store it in the TVlink list.
You can store up to 50 TV links.
1In Data Broadcasting Mode, select an item (link) that can
be stored in the TVlink listYES
pWhen you try to store the same URL or memo information, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to overwrite it.
pWhen the maximum number of TV links has already been stored in the TVlink list,
the confirmation display appears asking whether to store after deleting.
1m1SegTVlink
Select a TV link to be displayed.
pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether
to connect to i-mode, select “YES”.
pFor a link whose validity period is expired, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to delete it.
■Icons in the TVlink list
Store in TV Link
Information
pValidity period is set for some links.
pWhen a URL for a link contains more than 60 half-pitch characters, you cannot store
the link.
Call Up a Stored TV Link
TVlink list
Icon Format Description
Memo information Displays memo information.
Link communication
contents
Connects to the data broadcasting site.
(Video and caption are not displayed.)
i-mode contents Connects to the i-mode site.
Full Browser contents Connects via Full Browser.
240
1Seg
You can save the program you are watching as video or still images.
pThe copy control signals such as “Copy never”, “Copy once (copy for only one time)”,
and “Copy free” are incorporated in 1Seg. The copy control signals are determined by
each broadcasting station.
pYou cannot record the programs of “Copy never”. Further, when the copy control signal
is changed to “Copy never” during recording, the recording session is closed, and the
video recorded up to that point is saved.
The recorded video is saved to the microSD card (“Data box”→“1Seg”→
“Video”).
pSee page 334 for playing back the recorded video.
pYou cannot save the recorded video to the FOMA terminal.
1Viewer displayOo( )(for at least one second)
The confirmation tone sounds, “ ” appears, and recording starts.
pWhen the airwave reception level indicates “ ”, you cannot record video. Even
if “ ” is indicated, you might not be able to record it depending on the airwave
conditions.
pYou cannot change the channel during recording.
Function Menu of the TVlink List
Display detail Displays the title, URL, outline, content type, and validity
period of the TV link.
No. of TVlink Displays the number of the registered TV links.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for TV links to be deleted
l()YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Recording a 1Seg Program while Watching
Record Video
2Press Oo().
The confirmation tone sounds and video is saved.
p
When the file size is larger than 2 Gbytes, or the storage location becomes full, the
recording automatically ends, and then the video recorded up to that point is saved.
■Estimate of the recordable time and the number of saved files
pThe maximum recordable time is estimation for 224 kbps of video, 48 kbps of audio,
and 52 kbps of data (including captions). The recordable time varies depending on the
broadcasting station or program.
pThe maximum file size for continuous recording is up to 2 Gbytes under SD-VIDEO
specifications.
pThe savable number of video files decreases depending on the data volume.
Capacity of the
card
The maximum recordable
time (total)
The maximum savable
number
2 Gbytes Approx. 640 minutes
99
4 Gbytes Approx. 1,280 minutes
8 Gbytes Approx. 2,560 minutes
16 Gbytes Approx. 5,120 minutes
Information
pYou cannot record 1Seg programs during Data Broadcasting Mode. Switch to Video
Mode for it.
pThe playing time of the saved data might become shorter than the recording time
depending on the airwave conditions.
pThe recording is not suspended even when you switch displays by Multitask or when
a call comes in during recording.
pWhen the airwave conditions are changed to indicate “ ” during recording,
recording shifts to pause state, then “ ” and “ ” are displayed. Video and
audio during that period are not saved.
pIf you remove the battery pack or pull out the microSD card during recording, the
recorded data is saved to the microSD card as the file that cannot be played back.
pDepending on the broadcasting station or program, video and audio might be saved a
few seconds after your recording operation.
pYou cannot record when the video storage area is full. Also, you might not be able to
record when the unused space in the storage area is not enough. Delete unnecessary
video files and try again.
pSome programs cannot use the storage area fully.
241
1Seg
The recorded still images are saved to your FOMA terminal (“Data box”→
“1Seg”→“Image” folder). You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing
the memory space with other data files, however, the number of files you
can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 508)
pSee page 319 for displaying the recorded still image files.
pYou cannot save still images to the microSD card.
1Viewer displayOo()
The confirmation tone sounds, and the still image is saved.
pWhen the airwave reception level indicates “ ”, you cannot record still images.
pThe file name and title name of the saved video are as follows:
File name: “PRGXXX”
Title name: “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”
(X: numerals, Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)
pYou cannot set the recorded video for the Stand-by display, ring tone or Call
Receiving display.
Record Still Images
Information
Information
pYou cannot record 1Seg programs during Data Broadcasting Mode. Switch to Video
Mode for it.
pThe file name and title name of the saved still image are as follows:
File name: “YYYYMMDDhhmmXXX”
Title name: “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”
(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute, X: numeral)
pYou cannot set the recorded still image for the Stand-by display or the Call Receiving
display.
pSee page 194 when images are stored to the maximum.
pData broadcasting and caption cannot be saved as still images.
You can set TV Timer/Timer Recording of 1Seg programs. At the
specified date/time, an alarm sounds to notify you of the start of the
program.
pYou can set TV Timer/Timer Recording also by using the channel information (links)
displayed in the i-αppli Program Guide, sites, or mail. (See “Media To Function” on
page 196)
You can set TV Timer by setting the date/time, channel, and program
name. You can use “Act. TV w/ alarm” to automatically start 1Seg at the
set time. You can set TV Timer for up to 100 programs.
1m1SegTV Timer listl()
Do the following operations.
pSelect a program you set TV Timer for to check the contents. You can edit them
by pressing l().
<TV Timer> <Timer Recording>
Setting Timer for Watching or Recording
1Seg Programs
TV Timer List
Channel Select a channel.
Edit title Enter a program name.
pYou can enter up to 60 full-pitch/120 half-pitch characters.
Start date
setting
Enter a date/time for starting watching.
Select an item.
Enter date . . . . . . Enter a date/time directly.
Choose date . . . . Select a date from the Calendar and enter a
time.
Repeat Select a type of repeat.
pIf you select “Select day”, put a check mark for days of the week
to be set and press l().
pThe item set with repetition is counted as one item.
242
1Seg
Alarm Select an alarm method.
ON. . . . . . . . . . . .Alerts you at the time set for the start date/time
comes. The setting for alarm notification is
completed.
ON/Set time . . . .Alerts you at the time set as the prenotification.
OFF. . . . . . . . . . .Does not alert. The setting for alarm notification
is completed. (You cannot watch the 1Seg
program.)
Select how many seconds (minutes) before the specified
time to be alerted.
pWhen you set “Auto power ON” to “ON”, you cannot set “15
seconds before”, “30 seconds before”, and “45 seconds before”
as the prenotification time.
Alarm tone Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
Volume Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pIf you set to “Step”, the alarm tone is silent for about three
seconds, and then the volume steps up every about three
seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6.
Act. TV w/ alarm Select an item.
Auto ON . . . . . . .After the Timer Alarm Notification display
appears, 1Seg automatically starts.
Manual ON. . . . .You can manually activate 1Seg from the Timer
Alarm Notification display.
OFF. . . . . . . . . . .The timer alarm sounds only. You cannot
activate 1Seg from the Timer Alarm Notification
display.
Auto power ON You can set whether to turn on the power automatically to sound
the timer alarm when the alarm time comes during power off.
ON or OFF
1Seg volume You can set the sound volume of a 1Seg program when it is
activated by “Act. TV w/ alarm”.
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
Off timer You can set to end watching a 1Seg program for when the
specified time elapses after the 1Seg program automatically
starts by “Act. TV w/ alarm”.
Select a time.
2Press l().
You can set timer recordings by setting the date/time, channel, and
program name. You can set up to 100 timer recordings.
1m1SegTimer recording listl()
Do the following operations.
pSelect a set timer recording to check the contents, and you can edit it by pressing
l().
pYou can display the used memory space (estimate) by pressing i().
Prefer manner
mode
You can set the sound volume of timer alarm for during Manner
Mode.
ON or OFF
ON . . . . Sounds at the same volume as set for “TV timer alarm”
on page 98.
OFF . . . Sounds at the volume set for this function.
Timer Recording List
Channel Select a channel.
Edit title Enter a program name.
pYou can enter up to 60 full-pitch/120 half-pitch characters.
Start date
setting
Enter a date/time for starting or ending recording. The timer alarm
sounds about one minute before the starting time.
Select an item.
Enter date. . . . . . . Enter a date/time directly.
Choose date . . . . Select a date from the Calendar and enter a
time.
End date setting
Repeat Select a type of repeat.
pIf you select “Select day”, put a check mark for days of the week
to be set and press l().
pThe item set with repetition is counted as one item.
243
1Seg
2Press l().
pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether to set the timer recording,
select “YES”. If you select “YES (default)”, the same confirmation display does
not appear afterward.
Alarm You can set whether to sound alarm at the specified time of timer
alarm.
ON or OFF
Volume Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pYou cannot set the volume to “Step”.
Priority You can set a recording operation for when the start date/time
arrives while operating a function which cannot be started up
simultaneously.
Recording or Operation
Recording. . . . Suspends and terminates the function being
operated, and starts recording.
Operation . . . . The confirmation display appears asking
whether to start recording. Select “YES” to
suspend and terminate the function being
operated and start recording.
pFor while operating a function which can be started up
simultaneously, recording starts by the Multitask function.
pWhen the start time arrives during a call (including dialing and
ringing), recording starts after you end the call. When you are
using another function during a call, recording starts after you
end the call and the function.
Overwrite setting
When you set a recording to be repeated and set “Overwrite
setting” to “ON”, the program recorded last time is automatically
deleted and overwritten.
OFF or ON
Information
pYou can set TV Timer/Timer Recording also by using the program information
displayed in the i-αppli Program Guide, sites, or mail. In that case, the registration
display might appear with the start date/time, end date/time, channel, and program
name entered.
pWhen you set TV Timer for multiple programs and set the timer alarm to sound at the
same date/time, the alarm preferentially sounds for the program whose start date/time
is the earliest. When the start date/time of the programs is the same, the alarm
preferentially sounds for the program you set last.
pYou cannot set multiple timer recordings whose recording time overlaps. If you set two
timer recordings and the recording end time of one program is the same as the
recording start time of the other, recording of the first program ends about one minute
earlier.
pYou cannot set TV Timer/Timer Recording for the programs whose start date/time or
timer alarm date/time is past (about one minute before the start date/time for Timer
Recording), except for the timer setting to be repeated.
pThe setting of TV Timer/Timer Recording whose timer alarm date/time is past is
automatically deleted. However, the timer setting to be repeated and the TV Timer
setting for which “Alarm” is set to “OFF” are not deleted. Further, the settings are not
deleted when you are operating the TV Timer/Timer Recording function at the alarm
date/time.
pWhen no channel lists are set, you cannot set TV Timer/Timer Recording.
pTurn off the FOMA terminal after setting “Auto power ON” to “OFF” when you are near
electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals, or where the use is
prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals.
pWhen you have set “Priority” to “Operation” and the confirmation display is shown, the
recording does not start even at the recording start time and starts at the time you
select “YES”. However, the recording is not executed if the recording end time is over.
pWhen “Overwrite setting” is set to “ON”, the timer recording starts after erasing the
program previously recorded. Regardless of whether you have watched the recorded
program or not, or whether you have succeeded or failed timer recording, the
previously recorded program is erased. If it is not erased before the timer recording
starts, recording might not start on time.
pWhen you set “Overwrite setting” to “ON” for a recording, the file size of the recorded
video might become larger than that of the video recorded last time because the file
size varies depending on the recording (or watching) environment or programs. Note
that you might not be able to record correctly when the unused memory space in the
storage location is not enough.
pThe title of the recorded video file takes the program name booked for the timer
recording.
p“ ” appears on the viewer display during recording by Timer Recording.
pThe audio from a 1Seg program is not output during recording started by Timer
Recording. You can output the audio by pressing -r or adjusting the sound volume,
however.
Information
244
1Seg
The icon appears on the desktop.
“ ” . . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for today (except the setting for past time).
“ ” . . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for tomorrow or onward only.
pIf you set TV Timer with “Alarm” set to “OFF”, the icons are not displayed.
Function Menu while the TV Timer List or the Timer
Recording List is Displayed
New Go to step 1 of “TV Timer List” on page 241 for TV Timer.
Go to step 1 on page 242 for Timer Recording.
Edit Go to step 1 of “TV Timer List” on page 241 for TV Timer.
Go to step 1 on page 242 for Timer Recording.
Sort You can change the display order.
Select an order.
Delete this YES
Delete past You can delete the setting of TV Timer/Timer Recording whose
start date/time or end date/time is set for the past date/time.
YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for the setting of TV Timer/Timer
Recording to be deletedl()YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Memory info
[Timer Recording list
only]
You can display the used memory space (estimate).
When you set an alarm for “TV Timer” or “Timer recording”
<TV Timer>
If you set “Act. TV w/ alarm” to other than “Auto ON”, the alarm sounds for about five
minutes, and illumination lights. The vibrator works as the same setting for “Phone” of
“Vibrator”. The set start date/time, channel, program name and an animation appear on
the display.
If you set “Alarm” to “ON” and “Act. TV w/ alarm” to “Auto ON”, 1Seg automatically starts
when the specified time comes. The alarm does not sound.
To end watching, press h and select “End 1Seg”.
If you set “Off timer”, the confirmation display appears asking whether to continue
watching when the specified time elapses. If you select “NO” or do nothing for about 15
seconds, 1Seg automatically terminates.
<Timer Recording>
About one minute before starting time, the alarm sounds for about two seconds, and
illumination lights. The vibrator works as the same setting for “Phone” of “Vibrator”. The
set start date/time, end date/time, channel, program name and an animation appear on
the display, then the viewer display appears. If you do nothing for about one minute after
the recording starts, the Stand-by display appears. You can show the viewer display by
pressing x and selecting “Activate 1Seg”.
To end recording started by Timer Recording to save video, press Oo( ) from the
viewer display and select “YES”.
pDuring a call
The alarm sounds from the earpiece.
pDuring operations
<TV Timer>
When “Alarm setting” is set to “Operation preferred”, the timer alarm sounds only when
the Stand-by display is shown. When it is set to “Alarm preferred”, the timer alarm
sounds even while you are operating another function or during a call. (See page 385)
<Timer Recording>
Timer Recording works according to the setting of “Priority”. (See page 243) However,
Timer Recording might not work when you are reading to/writing from the microSD
card, or accessing the Data Storage Center.
pWhen the timer alarm is set to the same time of “Alarm”, “ToDo”, or “Schedule”
The alarm sounds in the priority order of “Alarm” → “Timer recording” → “ToDo”
→ “Schedule” → “TV timer”.
When the time specified for “TV Timer” or “Timer recording”
comes
245
1Seg
pWhen the power is turned off
The timer alarm does not sound except for the TV Timer setting with “Auto power ON”
set. For Timer Recording, you cannot record a 1Seg program unless the power is
turned on one minute before the start date/time.
The icon does not appear on the desktop even after turning on the power.
pIn Manner Mode
The vibrator, message display, and illumination light notify you. The alarm sounds at
the volume set for Manner Mode. (See page 97)
pDuring Lock All, Personal Data Lock or Omakase Lock
The timer alarm does not sound. You cannot record a 1Seg program unless each lock
is released one minute before the start date/time.
However, when “TV timer” is set to “Accept” or “Timer recording” is set to “Accept” for
“Customize” of Personal Data Lock, the alarm sounds or the recording starts even
during Personal Data Lock. For TV Timer, you need to manually activate 1Seg even if
“Act. TV w/alarm” is set to “Auto ON”.
pWhile the microSD card is operated, during infrared communication or iC
communication, or while updating software program
The timer alarm does not sound. You cannot record a 1Seg program unless each
function is finished one minute before the start date/time.
Information
pWhen you set “Alarm setting” to “Alarm preferred” for the setting of TV Timer/Timer
Recording and the alarm time comes while you are dialing, the alarm sounds after you
call up the other party. When the alarm time comes while ringing, the alarm sounds
after you start talking.
pWhen you have set “PIN1 code entry set” to “ON” and set “Auto power ON” to
automatically turn on the power to sound TV timer alarm, the display for entering your
PIN1 code appears after the power is automatically turned on. The timer alarm does
not sound unless you enter your PIN1 code.
pWhen you set “Auto power ON” to automatically turn on the power to sound a TV
timer alarm, the alarm sounds after the wake-up image stops.
pYou might not be able to set some i-motion files/Chaku-uta Full® music files for TV
timer alarm.
pDepending on the i-motion file you set for TV timer alarm, only the audio might be
output at the specified time.
pWhen a Chaku-uta Full® music file is set for TV timer alarm, only the audio is output at
the specified time. The illumination for when you play back a demo to select an alarm
tone differs from for when you are notified by an alarm.
The alarm tone stops by pressing any of the keys, but the animation/i-motion becomes a
still image, and the timer alarm message stays displayed. When “Act. TV w/ alarm” is set
to “OFF”, press any key again to clear it. However, you cannot clear the timer alarm
message by pressing a side key, with the FOMA terminal closed. When a call comes in,
the alarm stops.
Press Oo( ) and select “YES” from the Timer Alarm Notification display; then
1Seg starts, and you can watch the program set for TV Timer. In the case that a program
is being recorded, the video recorded up to that point is saved.
The icon may appear on the desktop. You can check that icon for the contents of the
missed timer alarm (setting information) or recording result.
The setting information or recording result is the latest missed one.
pWhen “Act. TV w/ alarm” is set to other than “OFF”, you can start 1Seg also by
pressing Oo( ) and select “YES” from the display of setting Information.
pWhen recorded video is stored, you can play back the video also by pressing
Oo( ) from the display of recording result.
pWhile Timer Recording is being performed during Personal Data Lock, the information
in the broadcasting storage area cannot be read out. Also, the functions such as
i-mode mail composition or Phonebook storage cannot be automatically used from
the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site. When 1Seg tries to use these
functions, a message appears telling that the function cannot be executed due to
Personal Data Lock.
To stop alarm tone/clear alarm message, animation, and
i-motion of TV timer alarm
When “Act. TV w/ alarm” of TV Timer is set to “Manual ON”
When “Timer Alarm Notification” is not executed or recording
is completed
Information
246
1Seg
You can display up to 20 recording results from the latest one.
1m1SegRecording result
Select a recording result.
pTo delete all recording results, press i(),
enter your Terminal Security Code, and select “YES”.
1m1SegUser settings
Do the following operations.
Recording Result
<User Settings>
Setting 1Seg
Display
Caption You can set whether to display the caption for when
watching starts.
ON or OFF
Caption posit. in w-scr You can set the caption position on the horizontal display.
Upper or Lower
Icon You can set whether to always display guide (see
page 233) on the horizontal display.
ON or OFF
pEven if you set “Icon” to “OFF”, the icon such as “ ”,
“ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears during communication or when
an i-mode mail message or Message R/F comes in.
Mail ticker display For when you receive an i-mode mail message, SMS
message, or Message R/F while watching a 1Seg
program, you can set whether to notify you of the receiving
by the ticker on the viewer display.
Select an item.
Sender+subject . . . . . . Displays ticker of the sender and
title.
Receipt notification . . . Displays ticker of reception
notification only.
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does not display ticker on the
viewer display.
pSee page 237 for details on ticker display.
Video
Mobile W-Speed The outlines of images are automatically corrected so that
you can watch more smooth videos of 1Seg programs.
ON or OFF
Image quality You can change the image quality.
Select an item.
Standard . . . The average image quality
Sports . . . . . The image quality suitable for sports
programs
Cinema . . . . The image quality suitable for films
Dynamic . . . The dynamic image quality by accentuation
Display light You can set the duration of the display lights for when you
watch a 1Seg program.
Constant light or Lighting duration
Enter a lighting duration (minutes).
pEnter from “01” through “30” in two digits.
Sound
Sound effect
Auto volume You can set whether to turn up the sound volume so that it
will be more audible.
ON or OFF
Remaster You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth
device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch
range lost at data compression.
ON or OFF
247
1Seg
Listening You can set the effect of the sound from an earphone or
Bluetooth device.
Select an item.
Surround . . . Makes the sound natural and stereophonic.
Natur 1/2 . . . Complements the cooped-up feeling
specific to earphones and plays back
natural sound. Select 1 or 2 according to
your taste.
OFF. . . . . . . . Sets Listening to “OFF”.
Equalizer You can change the quality of the sound from an earphone
or Bluetooth device.
Select an item.
Normal . . . . . Reproduces normal sound quality.
H.BASS1 . . . Enhances bass sound.
H.BASS2 . . . Enhances bass sound more deeply than
H.BASS1.
Voice . . . . . . Makes conversation audible.
Train . . . . . . . Minimizes abnormal sound that causes
sound leakage.
TV sound while closed You can set whether to continue audio output for when you
close the FOMA terminal while watching a 1Seg program.
ON or OFF
pWhen the setting is “OFF”, audio is muted when you
close the FOMA terminal. Audio is output again when
you open the FOMA terminal and select “OK”.
Recording
Rec. when low battery You can set whether to continue recording when the
battery runs short during recording.
ON or OFF
ON. . . . The confirmation display does not appear and
recording continues.
OFF. . . The confirmation display appears asking whether
to end recording.
Rec. program when
call
You can set whether to start recording automatically when
a call comes in while watching a 1Seg program.
ON or OFF
Data broadcasting
Image display setting You can set whether to display images of the data
broadcasting site. (See page 197)
Sound setting You can set whether to sound an effect tone of the data
broadcasting and the data broadcasting site.
ON or OFF
Reset settings If you select “YES (default)” from the confirmation display
for data broadcasting while watching a 1Seg program or
playing back video, the same confirmation display does
not appear afterward for both of them. The confirmation
display resumes after you execute Reset Settings.
YES
ECO mode You can set ECO Mode which fixes some settings and
reduces the battery consumption.
YES
pTo release ECO Mode, perform the same operation.
pOnce ECO Mode is set, the following settings are fixed
and cannot be changed. However, if you release ECO
Mode, settings return.
Mobile W-Speed: OFF
Image quality: Standard
Remaster: OFF
Listening: OFF
Equalizer: Normal
Reset channel setting You can delete all channel lists.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
248
1Seg
Reset storage area i()DeleteDelete this or Delete all
Delete this. . . . Deletes only the information of the
affiliated broadcasting stations you
selected, from the broadcasting storage
area.
Delete all . . . . . Deletes the information of all affiliated
broadcasting stations created in the
broadcasting storage area.
YES
pIf you select “Delete all”, you need to enter your Terminal
Security Code.
Reset TV settings You can reset each of “User settings” to the default.
See “Function List” on page 448 for the items to be reset.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Check TV settings You can check each of “User settings”.
Information
<Icon>
pThe guide display might appear even if “Icon” is set to “OFF” when the airwave
conditions have got worse.
<Mobile W-Speed>
pWhen you set to “ON”, you might not be able to have enough effects of “Image
quality”.
pMobile W-Speed becomes invalid during ECO mode or displaying in the multiwindow.
pDepending on the broadcast state, you might not be able to have the effects of Mobile
W-Speed.
pEven when “Mobile W-Speed” is set to “ON” during recording or during timer
recording, it is invalid when you play back the recorded video.
<Display light>
pWhile a display is shown in Multiwindow, the setting of this function is invalid. The
lighting duration follows the setting of “Backlight” on page 102.
<TV sound while closed>
pWhen “ON” is set, the data broadcasting information might be automatically updated
even with the FOMA terminal closed, and you might be charged a packet
communication fee.
pRegardless of the setting of this function, the audio is output even with the FOMA
terminal closed, when the display is shown in the multiwindow or you switch displays
by Multitask while watching a 1Seg program.
<Rec. program when call>
pIn the following cases, the recording cannot be started when a call comes in:
・During Play Background ・While being displayed in the multiwindow
・While being recorded ・While being recorded by Timer Recording
・In standby state for Timer Recording
<Image display setting>
pIf you change this setting, “Image display setting” of “i-mode Browser set.” of “i-mode
settings” is also changed.
<Reset settings>
pYou cannot reset the confirmation display at the start of 1Seg (see page 230) and at
the time of Timer Recording (see page 243).
Information
249
Music
Music&Video Channel
Music&Video Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Setting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Playing/Operating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
MUSIC Player
Playing Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Saving Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Using MUSIC Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <MUSIC Player> 258
Using Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
■Handling Music Files
You can use music files saved on the microSD card for personal use only. Before using, give enough consideration not to infringe on the third
party’s intellectual property rights or other rights such as copyright.
250
Music
Music&Video Channel is a service which automatically delivers up to
about one-hour programs at night by just setting your favorite music
programs in advance. Further, you can enjoy high-quality video program
of up to about 30 minutes. Programs are updated periodically and you
can enjoy the delivered programs at your convenient time such as on
commuting.
■Before using Music&Video Channel
pMusic&Video Channel is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis. (To
apply for Music&Video Channel, you need to subscribe to Pake-hodai, Pake-hodai full
or Pake-hodai double besides i-mode.)
pBesides the service fee for using Music&Video Channel, you might be separately
charged an information fee depending on the program.
pIf you insert the UIM to the Music&Video Channel incompatible FOMA terminal after
you subscribe to Music&Video Channel, you cannot use Music&Video Channel
Service. Note that the service fee applies unless you cancel the Music&Video Channel
subscription.
pYou cannot set or obtain programs during international roaming.※ Take procedures to
halt the distribution of programs before going abroad. Then, after homecoming, resume
receiving distribution.
※When you try to set or obtain programs during international roaming, note that you
are charged a packet communication fee for the i-mode communication.
pYou can use mail functions, display i-mode sites, and so on, while listening to program
using Music&Video Channel (Play Background).
See page 479 for the combination patterns of simultaneously usable functions.
pFor the details on Music&Video Channel, refer to “Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version”.
Music&Video Channel
If you previously set a program that you want to watch, the FOMA
terminal automatically downloads the program data at night.
1mMUSICMusic&Video Channel
2Set programFollow the instructions on the display to
set a program.
For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.
pSee page 194 when data files are stored to the maximum.
“ ” appears on the Stand-by display 12 hours before the time
the program obtaining starts. However, it does not appear if
you have inserted a UIM which is different from the one you
used to set the program.
Programs are automatically obtained at night. The display for
obtaining programs does not appear but “ ” appears on the
desktop when they are successfully obtained. Press Oo,
highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the
Music&Video Channel display.
When obtaining fails, “ ” appears.
Setting Programs
When a program is set
Information
pWhen the communication is disconnected during obtaining a program, re-obtaining is
automatically tried up to five times by an interval of about three minutes. When a
display for obtaining a program is shown, however, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to re-obtain the program.
pThe ring tone does not sound and the vibrator does not work to notify that obtaining
programs starts or is completed. When you set “Music&Video Ch illum.” of
“Illumination” to “ON”, the Call/Charging indicator flickers when obtaining programs is
completed. (See page 106)
pYou can set up to two programs at once.
pNote that a newly obtained program overwrites a saved program and you can no
longer play back that saved program afterward. To avoid overwriting, perform “Move
program” to move the program to the “Saved program” folder.
pYou cannot copy or save the obtained program to the microSD card.

Navigation menu